Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 831

Read This First Manuals Provided with This Machine

Safety Information for This Machine

Other Information for This Machine

Appendix

For information not in this manual, refer to


the HTML/PDF files on the supplied
CD-ROM.

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep
it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to
read the Safety Information in this manual before using the
machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals................................................................................................................................. 2
Symbols Used in the Manuals.......................................................................................................................2
Disclaimer........................................................................................................................................................2
Notes............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Machine Types............................................................................................................................................... 3
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Manuals for This Machine................................................................................................................................. 5
How to Use the Operating Instructions............................................................................................................. 7
Start Installer................................................................................................................................................... 7
Read HTML Manuals..................................................................................................................................... 7
Read the HTML manuals on the control panel.............................................................................................8
2. Safety Information for This Machine
Safety Symbols for This Machine...................................................................................................................... 9
Safety Information............................................................................................................................................ 10
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................................................10
Safety Precautions to Be Followed............................................................................................................. 10
Safety Labels of This Machine.........................................................................................................................17
Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels.........................................................................................17
Symbols Power Switch.................................................................................................................................20
3. Other Information for This Machine
Laws and Regulations...................................................................................................................................... 21
Duplication and Printing Prohibited............................................................................................................ 21
Laser Safety.................................................................................................................................................. 21
EMC Directive.............................................................................................................................................. 22
User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (For Users in India)........................................22
NOTICE TO USERS (NEW ZEALAND)..................................................................................................... 22
4. Appendix
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................................... 23

1
How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.

This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.

[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.

Indicates instructions displayed on the control panel.

Indicates instructions in sheet form.


(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Read the
information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see "Model-Specific Information",
Getting Started .

Disclaimer

To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.

2
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.

Notes

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.


The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.

Machine Types

Check the type of your machine before reading the manuals.


• Type 1: MP 501SPF
• Type 2: MP 601SPF
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.

3
4
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
This chapter explains manuals for this machine.

Manuals for This Machine


The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats:

Format Manuals

Printed manuals • Read This First


• Start Guide
• Quick Installation Guide

CD-ROM • Driver Installation Guide


• HTML manuals (Only for English version)

Manuals displayed on the control panel • Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)

Web page • Read This First


• User Guide
• Start Guide
• Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)
• Quick Reference Guide
• Quick Installation Guide
• Driver Installation Guide

Read This First


Before using the machine, be sure to read the section of this manual entitled Safety Information. It
also describes each regulation and environmental conformance.
Start Guide
Describes how to read manuals on the control panel. It also describes how to log in to the machine.
User Guide
Regarding the basic usage of this machine, frequently used functions, troubleshooting when an
error message appears, etc., summaries are provided for each user manual.
Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)
Describes the setup for using the machine, how to use functions to copy, fax, print, scan or for
maintenance and specifications, troubleshooting, system settings, and security functions.

5
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine

Manuals are available in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
User Guide and Security Guide are available in the seven languages above and other languages.
For details about how to use the HTML manuals, see page 7 "How to Use the Operating
Instructions".
Quick Reference Guide
Describes per page the basic functions of copy, fax, and scan.
• Quick Reference Copy Guide
• Quick Reference Fax Guide
• Quick Reference Scanner Guide
Quick Installation Guide
Describes procedures for unpacking and setting up the machine, which include loading paper and
installing print cartridge and waste toner bottle, etc.
Driver Installation Guide
Describes how to install and configure each driver. This manual is included in the drivers CD.

• Before you configure the extended security and authentication settings, refer to "Before Using This
Machine" in the Security Guide .
• You can download information about the machine's certification, which is based on an IT security
certification system (hereafter CC Certification), from https://support-download.com/services/
device/ccmanual/mp_501_601/en/download_admin.html and https://support-
download.com/services/device/ccmanual/mp_501_601/en/download_user.html. This
information is about how to set up the machine. If you have purchased a CC Certified machine, be
sure to read it before operating the machine so you can make the correct settings before using it.
• You can see the following manuals on the Web page.
• Appendix
• DHCP Option 204

6
How to Use the Operating Instructions

How to Use the Operating Instructions


This chapter describes the operating instructions of this machine.

Start Installer

The installer starts automatically when you insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of a
client computer. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the case, double-click
"setup.exe".

Read HTML Manuals

The following browsers are recommended to read the HTML manuals.


• Internet Explorer 8/9/10/11
• Firefox 29
• Safari 5.1.7
• Chrome 35

• If JavaScript is disabled or unavailable in your browser, you will not be able to search or use
certain buttons in the HTML documentation.
• The required display resolution is 1,024 × 768 pixels or greater.
• In the help on the top right of the top page, you can check how to use the HTML manuals. The help
topics explain the icons and buttons that are displayed in the HTML manuals.

Search for what you want to do or can do

Using Easy Search, you can search for what want to do or can do with this machine.

1. Click Easy Search on the top right of the top page.


2. Click a title to display the item you want to read.

Search by entering a keyword

You can search through the HTML manuals.


This section explains how to search for "duplex".

1. Enter "duplex" in the search box on the top left of the top page.

7
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine

2. Click .
A list of titles or descriptions that include "duplex" appears.
A search result appears in the search result window. In addition you can use the drop-down menu
to select a manual.
3. Click a title to display the item you want to read.

• Use keywords to search for items you want to query. Depending on the keyword you enter, related
keywords might also appear.
• Items including the used keyword is appear in the search result window.
• If you put a space between keywords, pages that contain both keywords are displayed. For
example, if you enter "duplex" and a space and "copy", items including both words appear in the
search result window.)

Read the HTML manuals on the control panel

You can also read the HTML manuals on the control panel. For details about how to read the HTML
manuals on the control panel, see Start Guide .

8
2. Safety Information for This Machine
This chapter describes the safety precautions.

Safety Symbols for This Machine


The meanings of the safety symbols for this machine are as follows:

Caution

Warning; Sharp element

Do not touch

Do not throw into the fire

Do not use the cleaner

Keep out of reach of children

Caution, hot surface

9
2. Safety Information for This Machine

Safety Information
Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death
or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor
or moderate injury or damage to property.

Safety Precautions to Be Followed

This section explains safety precautions that should always be followed when using this machine.

Environments where the machine can be used

This section explains safety precautions about environments where the machine can be used.

• Do not use flammable sprays or solvents in the vicinity of this machine. Also, avoid placing these
items in the vicinity of this machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not place vases, plant pots, cups, toiletries, medicines, small metal objects, or containers
holding water or any other liquids, on or close to this machine. Fire or electric shock could result
from spillage or if such objects or substances fall inside this machine.

• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might
occur.

• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, an injury might
occur.

• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. Doing so can cause the machine to topple over,
possibly resulting in injury.

10
Safety Information

• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and spacious. Good
ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily.

• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.

Handling power cords and power cord plugs

This section explains safety precautions about handling power cords and power cord plugs.

• Do not use any power sources other than those that match the specifications shown. Doing so
could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not use any frequencies other than those that match the specifications shown. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not use multi-socket adaptors. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not use extension cords. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not use power cords that are damaged, broken, or modified. Also, do not use power cords
that have been trapped under heavy objects, pulled hard, or bent severely. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.

• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and
electric shock hazard.

• The supplied power cord is for use with this machine only. Do not use it with other appliances.
Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.

• If the power cord is damaged and its inner wires are exposed or broken, contact your service
representative for a replacement. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire or electric
shock.

11
2. Safety Information for This Machine

• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• There are burn marks on the plug.
• The prongs on the plug are deformed.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the plug and consult your dealer or service
representative. Use of the plug could result in fire or electric shock.

• Be sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed, broken, etc.
• The power cord's coating has a crack or dent.
• When bending the power cord, the power turns off and on.
• Part of the power cord becomes hot.
• The power cord is damaged.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the power cord and consult your dealer or
service representative. Use of the power cord could result in fire or electric shock.

• Be sure to push the plug of the power cord fully into the wall outlet. Partially inserted plugs
create an unstable connection that can result in unsafe buildup of heat.

• If this machine is not going to be used for several days or longer at a time, disconnect its power
cord from the wall outlet.

• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.

• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around
the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.

• When performing maintenance on the machine, always disconnect the power cord from the
wall outlet.

• Power Source
220–240 V, 6 A, 50/60 Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.

12
Safety Information

Handling the main machine

This section explains safety precautions about handling the main machine.

• Be sure to locate the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet. This will allow easy
disconnection of the power cord in the event of an emergency.

• If the machine emits smoke or odours, or if it behaves unusually, you must turn off its power
immediately. After turning off the power, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the
wall outlet. Then contact your service representative and report the problem. Do not use the
machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• If metal objects, or water or other fluids fall inside this machine, you must turn off its power
immediately. After turning off the power, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the
wall outlet. Then contact your service representative and report the problem. Do not use the
machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not touch this machine if a lightning strike occurs in the immediate vicinity. Doing so could
result in electric shock.

• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, take care that the power cord is not damaged under the machine. Failing to take these
precautions could result in fire or electric shock.

• If you have to move the machine when the optional paper tray unit is attached, do not push on
the main unit's top section. Doing so can cause the optional paper tray unit to detach, possibly
resulting in injury.

• The machine weighs approximately 28 kg (62 lb.).


• When moving the machine, use the inset grips on both sides, and lift slowly in pairs. The
machine will break or cause injury if dropped.

• Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping may cause injury.

13
2. Safety Information for This Machine

• After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise the machine might
move or come down to cause an injury.

• Contact your service representative if you need to lift the machine (such as when relocating it to
another floor). Do not attempt to lift the machine without the assistance of your service
representative. The machine will be damaged if it topples or is dropped, resulting in malfunction
and risk of injury to users.

• Before installing or removing options, always disconnect the power cord plugs from the wall
outlet and allow time for the main unit to fully cool. Failing to take these precautions could result
in burns.

• Do not look into the lamp. It can damage your eyes.

• Do not hold the control panel while moving the machine. Doing so may damage the control
panel, cause a malfunction, or result in injury.

• Keep your hands away from the hinges and exposure glass when lowering the ADF. Not doing
so result in an injury if your hands or fingers are pinched.

Handling the machine's interior

This section explains safety precautions about handling the machine's interior.

• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those explicitly mentioned in this manual. Inside
this machine are high voltage components that are an electric shock hazard and laser
components that could cause blindness. Contact your sales or service representative if any of the
machine's internal components require maintenance, adjustment, or repair.
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify this machine. Doing so risks burns and electric shock.
Note again that exposure to the laser components inside this machine risks blindness.

• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.

• When removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.

• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.

14
Safety Information

• While safety measures have been installed to prevent accidents, you must not touch the
machine's rollers while it is operating. Doing so could cause injury.

• If the machine's interior is not cleaned regularly, dust will accumulate. Fire and breakdown can
result from heavy accumulation of dust inside this machine. Contact your sales or service
representative for details about and charges for cleaning the machine's interior.

Handling the machine's supplies

This section explains safety precautions about handling the machine's supplies.

• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.

• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.

• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Absorbed toner
may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the vacuum cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a vacuum cleaner that is explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof. If
toner is spilled on the floor, remove the spilled toner slowly using a wet cloth, so that the toner is
not scattered.

• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.

• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.

• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.

• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.

15
2. Safety Information for This Machine

• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.

• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.

• Do not attempt to print on stapled sheets, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind of
conductive paper. Doing so risks fire.

• Keep SD cards or USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult a doctor immediately.

16
Safety Labels of This Machine

Safety Labels of This Machine


This section explains the machine's safety information labels.

Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels

This machine has labels for WARNING and CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety,
please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.

Main unit

Front and Left Side

DPK001

1.

17
2. Safety Information for This Machine

Do not incinerate toner bottles. Doing so risks burns as toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.
Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner. Absorbed toner may cause a fire or explosion due
to electrical contact sparking inside the vacuum cleaner.
Store toner bottles out of reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner, consult a doctor
immediately.
Do not hold the toner bottle one-handed, use both hands and hold it firmly without shaking it.
Accidentally dropping the waste toner bottle may damage it. If toner scatters, you may inhale it. Also,
your clothes or hands, or floor will be dirty.
2.
Do not incinerate waste toner bottles. Doing so risks burns as toner will ignite on contact with naked
flame.
Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled waste toner. Absorbed toner may cause a fire or
explosion due to electrical contact sparking inside the vacuum cleaner.
Store waste toner bottles out of reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner, consult a doctor
immediately.
Do not hold the waste toner bottle one-handed, use both hands and hold it firmly without shaking it.
Accidentally dropping the waste toner bottle may damage it. If toner scatters, you may inhale it. Also,
your clothes or hands, or floor will be dirty.

Front and Right side

DPK003

18
Safety Labels of This Machine

There are protruding parts on the lower side of this machine, which is near this label. Do not touch the
lower part of this machine or areas near this label.

Rear Side

DPK002

1.
The machine weighs approximately 28 kg (62 lb.).
When moving the machine, use the inset grips on both sides.
2, 3
Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The inside and surface of the fusing unit could be very hot.
Caution should be taken when removing misfed paper.

19
2. Safety Information for This Machine

500-sheet paper feed unit

DPK004

1
There are protruding parts on the lower side of this machine, which is near this label. Do not touch the
lower part of this machine or areas near this label.

Symbols Power Switch

Symbols for power switch that are used for this machine are as follows:
• : STANDBY

20
3. Other Information for This Machine
This chapter describes laws and regulations related to this machine.

Laws and Regulations


Duplication and Printing Prohibited

Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing
certain items, consult with your legal advisor.

Laser Safety

Laser Safety

This machine complies with the requirements of IEC60825-1:2014 for class 1 laser product. The
machine contains two monolithic array laser diodes, 655–663 nanometer wavelength for each emitter.
The beam divergence angle is 21 degrees (minimum) and 29 degrees (maximum) in the vertical
direction, and 7 degrees (minimum) and 11 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal direction, and laser
beams are generated in Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The maximum output power of the light source
is 25 milliwatt.
The following label is attached on the rear side of the machine:

Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

21
3. Other Information for This Machine

EMC Directive

Installing the Ferrite Core

A telephone line cable with a ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.

User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (For Users in India)

This product complies with the "India E-waste Rule 2011" and prohibits use of lead, mercury,
hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations
exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2
of the Rule.

NOTICE TO USERS (NEW ZEALAND)

• The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has
accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates
no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it
provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of
Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is
compatible with all of Telecom's network services.
• This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher
speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such
circumstances.
• Devices connected to the telephone port may lose their memory if this fax machine is on line for
extended periods. To prevent this, such devices should have the facility for battery or similar
backup of memory.
• This device may be subject to ringing or bell tinkle when certain other devices are connected to the
same line. If this occurs, the problem should not be referred to the Telecom Faults Service.
• This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other
Telecom customers.
• Telepermitted equipment only may be connected to the auxiliary telephone port. The auxiliary
telephone port is not specifically designed for 3-wire connected equipment that may not respond to
incoming ringing when attached to this port.

22
4. Appendix
This appendix describes trademarks for the machine.

Trademarks
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Safari is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
The SD is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 8, 9, 10 and 11 are as follows:
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 9
• Internet Explorer® 10
• Internet Explorer® 11
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

23
MEMO

24 EN AU D256-7805
© 2016
EN AU D256-7805
User Guide What You Can Do with This Machine

Getting Started

Copy

Fax

Print

Scan

Document Server

Web Image Monitor

Adding Paper and Toner

Troubleshooting

Information for This Machine

For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information in
Read This FIrst before using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals................................................................................................................................. 7
Symbols Used in the Manuals.......................................................................................................................7
Model-Specific Information............................................................................................................................... 8
Names of Major Features.................................................................................................................................. 9
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
Searching by What You Want to Do............................................................................................................. 11
Reducing my Costs.......................................................................................................................................11
Using Scanned Files on the Computer....................................................................................................... 12
Registering Destinations...............................................................................................................................13
Operating the Machine More Effectively.................................................................................................. 14
What You Can Do with This Machine............................................................................................................ 15
Customizing the [Home] Screen................................................................................................................. 15
Making Copies Using Various Functions................................................................................................... 16
Printing Data Using Various Functions........................................................................................................17
Utilizing Stored Document.......................................................................................................................... 17
Sending and Receiving Faxes without Paper............................................................................................ 18
Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Internet...........................................................................................20
Sending and Receiving Faxes by Using the Machine without Fax Unit Installed................................... 21
Using the Facsimile and the Scanner in a Network Environment.............................................................22
Embedding Text Information in Scanned Files...........................................................................................22
Preventing Information Leakage (Security Functions)............................................................................... 23
Centrally Controlling Scan Conditions and Distribution........................................................................... 24
Monitoring and Setting the Machine Using a Computer......................................................................... 24
Preventing Unauthorized Copying............................................................................................................. 25
2. Getting Started
Guide to Names and Functions of Components............................................................................................27
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options................................................................................................30
Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options.............................................................................30
Installing Options............................................................................................................................................. 31
Order of Option Installation........................................................................................................................31
Attaching the 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit..................................................................................................31
Installing the Interface Units........................................................................................................................ 33
Installing the File Format Converter............................................................................................................ 39

1
Installing SD Card Options......................................................................................................................... 40
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel........................................................... 44
Changing the Display Language.................................................................................................................... 45
How to Use the [Home] Screen...................................................................................................................... 46
Possible Operations on the Standard Application Screen....................................................................... 48
Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen........................................................................................................... 49
How to Use Each Application......................................................................................................................... 52
[Copy] Screen..............................................................................................................................................53
[Fax] Screen................................................................................................................................................. 55
[Scanner] Screen......................................................................................................................................... 60
Registering Functions in a Program.................................................................................................................66
Turning On/Off the Power.............................................................................................................................. 69
Turning On the Main Power........................................................................................................................69
Turning Off the Main Power........................................................................................................................69
Logging In the Machine...................................................................................................................................71
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed.......................................................................................... 71
User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel.................................................................................. 71
Logging In Using the Control Panel............................................................................................................71
Logging Out Using the Control Panel.........................................................................................................72
Placing Originals..............................................................................................................................................74
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass...................................................................................................74
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder....................................................................................... 74
3. Copy
Basic Procedure................................................................................................................................................77
Auto Reduce / Enlarge....................................................................................................................................78
Duplex Copying............................................................................................................................................... 79
Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation......................................................................................... 80
Combined Copying......................................................................................................................................... 82
One-Sided Combine................................................................................................................................... 83
Two-Sided Combine....................................................................................................................................84
Copying onto Custom Size Paper...................................................................................................................86
Copying onto Envelopes................................................................................................................................. 87
Sort.................................................................................................................................................................... 89

2
Changing the Number of Sets.................................................................................................................... 89
Storing Data in the Document Server............................................................................................................. 90
4. Fax
Basic Procedure for Transmissions (Memory Transmission)..........................................................................91
Registering a Fax Destination......................................................................................................................91
Deleting a Fax Destination.......................................................................................................................... 93
Transmitting while Checking Connection to Destination (Immediate Transmission)................................... 94
Canceling a Transmission................................................................................................................................95
Canceling a Transmission Before the Original Is Scanned...................................................................... 95
Canceling a Transmission While the Original Is Being Scanned.............................................................95
Canceling a Transmission After the Original Is Scanned......................................................................... 95
Storing a Document......................................................................................................................................... 97
Sending Stored Documents.........................................................................................................................98
Printing the Journal Manually....................................................................................................................... 100
5. Print
Quick Install....................................................................................................................................................101
Quick Installation via a Network............................................................................................................. 101
Quick Installation via a USB Connection................................................................................................ 101
Displaying the Printer Driver Properties........................................................................................................103
Standard Printing........................................................................................................................................... 104
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver....................................................................................................... 104
Printing on Both Sides of Sheets................................................................................................................... 105
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver....................................................................................................... 105
Types of Two-sided Printing......................................................................................................................105
Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page............................................................................................... 106
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver....................................................................................................... 106
Types of Combine Printing........................................................................................................................106
Printing on Envelopes.................................................................................................................................... 108
Configuring Envelope Settings Using the Control Panel........................................................................ 108
Printing on Envelopes Using the Printer Driver........................................................................................ 108
Saving and Printing Using the Document Server.........................................................................................109
Storing Documents in Document Server.................................................................................................. 109
Managing Documents Stored in Document Server................................................................................ 110

3
Using the Quick Print Release Function........................................................................................................111
Using the Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device) Function..........................................................................113
6. Scan
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder............................................................................................. 117
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer Running Windows/Confirming a Computer's Information.....
.................................................................................................................................................................... 117
Registering an SMB Folder.......................................................................................................................119
Deleting an SMB Registered Folder.........................................................................................................122
Entering the Path to the Destination Manually........................................................................................ 123
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail......................................................................................124
Registering an E-mail Destination.............................................................................................................124
Deleting an E-mail Destination................................................................................................................. 126
Entering an E-mail Address Manually..................................................................................................... 126
Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files........................................................................................................ 127
Checking a Stored File Selected from the List......................................................................................... 128
Specifying the File Type................................................................................................................................ 129
Specifying Scan Settings............................................................................................................................... 130
7. Document Server
Storing Data................................................................................................................................................... 131
Printing Stored Documents............................................................................................................................ 133
8. Web Image Monitor
Displaying Top Page..................................................................................................................................... 135
9. Adding Paper and Toner
Loading Paper................................................................................................................................................137
Precautions for Loading Paper................................................................................................................. 137
Loading Paper into Paper Trays............................................................................................................... 138
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray........................................................................................................ 140
Printing from the Bypass Tray Using the Printer Function........................................................................142
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper........................................................................... 145
Recommended Paper.................................................................................................................................... 148
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types................................................................................................... 148
Adding Toner................................................................................................................................................. 156
Sending Faxes or Scanned Documents When Toner Has Run Out...................................................... 160

4
Disposing of Used Toner...........................................................................................................................161
10. Troubleshooting
When a Status Icon Is Displayed..................................................................................................................163
When the Indicator Lamp for [Check Status] Is Lit or Flashing...................................................................164
When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound.............................................................................................166
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine...................................................................................167
When Multiple Functions Cannot Be Executed Simultaneously............................................................ 172
Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function........................................... 173
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function.....................................................................175
When Network Setting Problems Occur................................................................................................. 176
When the Remote Fax Function Cannot Be Used...................................................................................182
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function..........................................................................185
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Printer Function..................................185
Messages Printed on the Error Logs or Reports When You Use the Printer Function...........................187
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function...................................................................... 197
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Scanner Function.............................. 197
Messages Displayed on the Client Computer.........................................................................................207
When Other Messages Appear...................................................................................................................214
When There Is a Problem Scanning or Storing Originals...................................................................... 215
When the Address Book Is Updated....................................................................................................... 216
When Data Cannot Be Sent Due to a Problem with the Destination.....................................................217
When the Machine Cannot Be Operated Due to a Problem with the User Certificate.......................217
When Problems Occur While Logging In............................................................................................... 219
When the User Lacks Privileges to Perform an Operation..................................................................... 219
When the LDAP Server Cannot Be Used.................................................................................................219
11. Information for This Machine
Information on Environmental Regulations.................................................................................................. 221
ENERGY STAR Program........................................................................................................................... 221
Energy Saving Functions...........................................................................................................................221
User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (mainly Europe)...................... 224
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only) (mainly Europe)
.................................................................................................................................................................... 225
Environmental Advice for Users (mainly Europe)............................................................... 225

5
Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA) (mainly North America)....
.................................................................................................................................................................... 226
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................227

6
How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.

This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.

[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Read the
information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see page 8 "Model-Specific
Information".

7
Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.
There is a label on the rear of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label contains
details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.

DPK051

The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region A model:
• CODE XXXX -27, -29
• 220–240 V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region B model:
• CODE XXXX -17
• 120–127 V

• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -27" is printed on the label, see
" (mainly Europe)" also.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -29" is printed on the label, see
" (mainly Asia)" also.

8
Names of Major Features
In this manual, major features of the machine are referred to as follows:
• Auto Document Feeder ADF

9
10
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
You can search for a description by what you want to do.

Searching by What You Want to Do


You can search for a procedure by what you want to do.

Reducing my Costs

BRL059S

Printing multi-page documents on both sides of sheets (Duplex Copy)


See "Duplex Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
Printing multi-page documents and received faxes on a single sheet (Combine (Copier/Fax))
See "Combined Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
See "Combine Two Originals", Fax.
Printing received faxes on both sides of sheets (2 Sided Print)
See "Two-Sided Printing", Fax.
Converting received faxes to electronic formats (Paperless Fax)
See "Confirming/Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents", Fax.
Sending files from the computer without printing them (LAN-Fax)
See "Sending Fax Documents from Computers", Fax.

11
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

Checking how much paper is saved ([Information] screen)


See "[Information] Screen", Getting Started.
Reducing electricity consumption
See "Saving Energy", Getting Started.
See "Timer Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.

Using Scanned Files on the Computer

BQX138S

Sending scan files


See "Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail", Scan.
Sending the URL of the folder in which scan files are stored
See "Sending the URL by E-mail", Scan.
Storing scan files in a shared folder
See "Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder", Scan.
Storing scan files on media
See "Basic Procedure for Saving Scan Files on a Memory Storage Device", Scan.
Embedding text information in scanned files
See "Embedding Text Information in Scanned Data", Scan.
Converting transmitted faxes to electronic formats and sending them to a computer
See "Overview of Folder Transmission Function", Fax.

12
Searching by What You Want to Do

Managing and using documents converted to electronic formats (Document Server)


See "Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions", Copy/ Document Server.

Registering Destinations

BRL060S

Using the control panel to register destinations in the Address Book


See "Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book", Fax.
See "Registering a Destination E-mail Address or Folder", Scan.
Using Web Image Monitor to register destinations from a computer
See "Registering Internet Fax Destination Information Using Web Image Monitor", Fax.
Downloading destinations registered in the machine to the LAN-Fax driver destination list
See "Using the machine's Address Book as the LAN-Fax destination list", Fax.

13
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

Operating the Machine More Effectively

BQX139S

Registering and using frequently-used settings (Program)


See "Registering Functions in a Program", Convenient Functions.
Registering frequently-used settings as initial settings (Program as Defaults)
See "Changing the Default Functions of the Initial Screen", Convenient Functions.
Registering frequently-used printing settings to the printer driver
See "Using One Click Presets", Print.
Changing the initial settings of the printer driver to frequently-used printing settings
See "Displaying the [Printing Preferences] Dialog Box", Print.
Adding shortcuts to frequently used programs or Web pages
See "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen", Convenient Functions.
Changing the order of the function and shortcut icons
See "Changing the Order of Icons on the [Home] Screen", Convenient Functions.

14
What You Can Do with This Machine

What You Can Do with This Machine


This section describes the features of this machine.

Customizing the [Home] Screen

The icons of each function are displayed on the [Home] screen.

DPK127

• You can add shortcuts to often used programs or Web pages to the [Home] screen. The programs
or Web pages can be recalled easily by pressing the shortcut icons.
• You can display only the icons of functions and shortcuts that you use.
• You can change the order of the function and shortcut icons.

• For details about the features on the [Home] screen, see "How to Use the [Home] Screen", Getting
Started.
• For details about how to customize the [Home] screen, see "How to Customize the [Home]
Screen", Convenient Functions.

15
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

Making Copies Using Various Functions

CJQ601

• You can print stamps on copies. Stamps can include background numbers, scanned images, dates,
and page numbers.
"Stamps", Copy/ Document Server.
• You can reduce or enlarge the copy image. With the Auto Reduce / Enlarge function, the machine
automatically calculates the reproduction ratio based on the sizes of the originals and the paper
you have specified.
See "Reducing or Enlarging Originals", Copy/ Document Server.
• Copier functions such as Duplex, Combine, Booklet, and Magazine allow you to save on paper by
copying multiple pages onto single sheets.
For details about duplex copying, see "Duplex Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
For details about combined copying, see "Combined Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
For details about the booklet and magazine functions, see "Booklet/Magazine", Copy/
Document Server.
• You can copy onto various types of paper such as envelopes and OHP transparencies.
See "Copying onto Various Types of Paper", Copy/ Document Server.

16
What You Can Do with This Machine

Printing Data Using Various Functions

DPK128

• This machine supports network and local connections.


• You can print or delete print jobs stored on the machine's hard disk, which have been previously
sent from computers using the printer driver. The following types of print jobs can be selected:
Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print.
See "Storing Documents in the Hard Disk Drive and Printing Them", Print.
• You can collate printed paper.
See "Collate", Print.
• You can print files stored on a removable memory device and specify print conditions such as print
quality and print size.
See "Direct Printing from a Memory Storage Device", Print.

Utilizing Stored Document

You can store files scanned in copier, facsimile, printer, or scanner mode on the machine's hard disk.
Web Image Monitor allows you to use your computer to search for, view, print, delete, and send stored
files via the network. You can also change print settings and print multiple documents (Document Server).

17
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

CJQ603

• You can retrieve stored documents scanned in scanner mode to your computer.
• Using the file format converter, you can download documents stored in copier, Document Server,
or printer mode to your computer.

• For details about how to use the Document Server, see "Storing Data in the Document Server",
Copy/ Document Server.
• For details about the Document Server in copier mode, see "Document Server", Copy/ Document
Server.
• For details about the Document Server in printer mode, see "Saving and Printing Using the
Document Server", Print.
• For details about the Document Server in fax mode, see "Storing a Document", Fax.
• For details about the Document Server in scanner mode, see "Storing and Saving the Scanned
Documents", Scan.

Sending and Receiving Faxes without Paper

Reception
You can store and save received fax documents as electronic formats in the machine's hard disk
without printing them.

18
What You Can Do with This Machine

CJQ604

You can use Web Image Monitor to check, print, delete, retrieve, or download documents using
your computer (Storing received documents).

• See "Confirming/Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents", Fax.


Transmission
You can send a fax from your computer over the network (Ethernet or wireless LAN) to this
machine, which then forwards the fax via its telephone connection (LAN-Fax).

CJQ605

• To send a fax, print from the Windows application you are working with, select LAN-Fax as
the printer, and then specify the destination.
• You can also check the sent image data.

19
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

• For details about the machine's settings, see "Network Settings Requirements", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about how to use the function, see "Sending Fax Documents from Computers", Fax.

Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Internet

xxx@xxx.com
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx@xxx.com
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

CJQ606

E-mail Transmission and Reception


This machine converts scanned document images to e-mail format, and transmits and receives the
e-mail data over the Internet.
• To send a document, specify an e-mail address instead of dialing the destination telephone
number (Internet Fax and e-mail transmission).
See "Specifying an Internet Fax Destination Manually", Fax.
• This machine can receive e-mail messages via Internet Fax or from computers (Internet Fax
Reception and Mail to Print).
See "Receiving E-Mail by Internet Fax/Mail to Print", Fax.
• Internet Fax compatible machines and computers that have e-mail addresses can receive e-
mail messages via Internet Fax.
IP-Fax
The IP-Fax function sends or receives documents between two facsimiles directly via a TCP/IP
network.
• To send a document, specify an IP address or host name instead of a fax number (IP-Fax
Transmission).
See "Specifying an IP-Fax Destination Manually", Fax.

20
What You Can Do with This Machine

• This machine can receive documents sent via Internet Fax (IP-Fax Reception).
See "Types of Reception", Fax.
• Using a VoIP gateway, this machine can send to G3 facsimiles connected to the public
switched telephone network (PSTN).

• For details about the machine's settings, see "Network Settings Requirements", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.

Sending and Receiving Faxes by Using the Machine without Fax Unit Installed

You can send and receive faxes through a different machine's fax functions via a network (Remote Fax).

CJQ612

• To use the remote fax function, install the fax connection unit on the main-machine and sub-
machine.
• The procedure for sending faxes is as same as that of for the machine with the fax unit. When a job
has finished, confirm results displayed on sending history or printed on reports.
• You can forward documents received by the main machine with the facsimile function to sub-
machines.

• For details, see "Sending/Receiving Documents Using a Remote Machine (Remote Fax)", Fax.

21
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

Using the Facsimile and the Scanner in a Network Environment

CJQ607

• You can send scan files to a specified destination using e-mail (Sending scan files by e-mail).
See "Overview of E-Mail Transmission Function", Fax.
See "Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail", Scan.
• You can send scan files directly to folders (Sending scan files by Scan to Folder).
See "Overview of Folder Transmission Function", Fax.
See "Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder", Scan.
• You can use Web Services on Devices (WSD) to send scan files to a client computer.
See "Basic Operating Procedure of WSD Scanner (Push Type)", Scan.

Embedding Text Information in Scanned Files

You can extract text information from a scanned document and embed it in the file without using a
computer.
If you scan a document using this function, embedded text can be searched by using the text search
function or copied to another document.

22
What You Can Do with This Machine

CUL003

• To use this function, the OCR unit is required.


• You can select a file type from [PDF], [High Compression PDF], or [PDF/A].
• This function can optically recognize characters in various languages and up to approximately
40,000 characters a page.

• See "Embedding Text Information in Scanned Data", Scan.

Preventing Information Leakage (Security Functions)

CJQ608

• You can protect documents from unauthorized access and stop them from being copied without
permission.
• You can control the use of the machine, as well as prevent machine settings from being changed
without authorization.
• By setting passwords, you can prevent unauthorized access via the network.
• You can erase or encrypt the data on the hard disk to minimize the risk of information leakage.

23
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

• You can limit the usage of functions for each user.

• See Security Guide.

Centrally Controlling Scan Conditions and Distribution

You can use the distributed scan management (DSM) system in Windows Server 2008 R2/2012 to
manage the destinations and scan settings for each individual user in a group and to use the information
when distributing scanned data.
You can also use this system to centrally manage information about people using the network and the
machine's scanner functions. Both delivered files and user information can be controlled.

xxx@xxx.xxx
A 600 dpi

600 dpi

A
xxx@xxx.xxx

CUL004

• You must set up and configure a Windows server to use the distributed scan management system.
This system is supported by Windows Server 2008 R2 or later.

• For details about how to deliver files using the distributed scan management system, see
"Managing Scan Conditions and Other Settings in the Block Using Distributed Scan Management",
Scan.

Monitoring and Setting the Machine Using a Computer

Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the machine's status and change the settings.

24
What You Can Do with This Machine

CJQ609

You can check which tray is running out of paper, register information in the Address Book, specify the
network settings, configure and change the system settings, manage jobs, print the job history, and
configure the authentication settings.

• See "Using Web Image Monitor", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
• See Web Image Monitor Help.

Preventing Unauthorized Copying

You can print embedded patterns on printouts to prevent unauthorized copying.

DPK129

25
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

• Using the printer driver, you can embed a pattern in the printed document. If the document is
copied on a machine with the Copy Data Security unit, protected pages are grayed out in the
copy. This can minimize the risk of confidential information being copied. Protected fax messages
are grayed out before being transmitted or stored. If a document protected by unauthorized copy
guard is copied on a machine that is equipped with the Copy Data Security unit, the machine
beeps to notify users that unauthorized copying is being attempted.
If the document is copied on a machine without the Copy Data Security Unit, the hidden text
becomes conspicuous in the copy, showing that the copy is unauthorized.
• Using the printer driver, you can embed text in the printed document for unauthorized copy
prevention. If the document is copied, scanned, or stored in a Document Server by a copier or
multifunction printer, the embedded text appears conspicuous in the copy, discouraging such
unauthorized copying.

• For details, see Security Guide.


• For details, see the printer driver Help.
• For details about this function in the printer mode, see "Printing Documents That Are Not Authorized
for Duplication", Print.

26
2. Getting Started
This chapter describes how to start using this machine.

Guide to Names and Functions of Components

• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.

Front and left view


1

2
3

10

8 7 6
DPK052

1. ADF
Lower the ADF over originals placed on the exposure glass.
If you load a stack of originals in the ADF, the ADF will automatically feed the originals one by one.
2. Exposure glass
Place originals face down here. For details, see page 74 "Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass".
3. Control panel
See page 44 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel".

27
2. Getting Started

4. Tray Extension
Pull this fence to prevent paper from falling off.
5. Main power switch
To operate the machine, the main power switch must be on. If it is off, open the main power switch's cover and
turn the switch on.
6. Paper size dial
Use this dial to specify the paper size. To use a paper size that is not indicated on the paper size dial, set the
dial to " ". If this is the case, set the paper size using the control panel.
7. Paper Tray
Paper is loaded here. For details about the sizes and types of paper that can be used, see page 137
"Loading Paper".
8. Left Cover
Open to access the waste toner bottle. For details, see "Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle", Maintenance and
Specifications.
9. Vents
Prevent overheating.
10. Standard Tray
Copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here.

Front and right view


1

4 2

DPK053

28
Guide to Names and Functions of Components

1. ADF's extender
Pull this extender to support large paper.
2. Vents
Prevent overheating.
3. Extender for the bypass tray
Pull this extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11 or larger size paper in the bypass tray.
4. Bypass tray
For details about the sizes and types of paper that can be used, see page 140 "Loading Paper into the
Bypass Tray".
5. Paper guides
When loading paper in the bypass tray, align the paper guides flush against the paper.
6. Front Cover
Open to access the inside of the machine and remove jammed paper.
Open here to replace the print cartridge.

Rear and left view

DPK054

1. Vents
Prevent overheating.

29
2. Getting Started

Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options


Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options

DPK055

1. 500-sheet paper feed unit


Paper is loaded here.
2. Caster table
A table with casters to place this machine.

30
Installing Options

Installing Options
By installing options, you can improve machine performance and expand the available features.

Order of Option Installation

When installing multiple options, the following order is recommended:

1. Attach the paper feed unit.


Attach the paper feed unit to the bottom of the machine.
You can attach up to four paper feed units. Up to 2,000 sheets of paper can be loaded.
2. Install the caster table.
3. Install the optional interface board.
Install in the slot of the machine.
Only one interface board can be installed.
4. Install the file format converter.
5. Insert SD card options.
Insert in the SD card slot of the machine.
There are two slots for SD cards.
Each slot supports different types of SD cards.
If you want to use two or more SD cards that can be inserted in the same slot, contact your sales or
service representative.

Attaching the 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit

You can install a 500-sheet paper feed unit.

• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.

• The machine weighs approximately 28 kg (62 lb.).


• When moving the machine, use the inset grips on both sides, and lift slowly in pairs. The
machine will break or cause injury if dropped.

• Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping may cause injury.

31
2. Getting Started

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, take care that the power cord is not damaged under the machine. Failing to take these
precautions could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not place the machine directly on the floor.


• When attaching multiple options, attach the paper feed unit first.
• To attach two or more paper feed units at the same time, first stack them one upon the other, and
then attach them as a single unit.
• Before turning on the power, remove the packaging material from the paper feed unit.

1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.


2. Remove the packaging from the paper feed unit.
3. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides of the machine.

DPK936

Lifting the machine requires two people.


When moving the machine, do not touch the following parts:
• The operation panel, the ADF, and parts around them
• Convex parts on the right side of the machine
• Places indicated on the labels attached to the machine
• The bottom of the optional paper tray

32
Installing Options

4. There are two upright pins on the optional paper feed unit. Align them with the holes on
the underside of the machine, and then carefully lower the machine.

DPK939

5. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.


6. Print the configuration page to confirm that the unit was attached correctly.

Installing the Interface Units

• Before beginning work, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static
electricity. Static electricity can damage the interface units.
• Do not subject the interface units to physical shocks.

Installing the Wireless LAN interface board

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPK101

The removed cover will not be reused.

33
2. Getting Started

4. Fully insert the interface board.

DPK102

Check that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPK103

6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.


7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

Installing the IEEE 1284 interface board

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.

34
Installing Options

3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPK101

The removed cover will not be reused.


4. Fully insert the IEEE 1284 interface board.

DPK104

Check that the IEEE 1284 interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPK105

6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.


7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

35
2. Getting Started

Installing the Extended USB board

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPK101

The removed cover will not be reused.


4. Fully insert the interface board.

DPK106

Check that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPK107

6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.

36
Installing Options

7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

Installing the Bluetooth interface unit

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
3. Fully insert the interface unit.

DPK108

Check that the interface unit is firmly connected to the controller board.
4. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.
5. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

Installing the USB Device Server

The optional USB device server is an interface board that adds an Ethernet port to the machine.
With this option installed, two Ethernet cables can be connected at the same time using the standard port
on the machine and an additional port on the USB device server. You can assign different IP addresses
to each port, so the machine can print jobs from different network segments.
Procedure for installing the USB device server

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.

37
2. Getting Started

3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPK101

The removed cover will not be reused.


4. Fully insert the interface board.

DPK109

Check that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPK130

6. Connect the USB device server to the machine.


For details, see the Setup Guide provided with the USB device server.

38
Installing Options

Configuring settings
After installing and connecting the USB device server to the machine, configure the machine
settings.

• When using the USB device server, set [Energy Saver Mode to Disable Print Server] to [Disable
Mode] to prevent the machine from entering Energy Saver mode. Otherwise, the USB device
server loses communication with the network while the machine is in Energy Saver mode, and the
machine cannot receive print jobs.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press [Administrator Tools].
6. Press [ Next] four times.
7. Press [Energy Saver Mode to Disable Print Server].
8. Press [Disable Mode].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
11. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Installing the File Format Converter

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPK101

The removed cover will not be reused.

39
2. Getting Started

4. Fully insert the file format converter.

DPK110

Check that the file format converter is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten two screws to secure the file format converter.

DPK111

6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.


7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

Installing SD Card Options

• Keep SD cards out of reach of children. If a child swallows an SD card, consult a doctor
immediately.

• Do not subject the card to physical shocks.

1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.

40
Installing Options

2. Open the rear cover.

DPK112

3. Unhook the tab on the interface cover, which is located on the side of the rear cover.

DPK113

4. Unhook the two tabs on the outside of the interface cover.

DPK114

41
2. Getting Started

5. Insert the SD card into the slot until it clicks.

DPK126

If you insert only one SD card, use the upper slot. If you insert two SD cards simultaneously, use
both slots.
If you want to use two or more SD cards simultaneously, contact your service representative.
6. Hook the two tabs on the outside of the interface cover.

DPK115

7. Hook the tab on the interface cover, which is located on the side of the rear cover.

DPK116

42
Installing Options

8. Close the rear cover.

DPK117

9. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.


10. Check that the SD card was installed correctly.

43
2. Getting Started

Guide to the Names and Functions of the


Machine's Control Panel
1 2

6
7
6

3
DCH009

1. Display panel
This is a touch panel display that features icons, keys, shortcuts, and widgets that allow you to navigate the
screens of the various functions and applications and provide you with information about operation status and
other messages. See page 46 "How to Use the [Home] Screen" and page 52 "How to Use Each
Application".
2. Main power indicator
The main power indicator goes on when you turn on the main power switch. When the machine is in Sleep
mode, the main power indicator flashes slowly. In Fusing Unit Off mode, the main power indicator is lit.
3. Status indicator
Indicates the status of the system. Stays lit when an error occurs or the toner runs out.
4. Data In indicator (facsimile and printer mode)
Flashes when the machine is receiving print jobs or LAN-Fax documents from a computer. See Fax and Print.
5. Fax indicator
Indicates the status of the fax functions. Flashes during data transmission and reception. Stays lit when
receiving a fax via Confidential or Substitute Reception.
6. Media slots
Use to insert an SD card or a USB flash memory device. For details, see "Inserting/Removing a Memory
Storage Device", Getting Started.
7. Media access lamp
Lights up when an SD card is inserted in the media slot.

44
Changing the Display Language

Changing the Display Language


You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Change Langs. Widget].
3. Select the language you want to display.
4. Press [OK].

45
2. Getting Started

How to Use the [Home] Screen


The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on.
One icon is assigned to each function, and these icons are displayed on the [Home] screen. You can
add shortcuts to frequently used functions or Web pages to the [Home] screen. Also, you can register
widgets such as the Change Langs. Widget to it. The [Home] screen and the screen of each function may
differ depending on the optional units that are installed.
To display the [Home] screen, press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

• Do not apply strong impact or force to the screen, or it may be damaged. Maximum force
allowable is approx. 30N (approx. 3 kgf). (N = Newton, kgf = Kilogram force. 1 kgf = 9.8N.)
To switch between screens, flick your finger to the right or left on the screen.
1 2 3 4

12 5

11 10 9 8 7 DPK060

1. Logged-in user icon


When user authentication is enabled, an icon is displayed that indicates that users are logged in.
Press the icon to show the names of the users that are currently logged in.
2. System message
Displays messages from the machine system and applications.
3. [Login]/[Logout]
These keys are displayed when user authentication is enabled. When you press [Login], the authentication
screen appears. If you have been already logged in to the machine, [Logout] appears. To log out of the
machine, press [Logout].
For details about how to log in and out, see page 71 "Logging In the Machine".
4. [Energy Saver]
Press to switch to Low Power mode or Sleep mode.
For details about the modes, see "Saving Energy", Getting Started.

46
How to Use the [Home] Screen

5. Application list icon


Press to display the application list. You can create shortcuts to the applications on the [Home] screen.
To use an application displayed in the [Widgets] tab and [Program] tab, create a shortcut for the application
on the [Home] screen. For details, see "Customizing the [Home] Screen", Convenient Functions.
6. Icons to switch between screens
Press to switch between the five home screens. The icons appear at the bottom right and left of the screen, the
number of icons indicates the number of screens on each side of the current screen.
7. [Stop]
Press to stop a job in progress, such as copying, scanning, faxing, or printing.
8. [Menu]
Displays the menu screen of the application you are using. Depending on the application you are using, this
key may be disabled. You can also press this key in the [Home] screen to restore the [Home] screen's settings
to their defaults.
9. [Home]
Press to display the [Home] screen.
10. [Return]
Press this key to return to the previous screen while Screen Features are enabled or applications are used.
Depending on the application you are using, this key may be disabled. You can specify whether this key is
enabled or not in some applications. For details about the settings, see "Screen Features", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
11. [Check Status]
Press to check the machine's system status, operational status of each function, and current jobs. You can also
display the job history and the machine's maintenance information.
12. Icon display area
Displays the function or application icons and widgets. Displayed icons differ between the five home screens.
For details about icons on each screen, see "Main Icons on the [Home] Screen", Getting Started.
You can also add shortcuts and arrange icons using folders. For details, see "Customizing the [Home]
Screen", Convenient Functions.

• You can change the [Home] screen's wallpaper. For details, see "Changing the [Home] Screen's
Wallpaper", Convenient Functions.
• You can switch modes by pressing icons on the [Home] screen. You can also switch modes by
pressing the function keys. For details about the function keys, see "Changing Modes by Pressing
the Function Keys", Getting Started.
• You cannot switch modes in any of the following situations:
• While scanning an original using the fax or scanner function
• When accessing the following screens:
• Machine Features

47
2. Getting Started

• Counter
• Inquiry
• Address Book Management
• Tray Paper Settings
• Current Job / Job History
• During interrupt copying
• During On-hook dialing for fax transmission
• The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on. You can change this
default setting under Function Priority. See "Screen Features", Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.

Possible Operations on the Standard Application Screen

• Pinch-in
Place your thumb and forefinger on the screen, and then pinch the fingers together to zoom out the
screen. Double-tapping can also be effective for this operation.

DNE103

• Pinch-out
Place your thumb and forefinger on the screen, and then spread the fingers apart to zoom in the
screen. Double-tapping can also be effective for this operation.

DNE104

• Flick

48
How to Use the [Home] Screen

Flick your finger to the right or left on the screen to switch between screens.

DNE102

• Long tap
Place your finger on the screen and hold it there until the next screen appears. You can display the
menu screen of the application you are using.

DNE101

• Drag
Slide your finger while pressing the screen. You can move an icon to where you want to place it on
the screen.

DNE111

Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen

Adding shortcuts to the [Home] screen

You can add shortcuts to the machine's functions.

49
2. Getting Started

You can display the icons for the machine's functions and the embedded software applications after you
delete them from the [Home] screen.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press .
3. Press the [Apps] tab to add a shortcut to an application other than the Classic
Applications. Press the [Program] tab to add a shortcut to one of the Classic Applications.
4. Press and hold down the application icon to add a shortcut to an application other than
the Classic Applications. Press and hold down the [Classic Applications] icon to add a
shortcut to one of the Classic Applications.
The image of where the shortcut is to be placed on the [Home] screen is displayed.
5. Drag the icon to where you want to place it on the screen.
If you want to add a shortcut to classic applications, proceed to Step 6.
6. Select the Classic Applications that you want to add from the list.

Adding shortcuts to bookmarks on the [Home] screen

You can add shortcuts to bookmarks that have been registered in favorites in the Web Browser to the
[Home] screen.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press .
3. Press the [Program] tab.
4. Press and hold down the [Bookmark] icon.
The image of where the shortcut is to be placed on the [Home] screen is displayed.
5. Drag the icon to where you want to place it on the screen.
6. Select the bookmark you want to add from the bookmark list.

Adding shortcuts to programs to the [Home] screen

You can add shortcuts to programs registered on Copier, Facsimile, Scanner mode, or quick
applications.

1. Display the function screen to which you want to register a program.


2. When you are using the standard applications or quick applications, press [Menu] ( ) at
the bottom of the screen in the center. When you are using the Classic Applications, press
[Recall/Program/Change Program] on the bottom left of the screen.
3. Register a program.
4. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

50
How to Use the [Home] Screen

5. Press .
6. Press the [Program] tab.
7. To display a program registered to the standard applications or quick applications, hold
down the application icon. To display a program registered to the Classic Applications,
hold down the [Classic Applications] icon.
The image of where the shortcut is to be placed on the [Home] screen is displayed.
8. Drag the icon to where you want to place it on the screen.
9. Select the program you want to add from the list.

Adding widgets to the [Home] screen

You can add widgets to the [Home] screen to show the remaining amount of toner or change the display
language.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press .
3. Press the [Widget] tab.
4. Press and hold down the widget icon you want to add.
The image of where the widget is to be placed on the [Home] screen is displayed.
5. Drag the icon to where you want to place it on the screen.

51
2. Getting Started

How to Use Each Application


You can open the function screens by pressing icons such as [Copy], [Fax], or [Scanner] on the [Home]
screen.
Three kinds of screens ("Standard Application Screen", "Classic Application Screen", and "Quick
Application Screen") can be used by each function.
Standard Application Screen
Functions and settings that are used frequently are shown on the top screen. Flick the screen up or
down to select a setting item. When you select an item, the pull-down menu appears, or the setting
item pops up. For details about operations on this screen, see page 48 "Possible Operations on the
Standard Application Screen". For details about how to use the screen, see page 53 "[Copy]
Screen", page 55 "[Fax] Screen", and page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".
Classic Application Screen
You can select advanced functions and detailed settings according to the functions and settings you
use frequently. For details about how to use this screen, see" How to Use Each Application",
Getting Started. For details about keys that appear on the screen of each Classic Application, see
"Keys that Appear on the Initial Settings Screen and Screens of Each Classic Application", Getting
Started.
Quick Application Screen
You can easily set the basic operations such as duplex copying, sending scanned documents by e-
mail, or other operations. For details about how to use this screen, see "How to Use Each
Application", Getting Started.

Functions usable on each screen


Screen Functions usable

Standard Application Screen • Copier


• Fax
• Scanner

Classic Application Screen • Copier


• Fax
• Scanner
• Printer
• Document Server

Quick Application Screen • Copier


• Fax
• Scanner

52
How to Use Each Application

• [Copier (Classic)] icon, [Fax (Classic)] icon, [Scanner (Classic)] icon, and [Printer (Classic)] icon
are displayed in the Application list. For details about how to register them to the [Home] screen,
see page 49 "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen".

[Copy] Screen

You can switch the two screens described in this section by flicking the screen up or down.

2 3 4

5
6

DPK063

No. Icon Description

You can adjust the density of the overall original in nine steps.
1
Specify the density by touching the icon and dragging it right or left.

You can reduce or enlarge images.


2

You can specify the paper tray containing the paper you want to copy
3 to.

You can specify the numbers of copies to be made.


4 Press a number to enter the number of copies using the keyboard. You
can also specify the number of copies by pressing [ ] or [ ].

53
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

Preview prints change according to the settings you make.

You can combine two 1-sided originals or one 2-sided original to one
6 side of a sheet. The machine selects a reproduction ratio automatically
and copies the originals onto a single sheet of copy paper.

7 8 9

10

11

DPK064

No. Icon Description

You can sort copies as a set in sequential order and stack copies of each
7 page in a multi-page original.

You can specify the size of the original when copying custom size
8 originals.

You can select an original type that is suitable for your originals.
9

You can divide an original that has many pages and scan it in smaller
10 batches while copying it as a single document. To do this, place several
pages of the original in the ADF.

54
How to Use Each Application

No. Icon Description

You can find other settings.


11

[Fax] Screen

1 2 3 4 5

13 6
12
7

11 10 DLV048

No. Icon Description

The specified destination is shown here.


By tapping the destination, you can register it to
the Address Book or remove it from the
1
destinations.
By flicking up and down, you can confirm the
selected destinations.

You can perform the following operations


related to Fax Reception:
• Check Stored Reception Files
• Operate Personal Box
2
• Print ID Required Print Files
• Manual Reception
• Print Memory Lock
• Check Reception File Settings

55
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

This function allows you to dial while listening to


the dial tone from the internal speaker with the
handset of the machine or external telephone
on-hook.

The total number of the selected destinations


appears.
3
Press to display a screen to confirm destinations.
In the screen to confirm destinations, you can do
the following:
• Register destinations to the Address Book
• Edit destinations
• Remove destinations from the destination list

You can perform the following operations


related to Job Status:
• Confirm Transmission Standby Files
4
• Check Transmission Results
• Check Reception Results
• Print Journals

5 Press to clear your current settings.

Press to display the preview screen after


6
scanning originals.

7 You can check the settings in Settings.

Press to open the settings screen. For details, see


8
page 57 "[Settings] screen".

Press to scan originals and start sending.

Press to switch the section of the Address Book.


10

56
How to Use Each Application

No. Icon Description

Shows the destinations in the Address Book.


11

The sections of the Address Book.


12

Press to add a destination.


Destinations can be added as follows:
• Input destinations manually
• Select from the transmission history

13 • Specify a registration number from the


Address Book
• Search for a destination in the Address
Book or on the LDAP server
• Press to display the Remaining Memory
Information

[Settings] screen

You can switch the three screens described in this section by flicking the screen up or down.
1 2 3

4 5 6 DPK065

57
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

You can switch to immediate transmission mode.


Unless immediate transmission is selected,
1
memory transmission mode is selected by
default.

You can select an original type that is suitable for


2 your originals.

Press to select the resolution according to the


size of the text on your original.
3

Press to specify the density to scan the original.


4 You can also specify the density by touching the
icon and dragging it right or left.

Press to select the scanning size of the original.


5

Press to select the sides of the original.


6

7 8 9

10

11

DPK066

58
How to Use Each Application

No. Icon Description

Press to select the orientation of the original.


7

Press to specify the sender.


8

You can specify settings to automatically send


9 files directly or via F-code confidential
communication at a specified time.

Specify the Internet Fax/E-Mail subject.


10

Specify the Internet Fax/E-Mail Text.


11

12 13 14

15 16 17 DPK067

No. Icon Description

You can select a standard message to be


12
printed.

You can send files over a closed network.


13

14 Requesting Reception Confirmation.

59
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

You can receive a transmission notification by e-


15
mail.

Once memory transmission is complete, you can


16 have the result printed.

Specifying Internet Fax/E-Mail Destinations as


17 BCC Addresses.

[Scanner] Screen

1 2 3 4 5

6
13
12
7

11 10 DLV053

No. Icon Description

Displays the type of scanner destination.


1 Press to switch between e-mail destinations and
folder destinations.

The specified destination is shown here.


By tapping the destination, you can register it to the
2 Address Book or remove it from the destinations.
By flicking up and down, you can confirm the
selected destinations.

60
How to Use Each Application

No. Icon Description

The total number of the selected destinations


appears.
Press to display a screen to confirm destinations.
In the screen to confirm destinations, you can do
the following:
3
• Switch the "To", "Cc", and "Bcc" fields of the
e-mail destinations
• Register destinations to the Address Book
• Edit destinations
• Remove destinations from the destination list

Press to display the transmission results screen.


In the transmission results screen, you can do the
following:
4 • Check sent jobs
• Check error descriptions
• Cancel transmission of a document in standby
• Print a list of transmission results

Press to clear your current settings.


5

Press to display the preview screen after scanning


6
originals.

You can check the settings in Send Settings.


7

Press to open the send settings screen. For details,


8
see page 62 "[Send Settings] screen".

Press to scan originals and start sending.

Press to switch the section of the Address Book.


10

61
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

Shows the destinations in the Address Book.


If a password or protection code is specified to a
11 folder destination, enter the password or protection
code on the screen displayed after tapping the
folder destination.

The sections of the Address Book.


12

Press to add a destination.


Destinations can be added as follows:
• Input destinations manually

13 • Select from the transmission history


• Specify a registration number from the
Address Book
• Search for a destination in the Address Book
or on the LDAP server

[Send Settings] screen

You can switch the four screens described in this section by flicking the screen up or down.
1 2 3

4 5 6 DPK068

No. Icon Description

Press to select the settings that are appropriate for


1 the type of your original and the color mode.

62
How to Use Each Application

No. Icon Description

Press to select a file type.


2

3 Press to select the resolution to scan the original.

Press to select the sides of the original to scan, such


4 as one side or both sides.

Press to select the scanning size of the original.


5

Press to specify a file name.


6

7 8 9

10

11

DPK069

No. Icon Description

Press to specify the density to scan the original.


7 You can also specify the density by touching the
icon and dragging it right or left.

Press to select the orientation of the original.


8

Press to specify the sender.


9

63
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

Press to enter the subject of the e-mail.


10

Press to enter the main text of the e-mail.


11

12 13 14

15 16 17 DPK070

No. Icon Description

Press to specify the magnification ratio for scanning


12
the original.

Press to erase the image from a specified width


13 around the document and in the center of the
document when the document is scanned.

14 Press to sign and encrypt the e-mail.

Press to scan a large number of originals in several


15 batches and send them together as a single job.
You can place multi-page originals in the ADF.

Press to scan a large number of originals in several


16 batches and send them together as a single job.
Place the originals in the ADF one by one.

Press to divide a multi-page original into parts of a


17 specified number of pages each, and then send the
documents.

64
How to Use Each Application

18 19 DPK071

No. Icon Description

To switch the scan setting for additional originals to


[1 Sided Original] after scanning one side of the
18 last page of a batch of two-sided originals using
the exposure glass, press [Change Setting], and
then press [1 Sided Original].

Press this to notify the sender that the e-mail


19
recipient has opened the e-mail.

65
2. Getting Started

Registering Functions in a Program


Depending on the functions, the number of programs that can be registered is different.
Standard Applications
• Copy: 25 programs
• Fax: 100 programs
• Scanner: 100 programs
Quick Applications
• Quick Copy: 25 programs
• Quick Fax: 100 programs
• Quick Scanner: 100 programs
The following settings can be registered to programs:
Standard Applications
• Copy:
Density, Reduce/Enlarge, Quantity, Paper Tray, 2 Sided, Combine, Sort, Stack, Original
Size, Original Type, Batch, Other Settings
• Fax:
Destination, Preview, Settings
• Scanner:
Destination, Preview, Send Settings
Quick Applications
• Quick Copy:
Density, Paper Tray, Quantity, Reduce/Enlarge, 2 Sided, Combine, Original Orientation
• Quick Fax:
Destination, Line, Density, Resolution, Original Orientation, Original Sides, Scan Size,
Original Type, Preview
• Quick Scanner:
Destination, Original Type, File Type, Resolution, Original Orientation, Original Sides, Scan
Size, Preview
This section explains how to register functions to a program by using each application.
Standard Applications/Quick Applications

1. Edit the settings so all functions you want to register to a program are selected on the
[Copy], [Fax], [Scanner], [Quick Copy], [Quick Fax], or [Quick Scanner] screen.
2. Press [Menu] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

66
Registering Functions in a Program

3. Press [Reg. Current Setting to Program].


4. Press the program number you want to register.
5. Enter the program name.
6. Select the icon for the program.
7. Press [Prev. Screen].
When using the quick application, press [Previous Scr.].
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [Place].
Even if you select [Do not Place], you can add shortcuts to the program to the [Home] screen
after the program registration is complete.
10. Press [Exit].

• The number of characters you can enter for a program name varies depending on the functions as
follows:
• Standard Applications
• Copy: 40 characters
• Fax: 40 characters
• Scanner: 40 characters
• Quick Applications
• Quick Copy: 40 characters
• Quick Fax: 40 characters
• Quick Scanner: 40 characters
• When a specified program is registered as the default, its values become the default settings, which
are displayed without recalling the program, when modes are cleared or reset, and after the
machine is turned on. See "Changing the Default Functions of the Initial Screen", Convenient
Functions.
• When the paper tray you specified in a program is empty and if there is more than one paper tray
with the same size paper in it, the paper tray prioritized under [Paper Tray Priority: Copier] or
[Paper Tray Priority: Fax] in the [Tray Paper Settings] tab will be selected first. For details, see "Tray
Paper Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
• Destinations can be registered to a program of the scanner mode only when [Include Destinations]
is selected for [Program Setting for Destinations] in [Scanner Features]. For details about the setting,
see "General Settings", Scan.
• Folder destinations that have protection codes cannot be registered to a program of the scanner
mode.

67
2. Getting Started

• Programs are not deleted by turning the power off or by pressing [Reset] unless the program is
deleted or overwritten.
• When you are using the Classic Applications, program numbers with next to them indicate that
the programs have been registered.
• Programs can be registered to the [Home] screen, and can be recalled easily. For details, see
page 49 "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen". Shortcuts to programs stored in Document Server
mode cannot be registered to the [Home] screen.

68
Turning On/Off the Power

Turning On/Off the Power

• When you push the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds after it is confirmed that the main
power indicator has lit up or gone out.
The main power switch is on the right side of the machine. When this switch is turned on, the main power
turns on and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel lights up. When this switch is
turned off, the main power turns off and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel
goes out. When this is done, machine power is off. Fax files in memory may be lost if you turn this switch
off. Use this switch only when necessary.

Turning On the Main Power

1. Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
2. Push the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes on.
After you switch the main power on, the machine might require about 5 minutes before it is ready.

DPK914

Turning Off the Main Power

• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.

• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation.

69
2. Getting Started

• Do not hold down the main power switch while turning off the main power. Doing so forcibly turns
off the machine's power and may damage the hard disk or memory and cause malfunctions.

1. Push the main power switch.


The main power indicator goes out. The main power turns off automatically when the machine shuts
down. If the screen on the control panel does not disappear, contact your service representative.

70
Logging In the Machine

Logging In the Machine


When the Authentication Screen is Displayed

If Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is active, the authentication


screen appears on the display. The machine only becomes operable after entering your own Login User
Name and Login Password. If User Code Authentication is active, you cannot use the machine until you
enter the User Code.
If you can use the machine, you can say that you are logged in. When you go out of the operable state,
you can say that you are logged out. After logging in the machine, be sure to log out of it to prevent
unauthorized usage.

• Ask the user administrator for the Login User Name, Login Password, and User Code. For details
about user authentication, see "Configuring User Authentication", Security Guide.
• User Code to enter on User Code Authentication is the numerical value registered in the Address
Book as "User Code".

User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel

If User Code Authentication is active, a screen prompting you to enter a User Code appears.

1. Enter a User Code (up to eight digits), and then press [OK].

Logging In Using the Control Panel

This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.

71
2. Getting Started

1. Press [Login] on the top right on the screen.

2. Press [User Name].

3. Enter a Login User Name, and then press [Done].


4. Press [Password].
5. Enter a Login Password, and then press [Done].
6. Press [Login].

Logging Out Using the Control Panel

This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.

• To prevent use of the machine by unauthorized persons, always log out when you have finished
using the machine.

1. Press [Logout] on the top right on the screen.

72
Logging In the Machine

2. Press [OK].

73
2. Getting Started

Placing Originals
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass

• Keep your hands away from the hinges and exposure glass when lowering the ADF. Not doing
so may result in an injury if your hands or fingers are pinched.

• Do not lift the ADF forcefully. Otherwise, the cover of the ADF might open or be damaged.

1. Lift the ADF.


2. Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be aligned to the
rear left corner.
Start with the first page to be scanned.

DPK118

1. Positioning mark
3. Lower the ADF.

Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder

Be sure not to load the original untidily. Doing so may cause the machine to display a paper misfeed
message. Also, be sure not to place originals or other objects on the top cover. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.

• When inserting originals in the ADF, push them in once and without force.
• Before inserting originals, remove any originals stacked in the original output tray.
• Once originals start to feed in, do not push or pull them.

74
Placing Originals

• Do not mix different size originals.

DPK120

1. Original guide

1. Adjust the original guide to the original size.


2. Place the aligned originals squarely face up in the ADF.
Do not stack originals beyond the limit mark.
The first page should be on the top.

DPK121

1. Limit mark

75
2. Getting Started

76
3. Copy
This chapter describes frequently used copier functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Copy/ Document Server available on our website.

Basic Procedure
To make copies of originals, place them on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
When placing the original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to be copied. When placing
the original in the ADF, place them so that the first page is on the top.
About placing the original on the exposure glass, see page 74 "Placing Originals on the Exposure
Glass".
About placing the original in the ADF, see page 74 "Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder".
To copy onto paper other than plain paper, specify the paper type in User Tools according to the weight
of the paper you are using. For details, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

77
3. Copy

Auto Reduce / Enlarge


The machine automatically calculates the reproduction ratio based on the sizes of the originals and the
paper you have specified. The machine will rotate, enlarge, or reduce the image of the originals to fit
them to the paper.

CKN008

• If you select a reproduction ratio after pressing [Auto Reduce / Enlarge], [Auto Reduce / Enlarge]
is canceled and the image cannot be rotated automatically.
This is useful to copy different size originals to the same size paper.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

78
Duplex Copying

Duplex Copying
Copies two 1-sided pages or one 2-sided page onto a 2-sided page. During copying, the image is
shifted to allow for the binding margin.

CKN009

There are two types of Duplex.


1 Sided 2 Sided
Copies two 1-sided pages on one 2-sided page.
2 Sided 2 Sided
Copies one 2-sided page on one 2-sided page.
The resulting copy image will differ according to the orientation in which you place your originals ( or
).
Original orientation and completed copies
To copy on both sides of the paper, select the original and copy orientation according to how you
want the printout to appear.

Original
Original Placing originals Orientation Copy
Orientation

Top to Top

Top to Bottom

79
3. Copy

Original
Original Placing originals Orientation Copy
Orientation

Top to Top

Top to Bottom

When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation

Select the orientation of the originals and copies if the original is two-sided or if you want to copy onto
both sides of the paper.
• Top to Top

CKN011

• Top to Bottom

CKN012

80
Duplex Copying

When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

81
3. Copy

Combined Copying
This mode can be used to select a reproduction ratio automatically and copy the originals onto a single
sheet of copy paper.
The machine selects a reproduction ratio between 25 and 400%. If the orientation of the original is
different from that of the copy paper, the machine will automatically rotate the image by 90 degrees to
make copies properly.
Orientation of the original and image position of Combine
The image position of Combine differs according to original orientation and the number of originals
to be combined.
• Portrait ( ) originals

CKN015

• Landscape ( ) originals

CKN016

Placing originals (originals placed in the ADF)


The default value for the copy order in the Combine function is [From Left to Right]. To copy
originals from right to left in the ADF, place them upside down.
• Originals read from left to right

82
Combined Copying

CKN010

• Originals read from right to left

CKN017

One-Sided Combine

Combine several pages onto one side of a sheet.

CKN014

There are six types of One-Sided Combine.


1 Sided 2 Originals Combine 1 Side
Copies two 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1 Sided 4 Originals Combine 1 Side
Copies four 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1 Sided 8 Originals Combine 1 Side
Copies eight 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1 Side
Copies one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet.

83
3. Copy

2 Sided 4 Pages Combine 1 Side


Copies two 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 8 Pages Combine 1 Side
Copies four 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

Two-Sided Combine

Combines various pages of originals onto two sides of one sheet.

CKN074

There are six types of Two-Sided Combine.


1 Sided 4 Originals Combine 2 Sides
Copies four 1-sided originals to one sheet with 2 pages per side.
1 Sided 8 Originals Combine 2 Sides
Copies eight 1-sided originals to one sheet with 4 pages per side.
1 Sided 16 Originals Combine 2 Sides
Copies 16 1-sided originals to one sheet with 8 pages per side.
2 Sided 4 Pages Combine 2 Sides
Copies two 2-sided originals to one sheet with 2 pages per side.

84
Combined Copying

2 Sided 8 Pages Combine 2 Sides


Copies four 2-sided originals to one sheet with 4 pages per side.
2 Sided 16 Pages Combine 2 Sides
Copies eight 2-sided originals to one sheet with 8 pages per side.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

85
3. Copy

Copying onto Custom Size Paper


Paper that has a horizontal length of 70.0–216.0 mm (2.76–8.50 inches) and a vertical length of
148.0–356.0 mm (5.83–14.01 inches) can be fed in from the bypass tray.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

86
Copying onto Envelopes

Copying onto Envelopes


This section describes how to copy onto regular size and custom size envelopes. Place the original on
the exposure glass and place the envelope in the bypass tray or paper tray.
Specify the thickness of the paper according to the weight of the envelopes you are printing on. For
details about the relationship between paper weight and paper thickness and the sizes of envelopes that
can be used, see page 148 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
About handling envelopes, supported envelope types, and how to load envelopes, see page 153
"Envelopes".

• The Duplex function cannot be used with envelopes. If the Duplex function is specified, press [1
sided 2 sided:TtoT] to cancel the setting.
To copy onto custom size envelopes, you must specify the envelope's dimensions. Specify the horizontal
and vertical length of the envelope.

DPK202

: Horizontal
: Vertical

87
3. Copy

When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

88
Sort

Sort
The machine assembles copies as sets in sequential order.

CKN018

When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

Changing the Number of Sets

You can change the number of copy sets during copying.

• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

89
3. Copy

Storing Data in the Document Server


The Document Server enables you to store documents being read with the copy feature on the hard disk
of this machine. Thus you can print them later applying necessary conditions.
You can check the stored documents on the Document Server screen. For details about the Document
Server, see page 131 "Storing Data".

1. Press [Store File].

2. Enter a user name, file name, or password if necessary.


3. Specify a folder in which to store the document if necessary.
4. Press [OK].
5. Place the originals.
6. Make the scanning settings for the original.
7. Select the paper tray.
8. Press [Start].
Stores scanned originals in memory and makes one set of copies. If you want to store another
document, do so after copying is complete.

90
4. Fax
This chapter describes frequently used facsimile functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Fax available on our website.

Basic Procedure for Transmissions (Memory


Transmission)
This section describes the basic procedure for transmitting documents using Memory Transmission.
You can specify the fax, IP-Fax, Internet Fax, e-mail, or folder destinations. Multiple types of destination
can be specified simultaneously.

• It is recommended that you call the receivers and confirm with them when sending important
documents.
• If there is a power failure (the main power switch is turned off) or the machine is unplugged for
about one hour, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. As soon as the main power
switch is turned on, the Power Failure Report is printed to help you check the list of deleted files. See
"When an Error Is Notified via a Report or E-Mail", Troubleshooting.
When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

Registering a Fax Destination

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Press [New Program].
5. Press [Change] under "Name".
The name entry display appears.
6. Enter the name, and then press [OK].

91
4. Fax

7. Press [ Next].
8. Press the key for the classification you want to use under "Select Title".

The keys you can select are as follows:


• [Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added to the
list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more key for each title.
9. Press [Fax Dest.].
10. Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".
11. Enter the fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK].

12. Specify optional settings such as "SUB Code", "SEP Code", and "International TX Mode".
13. Press [OK].
14. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
15. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

92
Basic Procedure for Transmissions (Memory Transmission)

Deleting a Fax Destination

• If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to its registered
Personal Box, for example, cannot be delivered. Be sure to check the settings in the fax function
before deleting any destinations.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Select the name whose fax destination you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, user code, fax number, folder name, e-mail address, or IP-
Fax destination.
5. Press [Fax Dest.].
6. Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".
7. Press [Delete All], and then press [OK] under "Fax Destination".

8. Press [OK].
9. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
10. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

93
4. Fax

Transmitting while Checking Connection to


Destination (Immediate Transmission)
Using Immediate Transmission, you can send documents while checking the connection to the
destination.
You can specify fax or IP-Fax destinations.
If you specify Internet Fax, e-mail, folder destinations, and group or multiple destinations, the
transmission mode is automatically switched to Memory Transmission.

• It is recommended that you call the receivers and confirm with them when sending important
documents.
When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

94
Canceling a Transmission

Canceling a Transmission
This section explains how to cancel a fax transmission.

Canceling a Transmission Before the Original Is Scanned

Use this procedure to cancel a transmission before pressing [Start].


When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

Canceling a Transmission While the Original Is Being Scanned

Use this procedure to cancel scanning or transmitting of the original while it is being scanned.
If you cancel a transmission using the standard memory transmission function, you need to follow a
different procedure to cancel the transmission. See page 95 "Canceling a Transmission After the
Original Is Scanned".
When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

Canceling a Transmission After the Original Is Scanned

Use this procedure to cancel a transmission after the original is scanned.

95
4. Fax

You can cancel transmission of a file while the file is being sent, stored in memory, or if it fails to transmit.
All the scanned data is deleted from memory.
When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

96
Storing a Document

Storing a Document
You can store and send a document at the same time. You can also just store a document.
The following information can be set for the stored documents as necessary:
User Name
You can set this function if necessary to know who and what departments stored documents in the
machine. A user name can be selected from the Address Book or entered manually.
File Name
You can specify a name for a stored document. If you do not specify a name, scanned documents
will be automatically assigned names such as "FAX0001" or "FAX0002".
Password
You can set this function so as not to send to unspecified people. A four to eight digit number can
be specified as a password.
You can also change the file information after storing files.

1. Place the original, and then specify the scan settings you require.
Specify the [Original Orientation] setting correctly. If you do not, the top/bottom orientation of the
original will not be displayed correctly in the preview.
2. Press [Store File].

3. Select [Send & Store] or [Store Only].


Select [Send & Store] to send documents after they are stored.
Select [Store Only] to store documents.

97
4. Fax

4. Set the user name, file name, and password as necessary.

• User Name
Press [User Name], and then select a user name. To specify an unregistered user name, press
[Manual Entry], and then enter the name. After specifying a user name, press [OK].
• File Name
Press [File Name], enter a file name, and then press [OK].
• Password
Press [Password], enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK]. Re-enter the
password for confirmation, and then press [OK].
5. Press [OK].
6. If you have selected [Send & Store], specify the receiver.
7. Press [Start].

Sending Stored Documents

The machine sends documents stored with the facsimile function in the Document Server.
The documents stored in the Document Server can be sent again and again until they are deleted.
The stored documents are sent with the scan settings made when they were stored.
You cannot use the following transmission methods:
• Immediate Transmission
• Parallel Memory Transmission
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial

98
Storing a Document

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Select the documents to be sent.


When multiple documents are selected, they are sent in the order of selection.
• Press [User Name] to place the documents in order by programmed user name.
• Press [File Name] to place the documents in alphabetical order.
• Press [Date] to place the documents in order of programmed date.
• Press [Queue] to arrange the order of the documents to be sent.
To view details about stored documents, press [Details].
Press the Thumbnails key to switch the screen to thumbnail display.
3. If you select a document with a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
4. When you want to add your originals to stored documents and send them all at once,
press [Original Stored File] or [Stored file Original].
When [Original Stored File] is pressed, the machine sends the originals, and then stored files.
When [Stored file Original] is pressed, the machine sends the stored files, and then originals.
5. Press [OK].
6. To add an original to stored documents, place the original, and then select any scan
settings you require.
7. Specify the destination, and then press [Start].

99
4. Fax

Printing the Journal Manually


To print the Journal manually, select the printing method: [All], [Print per File No.], or [Print per User].
All
Prints the results of communications in the order made.
Print per File No.
Prints only the results of communications specified by file number.
Print per User
Prints the results of communications by individual senders.
When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

100
5. Print
This chapter describes frequently used printer functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Print available on our website.

Quick Install
You can install the printer drivers easily from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

Quick Installation via a Network

Using Network Quick Install, the PCL 6 printer driver is installed under network environment, and the
Standard TCP/IP port will be set.

1. Click [Network Quick Install] on the installer screen.


2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
5. Click [Install].
6. When the port setting screen appears, specify a port.
7. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
8. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
9. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
10. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.

Quick Installation via a USB Connection

Using USB Quick Install, you can install the PCL 6 printer driver via a USB connection, and configure
settings to connect the printer to a computer.

101
5. Print

1. Click [USB Quick Install] on the installer screen.


2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select the method to install a printer driver, and then click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use, and then click [Next >].
5. Make sure the machine is turned off and not connected to the computer, and then click
[Next >].
Wait for a moment until file copying is complete and [<Auto-detect USB Port>] screen appears.
6. Connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, and then turn on the machine.
The auto-detecting starts.
7. In the confirmation dialog box, select [Yes] if you want to use the machine as your default
printer.
8. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
9. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.

102
Displaying the Printer Driver Properties

Displaying the Printer Driver Properties


This section explains how to open the printer driver properties from [Devices and Printers].

• Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer settings. Log on as an Administrators
group member.
• You cannot change the machine default settings for individual users. Settings made in the printer
properties dialog box are applied to all users.

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].


2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Printer properties].

103
5. Print

Standard Printing

• Duplex printing is selected as the default setting. If you want to print on only one side, select [Off]
for the two-sided printing setting.
• If you send a print job via USB 2.0 while the machine is in Low Power mode or Sleep mode, an
error message might appear when the print job is complete. In this case, check if the document was
printed.

When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Select the [Frequently Used Settings] tab.
5. In the "Job Type:" list, select [Normal Print].
6. In the "Document Size:" list, select the size of the original to be printed.
7. In the "Orientation" area, select [Portrait] or [Landscape] as the orientation of the
original.
8. In the "Paper Type:" list, select the type of paper that is loaded in the paper tray.
9. In the "Input Tray:" list, select the paper tray that contains the paper you want to print
onto.
If you select [Auto Tray Select] in the "Input Tray:" list, the paper tray is automatically selected
according to the paper size and type specified.
10. If you want to print multiple copies, specify a number of sets in the "Copies:" box.
11. Click [OK].
12. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

104
Printing on Both Sides of Sheets

Printing on Both Sides of Sheets


This section explains how to print on both sides of each page using the printer driver.

• The types of paper that can be printed on both sides are as follows:
• Plain 1 (64–74g/m2), Plain 2 (75–90g/m2), Recycled, Special 1, Special 2, Special 3,
Middle Thick (91–105g/m2), Thick 1 (106–120g/m2), Color, Letterhead, Preprinted, Bond

When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Frequently Used Settings] tab.
You can also click the [Detailed Settings] tab, and then click [2 Sided/Layout/Booklet] in the
"Menu:" box.
5. Select the method for binding the output pages in the "2 sided:" list.
6. Change any other print settings if necessary.
7. Click [OK].
8. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

Types of Two-sided Printing

You can select which way the bound pages open by specifying which edge to bind.

Orientation Open to Left Open to Top

Portrait

Landscape

105
5. Print

Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page


This section explains how to print multiple pages onto a single sheet. The combine printing function
allows you to economize on paper by printing multiple sheets at reduced size onto a single sheet.

When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Frequently Used Settings] tab.
You can also click the [Detailed Settings] tab, and then click [2 Sided/Layout/Booklet] in the
"Menu:" box.
5. Select the combination pattern in the "Layout:" list, and then specify the method for
combining pages in the "Page Order:" list.
To draw a border line around each page, select the [Draw Frame Border] checkbox in [2 Sided/
Layout/Booklet] in the [Detailed Settings] tab.
6. Change any other print settings if necessary.
7. Click [OK].
8. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

Types of Combine Printing

This function allows you to print 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages at reduced size onto a single sheet and to
specify a page ordering pattern for the combination. When combining 4 or more pages onto a single
sheet of paper, four patterns are available.
The following illustrations show example page ordering patterns for 2- and 4-page combinations.
2 Pages per Sheet

From Left to Right/Top to From Right to Left/Top to


Orientation
Bottom Bottom

Portrait

106
Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page

From Left to Right/Top to From Right to Left/Top to


Orientation
Bottom Bottom

Landscape

4 Pages per Sheet

Right, then Down Down, then Right Left, then Down Down, then Left

107
5. Print

Printing on Envelopes
Configure the paper settings appropriately using both the printer driver and the control panel.

Configuring Envelope Settings Using the Control Panel

1. Load envelopes in the paper tray.


2. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
3. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
4. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
5. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
6. Select the envelope size, and then press [OK].
7. Press [ Next].
8. Select the paper type setting of the paper tray in which the envelopes are loaded.
9. Press [Envelope] in the "Paper Type" area, and then select the appropriate item in the
"Paper Thickness" area.
10. Press [OK].
11. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
12. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Printing on Envelopes Using the Printer Driver

When using the PCL 6 printer driver

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. In the "Document Size:" list, select the envelope size.
5. In the "Input Tray:" list, select the paper tray in which the envelopes are loaded.
6. In the "Paper Type:" list, select [Envelope].
7. Change any other print settings if necessary.
8. Click [OK].
9. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

108
Saving and Printing Using the Document Server

Saving and Printing Using the Document


Server
The Document Server enables you to store documents on the machine's hard disk, and allows you to edit
and print them as necessary.

• Do not cancel the file transfer process while the data is being sent to the Document Server. The
process may not be canceled properly. If you accidentally cancel a print job, use the control panel
of the machine to delete the transferred data. For details about how to delete documents that are
stored in the Document Server, see "Deleting Stored Documents", Copy/ Document Server, or
Web Image Monitor Help.
• Up to 3,000 files can be stored in the Document Server. New files cannot be stored when 3,000
files have already been stored. Even if less than 3,000 files are stored, new files cannot be stored
when
• The number of pages in a document exceeds 2,000.
• The total number of stored pages in the machine and the sent data has reached 9,000 (It may
be fewer depending on the print data).
• The hard disk is full.
• Data stored in the Document Server is specified to be deleted after three days (72 hours) by the
factory default. We recommend you back up the data.
You can send data created on a client computer to the Document Server.

Storing Documents in Document Server

• If the machine is not used as the Document Server, the maximum number of the documents that can
be stored in the server may be less than the number described in the specification.

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. In the "Job Type:" list, click [Document Server].
5. Click [Details...].
6. Enter a user ID, file name, password, and user name as required.
7. Specify the folder number to store the document in the "Folder Number:" box.
When "0" is specified in the "Folder Number:" box, documents will be saved in the Shared folder.

109
5. Print

8. If the folder is protected by a password, enter the password in the "Folder Password:"
box.
9. Click [OK].
10. Change any other print settings if necessary.
11. Click [OK].
12. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

• You can print the documents stored in the Document Server using the control panel. For details, see
page 133 "Printing Stored Documents".

Managing Documents Stored in Document Server

You can view or delete the documents stored in the machine's Document Server using Web Image
Monitor from a client computer connected to the network.

110
Using the Quick Print Release Function

Using the Quick Print Release Function


The quick applications that are installed on this machine allow you to operate some of the printer
functions from a single screen. Using the Quick Print Release function, you can view the list of documents
that are stored on the machine. From the list, any documents can be selected and printed. The print
settings of the document and the date and time to send the document can be changed as well.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Quick Print Release] icon.
3. Select the user as required.
4. If necessary, enter the password for the documents.
The list of both the documents that have not password specified, and that matches the entered
password is displayed.

5. Select documents.
More than one document can be selected at one time.
You can perform the following operations on the selected documents:
• Delete
Deletes the selected documents.
• Preview
Shows the preview image of the first page of the document.
• Change Setg
Configures the print settings of the document.
• File Managmnt
Specifies the date and time to send the document, and the password.
The file information cannot be modified when more than one document is selected.
6. Press [Print].

111
5. Print

• If you change settings for [Administrator Authentication Management] or [Enhance File Protection]
using an external application such as Web Image Monitor while using the Quick Print Release
function, this function is terminated automatically.

112
Using the Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device) Function

Using the Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device)


Function
The Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device) function allows you to read and print files that are stored on a
memory storage device such as an SD card or USB flash memory device. Also, you can save the
scanned data on a memory storage device.
The files in the following formats can be printed using the Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device) function:
JPEG, TIFF, PDF, and XPS. The scanned data can be saved in JPEG, TIFF, or PDF format.
Printing a file in a memory storage device

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device)] icon.
3. Press [Media Print].
4. Insert a memory storage device in the media slot.
5. Press [USB] or [SD Card], depending on the type of the storage device.
6. Select the document to print.

You can perform the following operations on the selected document:


• Preview
Shows the preview image of the first page of the document.
• Selected
Displays the list of the selected documents.
7. If necessary, press [Print Settings] to change the settings such as the number of copies
or duplex printing.
8. Press [Start].
Saving the scanned data in a memory storage device

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device)] icon.
3. Press [Scan to Media].

113
5. Print

4. Insert a memory storage device in the media slot.


5. Press [USB] or [SD Card], depending on the type of the storage device that you are
using.
6. Specify the location to save the scanned data.

7. Place the original.


8. If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to change the settings such as the file type or scan
resolution.
9. To see the scanned image before saving it to a file, press [Preview].
10. Press [Start].
11. Press [Finish Scan] after scanning of the original has been completed.
If there are more originals to be scanned, place the next original, and then press [Scan Next
Original].
12. When the preview screen appears, check the scanned image, and then press [Save].

• If the file name is not specified in [Scan Settings], the scanned image is saved under the name
that conforms to the following naming rules:
• For single page format:
Transmission date and time (YYYYMMDDHHMMSSMMM) + 4 digit serial page number
(_nnnn) + extension (.tif/.jpg/.pdf)
For example, when you send 10-page original in jpeg format at 15:30:15.5 on Dec.
31, 2020, the file names are from "20201231153015500_0001.jpg" to
"20201231153015500_0010.jpg".
• For multi page format:
Transmission date and time (YYYYMMDDHHMMSSMMM) + extension (.tif/.jpg/.pdf)
For example, when you send 10-page original in PDF format at 15:30:15.5 on Dec. 31,
2020, the file name is "20201231153015500.pdf".
• When you save scanned data to a memory storage device, use characters which correspond
to the ASCII codes for the file name. If you use characters which is not correspond to the
ASCII codes, the machine may not read or save the documents.

114
Using the Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device) Function

• Certain types of USB flash memory device and SD cards cannot be used.

115
5. Print

116
6. Scan
This chapter describes frequently used scanner functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Scan available on our website.

Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder

• Before performing this procedure, see "Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder", Scan and
confirm the details of the destination computer. See also "Registering Folders", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings, and register the address of the destination computer to the address
book.
When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer Running Windows/Confirming a


Computer's Information

The following procedures explain how to create a shared folder on a computer running Windows, and
how to confirm the computer's information. In these examples, Windows 7 is the operating system, and
the computer is a member in a network domain. Write down the confirmed information.

Step 1: Confirming the user name and computer name

Confirm the user name and the name of the computer you will send scanned documents to.

1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], click [Accessories], and then click
[Command Prompt].
2. Enter the command "ipconfig/all", and then press the [Enter] key.
3. Confirm the name of the computer.
The computer's name is displayed under [Host Name].

117
6. Scan

You can also confirm the IPv4 address. The address displayed under [IPv4 Address] is the IPv4
address of the computer.
4. Enter the command "set user", and then press the [Enter] key.
Be sure to put a space between "set" and "user".
5. Confirm the user name.
The user name is displayed under [USERNAME].

Step 2: Creating a shared folder on a computer running Microsoft Windows

Create a shared destination folder in Windows and enable sharing. In the following procedure, a
computer which is running under Windows 7 and participating in a domain is used as an example.

• You must log in as an Administrators group member to create a shared folder.


• If "Everyone" is left selected in Step 6, the created shared folder will be accessible by all users. This
is a security risk, so we recommend that you give access rights only to specific users. Use the
following procedure to remove "Everyone" and specify user access rights.

1. Create a folder, just as you would create a normal folder, in a location of your choice on
the computer.
2. Right-click the folder, and then click [Properties].
3. On the [Sharing] tab, click [Advanced Sharing...].
4. Select the [Share this folder] check box.
5. Click [Permissions].
6. In the [Group or user names:] list, select "Everyone", and then click [Remove].
7. Click [Add...].
8. In the [Select Users, Computers, Service Accounts, or Groups] window, click
[Advanced...].
9. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
10. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
11. In the [Select Users, Computers, Service Accounts, or Groups] window, click [OK].
12. In the [Group or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full Control] or [Change] check box.
Configure the access permissions for each group and user.
13. Click [OK].

118
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder

Step 3: Specifying access privileges for the created shared folder

If you want to specify access privileges for the created folder to allow other users or groups to access
the folder, configure the folder as follows:

1. Right-click the folder created in Step 2, and then click [Properties].


2. On the [Security] tab, click [Edit...].
3. Click [Add...].
4. In the [Select Users, Computers, Service Accounts, or Groups] window, click
[Advanced...].
5. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
6. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
7. In the [Select Users, Computers, Service Accounts, or Groups] window, click [OK].
8. In the [Groups or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full Control] or [Modify] check box.
9. Click [OK].

Registering an SMB Folder

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Press [New Program].
5. Press [Change] under "Name".
The name entry display appears.
6. Enter the name, and then press [OK].
7. Press [ Next].

119
6. Scan

8. Press the key for the classification you want to use under "Select Title".

The keys you can select are as follows:


• [Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added to the
list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more key for each title.
9. Press [Auth. Info], and then press [ Next].

10. Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of "Folder Authentication".
When [Do not Specify] is selected, the SMB User Name and SMB Password that you have
specified in "Default User Name / Password (Send)" of File Transfer settings are applied.
11. Press [Change] under "Login User Name".
12. Enter the login user name of the destination computer, and then press [OK].
13. Press [Change] under "Login Password".
14. Enter the password of the destination computer, and then press [OK].
15. Enter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].
16. Press [Folder].

120
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder

17. Check that [SMB] is selected.

18. Press [Change] or [Browse Network], and then specify the folder.
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder by browsing the
network.
19. Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
20. Press [Exit].
If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
21. Press [OK].
22. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
23. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Locating the SMB folder manually

1. Press [Change] under "Path".


2. Enter the path where the folder is located.
For example: if the name of the destination computer is "User", and the folder name is "Share", the
path will be \\User\Share.

121
6. Scan

If the network does not allow automatic obtaining of IP addresses, include the destination
computer's IP address in the path. For example: if the IP address of the destination computer is
"192.168.0.191", and the folder name is "Share", the path will be \\192.168.0.191\Share.
3. Press [OK].
If the format of the entered path is not correct, a message appears. Press [Exit], and then enter the
path again.

Locating the SMB folder using Browse Network

1. Press [Browse Network].


The client computers sharing the same network as the machine appear.
Network display only lists client computers you are authorized to access.
2. Select the group that contains the destination computer.
3. Select the computer name of the destination computer.
Shared folders under it appear.

You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.


4. Select the folder you want to register.
5. Press [OK].

Deleting an SMB Registered Folder

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Select the name whose folder you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.

122
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder

You can search by the registered name, user code, fax number, folder name, e-mail address, or IP-
Fax destination.
5. Press [Folder].
6. Press the protocol which is not currently selected.
A confirmation message appears.
7. Press [Yes].
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
10. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Entering the Path to the Destination Manually

When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

123
6. Scan

Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-


mail
When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

Registering an E-mail Destination

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Press [New Program].
5. Press [Change] under "Name".
The name entry display appears.
6. Enter the name, and then press [OK].
7. Press [ Next].
8. Press the key for the classification you want to use under "Select Title".

The keys you can select are as follows:


• [Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.

124
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added to the
list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more key for each title.
9. Press [Email].
10. Press [Change] under "Email Address".

11. Enter the e-mail address, and then press [OK].

12. Select [Email / Internet Fax Destination] or [Internet Fax Destination Only].
If [Email / Internet Fax Destination] is specified, registered e-mail addresses appear in both Internet
fax address display and e-mail address display on the fax function screen, and in the address
display on the scanner function screen.
If [Internet Fax Destination Only] is specified, registered e-mail addresses only appear in Internet
fax display on the fax function screen.
13. If you want to use Internet fax, specify whether or not to use "Send via SMTP Server".
14. Press [OK].
15. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
16. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

125
6. Scan

Deleting an E-mail Destination

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Select the name whose e-mail address you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys. You can search by the
registered name, user code, fax number, folder name, e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination.
5. Press [Email].
6. Press [Change] under "Email Address".
7. Press [Delete All], and then press [OK].
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
10. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Entering an E-mail Address Manually

When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

126
Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files

Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files

• You can specify a password for each stored file. We recommend that you protect stored files from
unauthorized access by specifying passwords.
• Scan file stored in the machine may be lost if some kind of failure occurs. We advise against using
the hard disk to store important files. The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage that may
result from the loss of files.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Scanner (Classic)] icon.
3. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press [Reset].
4. Place originals.
5. Press [Store File].

6. Press [Store to HDD].


7. If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File Name],
[Password], and [Select Folder].
• User Name
Press [User Name], and then select a user name. To specify an unregistered user name, press
[Manual Entry], and then enter the name. After specifying a user name, press [OK].
• File Name
Press [File Name], enter a file name, and then press [OK].
• Password
Press [Password], enter a password, and then press [OK]. Re-enter the password for
confirmation, and then press [OK].
• Select Folder
Press [Select Folder], specify the folder in which to save the stored files, and then press [OK].

127
6. Scan

8. Press [OK].
9. If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as resolution and scan
size.
10. Press [Start].

Checking a Stored File Selected from the List

This section explains how to preview a file selected from the list of stored files.

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Specify the folder in which the file you want to check is stored.
3. From the list of stored files, select the file you want to check.
You can select more than one file.
4. Press [Preview].

128
Specifying the File Type

Specifying the File Type


This section explains the procedure for specifying the file type of a file you want to send.
File types can be specified when sending files by e-mail or Scan to Folder, sending stored files by e-mail
or Scan to Folder, and saving files on a memory storage device.
You can select one of the following file types:
• Single Page: [TIFF / JPEG], [PDF]
If you select a single-page file type when scanning multiple originals, one file is created for each
single page and the number of files sent is the same as the number of pages scanned.
• Multi-page: [TIFF], [PDF]
If you select a multi-page file type when scan multiple originals, scanned pages are combined and
sent as a single file.
Selectable file types differ depending on the scan settings and other conditions. For details about file
types, see "Notes about and limitations of file types", Scan.
When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

129
6. Scan

Specifying Scan Settings


When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

130
7. Document Server
This chapter describes frequently used Document Server functions and operations. For information not
included in this chapter, see Copy/ Document Server available on our website.

Storing Data
This section describes the procedure for storing documents on the Document Server.

• A document accessed with a correct password remains selected even after operations are
complete, and it can be accessed by other users. After the operation, be sure to press [Reset] to
cancel the document selection.
• The user name registered to a stored document in the Document Server is to identify the document
creator and type. It is not to protect confidential documents from others.
• When turning on the fax transmission or scanning by the scanner, make sure that all other
operations are ended.
File Name
A file name such as "COPY0001" and "COPY0002" is automatically attached to the scanned
document. You can change the file name.
User Name
You can register a user name to identify the user or user group that stored the documents. To assign
it, select the user name registered in the Address Book, or enter the name directly. Depending on
the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name].
For details about the Address Book, see "Registering Addresses and Users", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
Password
To prevent unauthorized printing, you can specify a password for any stored document. A
protected document can only be accessed if its password is entered. If a password is specified for
the documents, the lock icon appears on the left side of the file name.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Document Server] icon.
3. Press [To Scanning Screen].
4. Press [Target Fldr. to Store].
5. Specify a folder in which to store the document, and then press [OK].
6. Press [User Name].

131
7. Document Server

7. Specify a user name, and then press [OK].


The user names shown are names that were registered in the Address Book. To specify a name not
shown in the screen, press [Manual Entry], and then enter a user name.
8. Press [File Name].
9. Enter a file name, and then press [OK].
10. Press [Password].
11. Enter a password with the number keys, and then press [OK].
You can use four to eight digits for the password.
12. For double-check, enter the password again, and then press [OK].
13. Place the original.
14. Select the paper tray.
15. Specify the original scanning conditions.
16. Press [Start].
The original is scanned. The document is saved in the Document Server.
After scanning, a list of folders will be displayed. If the list does not appear, press [Finish Scanning].

132
Printing Stored Documents

Printing Stored Documents


Prints stored documents on the Document Server.
The items you can specify on the printing screen are as follows:
• Paper tray
• The number of prints
• [2 Sided Copy Top to Top], [2 Sided Copy Top to Bottom], [Booklet], [Magazine]
• [Finishing] ([Sort])
• [Cover/Slip Sheet] ([Front Cover], [Front/Back Cover], [Designate/Chapter], [Slip Sheet])
• [Edit / Stamp] ([Margin Adj.], [Stamp])
For details about each function, see the each section.

1. Select a folder.

2. Select a document to be printed.


3. When printing two or more documents at a time, repeat Step 2.
Up to 30 documents can be printed.
4. When specifying printing conditions, press [To Printing Screen], and then configure print
settings.
5. Enter the number of print copies with the number keys.
The maximum quantity that can be entered is 999.
6. Press [Start].

133
7. Document Server

134
8. Web Image Monitor
This chapter describes frequently used Web Image Monitor functions and operations. For information
not included in this chapter, see Connecting the Machine/ System Settings available on our website or
Web Image Monitor Help.

Displaying Top Page


This section explains the Top Page and how to display Web Image Monitor.

• When entering an IPv4 address, do not begin segments with zeros. For example: If the address is
"192.168.001.010", you must enter it as "192.168.1.10".

1. Start your web browser.


2. Enter "http://(machine's IP address or host name)/" in your web browser's URL bar.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
If the machine's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server, you can enter it.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server
authentication is issued, enter "https://(machine's IP address or host name)/".
Web Image Monitor is divided into the following areas:

1
4

DPK709

1. Menu area
If you select a menu item, its content will be shown.
2. Header area
Display icons for the links to Help and the keyword search function. This area also displays [Login] and
[Logout], which allows you to switch between the administrator and guest mode.

135
8. Web Image Monitor

3. Refresh/Help
(Refresh): Click at the upper right in the work area to update the machine information. Click the web
browser's [Refresh] button to refresh the entire browser screen.
(Help): Use Help to view or download Help file contents.
4. Basic Information area
Display the basic information of the machine.
5. Work area
Display the contents of the item selected in the menu area.

136
9. Adding Paper and Toner
This chapter describes how to load paper into the paper tray and recommended paper sizes and types.

Loading Paper
Precautions for Loading Paper

• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.

• If Tray 2, 3, 4 and 5 are installed, do not pull out more than one tray at a time when you are
changing or replenishing paper or resolving paper jams. Pressing down forcefully on the
machine's upper surfaces can result in malfunctions and/or user injury.

• Do not stack paper over the limit mark.


• Do not change the size of the paper for the specified printing tray while documents are being
scanned or printed.

• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the paper before loading it.

CBK254

• If you load paper when only a few sheets of paper remain in the tray, multiple sheet feeding may
occur. Remove any remaining paper, stack them with the new sheets of paper, and then fan the
entire stack before loading it into the tray.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• For details about the paper sizes and types that can be used, see page 148 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".

137
9. Adding Paper and Toner

• You might at times hear a rustling noise from paper moving through the machine. This noise does
not indicate a malfunction.

Loading Paper into Paper Trays

Every paper tray is loaded in the same way.


In the following example procedure, paper is loaded into Tray 1.

• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease or the paper may
misfeed.

1. Pull the tray carefully until it stops, lift the front side of the tray, and then pull it out of the
machine.

DPK907

Place the tray on a flat surface.


2. Adjust the paper size dial to match the size and feed direction of paper in the paper tray.

DPL036

138
Loading Paper

3. Squeeze the clip on the side paper guide and slide it to match the paper size.

DPL037

4. Squeeze the end guide and slide it inward to match the standard size.

DPL038

5. When loading paper that is larger than A4 or 81/2 × 11 , push the button, and then
pull the end guide out to match the paper size.

DPK125

6. Load the new paper stack print side down.


Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit (upper line) marked inside the tray.

139
9. Adding Paper and Toner

DPK909

7. Adjust the paper guides to close any gaps.


Do not move paper loaded in the tray more than a few millimeters.
Moving the loaded paper excessively may cause damage to paper edges on the openings of the
tray's lifting plate, resulting in sheets being folded or becoming jammed.
8. Lift the front side of the tray, and then slide it into the machine carefully until it stops.

DPL039

To avoid paper jams, make sure the tray is securely inserted.

• Letterhead paper must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see "Loading Orientation-
fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper", Paper Specifications and Adding Paper.
• You can load envelopes in Trays 2–5. When loading envelopes, place them in the correct
orientation. For details, see page 153 "Envelopes".

Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray

Use the bypass tray to use OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, and paper that cannot be loaded in
the paper trays.

140
Loading Paper

• The maximum number of sheets you can load at the same time depends on paper type. Do not
stack paper over the limit mark. For the maximum number of sheets you can load, see page 148
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
• After loading paper, specify the paper size and type using the control panel. When printing a
document, specify the same paper size and type in the printer driver as specified on the machine.

1. Open the bypass tray.

DPL019

Pull the extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11 or larger paper.

DPL020

2. Load paper face up until it stops, and then adjust both sides of the paper guide to match
the paper width.

DPL022

141
9. Adding Paper and Toner

• When you use the bypass tray, it is recommended to load the paper in orientation.
• When loading thick paper, thin paper, or OHP transparencies, specify the paper size and the
paper type.
• Letterhead paper must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see page 145 "Loading
Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper".
• You can load envelopes into the bypass tray. Envelopes must be loaded in a specific orientation.
For details, see page 153 "Envelopes".
• When copying from the bypass tray, see "Copying from the Bypass Tray", Copy/ Document
Server. When printing from a computer, see page 142 "Printing from the Bypass Tray Using the
Printer Function".
• When the [Notification Sound] is set to [No Sound], it does not sound if you load paper into the
bypass tray. For details about [Notification Sound], see "Screen Features", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.

Printing from the Bypass Tray Using the Printer Function

• If you select [Machine Setting(s)] in [Bypass Tray] under [Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of the
Printer Features menu, the settings made using the control panel have priority over the printer driver
settings. For details, see "System", Print.
• The default of [Bypass Tray] is [Machine Setting(s): Any Type].

• Settings remain valid until they are changed.


• For details about setting printer drivers, see "Printing Documents", Print.
• (mainly Europe and Asia)
[A4 ] is the default setting for [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
• (mainly North America)
[81/2 × 11 ] is the default setting for [Printer Bypass Paper Size].

Specifying regular sizes using the control panel

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
3. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
4. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].

142
Loading Paper

5. Select the paper size.

6. Press [OK].
7. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
8. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Specifying a custom size paper using the control panel

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools] icon ( ) on.
3. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
4. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
5. Press [Custom Size].
If a custom size is already specified, press [Change Size].
6. Press [Horizontal].
7. Enter the horizontal size using the number keys, and then press [ ].

8. Press [Vertical].
9. Enter the vertical size using the number keys, and then press [ ].
10. Press [OK] twice.
11. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
12. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

143
9. Adding Paper and Toner

Specifying thick paper, thin paper, or OHP transparencies for paper type using the
control panel

• Use A4 or 81/2 × 11 size OHP transparencies, and specify their size.


• Usually only one side of OHP transparencies can be used for printing. Be sure to load them with the
print side down.
• When printing onto OHP transparencies, remove printed sheets one by one.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
3. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
4. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size], and then specify the paper size.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [ Next].
7. Press [Paper Type: Bypass Tray].
8. Select the proper items, according to the paper type you want to specify.
• Press [OHP (Transparency)] on the [Paper Type] area when loading OHP transparencies.
• To load thick paper, press [Do not Display] on the [Paper Type] area, and then select the
appropriate paper thickness in the [Paper Thickness] area.

9. Press [OK].
10. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
11. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

• We recommend that you use specified OHP transparencies.


• For details about paper thickness, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.

144
Loading Paper

Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper

Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper (for example, letterhead paper, punched paper, or
copied paper) might not be printed correctly, depending on how the originals and paper are placed.
Settings for the User Tools
• Copier mode
Specify [Yes] for [Letterhead Setting] in [Input / Output] under the Copier / Document Server
Features menu, and then place the original and paper as shown below.
• Printer mode
Specify [Auto Detect] or [On (Always)] for [Letterhead Setting] in [System] under the Printer
Features menu, and then place the paper as shown below.
For details about the letterhead settings, see "Input / Output", Copy/ Document Server, or
"System", Print.
Original orientation and paper orientation
The meanings of the icons are as follows:

Icon Meaning

Place or load paper scanned or printed side face up.

Place or load paper scanned or printed side face down.

• Original orientation

Original orientation Exposure glass ADF

Readable orientation

145
9. Adding Paper and Toner

Original orientation Exposure glass ADF

Unreadable • Copy
orientation

• Scanner

• Paper orientation
• Copier mode

Copy side Paper trays Bypass tray*1

One-sided

Two-sided

*1 If you place originals in the ADF and copy on orientation-fixed paper from the bypass tray
without specifying the paper size, the image might be copied upside down. In order to make
copies correctly, place the paper upside down or specify the paper size.
• Printer mode

Print side Paper trays Bypass tray

One-sided

Two-sided

• In copier mode:

146
Loading Paper

• For details about how to make two-sided copies, see "Duplex Copying", Copy/ Document
Server.
• In printer mode:
• To print on letterhead paper when [Auto Detect] is specified for [Letterhead Setting], you must
specify [Letterhead] as the paper type in the printer driver's settings.
• If a print job is changed partway through printing from one-sided to two-sided printing, one-
sided output after the first copy may be printed facing a different direction. To ensure all
paper is output facing the same direction, specify different input trays for one-sided and two-
sided printing. Note also that two-sided printing must be disabled for the tray specified for
one-sided printing.
• For details about how to make two-sided prints, see "Printing on Both Sides of Sheets", Print.

147
9. Adding Paper and Toner

Recommended Paper
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

This section describes recommended paper sizes and types.

• If you use paper that curls, either because it is too dry or too damp, a paper jam may occur.
• Do not use paper designed for inkjet printers, as these may stick to the fusing unit and cause a
misfeed.
• When you load OHP transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets, and place them
correctly, or a misfeed might occur.
Tray 1

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– *1 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover) A4 , A5 , A6 , 81/2 × 14
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1 , 81/2 × 11 , 51/2 ×
81/2

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– *2 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover) A5 , B5 JIS , B6 JIS ,
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1 81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 ,
8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
16K , 81/2 × 132/5

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– Custom size: 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1
Vertical: 148.0–356.0 mm
Horizontal: 105.0–216.0
mm

Vertical: 5.83–14.0 inches


Horizontal: 4.14–8.50 inches

*1 Select the paper size using the paper size dial on the tray.

148
Recommended Paper

*2 Set the paper size dial on the tray to " ", and select the paper size with the control panel.
Trays 2-5

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– *1 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover) A4 , A5 , 81/2 × 14 ,
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1 81/2 × 11 , 51/2 × 81/2

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– *2 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover) B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 81/2 × 13
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 13 ,
8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
16K , 81/2 × 132/5

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– Custom size: 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1
Vertical: 162.0–356.0 mm
Horizontal: 92.0–216.0 mm

Vertical: 6.38–14.0 inches


Horizontal: 3.63–8.50 inches

Envelopes *2 *3

41/8 × 91/2 , 37/8 × 71/2


, C5 Env , C6 Env , DL
Env

*1 Select the paper size using the paper size dial on the tray.
*2 Set the paper size dial on the tray to " ", and select the paper size with the control panel.
*3 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.

149
9. Adding Paper and Toner

Bypass tray

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

60–220 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– *1 100 sheets


80 lb. Cover) A4 , A5 , A6 , B5 JIS ,
Thin Paper–Thick Paper 3 B6 JIS , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14
, 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2
×81/2 ,
16K , 81/2 × 132/5

60–220 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– Custom size*2: 100 sheets


80 lb. Cover)
Thin Paper–Thick Paper 3
Vertical: 148.0–356.0 mm
Horizontal: 70.0–216.0 mm

Vertical: 5.83–14.0 inches


Horizontal: 2.76–8.50 inches

OHP transparencies A4 , 81/2 × 11 *3

Label paper (adhesive labels) A4 *3

Envelopes *1 *3

41/8 × 91/2 , 37/8 × 71/2


, C5 Env , C6 Env , DL Env

*1 Select the paper size using the control panel. For copier mode, see "Copying from the Bypass Tray",
Copy/ Document Server. For printer mode, see page 142 "Specifying regular sizes using the control
panel".
*2 Enter the paper size. For copier mode, see "Copying from the Bypass Tray", Copy/ Document Server.
For printer mode, see page 143 "Specifying a custom size paper using the control panel".
*3 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.

150
Recommended Paper

Paper Thickness

Paper Thickness*1 Paper weight

Thin Paper*2 60–63 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond)

Plain Paper 1 64–74 g/m2 (17–20 lb. Bond)

Plain Paper 2 75–90 g/m2 (20-24 lb. Bond)

Middle Thick 91–105 g/m2 (24–28 lb. Bond)

Thick Paper 1 106–135 g/m2 (28–36 lb. Bond)*3

Thick Paper 2 136–170 g/m2 (36 lb. Bond–63 lb. Cover)

Thick Paper 3 171–220 g/m2 (63–80 lb. Cover)

*1 Print quality will decrease if the paper you are using is close to the minimum or maximum weight.
Change the paper weight setting to thinner or thicker.
*2 Depending on the type of thin paper, the edges may crease or the paper may be misfed.
*3 Allowed weights for Trays 1 to 5 and duplex printing are 106 to 120 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond to 44 lb.
Cover) paper.

• Certain types of paper, such as OHP transparencies, may produce noise when delivered. This
noise does not indicate a problem and print quality is unaffected.
• The paper capacity described in the tables above is an example. Actual paper capacity might be
lower, depending on the paper type.
• When loading paper, make sure the stack height does not exceed the limit mark of the paper tray.
• If multiple sheet feeding occurs, fan sheets thoroughly or load sheets one by one from the bypass
tray.
• Flatten out curled sheets before loading them.
• Depending on the paper sizes and types, the copy/print speed may be slower than usual.
• When loading thick paper of 106–220 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond–80 lb. Cover), see page 152 "Thick
paper".
• When loading envelopes, see page 153 "Envelopes".
• When copying or printing onto letterhead paper, the paper placing orientation is different
depending on which function you are using. For details, see page 145 "Loading Orientation-fixed
Paper or Two-sided Paper".
• If you load paper of the same size and same type in two or more trays, the machine automatically
feeds from one of the trays in which [Yes] is selected for [Apply Auto Paper Select] when the first
tray in use runs out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switching. This saves interrupting a

151
9. Adding Paper and Toner

copy run to replenish paper when making a large number of copies. You can specify the paper
type of the paper trays under [Paper Type]. For details, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings. For the setting procedure of the Auto Tray Switching function, see
"General Features", Copy/ Document Server.
• When loading label paper:
• We recommend that you use specified label paper.
• It is recommended to place one sheet at a time.
• Press [Bypass], and then select the appropriate paper thickness for [Paper Type].
• When loading OHP transparencies:
• It is recommended to place one sheet at a time.
• When copying onto OHP transparencies, see "Copying onto OHP Transparencies", Copy/
Document Server.
• When printing on OHP transparencies from the computer, see page 144 "Specifying thick
paper, thin paper, or OHP transparencies for paper type using the control panel".
• Fan OHP transparencies thoroughly whenever you use them. This prevents OHP
transparencies from sticking together, and from feeding incorrectly.
• Remove copied or printed sheets one by one.

Thick paper

This section gives you various details about and recommendations concerning thick paper.
When loading thick paper of 106–220 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond–80 lb. Cover), follow the recommendations
below to prevent misfeeds and loss of image quality.
• Store all your paper in the same environment - a room where the temperature is 20–25°C (68–
77°F) and the humidity is 30–65%.
• When loading paper in the paper trays, be sure to load at least 20 sheets. Also, be sure to position
the side fences flush against the paper stack.
• Jams and misfeeds can occur when printing on thick smooth paper. To prevent such problems, be
sure to fan smooth paper thoroughly before loading them. If paper continues to become jammed or
feed in together even after they are fanned, load them one by one from the bypass tray.

• Select [Thick Paper 1], [Thick Paper 2], or [Thick Paper 3] as the paper thickness in [Tray Paper
Settings].
• Even if thick paper is loaded as described above, normal operations and print quality might still not
be possible, depending on the paper type.
• Prints might have prominent vertical creases.
• Prints might be noticeably curled. Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled.

152
Recommended Paper

Envelopes

This section gives you various details about and recommendations concerning envelopes.

• Do not use window envelopes.


• Misfeeds might occur depending on the length and shape of the flaps.
• Before loading envelopes, press down on them to remove any air from inside, flatten out all four
edges. If they are bent or curled, flatten their leading edges (the edge going into the machine) by
running a pencil or ruler across them.

CHU024

In copier mode
The way to load envelopes varies depending on the orientation of the envelopes. When copying
onto envelopes, load them according to the applicable orientation shown below:

How to load envelopes


Orientation of
Exposure glass Trays 2–5 Bypass tray
envelopes

Envelopes

• Flaps: closed • Flaps: closed


• Bottom side of • Flaps: closed • Bottom side of
envelopes: toward • Bottom side of envelopes: toward
the front of the envelopes: toward the right of the
machine the right of the machine
• Side to be machine • Side to be printed:
scanned: face • Side to be printed: face up
down face down

153
9. Adding Paper and Toner

When loading envelopes, specify the envelope size and thickness. For details, see "Copying onto
Envelopes", Copy/ Document Server.
In printer mode
The way to load envelopes varies depending on the orientation of the envelopes. When printing
onto envelopes, load them according to the applicable orientation shown below:

How to load envelopes


Orientation Trays 2–5 Bypass tray

Envelopes

• Flaps: closed
• Flaps: closed
• Bottom side of envelopes:
• Bottom side of envelopes: toward the right of the
toward the right of the machine
machine
• Side to be printed: face up
• Side to be printed: face
down

When loading envelopes, select "Envelope" as the paper types using both [Tray Paper Settings]
and printer driver and specify the thickness of envelopes. For details, see "Printing on Envelopes",
Print.
To print on envelopes that are loaded with their short edges against the machine body, rotate the
print image by 180 degrees using the printer driver.
Recommended envelopes
For information about recommended envelopes, contact your local dealer.
For details about the sizes of envelopes you can load, see page 148 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".

• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.


• The Duplex function cannot be used with envelopes.
• Straighten any curls within 2 mm (0.1 inch) upward and 0 mm (0 inches) downward on the tray
before loading.
• To get better output quality, it is recommended that you set the right, left, top, and bottom print
margin, to at least 15 mm (0.6 inches) each.
• Output quality on envelopes may be uneven if parts of an envelope have differing thicknesses. Print
one or two envelopes to check print quality.

154
Recommended Paper

• Copied or printed sheets are delivered to the internal tray even if you specified a different tray.
• Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled.
• Check the envelopes are not damp.
• High temperature and high humidity conditions can reduce print quality and cause envelopes to
become creased.
• Depending on the environment, copying or printing on envelopes may wrinkle them even if they
are recommended.
• Certain types of envelopes might come out creased, dirtied, or misprinted. If you are printing a
solid color on an envelope, lines may appear where the overlapped edges of the envelope make it
thicker.

155
9. Adding Paper and Toner

Adding Toner
This section explains precautions when adding toner, how to send faxes or scanned documents when
the toner has run out, and how to dispose of used toner.

• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.

• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.

• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Absorbed toner
may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the vacuum cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a vacuum cleaner that is explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof. If
toner is spilled on the floor, remove the spilled toner slowly using a wet cloth, so that the toner is
not scattered.

• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.

• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.

• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.

• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.

156
Adding Toner

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.

• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.

• Always replace the print cartridge when a notification appears on the machine.
• Fault may occur if you use toner other than the recommended type.
• When adding toner, do not turn off the main power. If you do, settings will be lost.
• Store toner where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight, temperatures above 35°C (95°F), or
high humidity.
• Store toner horizontally.
• Do not shake the print cartridge with its mouth down after removing it. Residual toner may scatter.
• Do not repeatedly install and remove print cartridges. This will result in toner leakage.
Follow the instruction on the screen regarding how to replace a print cartridge.

1. Open the front cover.

DPK942

157
9. Adding Paper and Toner

2. Hold the print cartridge with one hand as you release the print cartridge lever with
another hand.

DPK918

3. Squeeze the clip on the print cartridge and lift it.

DPK919

4. Put the used print cartridge in a plastic bag and seal it so that the toner does not spill out.

DPK920

158
Adding Toner

5. Remove the new print cartridge from the toner kit.

DPK921

6. Shake the new print cartridge at least 10 times to the left and right so that the toner inside
it spreads uniformly.

10

DPK922

7. Insert the new print cartridge into the machine.


Press the new print cartridge until it clicks into place.

DPK924

159
9. Adding Paper and Toner

8. Lock the lever of the print cartridge.

DPK925

9. Close the front cover.

• If "Print Cartridge is almost empty." appears on the system message widget, the toner has almost
run out. Have a replacement print cartridge at hand.
• If appears when there is a lot of toner, hold the cartridge with the opening upward, shake it
well, and then reinstall it.
• When "No Toner" appears on the system message widget, you can check the name of the required
toner and the replacement procedure using the [ Add Toner] screen. To display the [ Add
Toner] screen, press [Check Status], and then press [Check] in the [Mach. Status] area in the
[Mach./Applic. Stat] tab.
• For details about how to check contact number where you can order supplies, see "Inquiry",
Maintenance and Specifications.

Sending Faxes or Scanned Documents When Toner Has Run Out

When the machine has run out of toner, the indicator on the display lights. Note that even if there is no
toner left, you can still send faxes or scanned documents.

• If number of communications executed after the toner has run out and not listed in the automatically
output Journal exceeds 200, communication is not possible.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Fax] icon or the [Scanner] icon.
3. Press [Exit], and then perform transmission operation.
The error message disappears.

• Any reports are not printed.

160
Adding Toner

Disposing of Used Toner

This section describes what to do with used toner.


Toner cannot be re-used.
Pack used toner containers in the container's box or a bag to prevent the toner from leaking out of the
container when you dispose of it.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used toner container, please contact your local sales office. If you discard it
by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
(mainly North America)
Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you can
recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.

161
9. Adding Paper and Toner

162
10. Troubleshooting
This chapter describes basic troubleshooting procedures.

When a Status Icon Is Displayed


This section describes the status icons displayed when the machine requires the user to remove misfed
paper, to add paper, or to perform other procedures.

Status Icon Status

: Paper Misfeed icon Appears when a paper misfeed occurs.


For details about removing jammed paper, see "Removing
Jammed Paper", Troubleshooting.

: Original Misfeed icon Appears when an original misfeed occurs.


For details about removing jammed paper, see "Removing
Jammed Paper", Troubleshooting.

: Load Paper icon Appears when paper runs out.


For details about loading paper, see "Loading Paper",
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper.

: Add Toner icon Appears when toner runs out.


For details about adding toner, see "Adding Toner",
Maintenance and Specifications.

: Waste Toner Full icon Appears when the waste toner bottle is full.
For details about replacing the waste toner bottle, see
"Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle", Maintenance and
Specifications.

: Service Call icon Appears when the machine is malfunctioning or requires


maintenance.

: Open Cover icon Appears when one or more covers of the machine are
open.

163
10. Troubleshooting

When the Indicator Lamp for [Check Status] Is


Lit or Flashing
If the indicator lamp for [Check Status] lights up or flashes, press [Check Status] to display the [Check
Status] screen. Check the status of each function in the [Check Status] screen.

[Check Status] screen

4 3
DDJ007

1. [Mach./Applic. Stat] tab


Indicates the status of the machine and each function.
2. [Check]
If an error occurs in the machine or a function, press [Check] to view details.
Pressing [Check] displays an error message or the corresponding function screen. Check the error message
displayed on the function screen and take the appropriate action. For details about how to resolve the
problems described in error messages, see "When Messages Appear", Troubleshooting.
3. Messages
Displays a message that indicates the status of the machine and each function.
4. Status icons
The status icons that can be displayed are described below:
: The function is performing a job.
: An error has occurred on the machine.
: The function cannot be used because an error has occurred in the function or machine. This icon may also
appear if the toner is running low.
The following table explains problems that cause the indicator lamp for [Check Status] to light or flash.

164
When the Indicator Lamp for [Check Status] Is Lit or Flashing

Problem Cause Solution

Documents and reports do The paper output tray is full. Remove the prints from the tray.
not print out.

Documents and reports do There is no paper left. Load paper. For details about loading
not print out. paper, see "Loading Paper", Paper
Specifications and Adding Paper.

An error has occurred. A function which has the Press [Check] in the function which the
status "Error Occurred" in error has occurred. Then read the
the [Check Status] screen is displayed message, and take the
defective. appropriate action. For details about
error messages and their solutions, see
"When Messages Appear",
Troubleshooting.
You can use other functions normally.

The machine is unable to A network error has • Check that the machine is
connect to the network. occurred. correctly connected to the
network and that the machine is
correctly set. For details about
how to connect the network, see
"Connecting to the Interface",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
• For details about connecting to
the network, contact your
administrator.
• If the indicator lamp is still lit even
after you try to solve the problem
as described here, contact your
service representative.

165
10. Troubleshooting

When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound


The following table describes the meaning of the various beep patterns that the machine issues to alert
users about left originals and other machine conditions.

Beep pattern Meaning Cause

Single short beep Panel/screen input A screen key was pressed.


accepted.

Short, then long beep Panel/screen input rejected. An invalid key was pressed on the
screen, or the entered password was
incorrect.

Single long beep Job completed successfully. A Copier/Document Server Features


job has finished.

2 long beeps Machine has warmed up. When the power is turned on or the
machine exits Sleep mode, the
machine has fully warmed up and is
ready for use.

5 long beeps Soft alert An auto reset was performed through


the simple screen of the Copier/
Document Server function or the
Scanner function.

5 long beeps repeated four Soft alert An original has been left on the
times. exposure glass or paper tray is empty.

5 short beeps repeated five Strong alert The machine requires user attention
times. because paper has jammed, the toner
needs replenishing, or other problems
have occurred.

• Users cannot mute the machine's beep alerts. When the machine beeps to alert users of a paper
jam or toner request, if the machine's covers are opened and closed repeatedly within a short
space of time, the beep alert might continue, even after normal status has resumed.
• You can enable or disable beep alerts. For details about Sound, see "General Features",
Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.

166
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine

When You Have Problems Operating the


Machine
Problem Cause Solution

When the machine is turned Functions other than the Wait a little longer.
on, the only icon that copier function are not yet
appears on the home screen ready.
is the [Copy] icon.

The machine has just been Functions other than the Wait a little longer.
turned on and the User Tools copier function are not yet
screen is displayed, but the ready. Time required varies
User Tools menu has items by function. Functions
missing. appear in the User Tools
menu when they become
ready for use.

The indicator lamp remains In some cases, the machine Before you press [Energy Saver],
lit and the machine does not does not enter Sleep mode check that Sleep mode can be
enter Sleep mode even when [Energy Saver] is enabled. For details about enabling
though [Energy Saver] was pressed. Sleep mode, see "Saving Energy",
pressed. Getting Started.

The display is turned off. The machine is in Sleep Touch the display panel.
mode.

Nothing happens when the The power is turned off. Make sure the main power indicator is
display panel is touched. off, and then turn on the power.

The power turns off The Weekly Timer setting is Change the Weekly Timer setting. For
automatically. set to [Main Power Off]. details about the Weekly Timer setting,
see "Timer Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.

The user code entry screen is Users are restricted by User For details about how to log in when
displayed. Code Authentication. User Code Authentication is enabled,
see "When the Authentication Screen is
Displayed", Getting Started.

The Authentication screen User Authentication is set. See "When the Authentication Screen
appears. is Displayed", Getting Started.

167
10. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

An error message is still Paper is still jammed in the Remove the jammed paper by
displayed, even if misfed tray. following the procedures displayed on
paper is removed. the control panel. For details about
removing jammed paper, see
"Removing Jammed Paper",
Troubleshooting.

An error message is still One or more of the covers Close all the covers of the machine.
displayed, even if the that are not indicated are
indicated cover is closed. still open.

Images are printed on the You may have loaded the Load the paper correctly. For details
reverse side of the paper. paper incorrectly. about loading paper, see "Loading
Paper", Paper Specifications and
Adding Paper.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Using curled paper often • Flatten the paper with your hands
causes misfeeds, soiled to straighten out the curl.
paper edges, or slipped • Load the paper upside down so
positions while stack printing that the curled edges face
is performed. downward. For details about
recommended paper, see
"Recommended Paper", Paper
Specifications and Adding Paper.
• Place the cut paper on a flat
surface to prevent it from curling,
and do not lean it against the
wall. For details about the proper
way to store paper, see "Paper
Storage", Paper Specifications
and Adding Paper.

168
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine

Problem Cause Solution

Misfeeds occur frequently. The tray's side or end fences • Remove the misfed paper. For
may not be set properly. details about removing jammed
paper, see "Removing Jammed
Paper", Troubleshooting.
• Check that the side or end fences
are set properly. Also, check that
the side fences are locked. For
details about setting the side and
end fences, see "Changing the
Paper Size", Paper Specifications
and Adding Paper.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Copy paper size setting is Remove the misfed paper. For details
not correct. about removing jammed paper, see
"Removing Jammed Paper",
Troubleshooting.

Misfeeds occur frequently. There is a foreign object on • Remove the misfed paper. For
the output tray. details about removing jammed
paper, see "Removing Jammed
Paper", Troubleshooting.
• Do not place anything on the
output tray.

Misfeeds occur when The envelopes are curled. Make sure you fully flatten curled
printing to envelopes. envelopes before you load them. Do
not stack envelopes over the specified
limit for the paper tray. If misfeeds still
occur after the envelopes have been
flattened, load envelopes on the tray
one at a time and print them
individually. For details about how to
load envelopes, see page 153
"Envelopes".

169
10. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

When printing to envelopes, The envelopes are curled. Make sure you fully flatten curled
the envelopes may be fed in envelopes before you load them. Do
together, or the envelopes not stack envelopes over the specified
may not be fed. limit for the paper tray. If misfeeds still
occur after the envelopes have been
flattened, load envelopes on the tray
one at a time and print them
individually. For details about how to
load envelopes, see page 153
"Envelopes".

Cannot print in duplex You have selected a paper Change the setting for "Apply Duplex"
mode. tray that is not set for duplex in "Tray Paper Settings" to enable
printing. duplex printing for the paper tray. For
details about setting "Apply Duplex",
see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting
the Machine/ System Settings.

Cannot print in duplex You have selected a paper In "Tray Paper Settings", select a paper
mode. type that cannot be used for type that can be used for duplex
duplex printing. printing. For details about setting
"Paper Type", see "Tray Paper
Settings", Connecting the Machine/
System Settings.

The machine does not turn The machine cannot perform Repeat the shutdown procedure. If the
off in 4 minutes after the the shutdown procedure. machine does not turn off, contact your
main power is turned off. service representative.

An error has occurred when The Address Book cannot be Wait a while, and then retry the
the Address Book is changed while you delete operation.
changed from the display the multiple stored
panel or Web Image documents.
Monitor.

170
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine

Problem Cause Solution

Cannot use Web Image When print volume limits are • For details about specifying print
Monitor to print documents specified, users cannot print volume limits, see "Managing
stored in Document Server. beyond their print volume Print Volume per User", Security
limit. Print jobs selected by Guide.
users who have reached • To view the status of a print job,
their print volume limits will see [Print Job History]. In Web
be canceled. Image Monitor, click [Job] on the
[Status/Information] menu. And
then click [Print Job History] in
"Document Server".

The function does not run or If you cannot carry out your Wait until the current job is completed
cannot be used. job, it may be that the before trying again.
machine is being used by For details about Function
another function. Compatibility, see "When Multiple
Functions Cannot Be Executed
Simultaneously", Troubleshooting.

The print image is not • The machine has not Contact the machine administrator or
properly positioned on the detected the paper your service representative.
paper. type and/or width
correctly.
• The print position is not
aligned properly.

Originals are misfed in the More than sixty originals • Remove all the originals, open
ADF. were placed in the ADF and close the cover of the ADF,
forcibly. and then place originals in the
ADF again.
• Do not forcibly load originals into
the ADF.
• If the problem persists, reduce the
number of originals that you
place in the ADF.

• There are times when images might not turn out as you want because of paper type, paper size, or
paper capacity problems, use the recommended paper. For details about recommended paper,
see page 148 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".

171
10. Troubleshooting

When Multiple Functions Cannot Be Executed Simultaneously

If you cannot carry out your job, it may be that the machine is being used by another function.
Wait until the current job is completed before trying again. In certain cases, you can carry out another
job using a different function while the current job is being performed.
For details about Function Compatibility, see "Function Compatibility", Troubleshooting.

172
Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function

Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/


Document Server Function

• If you cannot make copies as you want because of the paper type, paper size or paper capacity
problems, use recommended paper. For details about recommended paper, see page 148
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot delete the folder The folder cannot be deleted Unlock the locked original to delete it.
because it contains files with because it contains a locked For details about locked files, see
passwords. Delete the files original. "Managing Stored Files", Security
with passwords, or please Guide.
contact the file
administrator."

"Cannot display preview of The image data may have Press [Exit] to display the preview
this page." been corrupted. screen without a thumbnail.
If the selected document contains
several pages, press [Switch] on the
"Display Page" area to change the
page, and then a preview of the next
page will appear.

"Check paper size." An irregular paper size is If you press [Start], the copy will start
set. using the selected paper.

"Exceeded the maximum The number of pages the For details about how to check the
number of sheets that can be user is permitted to copy has number of copies available per user,
used. Copying will be been exceeded. see "Managing Print Volume per User",
stopped." Security Guide.

"File being stored exceeded The scanned originals have Press [Exit], and then store again with
max. number of pages per too many pages to store as an appropriate number of pages.
file. Copying will be one document.
stopped."

173
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Maximum number of sets is The number of copies You can change the maximum copy
n." exceeds the maximum copy quantity from [Max. Copy Quantity] in
("n" is replaced by a quantity. [General Features] under [Copier /
variable.) Document Server Features]. For details
about Max. Copy Quantity, see
"General Features", Copy/ Document
Server.

"Memory is full. nn originals The number of scanned Press [Print] to copy scanned originals
have been scanned. Press originals exceed the number and cancel the scanning data. Press
[Print] to copy scanned of pages that can be stored [Clear Memory] to cancel the scanning
originals. Do not remove in memory. data and not copy.
remaining originals."
("n" is replaced by a
variable.)

"Press [Continue] to scan The machine checked if the Remove all copies, and then press
and copy remaining remaining originals should [Continue] to continue copying. Press
originals." be copied, after the scanned [Stop] to stop copying.
originals were printed.

"The selected folder is An attempt was made to edit For details about locked folders, see
locked. Please contact the or use a locked folder. "Managing Folders", Security Guide.
file administrator."

• If you set [Memory Full Auto Scan Restart] in [Input / Output] of User Tools to [On], even if the
memory becomes full, the memory overflow message will not be displayed. The machine will make
copies of the scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed to scan and to copy the
remaining originals. In this case, the resulting sorted pages will not be sequential. For details about
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, see "Input / Output", Copy/ Document Server.

174
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function

Messages Displayed When You Use the


Facsimile Function
Message Cause Solution

"Cannot find the specified The name of the computer or Check that the computer name and the
path. Please check the folder entered as the folder name for the destination are
settings." destination is wrong. correct.

"Error occurred, and • Original jammed during Press [Exit], and then send the
transmission was Immediate Transmission. documents again.
cancelled." • A problem occurred in
the machine, or noise
occurred on the
telephone line.

"Functional problem The power was turned off Even if you turn on the power
occurred. Stopped while the machine was immediately, depending on the mail
processing." receiving a document by server, the machine might not be able
Internet Fax. to resume receiving the Internet Fax if
the timeout period has not expired.
Wait until the mail server's timeout
period has expired, and then resume
receiving the Internet Fax. For details
about receiving the Internet Fax,
contact your administrator.

"Functional problems with There is a problem with the Record the code number shown on the
facsimile. Data will be fax. screen, and then contact your service
initialized." representative. Other functions can be
used.

"Memory is full. Cannot The memory is full. If you press [Exit], the machine returns
scan more. Transmission will to standby mode and starts transmitting
be stopped." the stored pages.
Check the pages that have not been
sent using the Communication Result
Report, and then resend those pages.

"Put original back, check it Original jammed during Press [Exit], and then send the
and press the Start key." Memory Transmission. documents again.

175
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Some page(s) are near The first page of the The original's blank side might have
blank." document is almost blank. been scanned. Be sure to place your
originals correctly. For details about
determining the cause of blank pages,
see "Detecting Blank Pages", Fax.

• Settings that can be confirmed in System Settings or Fax Features on the control panel can also be
confirmed from Web Image Monitor. For details about how to confirm the settings from Web
Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• If the paper tray runs out of paper, "There is no paper. Load paper." appears on the screen,
prompting you to add paper. If there is paper left in the other trays, you can receive documents as
usual, even if the message appears on the screen. You can turn this function on or off with
"Parameter Settings". For details about how to do this, see "Parameter Settings", Fax.

When Network Setting Problems Occur

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are The alias telephone number • Check that the correct alias phone
any network problems." you entered is already number is listed in [H.323
[13-10] registered on the gatekeeper Settings] of [Fax Features]. For
by another device. details about H.323 Settings, see
"Initial Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are Cannot access gatekeeper. • Check that the correct gate
any network problems." keeper address is listed in [H.323
[13-11] Settings] of [Fax Features]. For
details about H.323 Settings, see
"Initial Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

176
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are User name registration is • Correct that the correct SIP Server
any network problems." refused by SIP server. IP Address and SIP User Name
[13-17] are listed in [SIP Settings] of [Fax
Features]. For details about SIP
Settings, see "Initial Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are Cannot access SIP server. • Check that the correct SIP Server
any network problems." IP Address is listed in [SIP
[13-18] Settings] of [Fax Features]. For
details about SIP Settings, see
"Initial Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are The password registered for For details about network problems,
any network problems." the SIP server is not the same contact your administrator.
[13-24] as the password registered
for this machine.

"Check whether there are In [Effective Protocol], the IP • Check that IPv4 in [Effective
any network problems." address is not enabled, or an Protocol] is set to "Active" in
[13-25] incorrect IP address has been [System Settings]. For details
registered. about effective protocol, see
"Interface Settings", Connecting
the Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the correct IPv4
address is specified for the
machine in [System Settings]. For
details about IPv4 address, see
"Interface Settings", Connecting
the Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

177
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are The "Effective Protocol" and • Check that the correct IP address
any network problems." "SIP Server IP Address" is specified for the machine in
[13-26] settings are different, or an [System Settings]. For details
incorrect IP address has been about IP address, see "Interface
registered. Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are The DNS server, SMTP • Check that the following settings
any network problems." server, or folder specified for in [System Settings] are listed
[14-01] transfer to was not found, or correctly.
the destination for Internet • DNS server
Fax around (not through) the
• Server name and IP address
SMTP server could not be
for the SMTP Server
found.
For details about these settings,
see "Interface Settings" or "File
Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the folder for transfer is
correctly specified.
• Check that the computer in which
the folder for transfer is specified
is correctly operated.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about network
problems, contact the
administrator of the destinations.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

178
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are E-mail transmission was • Check that User Name and
any network problems." rejected by SMTP Password for the following
[14-09] authentication, POP before settings in [System Settings] are
SMTP authentication, or login listed correctly.
authentication of the • SMTP Authentication
computer in which the folder
• POP before SMTP
for transfer is specified.
• Fax Email Account
For details about these settings,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the user ID and
password for the computer with
the folder for forwarding are
correctly specified.
• Check that the folder for
forwarding is correctly specified.
• Confirm that the computer with the
folder for forwarding is properly
working.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are E-mail addresses for the • Check that the correct e-mail
any network problems." machine and the Address is listed in [Fax Email
[14-33] administrator are not Account] of [System Settings]. For
registered. details about Fax Email Account,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

179
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are No POP3/IMAP4 server • Check that the correct Server
any network problems." address is registered. Name or Server Address is listed
[15-01] in [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings] of
[System Settings]. For details
about POP3 / IMAP4 Settings,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are Cannot log in to the POP3/ • Check that the correct User Name
any network problems." IMAP4 server. and Password are listed in [Fax
[15-02] Email Account] of [System
Settings]. For details about Fax
Email Account, see "File Transfer",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are No machine e-mail address • Check that the correct machine e-
any network problems." is specified. mail address is specified in
[15-03] [System Settings]. For details
about settings of e-mail address,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

180
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are Cannot find the DNS server • Check that the following settings
any network problems." or POP3/IMAP4 server. in [System Settings] are listed
[15-11] correctly.
• IP address of the DNS
Server
• the server name or IP
address of the POP3/
IMAP4 server
• the port number of the
POP3/IMAP4 server
• Reception Protocol
For details about these settings,
see "Interface Settings" or "File
Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are Cannot log in to the POP3/ • Check that the following settings
any network problems." IMAP4 server. in [System Settings] are listed
[15-12] correctly.
• the user name and password
for [Fax Email Account]
• the user name and password
for POP before SMTP
authentication
For details about these settings,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

181
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are • An IP address has not • Check that the correct IP address
any network problems." been registered for the is specified for the machine in
[16-00] main machine. [System Settings]. For details
• A network is not about the IP address of the main
connected properly. machine, contact your
administrator.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

• Settings that can be confirmed in System Settings or Fax Features on the control panel can also be
confirmed from Web Image Monitor. For details about how to confirm the settings from Web
Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• If the paper tray runs out of paper, "There is no paper. Load paper." appears on the screen,
prompting you to add paper. If there is paper left in the other trays, you can receive documents as
usual, even if the message appears on the screen. You can turn this function on or off with
"Parameter Settings". For details about how to do this, see "Parameter Settings", Fax.
• If "Check whether there are any network problems." appears, the machine is not correctly
connected to the network or the settings of the machine are not correct. If you do not need to
connect to a network, you can specify the setting so this message is not displayed, and then [Check
Status] no longer lights up. For details about how to do this, see "Parameter Settings", Fax. If you
reconnect the machine to the network, be sure to set "Display" by configuring the appropriate User
Parameter.

When the Remote Fax Function Cannot Be Used

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication with remote User authentication on the For details about user authentication,
machine failed. Check main machine has failed. see "Configuring User Authentication",
remote machine's auth. Security Guide.
settings."

"Authentication with remote User Code Authentication is The remote fax function does not
machine failed. Check set on the device connected support User Code Authentication.
remote machine's auth. via the remote fax function. Disable the User Code Authentication
settings." on the main machine.

182
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication with remote The user does not have For details about how to set
machine failed. Check permission to use the function permissions, see "Limiting Available
remote machine's auth. on the main machine. Functions", Security Guide.
settings."

"Connection with the remote A network error occurred • Check that the main machine
machine has failed. Check while you were using the supports the remote fax function.
the remote machine status." remote fax function. • Check that the main machine is
working normally.
• Check that the correct IP address
or host name is set for the main
machine in [System Settings]. For
details about these settings,
contact your administrator.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Connection with the remote The main machine's power is Turn on the main machine's power.
machine has failed. Check off.
the remote machine status."

"Connection with the remote A timeout error occurred • Check that the LAN cable is
machine has failed. Check while an attempt was made correctly connected to the
the remote machine status." to connect the device via machine.
remote fax function. • Check that the main machine is
working correctly.
• For details about connection with
main machine, see "Sending/
Receiving Documents Using a
Remote Machine (Remote Fax)",
Fax.

183
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Connection with the remote The settings or machine For details about the settings and
machine has failed. There is configurations for using the machine configurations for using the
a problem with the remote remote fax function to remote fax function to connect to a
machine structure. Contact connect to the main machine main machine, contact your
the administrator." are incorrect. administrator.

"Transfer error has occured. A network error occurred • Check that the correct IP address
Check the status of the during transfer. or host name is set for the main
remote machine." machine in [System Settings]. For
details about these settings,
contact your administrator.
• Check that the main machine is
working correctly.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about transmission,
contact your administrator.

"The HDD of the remote The hard disk became full Delete unnecessary files.
machine is full." after using the remote fax
function to scan an original.

184
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer


Function
This section describes the principal messages that appear on the display panel, error logs or reports. If
other messages appear, follow their instructions.

Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Printer Function

• Before turning off the power, see page 69 "Turning On/Off the Power".

Message Cause Solution

"Hardware Problem: An error has occurred in the Turn off the power, and then back on
Ethernet" Ethernet interface. again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

"Hardware Problem: HDD" An error has occurred in the Turn off the power, and then back on
hard disk. again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

"Hardware Problem: • The wireless LAN board Turn off the power, and then confirm
Wireless Card" has malfunctioned. the wireless LAN board is inserted
(A "wireless LAN board" or • The wireless LAN board correctly. And then, turn on the
"Bluetooth interface unit" is you are using is not power again. If the message
referred to as a "wireless compatible with this appears again, contact your service
card".) machine. representative.

"Hardware Problem: • The Bluetooth interface Turn off the power, and then confirm
Wireless Card" unit was connected while the Bluetooth interface unit is inserted
(A "wireless LAN board" or the machine was turned correctly. And then, turn on the
"Bluetooth interface unit" is on. power again. If the message
referred to as a "wireless • The Bluetooth interface appears again, contact your service
card".) unit was removed while representative.
the machine was turned
on.

185
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Load following paper in n. The printer driver settings are Check that the printer driver settings
To force print, select incorrect or the tray does not are correct, and then load paper of
another tray and press contain paper of the size the size selected in the printer driver
[Continue]." selected in the printer driver. into the input tray. For details about
("n" is replaced by a how to change the paper size, see
variable.) "Changing the Paper Size", Paper
Specifications and Adding Paper.

"Paper size and type are The printer driver settings are • Check that the printer driver
mismatched. Select another incorrect or the tray does not settings are correct, and then
tray from the following and contain paper of the size or load paper of the size selected
press [Continue]. To cancel type selected in the printer in the printer driver into the
job, press [Job Reset]. driver. input tray. For details about
Paper size and type can how to change the paper size,
also be changed in User see "Changing the Paper Size",
Tools." Paper Specifications and
Adding Paper.
• Select the tray manually to
continue printing, or cancel a
print job. For details about how
to select the tray manually, or
cancel a print job, see "If an
Error Occurs with the Specified
Paper Size and Type", Print.

"Paper type of n is The type of the paper in the tray Select a tray containing paper that is
mismatched. Select another does not match the paper type the same type as the specified paper
tray from the following and specified in the printer driver. type.
press [Continue]. Paper
type can also be changed
in User Tools."
(A tray name is placed at
n.)

"Printer font error." An error has occurred in the Contact your service representative.
font settings.

186
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

When using direct print from a memory storage device

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded the limit value for • The size of the selected Files or groups of files larger than 1 GB
total data size of the file exceeds 1 GB. cannot be printed.
selected files. Cannot select • The total size of the • When the total size of the multiple
more files." selected files exceeds 1 files that are selected exceeds 1
GB. GB, select files separately.
• When the size of the selected file
exceeds 1 GB, print from a
memory storage device using a
function other than the Direct
printing function.
You cannot select files of different
formats at the same time.

"Unable to access the • An error occurred Save the file to a different memory
specified memory storage when the machine storage device, and then print again.
device." accessed the memory
storage device or a file
stored on the memory
storage device.
• An error occurred
when the user used the
Direct printing function
to print from a memory
storage device.

Messages Printed on the Error Logs or Reports When You Use the Printer
Function

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that are printed on
the error logs or reports.

187
10. Troubleshooting

When print jobs are canceled

Message Cause Solution

"91: Error" Printing was canceled by the Check that the data is valid.
auto job cancel function due
to a command error.

"A job via the network that Jobs with errors were stored Contact your administrator to check
was not printed exists because an error occurred whether the machine is connected
because an error occurred. with a print job via the correctly to the network. For details
It was stored as a job not network while the error job about how to check and print jobs
printed." storing function was stored when print configuration errors
enabled. occur, see "Printing of Documents
Stored When Print Configuration Errors
Occur", Print.

"An error occurred while You tried to store a file in the On the printer driver, select a job type
processing an Unauthorized Document Server when the other than [Document Server] in "Job
Copy Prevention job. The [Unauthorized Copy Type:" or deselect [Unauthorized Copy
job was cancelled." Prevention] was specified. Prevention].

"An error occurred while The [Enter User Text:] field On the printer driver's [Detailed
processing an Unauthorized on the [Unauthorized Copy Settings] tab, click [Effects] in "Menu:".
Copy Prevention job. The Prevention for Pattern Select [Unauthorized Copy
job was cancelled." Details] screen is blank. Prevention], and then click [Details...]
to display [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention for Pattern Details]. Enter
text in [Enter User Text:].

"An error occurred while The resolution is set to a On the printer driver, set the resolution
processing an Unauthorized value less than 600 dpi to 600 dpi or higher, or cancel
Copy Prevention job. The when [Unauthorized Copy [Unauthorized Copy Prevention].
job was cancelled." Prevention] is specified.

"An error occurred while In [Administrator Tools] Cancel Unauthorized Copy Prevention
processing an Unauthorized under [System Settings], Printing for the printer driver. For details
Copy Prevention job. The priority was specified to be about how to cancel the settings, see
job was cancelled." given to Unauthorized Copy the printer driver Help.
Prevention Printing set on this
machine.

"Collate has been Collate was canceled. Turn off the power, and then back on
cancelled." again. If the message appears again,
contact your service representative.

188
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"You reach the usage limit. The number of pages the For details about print volume use
This job has been user is permitted to print has limitation, see "Managing Print Volume
cancelled." been exceeded. per User", Security Guide.

"Receiving data failed." Data reception was aborted. Resend the data.

"Sending data failed." The machine received a Check if the computer is working
command to stop correctly.
transmission from the printer
driver.

"The selected paper size is Job reset is automatically Specify the correct paper size, and
not supported. This job has performed if the specified then print the file again.
been cancelled." paper size is incorrect.

"The selected paper type is Job reset is automatically Specify the correct paper type, and
not supported. This job has performed if the specified then print the file again.
been cancelled." paper type is incorrect.

When there is a problem with the print settings

Message Cause Solution

"Classification Code is The classification code has not Enter the correct classification
incorrect." been entered, or the code.
classification code has been
entered incorrectly.

"Classification Code is The classification code is not Select [Optional] for


incorrect." supported with the printer classification code. For details
driver. about how to specify
classification code settings, see
"Configuring Classification
Codes", Print.

189
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Duplex has been cancelled." Duplex printing was canceled. Change the setting for "Apply
Duplex" in [Tray Paper Settings]
to enable duplex printing for the
paper tray. For details about
setting "Apply Duplex", see
"Tray Paper Settings",
Connecting the Machine/
System Settings.

"Exceeded max. pages. Collate The number of pages exceeds Reduce the number of pages to
is incomplete." the maximum number of sheets print.
that you can use Collate with.

"Output tray has been The output tray was changed Specify the proper output tray.
changed." because the paper size of the
specified output tray is limited.

"Print overrun." Images were discarded while Select a lower resolution on the
printing. printer driver. For details about
how to change the resolution
setting, see the printer driver
Help.

When documents cannot be stored in the Document Server

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot store data of this The paper size exceeded Reduce the paper size of the file that
size." the capacity of the you want to send to a size that the
Document Server. Document Server can store. Custom
size files can be sent but not stored
afterward.

"Document Server is not You cannot use the For details about using Document
available to use. Cannot Document Server function. Server function, contact your
store." administrator.
For details about how to set
permissions, see "Limiting Available
Functions", Security Guide.

190
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. capacity of The hard disk became full Delete some of the files stored in the
Document Server. Cannot after a file was stored. Document Server or reduce the size
store." that you want to send.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum file capacity Delete some of the files stored in the
files of Document Server. of the Document Server was Document Server.
Cannot store." exceeded.

"Exceeded max. number of While you were using the Delete Hold Print files (automatic) or
files. (Auto)" error job store function to unneeded files stored on the machine.
store Normal Print jobs as
Hold Print files, the maximum
file capacity for file storage
or Hold Print file
management (automatic)
was exceeded.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum page Delete some of the files stored in the
pages of Document Server. capacity of the Document Document Server or reduce the number
Cannot store." Server was exceeded. of pages that you want to send.

"Exceeded max. number of While you were using the Delete unneeded files stored on the
pages. (Auto)" error job store function to machine.
store Normal Print jobs as Reduce the number of pages to print.
Hold Print files, the maximum
page capacity was
exceeded.

"The print job has been The hard disk became full Delete the files stored in the Document
cancelled because capture after a file was stored. Server or reduce the file size to be sent.
file(s) could not be stored:
Exceeded max. memory."

"The print job has been The maximum file capacity Delete the files stored in the Document
cancelled because capture of the Document Server was Server.
file(s) could not be stored: exceeded.
Exceeded max. number of
files."

191
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"The print job has been The maximum page Delete some of the files stored in the
cancelled because capture capacity of the Document Document Server or reduce the number
file(s) could not be stored: Server was exceeded. of pages that you want to send.
Exceeded max. number of
pages per file."

"The specified folder in The specified folder is Unlock the folder or specify another
Document Server is locked. locked. folder number that can be used. For
Cannot store." details about locked folders, see
"Managing Folders", Security Guide.

When there is not enough free hard disk space

Message Cause Solution

"HDD is full." When you were printing Delete unneeded forms or fonts
with the PostScript 3 printer registered on the machine.
driver, the hard disk
capacity for fonts and forms
was exceeded.

"HDD is full." The hard disk became full Delete unneeded files stored on the
while you were printing a machine.
Sample Print, Locked Print, Alternatively, reduce the data size of
Hold Print, or Stored Print the Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold
file. Print, or Stored Print file.

"HDD is full. (Auto)" The hard disk became full Delete unneeded files stored on the
while you were using the machine.
error job store function to Alternatively, reduce the data size of
store Normal Print jobs as the Temporary Print file and/or the
Hold Print files. Stored Print file.

192
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

When there is not enough memory

Message Cause Solution

"84: Error" There is no work area Decrease the number of files sent to the
available for image machine.
processing.

When there is a problem with a parameter

Message Cause Solution

"86: Error" Parameters of the control Check the print settings.


code are invalid.

When the user lacks privileges to perform an operation

Message Cause Solution

"No response from the A timeout occurred while Check the status of the server.
server. Authentication has connection to the server was
failed." being established for LDAP
authentication or Windows
Authentication.

"Printing privileges have not You have no privileges to Contact the owner of the document.
been set for this document." print the PDF document you
tried to print.

"You do not have a privilege The entered login user name Check that the user name and
to use this function. This job or login password is not password are correct.
has been cancelled." correct.

"You do not have a privilege The logged in user is not For details about how to set
to use this function. This job allowed to use the selected permissions, see "Configuring User
has been cancelled." function. Authentication", Security Guide.

"You do not have a privilege The logged in user does not For details about how to set
to use this function. This have the privileges to permissions, see "Configuring User
operation has been register programs or change Authentication", Security Guide.
cancelled." the paper tray settings.

193
10. Troubleshooting

When a user cannot be registered

Message Cause Solution

"Auto-registration of user Automatic registration of For details about automatic registration


information has failed." information for LDAP of user information, see "Auto
Authentication or Windows Registration to the Address Book",
Authentication failed Security Guide.
because the Address Book is
full.

"Information for user The user name for LDAP was For details about user authentication,
authentication is already already registered in a see "Configuring User Authentication",
registered for another user." different server with a Security Guide.
different ID, and a
duplication of the user name
occurred due to a switching
of domains (servers), and so
on.

When other errors occur

Message Cause Solution

"85: Error" The specified graphics Check that the data is valid.
library is unavailable.

"98: Error" The machine could not Turn off the power, and then back on
access the hard disk again. If the message appears
correctly. frequently, contact your service
representative.

"99: Error" This data cannot be printed. Check that the data is valid. For details
The specified data is either about the kinds of data that can be
corrupt or it cannot be printed from a memory storage device
printed from a memory using the Direct printing function, see
storage device using the "Direct Printing from a Memory
Direct printing function. Storage Device", Print.

194
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"Command Error" An RPCS command error Check using the following procedure:
occurred. • Check if the communication
between the computer and the
machine is working correctly.
• Check if the correct printer driver
is being used.
• Check if the machine's memory
size is set correctly in the printer
driver.
• Check that the printer driver is the
most up-to-date version available.

"Compressed Data Error." The printer detected corrupt • Check the connection between
compressed data. the computer and the printer.
• Check that the program you used
to compress the data is
functioning correctly.

"Data storage error." You tried to print a Sample Contact your service representative.
Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, or Stored Print file, or
to store a file in the
Document Server when the
hard disk was
malfunctioning.

"Error has occurred." A syntax error, etc., Check that the PDF file is valid.
occurred.

"Exceeded Max. Stored While printing a Sample Delete unneeded files stored on the
Files" Print, Locked Print, Hold machine.
Print, or Stored Print file, the
maximum file capacity was
exceeded.

"Exceeded Max. Stored While printing a Sample Delete unneeded files stored on the
Pages" Print, Locked Print, Hold machine.
Print, or Stored Print file, the Reduce the number of pages to print.
maximum page capacity
was exceeded.

195
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Failed to obtain file system." PDF direct printing could not Turn off the power, and then back on
be performed because the again. If the message appears again,
file system could not be contact your service representative.
obtained.

"File system is full." PDF file does not print out Delete all unnecessary files from the
because the capacity of the hard disk, or decrease the file size sent
file system is full. to the machine.

"I/O buffer overflow." An input buffer overflow • In [Printer Features], under [Host
occurred. Interface], select [I/O Buffer],
and then set the maximum buffer
size to a larger value.
• Reduce the number of files being
sent to the machine.

"Insufficient Memory" A memory allocation error PCL 6


occurred. On the printer driver's [Detailed
Settings] tab, click [Print
Quality:Advanced] in "Menu:",
and then select [Raster] in the
"Vector/Raster:" list. In some
cases, it will take a long time to
complete a print job.

"Memory Retrieval Error" A memory allocation error Turn off the power and then back on
occurred. again. If the message appears again,
replace the RAM. For details about
replacing the RAM, contact your
service representative.

If printing does not start, contact your service representative.

• The contents of errors may be printed on the Configuration Page. Check the Configuration Page in
conjunction with the error log. For details about how to print the Configuration Page, see "List / Test
Print", Print.

196
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Messages Displayed When You Use the


Scanner Function
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Scanner Function

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that appear on the
control panel. If a message not described here appears, act according to the message.

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot find the specified The destination computer Check whether the computer name and
path. Please check the name or folder name is the folder name for the destination are
settings." invalid. correct.

"Cannot find the specified An antivirus program or a • Antivirus programs and firewalls
path. Please check the firewall is preventing the can prevent client computers from
settings." machine from connecting to establishing connection with this
your computer. machine.
• If you are using antivirus software,
add the program to the exclusion
list in the application settings. For
details about how to add
programs to the exclusion list, see
the antivirus software Help.
• To prevent a firewall from
blocking the connection, register
the machine's IP address in the
firewall's IP address exclusion
settings. For details about the
procedure for excluding an IP
address, see your operating
system's Help.

"Entered user code is not You have entered an Check the authentication settings, and
correct. Please re-enter." incorrect user code. then enter a correct user code.

197
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum number of Check the maximum number of
alphanumeric characters for specifiable alphanumeric characters which can be entered, and
the path." characters in a path has then enter it again. For details about
been exceeded. the maximum enterable number of
characters, see "Values of Various Set
Items for Transmission/Storage
Function", Scan.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum enterable Check the maximum number of
alphanumeric characters." number of alphanumeric characters which can be entered, and
characters has been then enter it again. For details about
exceeded. the maximum enterable number of
characters, see "Values of Various Set
Items for Transmission/Storage
Function", Scan.

"Exceeded the maximum The maximum allowable Up to 100 jobs can be placed on
number of OCR jobs that number of jobs on standby standby by the OCR function. Scan the
can be on standby for was exceeded because next document after the current jobs
storing, please wait. Try large quantities of have finished being stored.
again after storing of the documents were stored by
current job has completed." the OCR function.

"File types have been If there are selected stored For details about the file formats used
automatically set for some documents which cannot be to transmit stored documents, see
files because multiple files converted to a specified file "Sending a Stored File", Scan.
were selected." format, those documents are
automatically converted to a
convertible format before
they are transmitted.

"Programmed. Cannot The destinations that were WSD destinations and DSM
program the destination(s) selected while registered to destinations cannot be registered to the
that is not programmed in the program contain a folder program because they cannot be
the address book." destination for which one of registered in the address book. For
the following destinations is manually entered destinations, register
set: the destinations in the address book,
manually entered and then try to register them to the
destination, WSD program again.
destination, or DSM
destination

198
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Scanner journal is full." "Print & Delete Scanner Print or delete Scanner Journal. For
"Please check Scanner Journal" in [Scanner details about Scanner Features, see
Features." Features] is set to [Do not "General Settings", Scan.
Print: Disable Send], and
Scanner Journal is full.

"The entered file name The file name contains a • Check the file name set at the time
contains invalid character(s). character that cannot be of scanning. For details about
Enter the file name again used. characters that can be used in file
using any of the following 1 names, see "Specifying the File
byte characters. "0 to 9", "A Name", Scan.
to Z", "a to z", ". - _"" • Check the file name specified at
the time of scanning. The file
name specified in the Sending
Scan Files to Folders function
cannot contain the following
characters:
\/:*?"<>|
The file name cannot start or end
with a period ".".

"The program is recalled. The currently logged-in user For details about how to set
Cannot recall the does not have permission to permissions, see "Limiting Available
destination(s) for which view the destination that was Functions", Security Guide.
access privileges are registered in the program.
required."

"The program is recalled. The destination stored in the Enter the destination directly to send
Cannot recall the program could not be data separately.
destination(s) that is deleted recalled because it was
from the address book." deleted from the address
book.

"The program is recalled. The folder destinations for A destination for which the protection
Cannot recall the folder which the protection code code is set cannot be recalled by the
destination(s) with protection was set were registered in program. Cancel the protection code
code(s)." the program. setting or send scanned files to the
destination separately.

199
10. Troubleshooting

When documents cannot be scanned properly

Message Cause Solution

"All the pages are detected No PDF file was created Check whether the original is set
as blank. No file was because all the pages of the upside down.
created." scanned original were Change [OCR Scanned PDF: Blank
detected as blank when Page Sensitivity] in [Scanner Features]
[On] is specified for [Delete to "Sensitivity Level 1".
Blank Page] in [OCR
Settings].

"Check original's Originals may sometimes not Change the orientation of the original,
orientation." be scanned depending on a and then scan the original again.
combination of items such as
the specified scaling factor
and document size.

"Exceeded max. data The scanned data exceeded Specify the scan size and resolution
capacity." maximum data capacity. again. Note that it may not be possible
"Check scanning resolution, to scan very large originals at a high
then press Start key again." resolution. For details about the settings
for the scanner function, see
"Relationship between Resolution and
Scan Size", Scan.

"Exceeded max. data The scanned original Specify the scan size and resolution
capacity." exceeded maximum data again. Note that it may not be possible
"Check the scanning capacity. to scan very large originals at a high
resolution, then reset n resolution. For details about the settings
original(s)." for the scanner function, see
"Relationship between Resolution and
("n" in the message
Scan Size", Scan.
represents a variable.)

"Exceeded max. data The data being scanned is Reduce the resolution or [Specify Size]
capacity." too large for the scale ratio value, and then scan the original
"Check the resolution and specified in [Specify Size]. again.
the ratio and then press the
Start key again."

200
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum number of Check the files stored by the other
files which can be used in files that can be stored in the functions, and then delete unneeded
Document Server at the Document Server has been files. For details about how to delete
same time." exceeded. files, see "Deleting Stored Documents",
Copy/ Document Server.

"Not all of the image will be If the scaling factor specified Reduce the scaling factor in "Specify
scanned." in "Specify Reproduction Reproduction Ratio", and then try to
"Check the ratio and then Ratio" is too large, part of scan the original again.
press the Start key again." the image may be lost. If displaying the entire image is not
necessary, press [Start] to start
scanning with the current scaling
factor.

"Not all of the image will be Using "Specify Reproduction Specify a large size in [Specify Size],
scanned." Ratio" to scale down a large and then scan the original again.
"Check the ratio and then document may cause part of If displaying the entire image is not
press the Start key again." the image to be lost. necessary, press [Start] to start
scanning with the current scaling
factor.

"The size of the scanned The data being scanned is Specify a higher resolution or a large
data is too small." too small for the scale ratio size in [Specify Size], and then scan
"Check the resolution and specified in [Specify Size]. the original again.
the ratio and then press the
Start key again."

201
10. Troubleshooting

When documents cannot be scanned because the memory is full

Message Cause Solution

"Memory is full. Cannot Because of insufficient hard Try one of the following measures:
scan. The scanned data will disk space, the first page • Wait for a while, and then retry
be deleted." could not be scanned. the scan operation.
• Reduce the scan area or scanning
resolution. For details about
changing scan area and scanning
resolution, see "Scan Settings" of
Various Scan Settings, Scan.
• Delete unneeded stored files. For
details about how to delete stored
files, see "Deleting a Stored File",
Scan.

"Memory is full. Do you Because there is not enough Specify whether or not to use the data.
want to store scanned file?" free hard disk space in the
machine for storing in the
Document Server, only some
of the pages could be
scanned.

"Memory is full. Scanning Because there is not enough Specify whether or not to use the data.
has been cancelled. Press free hard disk space in the
[Send] to send the scanned machine for sending by e-
data, or press [Cancel] to mail while data is being
delete." stored in the Document
Server, only some of the
pages could be scanned.

202
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

When data transmission fails

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication with the The entered user name or • Check that the user name and
destination has failed. Check password was invalid. password are correct.
settings. To check the current • Check that the ID and password
status, press [Scanned Files for the destination folder are
Status]." correct.
• A password of 128 or more
characters may not be
recognized.

"Exceeded max. email size. The file size per page has Change the scanner features settings
Sending email has been reached the maximum e- as follows:
cancelled. Check [Max. mail size specified in • Increase the e-mail size limit in
Email Size] in Scanner [Scanner Features]. [Max. Email Size].
Features."
• Change the [Divide & Send
Email] setting to [Yes (per Page)]
or [Yes (per Max. Size)]. For
details about these settings, see
"Send Settings", Scan.

"Sending the data has A network error has Wait until sending is retried
failed. The data will be occurred and a file was not automatically after the preset interval. If
resent later." sent correctly. sending fails again, contact your
administrator.

"Transmission has failed. Transmission has failed. Allocate sufficient space.


Insufficient memory in the There was not enough free
destination hard disk. To space on the hard disk of the
check the current status, SMTP server, FTP server, or
press [Scanned Files client computer at the
Status]." destination.

"Transmission has failed. To While a file was being sent, If the same message appears again
check the current status, a network error occurred after scanning again, the cause could
press [Scanned Files and the file could not be sent be a mixed network, or network
Status]." correctly. settings were changed during WSD
scanner transmission. For details about
network error, contact your
administrator.

203
10. Troubleshooting

When data cannot be sent because a currently used file is selected

Message Cause Solution

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
use. File name cannot be name of a file whose status cleared), and then change the file
changed." is "Waiting...". name.

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
use. Password cannot be password of a file whose cleared), and then change the
changed." status is "Waiting...". password.

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
use. User name cannot be sender's name whose status cleared), and then change the user
changed." is "Waiting...". name.

"Some of selected files are You cannot delete a file Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
currently in use. They could which is waiting to be cleared), and then delete the file.
not be deleted." transmitted ("Waiting..."
status displayed).

When data cannot be sent because there are too many documents or pages

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. number of The file being stored has Specify whether to store the data or
pages per file. Do you want exceeded the maximum not. Scan the pages that were not
to store the scanned pages number of pages for one file. scanned, and then store them as a new
as 1 file?" file. For details about storing files, see
"Storing and Saving the Scanned
Documents", Scan.

"Exceeded max. number of Too many files are waiting to Try again after they have been sent.
stored files. Cannot send the be sent.
scanned data as capturing
files is unavailable."

"Exceeded max. page The number of scanned Specify whether to send the data that
capacity per file. Press pages exceeded the has already been scanned.
[Send] to send the scanned maximum page capacity.
data, or press [Cancel] to
delete."

204
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded maximum Too many files are waiting to Try again after they have been sent.
number of file to store. be sent.
Delete all unnecessary files."

When the WSD scanner function cannot be used

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot communicate with WSD (Device) protocol or For details about how to enable or
PC. Contact the WSD (Scanner) protocol is disable the WSD protocol, see
administrator." disabled. "Enabling and Disabling Protocols",
Security Guide.

"Cannot start scanning Scan Profile is not set on the Set Scan Profile. For details about how
because communication was client computer. to do this, see "Creating a New Scan
failed." Profile", Scan.

"Cannot start scanning The [Take no action] setting Open scanner properties, click the
because communication was has been selected on the [Events] tab, and then select [Start this
failed." client computer, forcing the program] as the computer's response
client computer to remain when it receives scan data. For details,
inactive when it receives see your operating system's Help.
scan data.

"Cannot start scanning. The Scan Profile might be Check the Scan Profile configuration.
Check the setting(s) on the incorrectly configured.
PC."

205
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Could not send the data A time out occurred when • Reduce the number of originals,
because the PC timed out WSD Scanner was used. and then scan again.
before it was sent." Time outs occur when too • Remove any misfed original, and
much time passes between then scan again.
scanning an original and
• Use Scanner Journal to check
sending its data. The
there are no jobs awaiting
followings are likely causes
transmission, and then scan
of time outs:
again.
• Too many originals per
set.
• Misfed originals.
• Transmission of other
jobs.

When documents cannot be stored on a memory storage device

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot write on the The memory storage device • Replace the memory storage
memory storage device is full and scan data cannot device.
because remaining free be saved. Even if the • If the document is scanned as
space is insufficient." memory storage device single-page or divided into
appears to have sufficient multiple pages, data already
free space, data might not written to the memory storage
be saved if the maximum device is saved as is. Replace the
number of files that can be memory storage device, and then
saved is exceeded. press [Retry] to save the
remaining data, or press [Cancel]
to redo the scan.

"Cannot write on the The memory storage device Unlock the write-protection on the
memory storage device is write-protected. memory storage device.
because the device is write-
protected."

206
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot write on the The memory storage device • Check to see if the memory
memory storage device. is faulty, or the file name storage device is defective.
Check the memory storage contains a character that • Check the memory storage
device and machine cannot be used. device. It might be unformatted,
settings." or its format might be
incompatible with this machine.
• Check the file name set at the time
of scanning. For details about the
characters that can be used in file
names, see "Specifying the File
Name", Scan.

"Exceeded max. page The scan could not be Reduce the number of documents to be
capacity per file. Press completed because the written to the memory storage device,
[Write] to write the scanned maximum number of pages and then try again.
data to the memory storage that can be scanned by this
device, or press [Cancel] to machine was exceeded
delete." during the scanned data
was written to the memory
storage device.

"Memory is full. Press [Write] The scan could not be Specify whether or not to save the
to write the current scanned completed because there scanned document to the memory
data to the memory storage was insufficient hard disk storage device.
device, or press [Cancel] to memory when the scanned
delete." data was saved to the
memory storage device.

Messages Displayed on the Client Computer

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the main error messages displayed on
the client computer when you use the TWAIN driver. If a message not described here appears, follow
the instruction.

207
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Any of Login User Name, The entered login user Check your login user name, login
Login Password or Driver name, password, or driver password, or driver encryption key,
Encryption Key is incorrect." encryption key was invalid. and then enter them correctly. For
details about login user name, login
password, and driver encryption key,
see "Basic Authentication" or
"Encrypting Transmitted Passwords",
Security Guide.

"Authentication succeeded. The logged in user name For details about how to set
However, the access does not have permissions permissions, see "Limiting Available
privileges for scanner for scanner function. Functions", Security Guide.
function has been denied."

"Cannot add any more The maximum number of The maximum number of modes that
scanning mode." registrable scan modes has can be stored is 100. Delete unneeded
been exceeded. modes.

"Cannot specify any more The maximum number of The maximum number of scanning
scanning area." registrable scan modes has areas that can be stored is 100. Delete
been exceeded. unneeded scanning areas.

"Clear Misfeed(s) in ADF." A paper misfeed has • Remove the jammed originals,
occurred inside the ADF. and then insert them again. For
details about jammed paper, see
"Removing Jammed Paper",
Troubleshooting.
• When a misfeed occurs, replace
the jammed originals.
• Check whether the originals are
suitable to be scanned by the
machine.

208
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Error has occurred in the An error has occurred in the • Check whether the network cable
scanner driver." driver. is connected correctly to the client
computer.
• Check whether the Ethernet board
of the client computer is
recognized correctly by
Windows.
• Check whether the client
computer can use the TCP/IP
protocol.

"Error has occurred in the The application-specified Check whether the scanning settings
scanner." scan conditions have made with the application exceed the
exceeded the setting range setting range of the machine.
of the machine.

"Fatal error has occurred in An unrecoverable machine An unrecoverable machine error has
the scanner." error has occurred. occurred. Contact your service
representative.

"Insufficient memory. Close Memory is insufficient. • Close all the unnecessary


all other applications, then applications running on the client
restart scanning." computer.
• Uninstall the TWAIN driver, and
then reinstall it after restarting the
computer.

209
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Insufficient memory. Reduce Scanner memory is • Reset the scan size.


the scanning area." insufficient. • Lower the resolution.
• Set with no compression. For
details about the settings, see
TWAIN driver Help.
The problem may be due to the
following:
• Scanning cannot be performed if
large values are set for brightness
when halftone or high resolution is
used. For details about the
relationship between scan
settings, see "Relationship
between Resolution and Scan
Size", Scan.
• If a misfeed occurs, you might not
scan an original. Remove the
misfeed, and then scan the
original again.

"Invalid Winsock version. You are using an invalid Install the operating system of the
Please use version 1.1 or version of Winsock. computer or copy Winsock from the
higher." operating system CD-ROM.

"No response from the The machine or client • Check whether the machine or
scanner." computer is not connected to client computer is connected to
the network correctly. the network correctly.
• Disable the client computer's own
firewall. For details about firewall,
see Windows Help.

"No response from the The network is crowded. Wait for a while, and then connect to
scanner." the network again.

210
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Scanner is in use for other A function of the machine • Wait for a while, and then
function. Please wait." other than the Scanner connect to the network again.
function is being used such • Cancel the job that is being
as the Copier function. processed. Press [Stop]. Follow
the instructions in the message that
appears and exit the function that
is running.

"Scanner is not available on The TWAIN scanner function Contact your service representative.
the specified device." cannot be used on this
machine.

"Scanner is not ready. The ADF cover is open. Check whether the ADF cover is
Check the scanner and the closed.
options."

"The name is already in use. You tried to register a name Use another name.
Check the registered that is already in use.
names."

When there is a problem connecting to the scanner

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot connect to the An access mask is set. For details about an access mask,
scanner. Check the network contact your administrator.
Access Mask settings in User
Tools."

"Cannot find "XXX" scanner The main power of the Check whether the main power of the
used for the previous scan. previously used scanner is scanner used for the previous scan is
"YYY" will be used instead." not set to "On". turned on.
("XXX" and "YYY" indicate
scanner names.)

211
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot find "XXX" scanner The machine is not • Check that the previously used
used for the previous scan. connected to the network scanner is connected to the
"YYY" will be used instead." correctly. network correctly.
("XXX" and "YYY" indicate • Cancel the personal firewall of
scanner names.) the client computer. For details
about firewall, see Windows
Help.
• Use an application such as telnet
to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine's
protocol. For details about how to
check this, see "Remote
Maintenance Using telnet",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
• Select the scanner used for the
previous scan.

"Communication error has A communication error has Check whether the client computer can
occurred on the network." occurred on the network. use the TCP/IP protocol.

"Scanner is not available. The machine's power is off. Turn on the power.
Check the scanner
connection status."

"Scanner is not available. The machine is not • Check whether the machine is
Check the scanner connected to the network connected to the network
connection status." correctly. correctly.
• Cancel the personal firewall
function of the client computer.
For details about firewall, see
Windows Help.
• Use an application such as telnet
to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine's
protocol. For details about how to
check this, see "Remote
Maintenance Using telnet",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.

212
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Scanner is not available. Network communication is • Check whether the machine's host
Check the scanner not available because the name is specified in the Network
connection status." machine's IP address could Connection Tool. For the WIA
not be obtained from the driver, check the [Network
host name. If only "IPv6" is Connection] tab in the properties.
set to [Active], the IPv6 • Use Web Image Monitor to set
address might not be "LLMNR" of "IPv6" to [Active].
obtained.

213
10. Troubleshooting

When Other Messages Appear


Message Cause Solution

"Firmware update will start. Automatic firmware update • If you want to start the firmware
Press [OK]. It will start is activated and it is time for update, press [OK], or let it start
automatically after 30 an automatic update. automatically after 30 seconds.
seconds have elapsed." • If you do not want to start the
firmware update, press [Cancel]
before 30 seconds have elapsed.
• Do not turn off the power switch
during the firmware update.

"Cannot connect with the • The wireless LAN Turn off the power, and then check the
wireless card. Turn the main board was not inserted wireless LAN board is inserted
power switch off, then check when the machine was correctly. After this, turn on the power
the card." turned on. again. If the message appears again,
(A "wireless LAN board" or • The wireless LAN contact your service representative.
"Bluetooth interface unit" is board was pulled out
referred to as a "wireless after the machine was
card".) turned on.
The settings are not updated
although the unit is detected.

"Cannot connect with the • The Bluetooth interface Turn off the power, and then confirm
Bluetooth interface. Check unit was installed while that the Bluetooth interface unit was
the Bluetooth interface." the machine was turned installed correctly. After this, turn on the
on. power again. If the message appears
• The Bluetooth interface again, contact your service
unit was removed while representative.
the machine was turned
on.

"Failed to read the PDF file." There is a possibility that the With this machine's browser PDF files
PDF version is not supported other than those whose versions and
by the browser's PDF viewer encryption levels are specified below
or an unsupported cannot be viewed.
encryption level is specified. • PDF version: 1.3-1.7
• PDF encryption level: 128Bit AES
or 256Bit AES

214
When Other Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Clean the scanning glass. The scanning glass or guide Clean the scanning glass or guide
(Located next to the plate of the ADF is dirty. plate. See "Maintaining Your
exposure glass.)" Machine", Maintenance and
Specifications.

"Internal cooling fan is Some print runs may cause The fan will emit noise, but this is
active." the machine's interior to heat normal and the machine will be
up, starting the cooling fan. operable while the fan is running.
The amount of paper that can be
printed and the total operation time
until the fan starts running depends on
the temperature of the location at
which the machine is installed.

"Self checking..." The machine is performing The machine may perform periodic
image adjustment maintenance during operations. The
operations. frequency and duration of
maintenance depends on the humidity,
temperature, and printing factors such
as number of prints, paper size, and
paper type. Wait for the machine to
resume operation.

When There Is a Problem Scanning or Storing Originals

Message Cause Solution

"Captured file exceeded The maximum number of Reduce the number of pages in the
max. number of pages per pages per file has been transmitted file, and then resend the
file. Cannot send the exceeded. file. For details about the maximum
scanned data." number of pages per file, see "Storage
Function", Scan.

"Original(s) is being Another function of the Cancel the job in progress. Press [Exit],
scanned for a different machine is being used. and then press [Stop]. Follow the
function." instructions in the message that
appears and exit the function that is
running.

215
10. Troubleshooting

When the Address Book Is Updated

Message Cause Solution

"Updating the destination list A network error has • Check whether the server is
has failed. Try again?" occurred. connected.
• Antivirus programs and firewalls
can prevent client computers from
establishing connection with this
machine.
• If you are using antivirus software,
add the program to the exclusion
list in the application settings. For
details about how to add
programs to the exclusion list, see
the antivirus software Help.
• To prevent a firewall from
blocking the connection, register
the machine's IP address in the
firewall's IP address exclusion
settings. For details about the
procedure for excluding an IP
address, see your operating
system's Help.

"Updating the destination The destination list is being Wait until the message disappears. Do
list... Please wait. Specified updated from the network not turn off the power while this
destination(s) or sender's using Web Image Monitor. message is displayed. Depending on
name has been cleared." the number of destinations to be
updated, there may be some delay
before operation is resumed.
Operation is not possible while this
message is displayed.

"Updating the destination A specified destination or Specify the destination or sender's


list... Please wait. Specified sender's name was cleared name again.
destination(s) or sender's when the destination list in
name has been cleared." the delivery server was
updated.

216
When Other Messages Appear

When Data Cannot Be Sent Due to a Problem with the Destination

Message Cause Solution

"Some invalid destination(s) The specified group contains In the message that appears at each
contained. Do you want to either an e-mail destination transmission, press [Select].
select only valid and/or folder destination
destination(s)?" that is not supported by the
specified transmission
method.

"SMTP authentication email The SMTP authentication e- For details about how to set SMTP
address and administrator mail address and the authentication, see "File Transfer",
email address mismatch." administrator's e-mail Connecting the Machine/ System
address do not match. Settings.

When the Machine Cannot Be Operated Due to a Problem with the User
Certificate

Message Cause Solution

"The destination cannot be The user certificate A new user certificate must be installed.
selected because its (destination certificate) has For details about the user certificate
encryption certificate is not expired. (destination certificate), see
currently valid." "Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.

"The group destination The user certificate A new user certificate must be installed.
cannot be selected because (destination certificate) has For details about the user certificate
it contains a destination with expired. (destination certificate), see
a encryption certificate that "Configuring S/MIME", Security
is not currently valid." Guide.

"Transmission cannot be The user certificate A new user certificate must be installed.
performed because the (destination certificate) has For details about the user certificate
encryption certificate is not expired. (destination certificate), see
currently valid." "Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.

217
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"XXX cannot be YYY The device certificate (S/ A new device certificate (S/MIME)
because the device MIME) has expired. must be installed. For details about
certificate used for the S/ how to install a device certificate (S/
MIME signature is not MIME), see "Protecting
currently valid." Communication Paths via a Device
(XXX and YYY indicate the Certificate", Security Guide.
user action.)

"XXX cannot be YYY There is no device certificate For details about the device certificate
because there is a problem (S/MIME), or the certificate (S/MIME), see "Protecting
with the device certificate is invalid. Communication Paths via a Device
used for the S/MIME Certificate", Security Guide.
signature. Check the device
certificate."
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)

"XXX cannot be YYY The device certificate (PDF A new device certificate (PDF with
because the Digital with digital signature or digital signature or PDF/A with digital
Signature's device certificate PDF/A with digital signature) must be installed. For details
is not currently valid." signature) has expired. about how to install a device certificate
(XXX and YYY indicate the (PDF with digital signature or PDF/A
user action.) with digital signature), see
"Configuring PDFs with Electronic
Signatures", Security Guide.

"XXX cannot be YYY There is no device certificate A new device certificate (PDF with
because there is a problem (PDF with digital signature or digital signature or PDF/A with digital
with the Digital Signature's PDF/A with digital signature) must be installed. For details
device certificate. Check the signature), or the certificate about how to install a device certificate
device certificate." is invalid. (PDF with digital signature or PDF/A
(XXX and YYY indicate the with digital signature), see
user action.) "Configuring PDFs with Electronic
Signatures", Security Guide.

• If a fax or an e-mail cannot be sent and a message appears which states that there is a problem
with the device certificate or user certificate, a new certificate must be installed. For details about
how to install a new certificate, see "Configuring S/MIME" or "Protecting Communication Paths via
a Device Certificate", Security Guide.

218
When Other Messages Appear

When Problems Occur While Logging In

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication has failed." The entered login user name For details about the correct login user
or login password is not name and login password, see "Basic
correct. Authentication", Security Guide.

"Authentication has failed." The machine cannot perform For details about authentication, see
authentication. "Configuring User Authentication",
Security Guide.

When the User Lacks Privileges to Perform an Operation

Message Cause Solution

"You do not have the The logged in user name For details about how to set
privileges to use this does not have permissions permissions, see "Limiting Available
function." for the selected function. Functions", Security Guide.

"The selected file(s) You have tried to delete files To check your access permission for
contained file(s) without without the permission to do stored documents, or to delete a
access privileges. Only so. document you do not have permission
file(s) with access privileges to delete, see "Managing Stored Files",
will be deleted." Security Guide.

When the LDAP Server Cannot Be Used

Message Cause Solution

"Connection with LDAP A network error has Try the operation again. If the message
server has failed. Check the occurred and connection is still displayed, the network may be
server status." has failed. busy.
Check the settings for LDAP server in
[System Settings]. For details about
settings for LDAP server, see
"Programming the LDAP server",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.

219
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded time limit for A network error has • Try the operation again. If the
LDAP server search. Check occurred and connection message is still displayed, the
the server status." has failed. network may be busy.
• Check that the correct settings for
LDAP server are listed in
[Administrator Tools] of [System
Settings]. For details about LDAP
server, see "Programming the
LDAP server", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.

"LDAP server authentication A network error has Configure settings correctly for the user
has failed. Check the occurred and connection name and the password for LDAP
settings." has failed. server authentication.

220
11. Information for This Machine
This chapter describes environmental precautions and regulations.

Information on Environmental Regulations


ENERGY STAR Program

ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment


This company is a participant in the ENERGY STAR® Program.
This machine is compliant with the regulations specified by the
ENERGY STAR® Program.

The ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment encourage energy conservation
by promoting energy efficient computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products that feature energy saving
functions.
It is an open program in which manufacturers participate voluntarily.
Targeted products are computers, monitors, printers, facsimiles, copiers, scanners, and multi-function
devices. Energy Star standards and logos are internationally uniform.

• For details about the "default delay time", see page 221 "Energy Saving Functions".

Energy Saving Functions

To reduce its power consumption, this machine has the following functions:
Low Power mode
• If this machine remains idle for a specified period, it automatically reduces its electrical
consumption.

221
11. Information for This Machine

• The default period the machine waits before entering Low Power Mode is 1 minute. This
default time can be changed.
Sleep mode
• If this machine remains idle for a specified period or when [Energy Saver] ( ) is pressed, it
enters Sleep mode to further reduce its electrical consumption.
• The default delay time the machine waits before entering Sleep mode is 1 minute. This default
time can be changed.
• The machine can print jobs from computers and receive faxes while in Sleep mode.
Specification
• (mainly Europe)

Type 1 Type 2

Reduced electrical consumption in 48.0 W 48.1 W


Low Power mode *1

Time of switch into Low Power mode 1 minute 1 minute

Time of switch out from Low Power 10 seconds 10 seconds


mode *1

Reduced electrical consumption in 1.1 W 1.1 W


Sleep mode *1

Time of switch into Sleep mode 1 minute 1 minute

Time of switch out from Sleep mode 21 seconds 25.4 seconds


*1

Duplex Function *2 Standard Standard

*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may differ
depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
*2 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used
with) a duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.
• (mainly Asia)

Type 1 Type 2

Reduced electrical consumption in 48.0 W 48.1 W


Low Power mode *1

Time of switch into Low Power mode 1 minute 1 minute

222
Information on Environmental Regulations

Type 1 Type 2

Time of switch out from Low Power 10 seconds 10 seconds


mode *1

Reduced electrical consumption in 3.4 W 3.4 W


Sleep mode *1

Time of switch into Sleep mode 1 minute 1 minute

Time of switch out from Sleep mode 21 seconds 25.4 seconds


*1

Duplex Function *2 Standard Standard

*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may differ
depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
*2 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used
with) a duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.
• (mainly North America)

Type 1 Type 2

Reduced electrical consumption in Low 47.6 W 46.7 W


Power mode *1

Time of switch into Low Power mode 1 minute 1 minute

Time of switch out from Low Power 10 seconds 10 seconds


mode *1

Reduced electrical consumption in 1.1 W 1.1 W


Sleep mode *1

Time of switch into Sleep mode 1 minute 1 minute

Time of switch out from Sleep mode *1 21 seconds 25.4 seconds

Duplex Function *2 Standard Standard

*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may differ
depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
*2 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used
with) a duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.

223
11. Information for This Machine

• Specifications can vary depending on which options are installed on the machine.
• For details about how to change the default interval, see "Timer Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• The machine enters sleep mode directly in the following situations:
• Low Power Mode Timer and Sleep Mode Timer are set to the same time
• Sleep Mode Timer is set to a shorter time than Low Power Mode Timer
• Depending on which embedded software application is installed on it, the machine might take
longer than indicated to enter Sleep mode.

User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (mainly


Europe)

Users in the countries where this symbol shown in this section has been specified in
national law on collection and treatment of E-waste

Our Products contain high quality components and are designed to facilitate recycling.
Our products or product packaging are marked with the symbol below.

The symbol indicates that the product must not be treated as municipal waste. It must be disposed of
separately via the appropriate return and collection systems available. By following these instructions
you ensure that this product is treated correctly and help to reduce potential impacts on the environment
and human health, which could otherwise result from inappropriate handling. Recycling of products
helps to conserve natural resources and protect the environment.
For more detailed information on collection and recycling systems for this product, please contact the
shop where you purchased it, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.

All Other Users

If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities, the shop where you bought this
product, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.

224
Information on Environmental Regulations

Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)
(mainly Europe)

In accordance with the Battery Directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users Annex II,
the above symbol is printed on batteries and accumulators.
This symbol means that in the European Union, used batteries and accumulators should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
In the EU, there are separate collection systems for not only used electrical and electronic products but
also batteries and accumulators.
Please dispose of them correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.
Contact your sales or service representative to change the battery.

Environmental Advice for Users (mainly Europe)

Users in the EU, Switzerland and Norway


Consumables yield
Please refer to either the User's Manual for this information or the packaging of the consumable.
Recycled paper
The machine can use recycled paper which is produced in accordance with European standard
EN 12281:2002 or DIN 19309. For products using EP printing technology, the machine can print
on 64 g/m2 paper, which contains less raw materials and represents a significant resource
reduction.
Duplex printing (if applicable)
Duplex printing enables both sides of a sheet of paper to be used. This saves paper and reduces
the size of printed documents so that fewer sheets are used. We recommend that this feature is
enabled whenever you print.
Toner and ink cartridge return program
Toner and ink cartridge for recycling will be accepted free of charge from users in accordance with
local regulations.
For details about the return program, please refer to the Web page below or consult your service
person.

https://www.ricoh-return.com/

225
11. Information for This Machine

Energy efficiency
The amount of electricity a machine consumes depends as much on its specifications as it does on
the way you use it. The machine is designed to allow you to reduce electricity costs by switching to
Ready mode after it prints the last page. If required, it can immediately print again from this mode.
If no additional prints are required and a specified period of time passes, the device switches to an
energy saving mode.
In these modes, the machine consumes less power (watts). If the machine is to print again, it needs
a little longer to return from an energy saving mode than from Ready mode.
For maximum energy savings, we recommend that the default setting for power management is
used.

Products that comply with the Energy Star requirement are always energy efficient.

Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA)


(mainly North America)

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/


perchlorate

226
INDEX
Data security for copying......................................25
Destination........................................................... 217
2 Sided Print...........................................................11
Display panel......................................................... 44
500-sheet paper feed unit.................................... 30
Distributed scan management.............................. 24
A Document Server.. 12, 17, 90, 109, 110, 131, 133,
173, 190
Adding toner........................................................156
Drag....................................................................... 49
Address Book........13, 91, 93, 119, 121, 122, 124,
126, 216 DSM....................................................................... 24
ADF.....................................................................9, 27 Duplex....................................................... 11, 16, 79
ADF's extender...................................................... 29 E
Authentication screen............................................ 71
E-mail address............................................ 124, 126
Auto Document Feeder........................................... 9
E-mail destination....................................... 124, 126
Auto Reduce / Enlarge.................................. 16, 78
E-mail transmission................................................ 20
B Embedding text information..................................22
Basic procedure......................................... 104, 131 ENERGY STAR Program..................................... 221
Basic procedure (Copy)....................................... 77 Envelope........................................ 16, 87, 108, 153
Basic procedure (Fax)........................................... 91 Environmental advice for users.......................... 225
Basic Procedure (Scanner Classic).................... 127 Error log............................................................... 187
Basic procedure (Scanner)........................ 117, 124 Error report.......................................................... 187
Beeping pattern................................................... 166 Exposure glass....................................................... 27
Bypass tray............................ 29, 86, 140, 142, 150 Extender................................................................. 29
Extender for the bypass tray................................. 29
C
External options..................................................... 30
Canceling a transmission...................................... 95 F
Caster table............................................................30
Changing the display language.......................... 45 Facsimile.............................................................. 175
Check Status........................................................ 164 Fax.......................................................................... 55
Checking a stored file......................................... 128 Fax destination................................................ 91, 93
Classic Application................................................52 Fax indicator.......................................................... 44
Combine.................................................... 11, 16, 82 File type................................................................ 129
Combine 1 Side.....................................................83 Flick......................................................................... 48
Combine 2 Sides................................................... 84 Folder destination......................119, 121, 122, 123
Combine printing.................................................106 Frequently-used settings........................................ 14
Computer............................................................. 207 Front cover............................................................. 29
Control panel.................................................. 27, 44 Function Compatibility........................................ 172
Copier.................................................................. 173 H
Copy................................................................ 53, 77
Hold Print................................................................17
Copy orientation....................................................80
Home screen............................................. 15, 46, 49
Creating a shared folder.................................... 117
How to Read the Manuals...................................... 7
Custom size paper.................................................86
I
D
Icon............................................................ 46, 49, 50
Data In indicator.................................................... 44
Immediate Transmission........................................ 94

227
Indicator lamp..................................................... 164 O
Information on environmental regulations.........221
OCR unit................................................................. 22
Information screen................................................. 11
OHP transparencies..................................... 16, 148
Internet Fax............................................................ 20
One-Sided combine.............................................. 83
IP-Fax......................................................................20
Options................................................................... 30
J Orientation-fixed paper......................................145
Journal.................................................................. 100 Original orientation............................................... 80
L P

Label paper......................................................... 148 Paper capacity.................................................... 148


LAN-Fax...........................................................11, 18 Paper guides.......................................................... 29
LDAP server..........................................................219 Paper size............................................................ 148
Left cover................................................................ 28 Paper size dial....................................................... 28
Loading paper................................... 137, 138, 140 Paper thickness.................................................... 151
Locked Print............................................................ 17 Paper tray............................................. 28, 138, 148
Logging in the machine................................ 71, 219 Paper type............................................................148
Logging out the machine.......................................72 Paper weight........................................................148
Long tap................................................................. 49 Paperless Fax......................................................... 11
Low Power mode.................................................221 PCL........................................................................101
PCL 6.......................................... 104, 105, 106, 108
M
Pinch-in................................................................... 48
Mail to Print............................................................ 20 Pinch-out.................................................................48
Main power indicator........................................... 44 Placing originals.................................................... 74
Main power switch......................................... 28, 69 Preventing information leakage........................... 23
Managing documents......................................... 110 Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device)............... 113
Media access lamp............................................... 44 Printer..... 104, 185, 187, 188, 189, 190, 192, 193,
Media slots............................................................ 44 194
Memory....................................................... 193, 202 Printer driver properties...................................... 103
Memory Storage Device.................................... 113 Privilege................................................................219
Memory Transmission........................................... 91 Problem....................................................... 167, 215
Message......... 167, 173, 175, 176, 182, 185, 187, Program........................................................... 14, 66
188, 189, 190, 192, 193, 194, 197, 200, 202,
203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 211, 214, 215, 216, Q
217, 219
Quick Application................................................. 52
Model-specific information..................................... 8
Quick Install......................................................... 101
N Quick Print Release............................................. 111
Names of major features........................................ 9 R
Network setting................................................... 176
Recommended paper......................................... 148
Note for the battery and/or accumulator symbol..
.............................................................................. 225 Reducing my costs................................................. 11
Notes to users in the state of California.............226 Region A................................................................... 8
Number of sets.......................................................89 Region B................................................................... 8
Registering destinations.........................................13
Remote Fax....................................................21, 182

228
Running out of toner............................................ 160 Two-sided paper................................................. 145
S Two-sided printing.............................................. 105
U
Sample Print........................................................... 17
Scan Settings....................................................... 130 Unauthorized copy prevention............................ 25
Scan to E-mail......................................................124 Used toner........................................................... 161
Scan to Folder............................................... 22, 117 User certificate..................................................... 217
Scanner.... 60, 117, 124, 127, 197, 200, 202, 203, User Code Authentication.....................................71
204, 205, 206, 207, 211 User information on electrical and electronic
Sending scan files........................................... 12, 22 equipment............................................................ 224
Sending stored documents................................... 98 Using scanned files on the computer................... 12
Shared folder.......................................................117 V
Shortcut icon............................................. 46, 49, 50
Sleep mode......................................................... 221 Vents.................................................................28, 29
SMB folder......................................... 119, 121, 122 W
Sort......................................................................... 89
Web Image Monitor.................................... 24, 135
Stamp..................................................................... 16
Widget................................................................... 51
Standard Application............................................ 52
WSD scanner.........................................................22
Standard printing................................................ 104
Standard tray......................................................... 28
Status icon............................................................ 163
Status indicator...................................................... 44
Stored documents.................................. 17, 98, 133
Stored Print............................................................. 17
Storing a document............................................... 97
Storing data.................................................. 90, 131
Storing documents...............................................109
Storing received documents................................. 18
Storing scan files........................................... 12, 127
Symbols.................................................................... 7
T
Thick paper.......................................................... 152
Toner................................................... 156, 160, 161
Tray......................................................................... 28
Tray 1................................................................... 148
Tray 2................................................................... 149
Tray 3................................................................... 149
Tray 4................................................................... 149
Tray 5................................................................... 149
Tray extension........................................................ 28
Turning off the power............................................ 69
Turning on the power............................................ 69
Two-Sided combine.............................................. 84

229
MEMO

230
MEMO

231
MEMO

232 EN GB EN US EN AU D256-7834
© 2016
EN GB EN US EN AU D256-7834
User Guide What You Can Do with This Machine

Getting Started

Copy

Fax

Print

Scan

Document Server

Web Image Monitor

Adding Paper and Toner

Troubleshooting

Information for This Machine

For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information in
Read This FIrst before using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals................................................................................................................................. 7
Symbols Used in the Manuals.......................................................................................................................7
Model-Specific Information............................................................................................................................... 8
Names of Major Features.................................................................................................................................. 9
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
Searching by What You Want to Do............................................................................................................. 11
Reducing my Costs.......................................................................................................................................11
Using Scanned Files on the Computer....................................................................................................... 12
Registering Destinations...............................................................................................................................13
Operating the Machine More Effectively.................................................................................................. 14
What You Can Do with This Machine............................................................................................................ 15
Customizing the [Home] Screen................................................................................................................. 15
Making Copies Using Various Functions................................................................................................... 16
Printing Data Using Various Functions........................................................................................................17
Utilizing Stored Document.......................................................................................................................... 17
Sending and Receiving Faxes without Paper............................................................................................ 18
Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Internet...........................................................................................20
Sending and Receiving Faxes by Using the Machine without Fax Unit Installed................................... 21
Using the Facsimile and the Scanner in a Network Environment.............................................................22
Embedding Text Information in Scanned Files...........................................................................................22
Preventing Information Leakage (Security Functions)............................................................................... 23
Centrally Controlling Scan Conditions and Distribution........................................................................... 24
Monitoring and Setting the Machine Using a Computer......................................................................... 24
Preventing Unauthorized Copying............................................................................................................. 25
2. Getting Started
Guide to Names and Functions of Components............................................................................................27
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options................................................................................................30
Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options.............................................................................30
Installing Options............................................................................................................................................. 31
Order of Option Installation........................................................................................................................31
Attaching the 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit..................................................................................................31
Installing the Interface Units........................................................................................................................ 33
Installing the File Format Converter............................................................................................................ 39

1
Installing SD Card Options......................................................................................................................... 40
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel........................................................... 44
Changing the Display Language.................................................................................................................... 45
How to Use the [Home] Screen...................................................................................................................... 46
Possible Operations on the Standard Application Screen....................................................................... 48
Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen........................................................................................................... 49
How to Use Each Application......................................................................................................................... 52
[Copy] Screen..............................................................................................................................................53
[Fax] Screen................................................................................................................................................. 55
[Scanner] Screen......................................................................................................................................... 60
Registering Functions in a Program.................................................................................................................66
Turning On/Off the Power.............................................................................................................................. 69
Turning On the Main Power........................................................................................................................69
Turning Off the Main Power........................................................................................................................69
Logging In the Machine...................................................................................................................................71
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed.......................................................................................... 71
User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel.................................................................................. 71
Logging In Using the Control Panel............................................................................................................71
Logging Out Using the Control Panel.........................................................................................................72
Placing Originals..............................................................................................................................................74
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass...................................................................................................74
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder....................................................................................... 74
3. Copy
Basic Procedure................................................................................................................................................77
Auto Reduce / Enlarge....................................................................................................................................78
Duplex Copying............................................................................................................................................... 79
Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation......................................................................................... 80
Combined Copying......................................................................................................................................... 82
One-Sided Combine................................................................................................................................... 83
Two-Sided Combine....................................................................................................................................84
Copying onto Custom Size Paper...................................................................................................................86
Copying onto Envelopes................................................................................................................................. 87
Sort.................................................................................................................................................................... 89

2
Changing the Number of Sets.................................................................................................................... 89
Storing Data in the Document Server............................................................................................................. 90
4. Fax
Basic Procedure for Transmissions (Memory Transmission)..........................................................................91
Registering a Fax Destination......................................................................................................................91
Deleting a Fax Destination.......................................................................................................................... 93
Transmitting while Checking Connection to Destination (Immediate Transmission)................................... 94
Canceling a Transmission................................................................................................................................95
Canceling a Transmission Before the Original Is Scanned...................................................................... 95
Canceling a Transmission While the Original Is Being Scanned.............................................................95
Canceling a Transmission After the Original Is Scanned......................................................................... 95
Storing a Document......................................................................................................................................... 97
Sending Stored Documents.........................................................................................................................98
Printing the Journal Manually....................................................................................................................... 100
5. Print
Quick Install....................................................................................................................................................101
Quick Installation via a Network............................................................................................................. 101
Quick Installation via a USB Connection................................................................................................ 101
Displaying the Printer Driver Properties........................................................................................................103
Standard Printing........................................................................................................................................... 104
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver....................................................................................................... 104
Printing on Both Sides of Sheets................................................................................................................... 105
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver....................................................................................................... 105
Types of Two-sided Printing......................................................................................................................105
Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page............................................................................................... 106
When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver....................................................................................................... 106
Types of Combine Printing........................................................................................................................ 106
Printing on Envelopes.................................................................................................................................... 108
Configuring Envelope Settings Using the Control Panel........................................................................ 108
Printing on Envelopes Using the Printer Driver........................................................................................ 108
Saving and Printing Using the Document Server.........................................................................................109
Storing Documents in Document Server.................................................................................................. 109
Managing Documents Stored in Document Server................................................................................ 110

3
Using the Quick Print Release Function........................................................................................................111
Using the Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device) Function..........................................................................113
6. Scan
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder............................................................................................. 117
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer Running Windows/Confirming a Computer's Information.....
.................................................................................................................................................................... 117
Registering an SMB Folder.......................................................................................................................119
Deleting an SMB Registered Folder.........................................................................................................122
Entering the Path to the Destination Manually........................................................................................ 123
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail......................................................................................124
Registering an E-mail Destination.............................................................................................................124
Deleting an E-mail Destination................................................................................................................. 126
Entering an E-mail Address Manually..................................................................................................... 126
Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files........................................................................................................ 127
Checking a Stored File Selected from the List......................................................................................... 128
Specifying the File Type................................................................................................................................ 129
Specifying Scan Settings............................................................................................................................... 130
7. Document Server
Storing Data................................................................................................................................................... 131
Printing Stored Documents............................................................................................................................ 133
8. Web Image Monitor
Displaying Top Page..................................................................................................................................... 135
9. Adding Paper and Toner
Loading Paper................................................................................................................................................137
Precautions for Loading Paper................................................................................................................. 137
Loading Paper into Paper Trays............................................................................................................... 138
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray........................................................................................................ 140
Printing from the Bypass Tray Using the Printer Function........................................................................142
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper........................................................................... 145
Recommended Paper.................................................................................................................................... 148
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types................................................................................................... 148
Adding Toner................................................................................................................................................. 156
Sending Faxes or Scanned Documents When Toner Has Run Out...................................................... 160

4
Disposing of Used Toner...........................................................................................................................161
10. Troubleshooting
When a Status Icon Is Displayed..................................................................................................................163
When the Indicator Lamp for [Check Status] Is Lit or Flashing...................................................................164
When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound.............................................................................................166
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine...................................................................................167
When Multiple Functions Cannot Be Executed Simultaneously............................................................ 172
Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function........................................... 173
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function.....................................................................175
When Network Setting Problems Occur................................................................................................. 176
When the Remote Fax Function Cannot Be Used...................................................................................182
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function..........................................................................185
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Printer Function..................................185
Messages Printed on the Error Logs or Reports When You Use the Printer Function...........................187
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function...................................................................... 197
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Scanner Function.............................. 197
Messages Displayed on the Client Computer.........................................................................................207
When Other Messages Appear...................................................................................................................214
When There Is a Problem Scanning or Storing Originals...................................................................... 215
When the Address Book Is Updated....................................................................................................... 216
When Data Cannot Be Sent Due to a Problem with the Destination.....................................................217
When the Machine Cannot Be Operated Due to a Problem with the User Certificate.......................217
When Problems Occur While Logging In............................................................................................... 219
When the User Lacks Privileges to Perform an Operation..................................................................... 219
When the LDAP Server Cannot Be Used.................................................................................................219
11. Information for This Machine
Information on Environmental Regulations.................................................................................................. 221
ENERGY STAR Program........................................................................................................................... 221
Energy Saving Functions...........................................................................................................................221
User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (mainly Europe)...................... 223
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only) (mainly Europe)
.................................................................................................................................................................... 224
Environmental Advice for Users (mainly Europe)............................................................... 225

5
Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA) (mainly North America)....
.................................................................................................................................................................... 226
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................227

6
How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.

This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.

[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Read the
information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see page 8 "Model-Specific
Information".

7
Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.
There is a label on the rear of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label contains
details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.

DPK051

The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region A model:
• CODE XXXX -27, -29
• 220–240 V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region B model:
• CODE XXXX -17
• 120–127 V

• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -27" is printed on the label, see
" (mainly Europe)" also.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -29" is printed on the label, see
" (mainly Asia)" also.

8
Names of Major Features
In this manual, major features of the machine are referred to as follows:
• Auto Document Feeder ADF

9
10
1. What You Can Do with This Machine
You can search for a description by what you want to do.

Searching by What You Want to Do


You can search for a procedure by what you want to do.

Reducing my Costs

BRL059S

Printing multi-page documents on both sides of sheets (Duplex Copy)


See "Duplex Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
Printing multi-page documents and received faxes on a single sheet (Combine (Copier/Fax))
See "Combined Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
See "Combine Two Originals", Fax.
Printing received faxes on both sides of sheets (2 Sided Print)
See "Two-Sided Printing", Fax.
Converting received faxes to electronic formats (Paperless Fax)
See "Confirming/Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents", Fax.
Sending files from the computer without printing them (LAN-Fax)
See "Sending Fax Documents from Computers", Fax.

11
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

Checking how much paper is saved ([Information] screen)


See "[Information] Screen", Getting Started.
Reducing electricity consumption
See "Saving Energy", Getting Started.
See "Timer Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.

Using Scanned Files on the Computer

BQX138S

Sending scan files


See "Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail", Scan.
Sending the URL of the folder in which scan files are stored
See "Sending the URL by E-mail", Scan.
Storing scan files in a shared folder
See "Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder", Scan.
Storing scan files on media
See "Basic Procedure for Saving Scan Files on a Memory Storage Device", Scan.
Embedding text information in scanned files
See "Embedding Text Information in Scanned Data", Scan.
Converting transmitted faxes to electronic formats and sending them to a computer
See "Overview of Folder Transmission Function", Fax.

12
Searching by What You Want to Do

Managing and using documents converted to electronic formats (Document Server)


See "Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions", Copy/ Document Server.

Registering Destinations

BRL060S

Using the control panel to register destinations in the Address Book


See "Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book", Fax.
See "Registering a Destination E-mail Address or Folder", Scan.
Using Web Image Monitor to register destinations from a computer
See "Registering Internet Fax Destination Information Using Web Image Monitor", Fax.
Downloading destinations registered in the machine to the LAN-Fax driver destination list
See "Using the machine's Address Book as the LAN-Fax destination list", Fax.

13
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

Operating the Machine More Effectively

BQX139S

Registering and using frequently-used settings (Program)


See "Registering Functions in a Program", Convenient Functions.
Registering frequently-used settings as initial settings (Program as Defaults)
See "Changing the Default Functions of the Initial Screen", Convenient Functions.
Registering frequently-used printing settings to the printer driver
See "Using One Click Presets", Print.
Changing the initial settings of the printer driver to frequently-used printing settings
See "Displaying the [Printing Preferences] Dialog Box", Print.
Adding shortcuts to frequently used programs or Web pages
See "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen", Convenient Functions.
Changing the order of the function and shortcut icons
See "Changing the Order of Icons on the [Home] Screen", Convenient Functions.

14
What You Can Do with This Machine

What You Can Do with This Machine


This section describes the features of this machine.

Customizing the [Home] Screen

The icons of each function are displayed on the [Home] screen.

DPK127

• You can add shortcuts to often used programs or Web pages to the [Home] screen. The programs
or Web pages can be recalled easily by pressing the shortcut icons.
• You can display only the icons of functions and shortcuts that you use.
• You can change the order of the function and shortcut icons.

• For details about the features on the [Home] screen, see "How to Use the [Home] Screen", Getting
Started.
• For details about how to customize the [Home] screen, see "How to Customize the [Home]
Screen", Convenient Functions.

15
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

Making Copies Using Various Functions

CJQ601

• You can print stamps on copies. Stamps can include background numbers, scanned images, dates,
and page numbers.
"Stamps", Copy/ Document Server.
• You can reduce or enlarge the copy image. With the Auto Reduce / Enlarge function, the machine
automatically calculates the reproduction ratio based on the sizes of the originals and the paper
you have specified.
See "Reducing or Enlarging Originals", Copy/ Document Server.
• Copier functions such as Duplex, Combine, Booklet, and Magazine allow you to save on paper by
copying multiple pages onto single sheets.
For details about duplex copying, see "Duplex Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
For details about combined copying, see "Combined Copying", Copy/ Document Server.
For details about the booklet and magazine functions, see "Booklet/Magazine", Copy/
Document Server.
• You can copy onto various types of paper such as envelopes and OHP transparencies.
See "Copying onto Various Types of Paper", Copy/ Document Server.

16
What You Can Do with This Machine

Printing Data Using Various Functions

DPK128

• This machine supports network and local connections.


• You can print or delete print jobs stored on the machine's hard disk, which have been previously
sent from computers using the printer driver. The following types of print jobs can be selected:
Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print.
See "Storing Documents in the Hard Disk Drive and Printing Them", Print.
• You can collate printed paper.
See "Collate", Print.
• You can print files stored on a removable memory device and specify print conditions such as print
quality and print size.
See "Direct Printing from a Memory Storage Device", Print.

Utilizing Stored Document

You can store files scanned in copier, facsimile, printer, or scanner mode on the machine's hard disk.
Web Image Monitor allows you to use your computer to search for, view, print, delete, and send stored
files via the network. You can also change print settings and print multiple documents (Document Server).

17
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

CJQ603

• You can retrieve stored documents scanned in scanner mode to your computer.
• Using the file format converter, you can download documents stored in copier, Document Server,
or printer mode to your computer.

• For details about how to use the Document Server, see "Storing Data in the Document Server",
Copy/ Document Server.
• For details about the Document Server in copier mode, see "Document Server", Copy/ Document
Server.
• For details about the Document Server in printer mode, see "Saving and Printing Using the
Document Server", Print.
• For details about the Document Server in fax mode, see "Storing a Document", Fax.
• For details about the Document Server in scanner mode, see "Storing and Saving the Scanned
Documents", Scan.

Sending and Receiving Faxes without Paper

Reception
You can store and save received fax documents as electronic formats in the machine's hard disk
without printing them.

18
What You Can Do with This Machine

CJQ604

You can use Web Image Monitor to check, print, delete, retrieve, or download documents using
your computer (Storing received documents).

• See "Confirming/Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents", Fax.


Transmission
You can send a fax from your computer over the network (Ethernet or wireless LAN) to this
machine, which then forwards the fax via its telephone connection (LAN-Fax).

CJQ605

• To send a fax, print from the Windows application you are working with, select LAN-Fax as
the printer, and then specify the destination.
• You can also check the sent image data.

19
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

• For details about the machine's settings, see "Network Settings Requirements", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about how to use the function, see "Sending Fax Documents from Computers", Fax.

Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Internet

xxx@xxx.com
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx@xxx.com
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

CJQ606

E-mail Transmission and Reception


This machine converts scanned document images to e-mail format, and transmits and receives the
e-mail data over the Internet.
• To send a document, specify an e-mail address instead of dialing the destination telephone
number (Internet Fax and e-mail transmission).
See "Specifying an Internet Fax Destination Manually", Fax.
• This machine can receive e-mail messages via Internet Fax or from computers (Internet Fax
Reception and Mail to Print).
See "Receiving E-Mail by Internet Fax/Mail to Print", Fax.
• Internet Fax compatible machines and computers that have e-mail addresses can receive e-
mail messages via Internet Fax.
IP-Fax
The IP-Fax function sends or receives documents between two facsimiles directly via a TCP/IP
network.
• To send a document, specify an IP address or host name instead of a fax number (IP-Fax
Transmission).
See "Specifying an IP-Fax Destination Manually", Fax.

20
What You Can Do with This Machine

• This machine can receive documents sent via Internet Fax (IP-Fax Reception).
See "Types of Reception", Fax.
• Using a VoIP gateway, this machine can send to G3 facsimiles connected to the public
switched telephone network (PSTN).

• For details about the machine's settings, see "Network Settings Requirements", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.

Sending and Receiving Faxes by Using the Machine without Fax Unit Installed

You can send and receive faxes through a different machine's fax functions via a network (Remote Fax).

CJQ612

• To use the remote fax function, install the fax connection unit on the main-machine and sub-
machine.
• The procedure for sending faxes is as same as that of for the machine with the fax unit. When a job
has finished, confirm results displayed on sending history or printed on reports.
• You can forward documents received by the main machine with the facsimile function to sub-
machines.

• For details, see "Sending/Receiving Documents Using a Remote Machine (Remote Fax)", Fax.

21
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

Using the Facsimile and the Scanner in a Network Environment

CJQ607

• You can send scan files to a specified destination using e-mail (Sending scan files by e-mail).
See "Overview of E-Mail Transmission Function", Fax.
See "Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail", Scan.
• You can send scan files directly to folders (Sending scan files by Scan to Folder).
See "Overview of Folder Transmission Function", Fax.
See "Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder", Scan.
• You can use Web Services on Devices (WSD) to send scan files to a client computer.
See "Basic Operating Procedure of WSD Scanner (Push Type)", Scan.

Embedding Text Information in Scanned Files

You can extract text information from a scanned document and embed it in the file without using a
computer.
If you scan a document using this function, embedded text can be searched by using the text search
function or copied to another document.

22
What You Can Do with This Machine

CUL003

• To use this function, the OCR unit is required.


• You can select a file type from [PDF], [High Compression PDF], or [PDF/A].
• This function can optically recognize characters in various languages and up to approximately
40,000 characters a page.

• See "Embedding Text Information in Scanned Data", Scan.

Preventing Information Leakage (Security Functions)

CJQ608

• You can protect documents from unauthorized access and stop them from being copied without
permission.
• You can control the use of the machine, as well as prevent machine settings from being changed
without authorization.
• By setting passwords, you can prevent unauthorized access via the network.
• You can erase or encrypt the data on the hard disk to minimize the risk of information leakage.

23
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

• You can limit the usage of functions for each user.

• See Security Guide.

Centrally Controlling Scan Conditions and Distribution

You can use the distributed scan management (DSM) system in Windows Server 2008 R2/2012 to
manage the destinations and scan settings for each individual user in a group and to use the information
when distributing scanned data.
You can also use this system to centrally manage information about people using the network and the
machine's scanner functions. Both delivered files and user information can be controlled.

xxx@xxx.xxx
A 600 dpi

600 dpi

A
xxx@xxx.xxx

CUL004

• You must set up and configure a Windows server to use the distributed scan management system.
This system is supported by Windows Server 2008 R2 or later.

• For details about how to deliver files using the distributed scan management system, see
"Managing Scan Conditions and Other Settings in the Block Using Distributed Scan Management",
Scan.

Monitoring and Setting the Machine Using a Computer

Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the machine's status and change the settings.

24
What You Can Do with This Machine

CJQ609

You can check which tray is running out of paper, register information in the Address Book, specify the
network settings, configure and change the system settings, manage jobs, print the job history, and
configure the authentication settings.

• See "Using Web Image Monitor", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
• See Web Image Monitor Help.

Preventing Unauthorized Copying

You can print embedded patterns on printouts to prevent unauthorized copying.

DPK129

25
1. What You Can Do with This Machine

• Using the printer driver, you can embed a pattern in the printed document. If the document is
copied on a machine with the Copy Data Security unit, protected pages are grayed out in the
copy. This can minimize the risk of confidential information being copied. Protected fax messages
are grayed out before being transmitted or stored. If a document protected by unauthorized copy
guard is copied on a machine that is equipped with the Copy Data Security unit, the machine
beeps to notify users that unauthorized copying is being attempted.
If the document is copied on a machine without the Copy Data Security Unit, the hidden text
becomes conspicuous in the copy, showing that the copy is unauthorized.
• Using the printer driver, you can embed text in the printed document for unauthorized copy
prevention. If the document is copied, scanned, or stored in a Document Server by a copier or
multifunction printer, the embedded text appears conspicuous in the copy, discouraging such
unauthorized copying.

• For details, see Security Guide.


• For details, see the printer driver Help.
• For details about this function in the printer mode, see "Printing Documents That Are Not Authorized
for Duplication", Print.

26
2. Getting Started
This chapter describes how to start using this machine.

Guide to Names and Functions of Components

• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.

Front and left view


1

2
3

10

8 7 6
DPK052

1. ADF
Lower the ADF over originals placed on the exposure glass.
If you load a stack of originals in the ADF, the ADF will automatically feed the originals one by one.
2. Exposure glass
Place originals face down here. For details, see page 74 "Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass".
3. Control panel
See page 44 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel".

27
2. Getting Started

4. Tray Extension
Pull this fence to prevent paper from falling off.
5. Main power switch
To operate the machine, the main power switch must be on. If it is off, open the main power switch's cover and
turn the switch on.
6. Paper size dial
Use this dial to specify the paper size. To use a paper size that is not indicated on the paper size dial, set the
dial to " ". If this is the case, set the paper size using the control panel.
7. Paper Tray
Paper is loaded here. For details about the sizes and types of paper that can be used, see page 137
"Loading Paper".
8. Left Cover
Open to access the waste toner bottle. For details, see "Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle", Maintenance and
Specifications.
9. Vents
Prevent overheating.
10. Standard Tray
Copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here.

Front and right view


1

4 2

DPK053

28
Guide to Names and Functions of Components

1. ADF's extender
Pull this extender to support large paper.
2. Vents
Prevent overheating.
3. Extender for the bypass tray
Pull this extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11 or larger size paper in the bypass tray.
4. Bypass tray
For details about the sizes and types of paper that can be used, see page 140 "Loading Paper into the
Bypass Tray".
5. Paper guides
When loading paper in the bypass tray, align the paper guides flush against the paper.
6. Front Cover
Open to access the inside of the machine and remove jammed paper.
Open here to replace the print cartridge.

Rear and left view

DPK054

1. Vents
Prevent overheating.

29
2. Getting Started

Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options


Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options

DPK055

1. 500-sheet paper feed unit


Paper is loaded here.
2. Caster table
A table with casters to place this machine.

30
Installing Options

Installing Options
By installing options, you can improve machine performance and expand the available features.

Order of Option Installation

When installing multiple options, the following order is recommended:

1. Attach the paper feed unit.


Attach the paper feed unit to the bottom of the machine.
You can attach up to four paper feed units. Up to 2,000 sheets of paper can be loaded.
2. Install the caster table.
3. Install the optional interface board.
Install in the slot of the machine.
Only one interface board can be installed.
4. Install the file format converter.
5. Insert SD card options.
Insert in the SD card slot of the machine.
There are two slots for SD cards.
Each slot supports different types of SD cards.
If you want to use two or more SD cards that can be inserted in the same slot, contact your sales or
service representative.

Attaching the 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit

You can install a 500-sheet paper feed unit.

• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.

• The machine weighs approximately 28 kg (62 lb.).


• When moving the machine, use the inset grips on both sides, and lift slowly in pairs. The
machine will break or cause injury if dropped.

• Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping may cause injury.

31
2. Getting Started

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, take care that the power cord is not damaged under the machine. Failing to take these
precautions could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not place the machine directly on the floor.


• When attaching multiple options, attach the paper feed unit first.
• To attach two or more paper feed units at the same time, first stack them one upon the other, and
then attach them as a single unit.
• Before turning on the power, remove the packaging material from the paper feed unit.

1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.


2. Remove the packaging from the paper feed unit.
3. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides of the machine.

DPK936

Lifting the machine requires two people.


When moving the machine, do not touch the following parts:
• The operation panel, the ADF, and parts around them
• Convex parts on the right side of the machine
• Places indicated on the labels attached to the machine
• The bottom of the optional paper tray

32
Installing Options

4. There are two upright pins on the optional paper feed unit. Align them with the holes on
the underside of the machine, and then carefully lower the machine.

DPK939

5. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.


6. Print the configuration page to confirm that the unit was attached correctly.

Installing the Interface Units

• Before beginning work, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static
electricity. Static electricity can damage the interface units.
• Do not subject the interface units to physical shocks.

Installing the Wireless LAN interface board

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPK101

The removed cover will not be reused.

33
2. Getting Started

4. Fully insert the interface board.

DPK102

Check that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPK103

6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.


7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

Installing the IEEE 1284 interface board

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.

34
Installing Options

3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPK101

The removed cover will not be reused.


4. Fully insert the IEEE 1284 interface board.

DPK104

Check that the IEEE 1284 interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPK105

6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.


7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

35
2. Getting Started

Installing the Extended USB board

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPK101

The removed cover will not be reused.


4. Fully insert the interface board.

DPK106

Check that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPK107

6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.

36
Installing Options

7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

Installing the Bluetooth interface unit

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
3. Fully insert the interface unit.

DPK108

Check that the interface unit is firmly connected to the controller board.
4. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.
5. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

Installing the USB Device Server

The optional USB device server is an interface board that adds an Ethernet port to the machine.
With this option installed, two Ethernet cables can be connected at the same time using the standard port
on the machine and an additional port on the USB device server. You can assign different IP addresses
to each port, so the machine can print jobs from different network segments.
Procedure for installing the USB device server

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.

37
2. Getting Started

3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPK101

The removed cover will not be reused.


4. Fully insert the interface board.

DPK109

Check that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPK130

6. Connect the USB device server to the machine.


For details, see the Setup Guide provided with the USB device server.

38
Installing Options

Configuring settings
After installing and connecting the USB device server to the machine, configure the machine
settings.

• When using the USB device server, set [Energy Saver Mode to Disable Print Server] to [Disable
Mode] to prevent the machine from entering Energy Saver mode. Otherwise, the USB device
server loses communication with the network while the machine is in Energy Saver mode, and the
machine cannot receive print jobs.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press [Administrator Tools].
6. Press [ Next] four times.
7. Press [Energy Saver Mode to Disable Print Server].
8. Press [Disable Mode].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
11. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Installing the File Format Converter

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPK101

The removed cover will not be reused.

39
2. Getting Started

4. Fully insert the file format converter.

DPK110

Check that the file format converter is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten two screws to secure the file format converter.

DPK111

6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.


7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

Installing SD Card Options

• Keep SD cards out of reach of children. If a child swallows an SD card, consult a doctor
immediately.

• Do not subject the card to physical shocks.

1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.

40
Installing Options

2. Open the rear cover.

DPK112

3. Unhook the tab on the interface cover, which is located on the side of the rear cover.

DPK113

4. Unhook the two tabs on the outside of the interface cover.

DPK114

41
2. Getting Started

5. Insert the SD card into the slot until it clicks.

DPK126

If you insert only one SD card, use the upper slot. If you insert two SD cards simultaneously, use
both slots.
If you want to use two or more SD cards simultaneously, contact your service representative.
6. Hook the two tabs on the outside of the interface cover.

DPK115

7. Hook the tab on the interface cover, which is located on the side of the rear cover.

DPK116

42
Installing Options

8. Close the rear cover.

DPK117

9. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.


10. Check that the SD card was installed correctly.

43
2. Getting Started

Guide to the Names and Functions of the


Machine's Control Panel
1 2

6
7
6

3
DCH009

1. Display panel
This is a touch panel display that features icons, keys, shortcuts, and widgets that allow you to navigate the
screens of the various functions and applications and provide you with information about operation status and
other messages. See page 46 "How to Use the [Home] Screen" and page 52 "How to Use Each
Application".
2. Main power indicator
The main power indicator goes on when you turn on the main power switch. When the machine is in Sleep
mode, the main power indicator flashes slowly. In Fusing Unit Off mode, the main power indicator is lit.
3. Status indicator
Indicates the status of the system. Stays lit when an error occurs or the toner runs out.
4. Data In indicator (facsimile and printer mode)
Flashes when the machine is receiving print jobs or LAN-Fax documents from a computer. See Fax and Print.
5. Fax indicator
Indicates the status of the fax functions. Flashes during data transmission and reception. Stays lit when
receiving a fax via Confidential or Substitute Reception.
6. Media slots
Use to insert an SD card or a USB flash memory device. For details, see "Inserting/Removing a Memory
Storage Device", Getting Started.
7. Media access lamp
Lights up when an SD card is inserted in the media slot.

44
Changing the Display Language

Changing the Display Language


You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Change Langs. Widget].
3. Select the language you want to display.
4. Press [OK].

45
2. Getting Started

How to Use the [Home] Screen


The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on.
One icon is assigned to each function, and these icons are displayed on the [Home] screen. You can
add shortcuts to frequently used functions or Web pages to the [Home] screen. Also, you can register
widgets such as the Change Langs. Widget to it. The [Home] screen and the screen of each function may
differ depending on the optional units that are installed.
To display the [Home] screen, press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

• Do not apply strong impact or force to the screen, or it may be damaged. Maximum force
allowable is approx. 30N (approx. 3 kgf). (N = Newton, kgf = Kilogram force. 1 kgf = 9.8N.)
To switch between screens, flick your finger to the right or left on the screen.
1 2 3 4

12 5

11 10 9 8 7 DPK060

1. Logged-in user icon


When user authentication is enabled, an icon is displayed that indicates that users are logged in.
Press the icon to show the names of the users that are currently logged in.
2. System message
Displays messages from the machine system and applications.
3. [Login]/[Logout]
These keys are displayed when user authentication is enabled. When you press [Login], the authentication
screen appears. If you have been already logged in to the machine, [Logout] appears. To log out of the
machine, press [Logout].
For details about how to log in and out, see page 71 "Logging In the Machine".
4. [Energy Saver]
Press to switch to Low Power mode or Sleep mode.
For details about the modes, see "Saving Energy", Getting Started.

46
How to Use the [Home] Screen

5. Application list icon


Press to display the application list. You can create shortcuts to the applications on the [Home] screen.
To use an application displayed in the [Widgets] tab and [Program] tab, create a shortcut for the application
on the [Home] screen. For details, see "Customizing the [Home] Screen", Convenient Functions.
6. Icons to switch between screens
Press to switch between the five home screens. The icons appear at the bottom right and left of the screen, the
number of icons indicates the number of screens on each side of the current screen.
7. [Stop]
Press to stop a job in progress, such as copying, scanning, faxing, or printing.
8. [Menu]
Displays the menu screen of the application you are using. Depending on the application you are using, this
key may be disabled. You can also press this key in the [Home] screen to restore the [Home] screen's settings
to their defaults.
9. [Home]
Press to display the [Home] screen.
10. [Return]
Press this key to return to the previous screen while Screen Features are enabled or applications are used.
Depending on the application you are using, this key may be disabled. You can specify whether this key is
enabled or not in some applications. For details about the settings, see "Screen Features", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
11. [Check Status]
Press to check the machine's system status, operational status of each function, and current jobs. You can also
display the job history and the machine's maintenance information.
12. Icon display area
Displays the function or application icons and widgets. Displayed icons differ between the five home screens.
For details about icons on each screen, see "Main Icons on the [Home] Screen", Getting Started.
You can also add shortcuts and arrange icons using folders. For details, see "Customizing the [Home]
Screen", Convenient Functions.

• You can change the [Home] screen's wallpaper. For details, see "Changing the [Home] Screen's
Wallpaper", Convenient Functions.
• You can switch modes by pressing icons on the [Home] screen. You can also switch modes by
pressing the function keys. For details about the function keys, see "Changing Modes by Pressing
the Function Keys", Getting Started.
• You cannot switch modes in any of the following situations:
• While scanning an original using the fax or scanner function
• When accessing the following screens:
• Machine Features

47
2. Getting Started

• Counter
• Inquiry
• Address Book Management
• Tray Paper Settings
• Current Job / Job History
• During interrupt copying
• During On-hook dialing for fax transmission
• The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on. You can change this
default setting under Function Priority. See "Screen Features", Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.

Possible Operations on the Standard Application Screen

• Pinch-in
Place your thumb and forefinger on the screen, and then pinch the fingers together to zoom out the
screen. Double-tapping can also be effective for this operation.

DNE103

• Pinch-out
Place your thumb and forefinger on the screen, and then spread the fingers apart to zoom in the
screen. Double-tapping can also be effective for this operation.

DNE104

• Flick

48
How to Use the [Home] Screen

Flick your finger to the right or left on the screen to switch between screens.

DNE102

• Long tap
Place your finger on the screen and hold it there until the next screen appears. You can display the
menu screen of the application you are using.

DNE101

• Drag
Slide your finger while pressing the screen. You can move an icon to where you want to place it on
the screen.

DNE111

Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen

Adding shortcuts to the [Home] screen

You can add shortcuts to the machine's functions.

49
2. Getting Started

You can display the icons for the machine's functions and the embedded software applications after you
delete them from the [Home] screen.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press .
3. Press the [Apps] tab to add a shortcut to an application other than the Classic
Applications. Press the [Program] tab to add a shortcut to one of the Classic Applications.
4. Press and hold down the application icon to add a shortcut to an application other than
the Classic Applications. Press and hold down the [Classic Applications] icon to add a
shortcut to one of the Classic Applications.
The image of where the shortcut is to be placed on the [Home] screen is displayed.
5. Drag the icon to where you want to place it on the screen.
If you want to add a shortcut to classic applications, proceed to Step 6.
6. Select the Classic Applications that you want to add from the list.

Adding shortcuts to bookmarks on the [Home] screen

You can add shortcuts to bookmarks that have been registered in favorites in the Web Browser to the
[Home] screen.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press .
3. Press the [Program] tab.
4. Press and hold down the [Bookmark] icon.
The image of where the shortcut is to be placed on the [Home] screen is displayed.
5. Drag the icon to where you want to place it on the screen.
6. Select the bookmark you want to add from the bookmark list.

Adding shortcuts to programs to the [Home] screen

You can add shortcuts to programs registered on Copier, Facsimile, Scanner mode, or quick
applications.

1. Display the function screen to which you want to register a program.


2. When you are using the standard applications or quick applications, press [Menu] ( ) at
the bottom of the screen in the center. When you are using the Classic Applications, press
[Recall/Program/Change Program] on the bottom left of the screen.
3. Register a program.
4. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

50
How to Use the [Home] Screen

5. Press .
6. Press the [Program] tab.
7. To display a program registered to the standard applications or quick applications, hold
down the application icon. To display a program registered to the Classic Applications,
hold down the [Classic Applications] icon.
The image of where the shortcut is to be placed on the [Home] screen is displayed.
8. Drag the icon to where you want to place it on the screen.
9. Select the program you want to add from the list.

Adding widgets to the [Home] screen

You can add widgets to the [Home] screen to show the remaining amount of toner or change the display
language.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press .
3. Press the [Widget] tab.
4. Press and hold down the widget icon you want to add.
The image of where the widget is to be placed on the [Home] screen is displayed.
5. Drag the icon to where you want to place it on the screen.

51
2. Getting Started

How to Use Each Application


You can open the function screens by pressing icons such as [Copy], [Fax], or [Scanner] on the [Home]
screen.
Three kinds of screens ("Standard Application Screen", "Classic Application Screen", and "Quick
Application Screen") can be used by each function.
Standard Application Screen
Functions and settings that are used frequently are shown on the top screen. Flick the screen up or
down to select a setting item. When you select an item, the pull-down menu appears, or the setting
item pops up. For details about operations on this screen, see page 48 "Possible Operations on the
Standard Application Screen". For details about how to use the screen, see page 53 "[Copy]
Screen", page 55 "[Fax] Screen", and page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".
Classic Application Screen
You can select advanced functions and detailed settings according to the functions and settings you
use frequently. For details about how to use this screen, see" How to Use Each Application",
Getting Started. For details about keys that appear on the screen of each Classic Application, see
"Keys that Appear on the Initial Settings Screen and Screens of Each Classic Application", Getting
Started.
Quick Application Screen
You can easily set the basic operations such as duplex copying, sending scanned documents by e-
mail, or other operations. For details about how to use this screen, see "How to Use Each
Application", Getting Started.

Functions usable on each screen


Screen Functions usable

Standard Application Screen • Copier


• Fax
• Scanner

Classic Application Screen • Copier


• Fax
• Scanner
• Printer
• Document Server

Quick Application Screen • Copier


• Fax
• Scanner

52
How to Use Each Application

• [Copier (Classic)] icon, [Fax (Classic)] icon, [Scanner (Classic)] icon, and [Printer (Classic)] icon
are displayed in the Application list. For details about how to register them to the [Home] screen,
see page 49 "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen".

[Copy] Screen

You can switch the two screens described in this section by flicking the screen up or down.

2 3 4

5
6

DPK063

No. Icon Description

You can adjust the density of the overall original in nine steps.
1
Specify the density by touching the icon and dragging it right or left.

You can reduce or enlarge images.


2

You can specify the paper tray containing the paper you want to copy
3 to.

You can specify the numbers of copies to be made.


4 Press a number to enter the number of copies using the keyboard. You
can also specify the number of copies by pressing [ ] or [ ].

53
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

Preview prints change according to the settings you make.

You can combine two 1-sided originals or one 2-sided original to one
6 side of a sheet. The machine selects a reproduction ratio automatically
and copies the originals onto a single sheet of copy paper.

7 8 9

10

11

DPK064

No. Icon Description

You can sort copies as a set in sequential order and stack copies of each
7 page in a multi-page original.

You can specify the size of the original when copying custom size
8 originals.

You can select an original type that is suitable for your originals.
9

You can divide an original that has many pages and scan it in smaller
10 batches while copying it as a single document. To do this, place several
pages of the original in the ADF.

54
How to Use Each Application

No. Icon Description

You can find other settings.


11

[Fax] Screen

1 2 3 4 5

13 6
12
7

11 10 DLV048

No. Icon Description

The specified destination is shown here.


By tapping the destination, you can register it to
the Address Book or remove it from the
1
destinations.
By flicking up and down, you can confirm the
selected destinations.

You can perform the following operations


related to Fax Reception:
• Check Stored Reception Files
• Operate Personal Box
2
• Print ID Required Print Files
• Manual Reception
• Print Memory Lock
• Check Reception File Settings

55
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

This function allows you to dial while listening to


the dial tone from the internal speaker with the
handset of the machine or external telephone
on-hook.

The total number of the selected destinations


appears.
3
Press to display a screen to confirm destinations.
In the screen to confirm destinations, you can do
the following:
• Register destinations to the Address Book
• Edit destinations
• Remove destinations from the destination list

You can perform the following operations


related to Job Status:
• Confirm Transmission Standby Files
4
• Check Transmission Results
• Check Reception Results
• Print Journals

5 Press to clear your current settings.

Press to display the preview screen after


6
scanning originals.

7 You can check the settings in Settings.

Press to open the settings screen. For details, see


8
page 57 "[Settings] screen".

Press to scan originals and start sending.

Press to switch the section of the Address Book.


10

56
How to Use Each Application

No. Icon Description

Shows the destinations in the Address Book.


11

The sections of the Address Book.


12

Press to add a destination.


Destinations can be added as follows:
• Input destinations manually
• Select from the transmission history

13 • Specify a registration number from the


Address Book
• Search for a destination in the Address
Book or on the LDAP server
• Press to display the Remaining Memory
Information

[Settings] screen

You can switch the three screens described in this section by flicking the screen up or down.
1 2 3

4 5 6 DPK065

57
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

You can switch to immediate transmission mode.


Unless immediate transmission is selected,
1
memory transmission mode is selected by
default.

You can select an original type that is suitable for


2 your originals.

Press to select the resolution according to the


size of the text on your original.
3

Press to specify the density to scan the original.


4 You can also specify the density by touching the
icon and dragging it right or left.

Press to select the scanning size of the original.


5

Press to select the sides of the original.


6

7 8 9

10

11

DPK066

58
How to Use Each Application

No. Icon Description

Press to select the orientation of the original.


7

Press to specify the sender.


8

You can specify settings to automatically send


9 files directly or via F-code confidential
communication at a specified time.

Specify the Internet Fax/E-Mail subject.


10

Specify the Internet Fax/E-Mail Text.


11

12 13 14

15 16 17 DPK067

No. Icon Description

You can select a standard message to be


12
printed.

You can send files over a closed network.


13

14 Requesting Reception Confirmation.

59
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

You can receive a transmission notification by e-


15
mail.

Once memory transmission is complete, you can


16 have the result printed.

Specifying Internet Fax/E-Mail Destinations as


17 BCC Addresses.

[Scanner] Screen

1 2 3 4 5

6
13
12
7

11 10 DLV053

No. Icon Description

Displays the type of scanner destination.


1 Press to switch between e-mail destinations and
folder destinations.

The specified destination is shown here.


By tapping the destination, you can register it to the
2 Address Book or remove it from the destinations.
By flicking up and down, you can confirm the
selected destinations.

60
How to Use Each Application

No. Icon Description

The total number of the selected destinations


appears.
Press to display a screen to confirm destinations.
In the screen to confirm destinations, you can do
the following:
3
• Switch the "To", "Cc", and "Bcc" fields of the
e-mail destinations
• Register destinations to the Address Book
• Edit destinations
• Remove destinations from the destination list

Press to display the transmission results screen.


In the transmission results screen, you can do the
following:
4 • Check sent jobs
• Check error descriptions
• Cancel transmission of a document in standby
• Print a list of transmission results

Press to clear your current settings.


5

Press to display the preview screen after scanning


6
originals.

You can check the settings in Send Settings.


7

Press to open the send settings screen. For details,


8
see page 62 "[Send Settings] screen".

Press to scan originals and start sending.

Press to switch the section of the Address Book.


10

61
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

Shows the destinations in the Address Book.


If a password or protection code is specified to a
11 folder destination, enter the password or protection
code on the screen displayed after tapping the
folder destination.

The sections of the Address Book.


12

Press to add a destination.


Destinations can be added as follows:
• Input destinations manually

13 • Select from the transmission history


• Specify a registration number from the
Address Book
• Search for a destination in the Address Book
or on the LDAP server

[Send Settings] screen

You can switch the four screens described in this section by flicking the screen up or down.
1 2 3

4 5 6 DPK068

No. Icon Description

Press to select the settings that are appropriate for


1 the type of your original and the color mode.

62
How to Use Each Application

No. Icon Description

Press to select a file type.


2

3 Press to select the resolution to scan the original.

Press to select the sides of the original to scan, such


4 as one side or both sides.

Press to select the scanning size of the original.


5

Press to specify a file name.


6

7 8 9

10

11

DPK069

No. Icon Description

Press to specify the density to scan the original.


7 You can also specify the density by touching the
icon and dragging it right or left.

Press to select the orientation of the original.


8

Press to specify the sender.


9

63
2. Getting Started

No. Icon Description

Press to enter the subject of the e-mail.


10

Press to enter the main text of the e-mail.


11

12 13 14

15 16 17 DPK070

No. Icon Description

Press to specify the magnification ratio for scanning


12
the original.

Press to erase the image from a specified width


13 around the document and in the center of the
document when the document is scanned.

14 Press to sign and encrypt the e-mail.

Press to scan a large number of originals in several


15 batches and send them together as a single job.
You can place multi-page originals in the ADF.

Press to scan a large number of originals in several


16 batches and send them together as a single job.
Place the originals in the ADF one by one.

Press to divide a multi-page original into parts of a


17 specified number of pages each, and then send the
documents.

64
How to Use Each Application

18 19 DPK071

No. Icon Description

To switch the scan setting for additional originals to


[1 Sided Original] after scanning one side of the
18 last page of a batch of two-sided originals using
the exposure glass, press [Change Setting], and
then press [1 Sided Original].

Press this to notify the sender that the e-mail


19
recipient has opened the e-mail.

65
2. Getting Started

Registering Functions in a Program


Depending on the functions, the number of programs that can be registered is different.
Standard Applications
• Copy: 25 programs
• Fax: 100 programs
• Scanner: 100 programs
Quick Applications
• Quick Copy: 25 programs
• Quick Fax: 100 programs
• Quick Scanner: 100 programs
The following settings can be registered to programs:
Standard Applications
• Copy:
Density, Reduce/Enlarge, Quantity, Paper Tray, 2 Sided, Combine, Sort, Stack, Original
Size, Original Type, Batch, Other Settings
• Fax:
Destination, Preview, Settings
• Scanner:
Destination, Preview, Send Settings
Quick Applications
• Quick Copy:
Density, Paper Tray, Quantity, Reduce/Enlarge, 2 Sided, Combine, Original Orientation
• Quick Fax:
Destination, Line, Density, Resolution, Original Orientation, Original Sides, Scan Size,
Original Type, Preview
• Quick Scanner:
Destination, Original Type, File Type, Resolution, Original Orientation, Original Sides, Scan
Size, Preview
This section explains how to register functions to a program by using each application.
Standard Applications/Quick Applications

1. Edit the settings so all functions you want to register to a program are selected on the
[Copy], [Fax], [Scanner], [Quick Copy], [Quick Fax], or [Quick Scanner] screen.
2. Press [Menu] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

66
Registering Functions in a Program

3. Press [Reg. Current Setting to Program].


4. Press the program number you want to register.
5. Enter the program name.
6. Select the icon for the program.
7. Press [Prev. Screen].
When using the quick application, press [Previous Scr.].
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [Place].
Even if you select [Do not Place], you can add shortcuts to the program to the [Home] screen
after the program registration is complete.
10. Press [Exit].

• The number of characters you can enter for a program name varies depending on the functions as
follows:
• Standard Applications
• Copy: 40 characters
• Fax: 40 characters
• Scanner: 40 characters
• Quick Applications
• Quick Copy: 40 characters
• Quick Fax: 40 characters
• Quick Scanner: 40 characters
• When a specified program is registered as the default, its values become the default settings, which
are displayed without recalling the program, when modes are cleared or reset, and after the
machine is turned on. See "Changing the Default Functions of the Initial Screen", Convenient
Functions.
• When the paper tray you specified in a program is empty and if there is more than one paper tray
with the same size paper in it, the paper tray prioritized under [Paper Tray Priority: Copier] or
[Paper Tray Priority: Fax] in the [Tray Paper Settings] tab will be selected first. For details, see "Tray
Paper Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.
• Destinations can be registered to a program of the scanner mode only when [Include Destinations]
is selected for [Program Setting for Destinations] in [Scanner Features]. For details about the setting,
see "General Settings", Scan.
• Folder destinations that have protection codes cannot be registered to a program of the scanner
mode.

67
2. Getting Started

• Programs are not deleted by turning the power off or by pressing [Reset] unless the program is
deleted or overwritten.
• When you are using the Classic Applications, program numbers with next to them indicate that
the programs have been registered.
• Programs can be registered to the [Home] screen, and can be recalled easily. For details, see
page 49 "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen". Shortcuts to programs stored in Document Server
mode cannot be registered to the [Home] screen.

68
Turning On/Off the Power

Turning On/Off the Power

• When you push the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds after it is confirmed that the main
power indicator has lit up or gone out.
The main power switch is on the right side of the machine. When this switch is turned on, the main power
turns on and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel lights up. When this switch is
turned off, the main power turns off and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel
goes out. When this is done, machine power is off. Fax files in memory may be lost if you turn this switch
off. Use this switch only when necessary.

Turning On the Main Power

1. Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
2. Push the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes on.
After you switch the main power on, the machine might require about 5 minutes before it is ready.

DPK914

Turning Off the Main Power

• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.

• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation.

69
2. Getting Started

• Do not hold down the main power switch while turning off the main power. Doing so forcibly turns
off the machine's power and may damage the hard disk or memory and cause malfunctions.

1. Push the main power switch.


The main power indicator goes out. The main power turns off automatically when the machine shuts
down. If the screen on the control panel does not disappear, contact your service representative.

70
Logging In the Machine

Logging In the Machine


When the Authentication Screen is Displayed

If Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is active, the authentication


screen appears on the display. The machine only becomes operable after entering your own Login User
Name and Login Password. If User Code Authentication is active, you cannot use the machine until you
enter the User Code.
If you can use the machine, you can say that you are logged in. When you go out of the operable state,
you can say that you are logged out. After logging in the machine, be sure to log out of it to prevent
unauthorized usage.

• Ask the user administrator for the Login User Name, Login Password, and User Code. For details
about user authentication, see "Configuring User Authentication", Security Guide.
• User Code to enter on User Code Authentication is the numerical value registered in the Address
Book as "User Code".

User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel

If User Code Authentication is active, a screen prompting you to enter a User Code appears.

1. Enter a User Code (up to eight digits), and then press [OK].

Logging In Using the Control Panel

This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.

71
2. Getting Started

1. Press [Login] on the top right on the screen.

2. Press [User Name].

3. Enter a Login User Name, and then press [Done].


4. Press [Password].
5. Enter a Login Password, and then press [Done].
6. Press [Login].

Logging Out Using the Control Panel

This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.

• To prevent use of the machine by unauthorized persons, always log out when you have finished
using the machine.

1. Press [Logout] on the top right on the screen.

72
Logging In the Machine

2. Press [OK].

73
2. Getting Started

Placing Originals
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass

• Keep your hands away from the hinges and exposure glass when lowering the ADF. Not doing
so may result in an injury if your hands or fingers are pinched.

• Do not lift the ADF forcefully. Otherwise, the cover of the ADF might open or be damaged.

1. Lift the ADF.


2. Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be aligned to the
rear left corner.
Start with the first page to be scanned.

DPK118

1. Positioning mark
3. Lower the ADF.

Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder

Be sure not to load the original untidily. Doing so may cause the machine to display a paper misfeed
message. Also, be sure not to place originals or other objects on the top cover. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.

• When inserting originals in the ADF, push them in once and without force.
• Before inserting originals, remove any originals stacked in the original output tray.
• Once originals start to feed in, do not push or pull them.

74
Placing Originals

• Do not mix different size originals.

DPK120

1. Original guide

1. Adjust the original guide to the original size.


2. Place the aligned originals squarely face up in the ADF.
Do not stack originals beyond the limit mark.
The first page should be on the top.

DPK121

1. Limit mark

75
2. Getting Started

76
3. Copy
This chapter describes frequently used copier functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Copy/ Document Server available on our website.

Basic Procedure
To make copies of originals, place them on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
When placing the original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to be copied. When placing
the original in the ADF, place them so that the first page is on the top.
About placing the original on the exposure glass, see page 74 "Placing Originals on the Exposure
Glass".
About placing the original in the ADF, see page 74 "Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder".
To copy onto paper other than plain paper, specify the paper type in User Tools according to the weight
of the paper you are using. For details, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

77
3. Copy

Auto Reduce / Enlarge


The machine automatically calculates the reproduction ratio based on the sizes of the originals and the
paper you have specified. The machine will rotate, enlarge, or reduce the image of the originals to fit
them to the paper.

CKN008

• If you select a reproduction ratio after pressing [Auto Reduce / Enlarge], [Auto Reduce / Enlarge]
is canceled and the image cannot be rotated automatically.
This is useful to copy different size originals to the same size paper.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

78
Duplex Copying

Duplex Copying
Copies two 1-sided pages or one 2-sided page onto a 2-sided page. During copying, the image is
shifted to allow for the binding margin.

CKN009

There are two types of Duplex.


1 Sided 2 Sided
Copies two 1-sided pages on one 2-sided page.
2 Sided 2 Sided
Copies one 2-sided page on one 2-sided page.
The resulting copy image will differ according to the orientation in which you place your originals ( or
).
Original orientation and completed copies
To copy on both sides of the paper, select the original and copy orientation according to how you
want the printout to appear.

Original
Original Placing originals Orientation Copy
Orientation

Top to Top

Top to Bottom

79
3. Copy

Original
Original Placing originals Orientation Copy
Orientation

Top to Top

Top to Bottom

When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation

Select the orientation of the originals and copies if the original is two-sided or if you want to copy onto
both sides of the paper.
• Top to Top

CKN011

• Top to Bottom

CKN012

80
Duplex Copying

When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

81
3. Copy

Combined Copying
This mode can be used to select a reproduction ratio automatically and copy the originals onto a single
sheet of copy paper.
The machine selects a reproduction ratio between 25 and 400%. If the orientation of the original is
different from that of the copy paper, the machine will automatically rotate the image by 90 degrees to
make copies properly.
Orientation of the original and image position of Combine
The image position of Combine differs according to original orientation and the number of originals
to be combined.
• Portrait ( ) originals

CKN015

• Landscape ( ) originals

CKN016

Placing originals (originals placed in the ADF)


The default value for the copy order in the Combine function is [From Left to Right]. To copy
originals from right to left in the ADF, place them upside down.
• Originals read from left to right

82
Combined Copying

CKN010

• Originals read from right to left

CKN017

One-Sided Combine

Combine several pages onto one side of a sheet.

CKN014

There are six types of One-Sided Combine.


1 Sided 2 Originals Combine 1 Side
Copies two 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1 Sided 4 Originals Combine 1 Side
Copies four 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1 Sided 8 Originals Combine 1 Side
Copies eight 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1 Side
Copies one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet.

83
3. Copy

2 Sided 4 Pages Combine 1 Side


Copies two 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 8 Pages Combine 1 Side
Copies four 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

Two-Sided Combine

Combines various pages of originals onto two sides of one sheet.

CKN074

There are six types of Two-Sided Combine.


1 Sided 4 Originals Combine 2 Sides
Copies four 1-sided originals to one sheet with 2 pages per side.
1 Sided 8 Originals Combine 2 Sides
Copies eight 1-sided originals to one sheet with 4 pages per side.
1 Sided 16 Originals Combine 2 Sides
Copies 16 1-sided originals to one sheet with 8 pages per side.
2 Sided 4 Pages Combine 2 Sides
Copies two 2-sided originals to one sheet with 2 pages per side.

84
Combined Copying

2 Sided 8 Pages Combine 2 Sides


Copies four 2-sided originals to one sheet with 4 pages per side.
2 Sided 16 Pages Combine 2 Sides
Copies eight 2-sided originals to one sheet with 8 pages per side.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

85
3. Copy

Copying onto Custom Size Paper


Paper that has a horizontal length of 70.0–216.0 mm (2.76–8.50 inches) and a vertical length of
148.0–356.0 mm (5.83–14.01 inches) can be fed in from the bypass tray.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

86
Copying onto Envelopes

Copying onto Envelopes


This section describes how to copy onto regular size and custom size envelopes. Place the original on
the exposure glass and place the envelope in the bypass tray or paper tray.
Specify the thickness of the paper according to the weight of the envelopes you are printing on. For
details about the relationship between paper weight and paper thickness and the sizes of envelopes that
can be used, see page 148 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
About handling envelopes, supported envelope types, and how to load envelopes, see page 153
"Envelopes".

• The Duplex function cannot be used with envelopes. If the Duplex function is specified, press [1
sided 2 sided:TtoT] to cancel the setting.
To copy onto custom size envelopes, you must specify the envelope's dimensions. Specify the horizontal
and vertical length of the envelope.

DPK202

: Horizontal
: Vertical

87
3. Copy

When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

88
Sort

Sort
The machine assembles copies as sets in sequential order.

CKN018

When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

Changing the Number of Sets

You can change the number of copy sets during copying.

• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected.
When Using the Copy Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 53 "[Copy] Screen".

89
3. Copy

Storing Data in the Document Server


The Document Server enables you to store documents being read with the copy feature on the hard disk
of this machine. Thus you can print them later applying necessary conditions.
You can check the stored documents on the Document Server screen. For details about the Document
Server, see page 131 "Storing Data".

1. Press [Store File].

2. Enter a user name, file name, or password if necessary.


3. Specify a folder in which to store the document if necessary.
4. Press [OK].
5. Place the originals.
6. Make the scanning settings for the original.
7. Select the paper tray.
8. Press [Start].
Stores scanned originals in memory and makes one set of copies. If you want to store another
document, do so after copying is complete.

90
4. Fax
This chapter describes frequently used facsimile functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Fax available on our website.

Basic Procedure for Transmissions (Memory


Transmission)
This section describes the basic procedure for transmitting documents using Memory Transmission.
You can specify the fax, IP-Fax, Internet Fax, e-mail, or folder destinations. Multiple types of destination
can be specified simultaneously.

• It is recommended that you call the receivers and confirm with them when sending important
documents.
• If there is a power failure (the main power switch is turned off) or the machine is unplugged for
about one hour, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. As soon as the main power
switch is turned on, the Power Failure Report is printed to help you check the list of deleted files. See
"When an Error Is Notified via a Report or E-Mail", Troubleshooting.
When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

Registering a Fax Destination

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Press [New Program].
5. Press [Change] under "Name".
The name entry display appears.
6. Enter the name, and then press [OK].

91
4. Fax

7. Press [ Next].
8. Press the key for the classification you want to use under "Select Title".

The keys you can select are as follows:


• [Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added to the
list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more key for each title.
9. Press [Fax Dest.].
10. Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".
11. Enter the fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK].

12. Specify optional settings such as "SUB Code", "SEP Code", and "International TX Mode".
13. Press [OK].
14. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
15. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

92
Basic Procedure for Transmissions (Memory Transmission)

Deleting a Fax Destination

• If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to its registered
Personal Box, for example, cannot be delivered. Be sure to check the settings in the fax function
before deleting any destinations.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Select the name whose fax destination you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, user code, fax number, folder name, e-mail address, or IP-
Fax destination.
5. Press [Fax Dest.].
6. Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".
7. Press [Delete All], and then press [OK] under "Fax Destination".

8. Press [OK].
9. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
10. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

93
4. Fax

Transmitting while Checking Connection to


Destination (Immediate Transmission)
Using Immediate Transmission, you can send documents while checking the connection to the
destination.
You can specify fax or IP-Fax destinations.
If you specify Internet Fax, e-mail, folder destinations, and group or multiple destinations, the
transmission mode is automatically switched to Memory Transmission.

• It is recommended that you call the receivers and confirm with them when sending important
documents.
When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

94
Canceling a Transmission

Canceling a Transmission
This section explains how to cancel a fax transmission.

Canceling a Transmission Before the Original Is Scanned

Use this procedure to cancel a transmission before pressing [Start].


When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

Canceling a Transmission While the Original Is Being Scanned

Use this procedure to cancel scanning or transmitting of the original while it is being scanned.
If you cancel a transmission using the standard memory transmission function, you need to follow a
different procedure to cancel the transmission. See page 95 "Canceling a Transmission After the
Original Is Scanned".
When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

Canceling a Transmission After the Original Is Scanned

Use this procedure to cancel a transmission after the original is scanned.

95
4. Fax

You can cancel transmission of a file while the file is being sent, stored in memory, or if it fails to transmit.
All the scanned data is deleted from memory.
When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

96
Storing a Document

Storing a Document
You can store and send a document at the same time. You can also just store a document.
The following information can be set for the stored documents as necessary:
User Name
You can set this function if necessary to know who and what departments stored documents in the
machine. A user name can be selected from the Address Book or entered manually.
File Name
You can specify a name for a stored document. If you do not specify a name, scanned documents
will be automatically assigned names such as "FAX0001" or "FAX0002".
Password
You can set this function so as not to send to unspecified people. A four to eight digit number can
be specified as a password.
You can also change the file information after storing files.

1. Place the original, and then specify the scan settings you require.
Specify the [Original Orientation] setting correctly. If you do not, the top/bottom orientation of the
original will not be displayed correctly in the preview.
2. Press [Store File].

3. Select [Send & Store] or [Store Only].


Select [Send & Store] to send documents after they are stored.
Select [Store Only] to store documents.

97
4. Fax

4. Set the user name, file name, and password as necessary.

• User Name
Press [User Name], and then select a user name. To specify an unregistered user name, press
[Manual Entry], and then enter the name. After specifying a user name, press [OK].
• File Name
Press [File Name], enter a file name, and then press [OK].
• Password
Press [Password], enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK]. Re-enter the
password for confirmation, and then press [OK].
5. Press [OK].
6. If you have selected [Send & Store], specify the receiver.
7. Press [Start].

Sending Stored Documents

The machine sends documents stored with the facsimile function in the Document Server.
The documents stored in the Document Server can be sent again and again until they are deleted.
The stored documents are sent with the scan settings made when they were stored.
You cannot use the following transmission methods:
• Immediate Transmission
• Parallel Memory Transmission
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial

98
Storing a Document

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Select the documents to be sent.


When multiple documents are selected, they are sent in the order of selection.
• Press [User Name] to place the documents in order by programmed user name.
• Press [File Name] to place the documents in alphabetical order.
• Press [Date] to place the documents in order of programmed date.
• Press [Queue] to arrange the order of the documents to be sent.
To view details about stored documents, press [Details].
Press the Thumbnails key to switch the screen to thumbnail display.
3. If you select a document with a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
4. When you want to add your originals to stored documents and send them all at once,
press [Original Stored File] or [Stored file Original].
When [Original Stored File] is pressed, the machine sends the originals, and then stored files.
When [Stored file Original] is pressed, the machine sends the stored files, and then originals.
5. Press [OK].
6. To add an original to stored documents, place the original, and then select any scan
settings you require.
7. Specify the destination, and then press [Start].

99
4. Fax

Printing the Journal Manually


To print the Journal manually, select the printing method: [All], [Print per File No.], or [Print per User].
All
Prints the results of communications in the order made.
Print per File No.
Prints only the results of communications specified by file number.
Print per User
Prints the results of communications by individual senders.
When Using the Fax Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 55 "[Fax] Screen".

100
5. Print
This chapter describes frequently used printer functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Print available on our website.

Quick Install
You can install the printer drivers easily from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

Quick Installation via a Network

Using Network Quick Install, the PCL 6 printer driver is installed under network environment, and the
Standard TCP/IP port will be set.

1. Click [Network Quick Install] on the installer screen.


2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
5. Click [Install].
6. When the port setting screen appears, specify a port.
7. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
8. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
9. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
10. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.

Quick Installation via a USB Connection

Using USB Quick Install, you can install the PCL 6 printer driver via a USB connection, and configure
settings to connect the printer to a computer.

101
5. Print

1. Click [USB Quick Install] on the installer screen.


2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select the method to install a printer driver, and then click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use, and then click [Next >].
5. Make sure the machine is turned off and not connected to the computer, and then click
[Next >].
Wait for a moment until file copying is complete and [<Auto-detect USB Port>] screen appears.
6. Connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, and then turn on the machine.
The auto-detecting starts.
7. In the confirmation dialog box, select [Yes] if you want to use the machine as your default
printer.
8. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
9. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.

102
Displaying the Printer Driver Properties

Displaying the Printer Driver Properties


This section explains how to open the printer driver properties from [Devices and Printers].

• Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer settings. Log on as an Administrators
group member.
• You cannot change the machine default settings for individual users. Settings made in the printer
properties dialog box are applied to all users.

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].


2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Printer properties].

103
5. Print

Standard Printing

• Duplex printing is selected as the default setting. If you want to print on only one side, select [Off]
for the two-sided printing setting.
• If you send a print job via USB 2.0 while the machine is in Low Power mode or Sleep mode, an
error message might appear when the print job is complete. In this case, check if the document was
printed.

When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Select the [Frequently Used Settings] tab.
5. In the "Job Type:" list, select [Normal Print].
6. In the "Document Size:" list, select the size of the original to be printed.
7. In the "Orientation" area, select [Portrait] or [Landscape] as the orientation of the
original.
8. In the "Paper Type:" list, select the type of paper that is loaded in the paper tray.
9. In the "Input Tray:" list, select the paper tray that contains the paper you want to print
onto.
If you select [Auto Tray Select] in the "Input Tray:" list, the paper tray is automatically selected
according to the paper size and type specified.
10. If you want to print multiple copies, specify a number of sets in the "Copies:" box.
11. Click [OK].
12. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

104
Printing on Both Sides of Sheets

Printing on Both Sides of Sheets


This section explains how to print on both sides of each page using the printer driver.

• The types of paper that can be printed on both sides are as follows:
• Plain 1 (64–74g/m2), Plain 2 (75–90g/m2), Recycled, Special 1, Special 2, Special 3,
Middle Thick (91–105g/m2), Thick 1 (106–120g/m2), Color, Letterhead, Preprinted, Bond

When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Frequently Used Settings] tab.
You can also click the [Detailed Settings] tab, and then click [2 Sided/Layout/Booklet] in the
"Menu:" box.
5. Select the method for binding the output pages in the "2 sided:" list.
6. Change any other print settings if necessary.
7. Click [OK].
8. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

Types of Two-sided Printing

You can select which way the bound pages open by specifying which edge to bind.

Orientation Open to Left Open to Top

Portrait

Landscape

105
5. Print

Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page


This section explains how to print multiple pages onto a single sheet. The combine printing function
allows you to economize on paper by printing multiple sheets at reduced size onto a single sheet.

When Using the PCL 6 Printer Driver

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Frequently Used Settings] tab.
You can also click the [Detailed Settings] tab, and then click [2 Sided/Layout/Booklet] in the
"Menu:" box.
5. Select the combination pattern in the "Layout:" list, and then specify the method for
combining pages in the "Page Order:" list.
To draw a border line around each page, select the [Draw Frame Border] checkbox in [2 Sided/
Layout/Booklet] in the [Detailed Settings] tab.
6. Change any other print settings if necessary.
7. Click [OK].
8. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

Types of Combine Printing

This function allows you to print 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages at reduced size onto a single sheet and to
specify a page ordering pattern for the combination. When combining 4 or more pages onto a single
sheet of paper, four patterns are available.
The following illustrations show example page ordering patterns for 2- and 4-page combinations.
2 Pages per Sheet

From Left to Right/Top to From Right to Left/Top to


Orientation
Bottom Bottom

Portrait

106
Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page

From Left to Right/Top to From Right to Left/Top to


Orientation
Bottom Bottom

Landscape

4 Pages per Sheet

Right, then Down Down, then Right Left, then Down Down, then Left

107
5. Print

Printing on Envelopes
Configure the paper settings appropriately using both the printer driver and the control panel.

Configuring Envelope Settings Using the Control Panel

1. Load envelopes in the paper tray.


2. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
3. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
4. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
5. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
6. Select the envelope size, and then press [OK].
7. Press [ Next].
8. Select the paper type setting of the paper tray in which the envelopes are loaded.
9. Press [Envelope] in the "Paper Type" area, and then select the appropriate item in the
"Paper Thickness" area.
10. Press [OK].
11. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
12. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Printing on Envelopes Using the Printer Driver

When using the PCL 6 printer driver

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. In the "Document Size:" list, select the envelope size.
5. In the "Input Tray:" list, select the paper tray in which the envelopes are loaded.
6. In the "Paper Type:" list, select [Envelope].
7. Change any other print settings if necessary.
8. Click [OK].
9. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

108
Saving and Printing Using the Document Server

Saving and Printing Using the Document


Server
The Document Server enables you to store documents on the machine's hard disk, and allows you to edit
and print them as necessary.

• Do not cancel the file transfer process while the data is being sent to the Document Server. The
process may not be canceled properly. If you accidentally cancel a print job, use the control panel
of the machine to delete the transferred data. For details about how to delete documents that are
stored in the Document Server, see "Deleting Stored Documents", Copy/ Document Server, or
Web Image Monitor Help.
• Up to 3,000 files can be stored in the Document Server. New files cannot be stored when 3,000
files have already been stored. Even if less than 3,000 files are stored, new files cannot be stored
when
• The number of pages in a document exceeds 2,000.
• The total number of stored pages in the machine and the sent data has reached 9,000 (It may
be fewer depending on the print data).
• The hard disk is full.
• Data stored in the Document Server is specified to be deleted after three days (72 hours) by the
factory default. We recommend you back up the data.
You can send data created on a client computer to the Document Server.

Storing Documents in Document Server

• If the machine is not used as the Document Server, the maximum number of the documents that can
be stored in the server may be less than the number described in the specification.

1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. In the "Job Type:" list, click [Document Server].
5. Click [Details...].
6. Enter a user ID, file name, password, and user name as required.
7. Specify the folder number to store the document in the "Folder Number:" box.
When "0" is specified in the "Folder Number:" box, documents will be saved in the Shared folder.

109
5. Print

8. If the folder is protected by a password, enter the password in the "Folder Password:"
box.
9. Click [OK].
10. Change any other print settings if necessary.
11. Click [OK].
12. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

• You can print the documents stored in the Document Server using the control panel. For details, see
page 133 "Printing Stored Documents".

Managing Documents Stored in Document Server

You can view or delete the documents stored in the machine's Document Server using Web Image
Monitor from a client computer connected to the network.

110
Using the Quick Print Release Function

Using the Quick Print Release Function


The quick applications that are installed on this machine allow you to operate some of the printer
functions from a single screen. Using the Quick Print Release function, you can view the list of documents
that are stored on the machine. From the list, any documents can be selected and printed. The print
settings of the document and the date and time to send the document can be changed as well.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Quick Print Release] icon.
3. Select the user as required.
4. If necessary, enter the password for the documents.
The list of both the documents that have not password specified, and that matches the entered
password is displayed.

5. Select documents.
More than one document can be selected at one time.
You can perform the following operations on the selected documents:
• Delete
Deletes the selected documents.
• Preview
Shows the preview image of the first page of the document.
• Change Setg
Configures the print settings of the document.
• File Managmnt
Specifies the date and time to send the document, and the password.
The file information cannot be modified when more than one document is selected.
6. Press [Print].

111
5. Print

• If you change settings for [Administrator Authentication Management] or [Enhance File Protection]
using an external application such as Web Image Monitor while using the Quick Print Release
function, this function is terminated automatically.

112
Using the Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device) Function

Using the Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device)


Function
The Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device) function allows you to read and print files that are stored on a
memory storage device such as an SD card or USB flash memory device. Also, you can save the
scanned data on a memory storage device.
The files in the following formats can be printed using the Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device) function:
JPEG, TIFF, PDF, and XPS. The scanned data can be saved in JPEG, TIFF, or PDF format.
Printing a file in a memory storage device

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device)] icon.
3. Press [Media Print].
4. Insert a memory storage device in the media slot.
5. Press [USB] or [SD Card], depending on the type of the storage device.
6. Select the document to print.

You can perform the following operations on the selected document:


• Preview
Shows the preview image of the first page of the document.
• Selected
Displays the list of the selected documents.
7. If necessary, press [Print Settings] to change the settings such as the number of copies
or duplex printing.
8. Press [Start].
Saving the scanned data in a memory storage device

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device)] icon.
3. Press [Scan to Media].

113
5. Print

4. Insert a memory storage device in the media slot.


5. Press [USB] or [SD Card], depending on the type of the storage device that you are
using.
6. Specify the location to save the scanned data.

7. Place the original.


8. If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to change the settings such as the file type or scan
resolution.
9. To see the scanned image before saving it to a file, press [Preview].
10. Press [Start].
11. Press [Finish Scan] after scanning of the original has been completed.
If there are more originals to be scanned, place the next original, and then press [Scan Next
Original].
12. When the preview screen appears, check the scanned image, and then press [Save].

• If the file name is not specified in [Scan Settings], the scanned image is saved under the name
that conforms to the following naming rules:
• For single page format:
Transmission date and time (YYYYMMDDHHMMSSMMM) + 4 digit serial page number
(_nnnn) + extension (.tif/.jpg/.pdf)
For example, when you send 10-page original in jpeg format at 15:30:15.5 on Dec.
31, 2020, the file names are from "20201231153015500_0001.jpg" to
"20201231153015500_0010.jpg".
• For multi page format:
Transmission date and time (YYYYMMDDHHMMSSMMM) + extension (.tif/.jpg/.pdf)
For example, when you send 10-page original in PDF format at 15:30:15.5 on Dec. 31,
2020, the file name is "20201231153015500.pdf".
• When you save scanned data to a memory storage device, use characters which correspond
to the ASCII codes for the file name. If you use characters which is not correspond to the
ASCII codes, the machine may not read or save the documents.

114
Using the Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device) Function

• Certain types of USB flash memory device and SD cards cannot be used.

115
5. Print

116
6. Scan
This chapter describes frequently used scanner functions and operations. For information not included in
this chapter, see Scan available on our website.

Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder

• Before performing this procedure, see "Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder", Scan and
confirm the details of the destination computer. See also "Registering Folders", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings, and register the address of the destination computer to the address
book.
When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer Running Windows/Confirming a


Computer's Information

The following procedures explain how to create a shared folder on a computer running Windows, and
how to confirm the computer's information. In these examples, Windows 7 is the operating system, and
the computer is a member in a network domain. Write down the confirmed information.

Step 1: Confirming the user name and computer name

Confirm the user name and the name of the computer you will send scanned documents to.

1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], click [Accessories], and then click
[Command Prompt].
2. Enter the command "ipconfig/all", and then press the [Enter] key.
3. Confirm the name of the computer.
The computer's name is displayed under [Host Name].

117
6. Scan

You can also confirm the IPv4 address. The address displayed under [IPv4 Address] is the IPv4
address of the computer.
4. Enter the command "set user", and then press the [Enter] key.
Be sure to put a space between "set" and "user".
5. Confirm the user name.
The user name is displayed under [USERNAME].

Step 2: Creating a shared folder on a computer running Microsoft Windows

Create a shared destination folder in Windows and enable sharing. In the following procedure, a
computer which is running under Windows 7 and participating in a domain is used as an example.

• You must log in as an Administrators group member to create a shared folder.


• If "Everyone" is left selected in Step 6, the created shared folder will be accessible by all users. This
is a security risk, so we recommend that you give access rights only to specific users. Use the
following procedure to remove "Everyone" and specify user access rights.

1. Create a folder, just as you would create a normal folder, in a location of your choice on
the computer.
2. Right-click the folder, and then click [Properties].
3. On the [Sharing] tab, click [Advanced Sharing...].
4. Select the [Share this folder] check box.
5. Click [Permissions].
6. In the [Group or user names:] list, select "Everyone", and then click [Remove].
7. Click [Add...].
8. In the [Select Users, Computers, Service Accounts, or Groups] window, click
[Advanced...].
9. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
10. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
11. In the [Select Users, Computers, Service Accounts, or Groups] window, click [OK].
12. In the [Group or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full Control] or [Change] check box.
Configure the access permissions for each group and user.
13. Click [OK].

118
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder

Step 3: Specifying access privileges for the created shared folder

If you want to specify access privileges for the created folder to allow other users or groups to access
the folder, configure the folder as follows:

1. Right-click the folder created in Step 2, and then click [Properties].


2. On the [Security] tab, click [Edit...].
3. Click [Add...].
4. In the [Select Users, Computers, Service Accounts, or Groups] window, click
[Advanced...].
5. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
6. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
7. In the [Select Users, Computers, Service Accounts, or Groups] window, click [OK].
8. In the [Groups or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full Control] or [Modify] check box.
9. Click [OK].

Registering an SMB Folder

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Press [New Program].
5. Press [Change] under "Name".
The name entry display appears.
6. Enter the name, and then press [OK].
7. Press [ Next].

119
6. Scan

8. Press the key for the classification you want to use under "Select Title".

The keys you can select are as follows:


• [Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added to the
list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more key for each title.
9. Press [Auth. Info], and then press [ Next].

10. Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of "Folder Authentication".
When [Do not Specify] is selected, the SMB User Name and SMB Password that you have
specified in "Default User Name / Password (Send)" of File Transfer settings are applied.
11. Press [Change] under "Login User Name".
12. Enter the login user name of the destination computer, and then press [OK].
13. Press [Change] under "Login Password".
14. Enter the password of the destination computer, and then press [OK].
15. Enter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].
16. Press [Folder].

120
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder

17. Check that [SMB] is selected.

18. Press [Change] or [Browse Network], and then specify the folder.
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder by browsing the
network.
19. Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
20. Press [Exit].
If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
21. Press [OK].
22. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
23. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Locating the SMB folder manually

1. Press [Change] under "Path".


2. Enter the path where the folder is located.
For example: if the name of the destination computer is "User", and the folder name is "Share", the
path will be \\User\Share.

121
6. Scan

If the network does not allow automatic obtaining of IP addresses, include the destination
computer's IP address in the path. For example: if the IP address of the destination computer is
"192.168.0.191", and the folder name is "Share", the path will be \\192.168.0.191\Share.
3. Press [OK].
If the format of the entered path is not correct, a message appears. Press [Exit], and then enter the
path again.

Locating the SMB folder using Browse Network

1. Press [Browse Network].


The client computers sharing the same network as the machine appear.
Network display only lists client computers you are authorized to access.
2. Select the group that contains the destination computer.
3. Select the computer name of the destination computer.
Shared folders under it appear.

You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.


4. Select the folder you want to register.
5. Press [OK].

Deleting an SMB Registered Folder

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Select the name whose folder you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.

122
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder

You can search by the registered name, user code, fax number, folder name, e-mail address, or IP-
Fax destination.
5. Press [Folder].
6. Press the protocol which is not currently selected.
A confirmation message appears.
7. Press [Yes].
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
10. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Entering the Path to the Destination Manually

When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

123
6. Scan

Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-


mail
When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

Registering an E-mail Destination

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Press [New Program].
5. Press [Change] under "Name".
The name entry display appears.
6. Enter the name, and then press [OK].
7. Press [ Next].
8. Press the key for the classification you want to use under "Select Title".

The keys you can select are as follows:


• [Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.

124
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added to the
list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more key for each title.
9. Press [Email].
10. Press [Change] under "Email Address".

11. Enter the e-mail address, and then press [OK].

12. Select [Email / Internet Fax Destination] or [Internet Fax Destination Only].
If [Email / Internet Fax Destination] is specified, registered e-mail addresses appear in both Internet
fax address display and e-mail address display on the fax function screen, and in the address
display on the scanner function screen.
If [Internet Fax Destination Only] is specified, registered e-mail addresses only appear in Internet
fax display on the fax function screen.
13. If you want to use Internet fax, specify whether or not to use "Send via SMTP Server".
14. Press [OK].
15. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
16. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

125
6. Scan

Deleting an E-mail Destination

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [Address Book Management] icon.
3. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
4. Select the name whose e-mail address you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys. You can search by the
registered name, user code, fax number, folder name, e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination.
5. Press [Email].
6. Press [Change] under "Email Address".
7. Press [Delete All], and then press [OK].
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
10. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Entering an E-mail Address Manually

When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

126
Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files

Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files

• You can specify a password for each stored file. We recommend that you protect stored files from
unauthorized access by specifying passwords.
• Scan file stored in the machine may be lost if some kind of failure occurs. We advise against using
the hard disk to store important files. The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage that may
result from the loss of files.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Scanner (Classic)] icon.
3. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press [Reset].
4. Place originals.
5. Press [Store File].

6. Press [Store to HDD].


7. If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File Name],
[Password], and [Select Folder].
• User Name
Press [User Name], and then select a user name. To specify an unregistered user name, press
[Manual Entry], and then enter the name. After specifying a user name, press [OK].
• File Name
Press [File Name], enter a file name, and then press [OK].
• Password
Press [Password], enter a password, and then press [OK]. Re-enter the password for
confirmation, and then press [OK].
• Select Folder
Press [Select Folder], specify the folder in which to save the stored files, and then press [OK].

127
6. Scan

8. Press [OK].
9. If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as resolution and scan
size.
10. Press [Start].

Checking a Stored File Selected from the List

This section explains how to preview a file selected from the list of stored files.

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Specify the folder in which the file you want to check is stored.
3. From the list of stored files, select the file you want to check.
You can select more than one file.
4. Press [Preview].

128
Specifying the File Type

Specifying the File Type


This section explains the procedure for specifying the file type of a file you want to send.
File types can be specified when sending files by e-mail or Scan to Folder, sending stored files by e-mail
or Scan to Folder, and saving files on a memory storage device.
You can select one of the following file types:
• Single Page: [TIFF / JPEG], [PDF]
If you select a single-page file type when scanning multiple originals, one file is created for each
single page and the number of files sent is the same as the number of pages scanned.
• Multi-page: [TIFF], [PDF]
If you select a multi-page file type when scan multiple originals, scanned pages are combined and
sent as a single file.
Selectable file types differ depending on the scan settings and other conditions. For details about file
types, see "Notes about and limitations of file types", Scan.
When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

129
6. Scan

Specifying Scan Settings


When Using the Scanner Application

About how to use the application's screen, see page 60 "[Scanner] Screen".

130
7. Document Server
This chapter describes frequently used Document Server functions and operations. For information not
included in this chapter, see Copy/ Document Server available on our website.

Storing Data
This section describes the procedure for storing documents on the Document Server.

• A document accessed with a correct password remains selected even after operations are
complete, and it can be accessed by other users. After the operation, be sure to press [Reset] to
cancel the document selection.
• The user name registered to a stored document in the Document Server is to identify the document
creator and type. It is not to protect confidential documents from others.
• When turning on the fax transmission or scanning by the scanner, make sure that all other
operations are ended.
File Name
A file name such as "COPY0001" and "COPY0002" is automatically attached to the scanned
document. You can change the file name.
User Name
You can register a user name to identify the user or user group that stored the documents. To assign
it, select the user name registered in the Address Book, or enter the name directly. Depending on
the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name].
For details about the Address Book, see "Registering Addresses and Users", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
Password
To prevent unauthorized printing, you can specify a password for any stored document. A
protected document can only be accessed if its password is entered. If a password is specified for
the documents, the lock icon appears on the left side of the file name.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Document Server] icon.
3. Press [To Scanning Screen].
4. Press [Target Fldr. to Store].
5. Specify a folder in which to store the document, and then press [OK].
6. Press [User Name].

131
7. Document Server

7. Specify a user name, and then press [OK].


The user names shown are names that were registered in the Address Book. To specify a name not
shown in the screen, press [Manual Entry], and then enter a user name.
8. Press [File Name].
9. Enter a file name, and then press [OK].
10. Press [Password].
11. Enter a password with the number keys, and then press [OK].
You can use four to eight digits for the password.
12. For double-check, enter the password again, and then press [OK].
13. Place the original.
14. Select the paper tray.
15. Specify the original scanning conditions.
16. Press [Start].
The original is scanned. The document is saved in the Document Server.
After scanning, a list of folders will be displayed. If the list does not appear, press [Finish Scanning].

132
Printing Stored Documents

Printing Stored Documents


Prints stored documents on the Document Server.
The items you can specify on the printing screen are as follows:
• Paper tray
• The number of prints
• [2 Sided Copy Top to Top], [2 Sided Copy Top to Bottom], [Booklet], [Magazine]
• [Finishing] ([Sort])
• [Cover/Slip Sheet] ([Front Cover], [Front/Back Cover], [Designate/Chapter], [Slip Sheet])
• [Edit / Stamp] ([Margin Adj.], [Stamp])
For details about each function, see the each section.

1. Select a folder.

2. Select a document to be printed.


3. When printing two or more documents at a time, repeat Step 2.
Up to 30 documents can be printed.
4. When specifying printing conditions, press [To Printing Screen], and then configure print
settings.
5. Enter the number of print copies with the number keys.
The maximum quantity that can be entered is 999.
6. Press [Start].

133
7. Document Server

134
8. Web Image Monitor
This chapter describes frequently used Web Image Monitor functions and operations. For information
not included in this chapter, see Connecting the Machine/ System Settings available on our website or
Web Image Monitor Help.

Displaying Top Page


This section explains the Top Page and how to display Web Image Monitor.

• When entering an IPv4 address, do not begin segments with zeros. For example: If the address is
"192.168.001.010", you must enter it as "192.168.1.10".

1. Start your web browser.


2. Enter "http://(machine's IP address or host name)/" in your web browser's URL bar.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
If the machine's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server, you can enter it.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server
authentication is issued, enter "https://(machine's IP address or host name)/".
Web Image Monitor is divided into the following areas:

1
4

DPK709

1. Menu area
If you select a menu item, its content will be shown.
2. Header area
Display icons for the links to Help and the keyword search function. This area also displays [Login] and
[Logout], which allows you to switch between the administrator and guest mode.

135
8. Web Image Monitor

3. Refresh/Help
(Refresh): Click at the upper right in the work area to update the machine information. Click the web
browser's [Refresh] button to refresh the entire browser screen.
(Help): Use Help to view or download Help file contents.
4. Basic Information area
Display the basic information of the machine.
5. Work area
Display the contents of the item selected in the menu area.

136
9. Adding Paper and Toner
This chapter describes how to load paper into the paper tray and recommended paper sizes and types.

Loading Paper
Precautions for Loading Paper

• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.

• If Tray 2, 3, 4 and 5 are installed, do not pull out more than one tray at a time when you are
changing or replenishing paper or resolving paper jams. Pressing down forcefully on the
machine's upper surfaces can result in malfunctions and/or user injury.

• Do not stack paper over the limit mark.


• Do not change the size of the paper for the specified printing tray while documents are being
scanned or printed.

• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the paper before loading it.

CBK254

• If you load paper when only a few sheets of paper remain in the tray, multiple sheet feeding may
occur. Remove any remaining paper, stack them with the new sheets of paper, and then fan the
entire stack before loading it into the tray.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• For details about the paper sizes and types that can be used, see page 148 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".

137
9. Adding Paper and Toner

• You might at times hear a rustling noise from paper moving through the machine. This noise does
not indicate a malfunction.

Loading Paper into Paper Trays

Every paper tray is loaded in the same way.


In the following example procedure, paper is loaded into Tray 1.

• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease or the paper may
misfeed.

1. Pull the tray carefully until it stops, lift the front side of the tray, and then pull it out of the
machine.

DPK907

Place the tray on a flat surface.


2. Adjust the paper size dial to match the size and feed direction of paper in the paper tray.

DPL036

138
Loading Paper

3. Squeeze the clip on the side paper guide and slide it to match the paper size.

DPL037

4. Squeeze the end guide and slide it inward to match the standard size.

DPL038

5. When loading paper that is larger than A4 or 81/2 × 11 , push the button, and then
pull the end guide out to match the paper size.

DPK125

6. Load the new paper stack print side down.


Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit (upper line) marked inside the tray.

139
9. Adding Paper and Toner

DPK909

7. Adjust the paper guides to close any gaps.


Do not move paper loaded in the tray more than a few millimeters.
Moving the loaded paper excessively may cause damage to paper edges on the openings of the
tray's lifting plate, resulting in sheets being folded or becoming jammed.
8. Lift the front side of the tray, and then slide it into the machine carefully until it stops.

DPL039

To avoid paper jams, make sure the tray is securely inserted.

• Letterhead paper must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see "Loading Orientation-
fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper", Paper Specifications and Adding Paper.
• You can load envelopes in Trays 2–5. When loading envelopes, place them in the correct
orientation. For details, see page 153 "Envelopes".

Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray

Use the bypass tray to use OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, and paper that cannot be loaded in
the paper trays.

140
Loading Paper

• The maximum number of sheets you can load at the same time depends on paper type. Do not
stack paper over the limit mark. For the maximum number of sheets you can load, see page 148
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
• After loading paper, specify the paper size and type using the control panel. When printing a
document, specify the same paper size and type in the printer driver as specified on the machine.

1. Open the bypass tray.

DPL019

Pull the extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11 or larger paper.

DPL020

2. Load paper face up until it stops, and then adjust both sides of the paper guide to match
the paper width.

DPL022

141
9. Adding Paper and Toner

• When you use the bypass tray, it is recommended to load the paper in orientation.
• When loading thick paper, thin paper, or OHP transparencies, specify the paper size and the
paper type.
• Letterhead paper must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see page 145 "Loading
Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper".
• You can load envelopes into the bypass tray. Envelopes must be loaded in a specific orientation.
For details, see page 153 "Envelopes".
• When copying from the bypass tray, see "Copying from the Bypass Tray", Copy/ Document
Server. When printing from a computer, see page 142 "Printing from the Bypass Tray Using the
Printer Function".
• When the [Notification Sound] is set to [No Sound], it does not sound if you load paper into the
bypass tray. For details about [Notification Sound], see "Screen Features", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.

Printing from the Bypass Tray Using the Printer Function

• If you select [Machine Setting(s)] in [Bypass Tray] under [Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of the
Printer Features menu, the settings made using the control panel have priority over the printer driver
settings. For details, see "System", Print.
• The default of [Bypass Tray] is [Machine Setting(s): Any Type].

• Settings remain valid until they are changed.


• For details about setting printer drivers, see "Printing Documents", Print.
• (mainly Europe and Asia)
[A4 ] is the default setting for [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
• (mainly North America)
[81/2 × 11 ] is the default setting for [Printer Bypass Paper Size].

Specifying regular sizes using the control panel

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
3. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
4. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].

142
Loading Paper

5. Select the paper size.

6. Press [OK].
7. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
8. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

Specifying a custom size paper using the control panel

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools] icon ( ) on.
3. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
4. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
5. Press [Custom Size].
If a custom size is already specified, press [Change Size].
6. Press [Horizontal].
7. Enter the horizontal size using the number keys, and then press [ ].

8. Press [Vertical].
9. Enter the vertical size using the number keys, and then press [ ].
10. Press [OK] twice.
11. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
12. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

143
9. Adding Paper and Toner

Specifying thick paper, thin paper, or OHP transparencies for paper type using the
control panel

• Use A4 or 81/2 × 11 size OHP transparencies, and specify their size.


• Usually only one side of OHP transparencies can be used for printing. Be sure to load them with the
print side down.
• When printing onto OHP transparencies, remove printed sheets one by one.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press the [User Tools] icon ( ).
3. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
4. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size], and then specify the paper size.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [ Next].
7. Press [Paper Type: Bypass Tray].
8. Select the proper items, according to the paper type you want to specify.
• Press [OHP (Transparency)] on the [Paper Type] area when loading OHP transparencies.
• To load thick paper, press [Do not Display] on the [Paper Type] area, and then select the
appropriate paper thickness in the [Paper Thickness] area.

9. Press [OK].
10. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right of the screen.
11. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

• We recommend that you use specified OHP transparencies.


• For details about paper thickness, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.

144
Loading Paper

Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper

Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper (for example, letterhead paper, punched paper, or
copied paper) might not be printed correctly, depending on how the originals and paper are placed.
Settings for the User Tools
• Copier mode
Specify [Yes] for [Letterhead Setting] in [Input / Output] under the Copier / Document Server
Features menu, and then place the original and paper as shown below.
• Printer mode
Specify [Auto Detect] or [On (Always)] for [Letterhead Setting] in [System] under the Printer
Features menu, and then place the paper as shown below.
For details about the letterhead settings, see "Input / Output", Copy/ Document Server, or
"System", Print.
Original orientation and paper orientation
The meanings of the icons are as follows:

Icon Meaning

Place or load paper scanned or printed side face up.

Place or load paper scanned or printed side face down.

• Original orientation

Original orientation Exposure glass ADF

Readable orientation

145
9. Adding Paper and Toner

Original orientation Exposure glass ADF

Unreadable • Copy
orientation

• Scanner

• Paper orientation
• Copier mode

Copy side Paper trays Bypass tray*1

One-sided

Two-sided

*1 If you place originals in the ADF and copy on orientation-fixed paper from the bypass tray
without specifying the paper size, the image might be copied upside down. In order to make
copies correctly, place the paper upside down or specify the paper size.
• Printer mode

Print side Paper trays Bypass tray

One-sided

Two-sided

• In copier mode:

146
Loading Paper

• For details about how to make two-sided copies, see "Duplex Copying", Copy/ Document
Server.
• In printer mode:
• To print on letterhead paper when [Auto Detect] is specified for [Letterhead Setting], you must
specify [Letterhead] as the paper type in the printer driver's settings.
• If a print job is changed partway through printing from one-sided to two-sided printing, one-
sided output after the first copy may be printed facing a different direction. To ensure all
paper is output facing the same direction, specify different input trays for one-sided and two-
sided printing. Note also that two-sided printing must be disabled for the tray specified for
one-sided printing.
• For details about how to make two-sided prints, see "Printing on Both Sides of Sheets", Print.

147
9. Adding Paper and Toner

Recommended Paper
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

This section describes recommended paper sizes and types.

• If you use paper that curls, either because it is too dry or too damp, a paper jam may occur.
• Do not use paper designed for inkjet printers, as these may stick to the fusing unit and cause a
misfeed.
• When you load OHP transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets, and place them
correctly, or a misfeed might occur.
Tray 1

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– *1 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover) A4 , A5 , A6 , 81/2 × 14
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1 , 81/2 × 11 , 51/2 ×
81/2

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– *2 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover) A5 , B5 JIS , B6 JIS ,
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1 81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 ,
8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
16K , 81/2 × 132/5

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– Custom size: 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1
Vertical: 148.0–356.0 mm
Horizontal: 105.0–216.0
mm

Vertical: 5.83–14.0 inches


Horizontal: 4.14–8.50 inches

*1 Select the paper size using the paper size dial on the tray.

148
Recommended Paper

*2 Set the paper size dial on the tray to " ", and select the paper size with the control panel.
Trays 2-5

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– *1 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover) A4 , A5 , 81/
2 × 14 ,
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1 81/2 × 11 , 51/2 × 81/2

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– *2 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover) B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 81/2 × 13
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 13 ,
8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
16K , 81/2 × 132/5

64–120 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond– Custom size: 500 sheets


44 lb. Cover)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 1
Vertical: 162.0–356.0 mm
Horizontal: 92.0–216.0 mm

Vertical: 6.38–14.0 inches


Horizontal: 3.63–8.50 inches

Envelopes *2 *3

41/8 × 91/2 , 37/8 × 71/2


, C5 Env , C6 Env , DL
Env

*1 Select the paper size using the paper size dial on the tray.
*2 Set the paper size dial on the tray to " ", and select the paper size with the control panel.
*3 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.

149
9. Adding Paper and Toner

Bypass tray

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

60–220 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– *1 100 sheets


80 lb. Cover) A4 , A5 , A6 , B5 JIS ,
Thin Paper–Thick Paper 3 B6 JIS , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14
, 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2
×81/2 ,
16K , 81/2 × 132/5

60–220 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– Custom size*2: 100 sheets


80 lb. Cover)
Thin Paper–Thick Paper 3
Vertical: 148.0–356.0 mm
Horizontal: 70.0–216.0 mm

Vertical: 5.83–14.0 inches


Horizontal: 2.76–8.50 inches

OHP transparencies A4 , 81/2 × 11 *3

Label paper (adhesive labels) A4 *3

Envelopes *1 *3

41/8 × 91/2 , 37/8 × 71/2


, C5 Env , C6 Env , DL Env

*1 Select the paper size using the control panel. For copier mode, see "Copying from the Bypass Tray",
Copy/ Document Server. For printer mode, see page 142 "Specifying regular sizes using the control
panel".
*2 Enter the paper size. For copier mode, see "Copying from the Bypass Tray", Copy/ Document Server.
For printer mode, see page 143 "Specifying a custom size paper using the control panel".
*3 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.

150
Recommended Paper

Paper Thickness

Paper Thickness*1 Paper weight

Thin Paper*2 60–63 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond)

Plain Paper 1 64–74 g/m2 (17–20 lb. Bond)

Plain Paper 2 75–90 g/m2 (20-24 lb. Bond)

Middle Thick 91–105 g/m2 (24–28 lb. Bond)

Thick Paper 1 106–135 g/m2 (28–36 lb. Bond)*3

Thick Paper 2 136–170 g/m2 (36 lb. Bond–63 lb. Cover)

Thick Paper 3 171–220 g/m2 (63–80 lb. Cover)

*1 Print quality will decrease if the paper you are using is close to the minimum or maximum weight.
Change the paper weight setting to thinner or thicker.
*2 Depending on the type of thin paper, the edges may crease or the paper may be misfed.
*3 Allowed weights for Trays 1 to 5 and duplex printing are 106 to 120 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond to 44 lb.
Cover) paper.

• Certain types of paper, such as OHP transparencies, may produce noise when delivered. This
noise does not indicate a problem and print quality is unaffected.
• The paper capacity described in the tables above is an example. Actual paper capacity might be
lower, depending on the paper type.
• When loading paper, make sure the stack height does not exceed the limit mark of the paper tray.
• If multiple sheet feeding occurs, fan sheets thoroughly or load sheets one by one from the bypass
tray.
• Flatten out curled sheets before loading them.
• Depending on the paper sizes and types, the copy/print speed may be slower than usual.
• When loading thick paper of 106–220 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond–80 lb. Cover), see page 152 "Thick
paper".
• When loading envelopes, see page 153 "Envelopes".
• When copying or printing onto letterhead paper, the paper placing orientation is different
depending on which function you are using. For details, see page 145 "Loading Orientation-fixed
Paper or Two-sided Paper".
• If you load paper of the same size and same type in two or more trays, the machine automatically
feeds from one of the trays in which [Yes] is selected for [Apply Auto Paper Select] when the first
tray in use runs out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switching. This saves interrupting a

151
9. Adding Paper and Toner

copy run to replenish paper when making a large number of copies. You can specify the paper
type of the paper trays under [Paper Type]. For details, see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings. For the setting procedure of the Auto Tray Switching function, see
"General Features", Copy/ Document Server.
• When loading label paper:
• We recommend that you use specified label paper.
• It is recommended to place one sheet at a time.
• Press [Bypass], and then select the appropriate paper thickness for [Paper Type].
• When loading OHP transparencies:
• It is recommended to place one sheet at a time.
• When copying onto OHP transparencies, see "Copying onto OHP Transparencies", Copy/
Document Server.
• When printing on OHP transparencies from the computer, see page 144 "Specifying thick
paper, thin paper, or OHP transparencies for paper type using the control panel".
• Fan OHP transparencies thoroughly whenever you use them. This prevents OHP
transparencies from sticking together, and from feeding incorrectly.
• Remove copied or printed sheets one by one.

Thick paper

This section gives you various details about and recommendations concerning thick paper.
When loading thick paper of 106–220 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond–80 lb. Cover), follow the recommendations
below to prevent misfeeds and loss of image quality.
• Store all your paper in the same environment - a room where the temperature is 20–25°C (68–
77°F) and the humidity is 30–65%.
• When loading paper in the paper trays, be sure to load at least 20 sheets. Also, be sure to position
the side fences flush against the paper stack.
• Jams and misfeeds can occur when printing on thick smooth paper. To prevent such problems, be
sure to fan smooth paper thoroughly before loading them. If paper continues to become jammed or
feed in together even after they are fanned, load them one by one from the bypass tray.

• Select [Thick Paper 1], [Thick Paper 2], or [Thick Paper 3] as the paper thickness in [Tray Paper
Settings].
• Even if thick paper is loaded as described above, normal operations and print quality might still not
be possible, depending on the paper type.
• Prints might have prominent vertical creases.
• Prints might be noticeably curled. Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled.

152
Recommended Paper

Envelopes

This section gives you various details about and recommendations concerning envelopes.

• Do not use window envelopes.


• Misfeeds might occur depending on the length and shape of the flaps.
• Before loading envelopes, press down on them to remove any air from inside, flatten out all four
edges. If they are bent or curled, flatten their leading edges (the edge going into the machine) by
running a pencil or ruler across them.

CHU024

In copier mode
The way to load envelopes varies depending on the orientation of the envelopes. When copying
onto envelopes, load them according to the applicable orientation shown below:

How to load envelopes


Orientation of
Exposure glass Trays 2–5 Bypass tray
envelopes

Envelopes

• Flaps: closed • Flaps: closed


• Bottom side of • Flaps: closed • Bottom side of
envelopes: toward • Bottom side of envelopes: toward
the front of the envelopes: toward the right of the
machine the right of the machine
• Side to be machine • Side to be printed:
scanned: face • Side to be printed: face up
down face down

153
9. Adding Paper and Toner

When loading envelopes, specify the envelope size and thickness. For details, see "Copying onto
Envelopes", Copy/ Document Server.
In printer mode
The way to load envelopes varies depending on the orientation of the envelopes. When printing
onto envelopes, load them according to the applicable orientation shown below:

How to load envelopes


Orientation Trays 2–5 Bypass tray

Envelopes

• Flaps: closed
• Flaps: closed
• Bottom side of envelopes:
• Bottom side of envelopes: toward the right of the
toward the right of the machine
machine
• Side to be printed: face up
• Side to be printed: face
down

When loading envelopes, select "Envelope" as the paper types using both [Tray Paper Settings]
and printer driver and specify the thickness of envelopes. For details, see "Printing on Envelopes",
Print.
To print on envelopes that are loaded with their short edges against the machine body, rotate the
print image by 180 degrees using the printer driver.
Recommended envelopes
For information about recommended envelopes, contact your local dealer.
For details about the sizes of envelopes you can load, see page 148 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".

• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.


• The Duplex function cannot be used with envelopes.
• Straighten any curls within 2 mm (0.1 inch) upward and 0 mm (0 inches) downward on the tray
before loading.
• To get better output quality, it is recommended that you set the right, left, top, and bottom print
margin, to at least 15 mm (0.6 inches) each.
• Output quality on envelopes may be uneven if parts of an envelope have differing thicknesses. Print
one or two envelopes to check print quality.

154
Recommended Paper

• Copied or printed sheets are delivered to the internal tray even if you specified a different tray.
• Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled.
• Check the envelopes are not damp.
• High temperature and high humidity conditions can reduce print quality and cause envelopes to
become creased.
• Depending on the environment, copying or printing on envelopes may wrinkle them even if they
are recommended.
• Certain types of envelopes might come out creased, dirtied, or misprinted. If you are printing a
solid color on an envelope, lines may appear where the overlapped edges of the envelope make it
thicker.

155
9. Adding Paper and Toner

Adding Toner
This section explains precautions when adding toner, how to send faxes or scanned documents when
the toner has run out, and how to dispose of used toner.

• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.

• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.

• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Absorbed toner
may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the vacuum cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a vacuum cleaner that is explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof. If
toner is spilled on the floor, remove the spilled toner slowly using a wet cloth, so that the toner is
not scattered.

• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.

• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.

• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.

• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.

156
Adding Toner

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.

• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.

• Always replace the print cartridge when a notification appears on the machine.
• Fault may occur if you use toner other than the recommended type.
• When adding toner, do not turn off the main power. If you do, settings will be lost.
• Store toner where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight, temperatures above 35°C (95°F), or
high humidity.
• Store toner horizontally.
• Do not shake the print cartridge with its mouth down after removing it. Residual toner may scatter.
• Do not repeatedly install and remove print cartridges. This will result in toner leakage.
Follow the instruction on the screen regarding how to replace a print cartridge.

1. Open the front cover.

DPK942

157
9. Adding Paper and Toner

2. Hold the print cartridge with one hand as you release the print cartridge lever with
another hand.

DPK918

3. Squeeze the clip on the print cartridge and lift it.

DPK919

4. Put the used print cartridge in a plastic bag and seal it so that the toner does not spill out.

DPK920

158
Adding Toner

5. Remove the new print cartridge from the toner kit.

DPK921

6. Shake the new print cartridge at least 10 times to the left and right so that the toner inside
it spreads uniformly.

10

DPK922

7. Insert the new print cartridge into the machine.


Press the new print cartridge until it clicks into place.

DPK924

159
9. Adding Paper and Toner

8. Lock the lever of the print cartridge.

DPK925

9. Close the front cover.

• If "Print Cartridge is almost empty." appears on the system message widget, the toner has almost
run out. Have a replacement print cartridge at hand.
• If appears when there is a lot of toner, hold the cartridge with the opening upward, shake it
well, and then reinstall it.
• When "No Toner" appears on the system message widget, you can check the name of the required
toner and the replacement procedure using the [ Add Toner] screen. To display the [ Add
Toner] screen, press [Check Status], and then press [Check] in the [Mach. Status] area in the
[Mach./Applic. Stat] tab.
• For details about how to check contact number where you can order supplies, see "Inquiry",
Maintenance and Specifications.

Sending Faxes or Scanned Documents When Toner Has Run Out

When the machine has run out of toner, the indicator on the display lights. Note that even if there is no
toner left, you can still send faxes or scanned documents.

• If number of communications executed after the toner has run out and not listed in the automatically
output Journal exceeds 200, communication is not possible.

1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.


2. Press the [Fax] icon or the [Scanner] icon.
3. Press [Exit], and then perform transmission operation.
The error message disappears.

• Any reports are not printed.

160
Adding Toner

Disposing of Used Toner

This section describes what to do with used toner.


Toner cannot be re-used.
Pack used toner containers in the container's box or a bag to prevent the toner from leaking out of the
container when you dispose of it.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used toner container, please contact your local sales office. If you discard it
by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
(mainly North America)
Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you can
recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.

161
9. Adding Paper and Toner

162
10. Troubleshooting
This chapter describes basic troubleshooting procedures.

When a Status Icon Is Displayed


This section describes the status icons displayed when the machine requires the user to remove misfed
paper, to add paper, or to perform other procedures.

Status Icon Status

: Paper Misfeed icon Appears when a paper misfeed occurs.


For details about removing jammed paper, see "Removing
Jammed Paper", Troubleshooting.

: Original Misfeed icon Appears when an original misfeed occurs.


For details about removing jammed paper, see "Removing
Jammed Paper", Troubleshooting.

: Load Paper icon Appears when paper runs out.


For details about loading paper, see "Loading Paper",
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper.

: Add Toner icon Appears when toner runs out.


For details about adding toner, see "Adding Toner",
Maintenance and Specifications.

: Waste Toner Full icon Appears when the waste toner bottle is full.
For details about replacing the waste toner bottle, see
"Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle", Maintenance and
Specifications.

: Service Call icon Appears when the machine is malfunctioning or requires


maintenance.

: Open Cover icon Appears when one or more covers of the machine are
open.

163
10. Troubleshooting

When the Indicator Lamp for [Check Status] Is


Lit or Flashing
If the indicator lamp for [Check Status] lights up or flashes, press [Check Status] to display the [Check
Status] screen. Check the status of each function in the [Check Status] screen.

[Check Status] screen

4 3
DDJ007

1. [Mach./Applic. Stat] tab


Indicates the status of the machine and each function.
2. [Check]
If an error occurs in the machine or a function, press [Check] to view details.
Pressing [Check] displays an error message or the corresponding function screen. Check the error message
displayed on the function screen and take the appropriate action. For details about how to resolve the
problems described in error messages, see "When Messages Appear", Troubleshooting.
3. Messages
Displays a message that indicates the status of the machine and each function.
4. Status icons
The status icons that can be displayed are described below:
: The function is performing a job.
: An error has occurred on the machine.
: The function cannot be used because an error has occurred in the function or machine. This icon may also
appear if the toner is running low.
The following table explains problems that cause the indicator lamp for [Check Status] to light or flash.

164
When the Indicator Lamp for [Check Status] Is Lit or Flashing

Problem Cause Solution

Documents and reports do The paper output tray is full. Remove the prints from the tray.
not print out.

Documents and reports do There is no paper left. Load paper. For details about loading
not print out. paper, see "Loading Paper", Paper
Specifications and Adding Paper.

An error has occurred. A function which has the Press [Check] in the function which the
status "Error Occurred" in error has occurred. Then read the
the [Check Status] screen is displayed message, and take the
defective. appropriate action. For details about
error messages and their solutions, see
"When Messages Appear",
Troubleshooting.
You can use other functions normally.

The machine is unable to A network error has • Check that the machine is
connect to the network. occurred. correctly connected to the
network and that the machine is
correctly set. For details about
how to connect the network, see
"Connecting to the Interface",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
• For details about connecting to
the network, contact your
administrator.
• If the indicator lamp is still lit even
after you try to solve the problem
as described here, contact your
service representative.

165
10. Troubleshooting

When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound


The following table describes the meaning of the various beep patterns that the machine issues to alert
users about left originals and other machine conditions.

Beep pattern Meaning Cause

Single short beep Panel/screen input A screen key was pressed.


accepted.

Short, then long beep Panel/screen input rejected. An invalid key was pressed on the
screen, or the entered password was
incorrect.

Single long beep Job completed successfully. A Copier/Document Server Features


job has finished.

2 long beeps Machine has warmed up. When the power is turned on or the
machine exits Sleep mode, the
machine has fully warmed up and is
ready for use.

5 long beeps Soft alert An auto reset was performed through


the simple screen of the Copier/
Document Server function or the
Scanner function.

5 long beeps repeated four Soft alert An original has been left on the
times. exposure glass or paper tray is empty.

5 short beeps repeated five Strong alert The machine requires user attention
times. because paper has jammed, the toner
needs replenishing, or other problems
have occurred.

• Users cannot mute the machine's beep alerts. When the machine beeps to alert users of a paper
jam or toner request, if the machine's covers are opened and closed repeatedly within a short
space of time, the beep alert might continue, even after normal status has resumed.
• You can enable or disable beep alerts. For details about Sound, see "General Features",
Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.

166
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine

When You Have Problems Operating the


Machine
Problem Cause Solution

When the machine is turned Functions other than the Wait a little longer.
on, the only icon that copier function are not yet
appears on the home screen ready.
is the [Copy] icon.

The machine has just been Functions other than the Wait a little longer.
turned on and the User Tools copier function are not yet
screen is displayed, but the ready. Time required varies
User Tools menu has items by function. Functions
missing. appear in the User Tools
menu when they become
ready for use.

The indicator lamp remains In some cases, the machine Before you press [Energy Saver],
lit and the machine does not does not enter Sleep mode check that Sleep mode can be
enter Sleep mode even when [Energy Saver] is enabled. For details about enabling
though [Energy Saver] was pressed. Sleep mode, see "Saving Energy",
pressed. Getting Started.

The display is turned off. The machine is in Sleep Touch the display panel.
mode.

Nothing happens when the The power is turned off. Make sure the main power indicator is
display panel is touched. off, and then turn on the power.

The power turns off The Weekly Timer setting is Change the Weekly Timer setting. For
automatically. set to [Main Power Off]. details about the Weekly Timer setting,
see "Timer Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.

The user code entry screen is Users are restricted by User For details about how to log in when
displayed. Code Authentication. User Code Authentication is enabled,
see "When the Authentication Screen is
Displayed", Getting Started.

The Authentication screen User Authentication is set. See "When the Authentication Screen
appears. is Displayed", Getting Started.

167
10. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

An error message is still Paper is still jammed in the Remove the jammed paper by
displayed, even if misfed tray. following the procedures displayed on
paper is removed. the control panel. For details about
removing jammed paper, see
"Removing Jammed Paper",
Troubleshooting.

An error message is still One or more of the covers Close all the covers of the machine.
displayed, even if the that are not indicated are
indicated cover is closed. still open.

Images are printed on the You may have loaded the Load the paper correctly. For details
reverse side of the paper. paper incorrectly. about loading paper, see "Loading
Paper", Paper Specifications and
Adding Paper.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Using curled paper often • Flatten the paper with your hands
causes misfeeds, soiled to straighten out the curl.
paper edges, or slipped • Load the paper upside down so
positions while stack printing that the curled edges face
is performed. downward. For details about
recommended paper, see
"Recommended Paper", Paper
Specifications and Adding Paper.
• Place the cut paper on a flat
surface to prevent it from curling,
and do not lean it against the
wall. For details about the proper
way to store paper, see "Paper
Storage", Paper Specifications
and Adding Paper.

168
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine

Problem Cause Solution

Misfeeds occur frequently. The tray's side or end fences • Remove the misfed paper. For
may not be set properly. details about removing jammed
paper, see "Removing Jammed
Paper", Troubleshooting.
• Check that the side or end fences
are set properly. Also, check that
the side fences are locked. For
details about setting the side and
end fences, see "Changing the
Paper Size", Paper Specifications
and Adding Paper.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Copy paper size setting is Remove the misfed paper. For details
not correct. about removing jammed paper, see
"Removing Jammed Paper",
Troubleshooting.

Misfeeds occur frequently. There is a foreign object on • Remove the misfed paper. For
the output tray. details about removing jammed
paper, see "Removing Jammed
Paper", Troubleshooting.
• Do not place anything on the
output tray.

Misfeeds occur when The envelopes are curled. Make sure you fully flatten curled
printing to envelopes. envelopes before you load them. Do
not stack envelopes over the specified
limit for the paper tray. If misfeeds still
occur after the envelopes have been
flattened, load envelopes on the tray
one at a time and print them
individually. For details about how to
load envelopes, see page 153
"Envelopes".

169
10. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

When printing to envelopes, The envelopes are curled. Make sure you fully flatten curled
the envelopes may be fed in envelopes before you load them. Do
together, or the envelopes not stack envelopes over the specified
may not be fed. limit for the paper tray. If misfeeds still
occur after the envelopes have been
flattened, load envelopes on the tray
one at a time and print them
individually. For details about how to
load envelopes, see page 153
"Envelopes".

Cannot print in duplex You have selected a paper Change the setting for "Apply Duplex"
mode. tray that is not set for duplex in "Tray Paper Settings" to enable
printing. duplex printing for the paper tray. For
details about setting "Apply Duplex",
see "Tray Paper Settings", Connecting
the Machine/ System Settings.

Cannot print in duplex You have selected a paper In "Tray Paper Settings", select a paper
mode. type that cannot be used for type that can be used for duplex
duplex printing. printing. For details about setting
"Paper Type", see "Tray Paper
Settings", Connecting the Machine/
System Settings.

The machine does not turn The machine cannot perform Repeat the shutdown procedure. If the
off in 4 minutes after the the shutdown procedure. machine does not turn off, contact your
main power is turned off. service representative.

An error has occurred when The Address Book cannot be Wait a while, and then retry the
the Address Book is changed while you delete operation.
changed from the display the multiple stored
panel or Web Image documents.
Monitor.

170
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine

Problem Cause Solution

Cannot use Web Image When print volume limits are • For details about specifying print
Monitor to print documents specified, users cannot print volume limits, see "Managing
stored in Document Server. beyond their print volume Print Volume per User", Security
limit. Print jobs selected by Guide.
users who have reached • To view the status of a print job,
their print volume limits will see [Print Job History]. In Web
be canceled. Image Monitor, click [Job] on the
[Status/Information] menu. And
then click [Print Job History] in
"Document Server".

The function does not run or If you cannot carry out your Wait until the current job is completed
cannot be used. job, it may be that the before trying again.
machine is being used by For details about Function
another function. Compatibility, see "When Multiple
Functions Cannot Be Executed
Simultaneously", Troubleshooting.

The print image is not • The machine has not Contact the machine administrator or
properly positioned on the detected the paper your service representative.
paper. type and/or width
correctly.
• The print position is not
aligned properly.

Originals are misfed in the More than sixty originals • Remove all the originals, open
ADF. were placed in the ADF and close the cover of the ADF,
forcibly. and then place originals in the
ADF again.
• Do not forcibly load originals into
the ADF.
• If the problem persists, reduce the
number of originals that you
place in the ADF.

• There are times when images might not turn out as you want because of paper type, paper size, or
paper capacity problems, use the recommended paper. For details about recommended paper,
see page 148 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".

171
10. Troubleshooting

When Multiple Functions Cannot Be Executed Simultaneously

If you cannot carry out your job, it may be that the machine is being used by another function.
Wait until the current job is completed before trying again. In certain cases, you can carry out another
job using a different function while the current job is being performed.
For details about Function Compatibility, see "Function Compatibility", Troubleshooting.

172
Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function

Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/


Document Server Function

• If you cannot make copies as you want because of the paper type, paper size or paper capacity
problems, use recommended paper. For details about recommended paper, see page 148
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot delete the folder The folder cannot be deleted Unlock the locked original to delete it.
because it contains files with because it contains a locked For details about locked files, see
passwords. Delete the files original. "Managing Stored Files", Security
with passwords, or please Guide.
contact the file
administrator."

"Cannot display preview of The image data may have Press [Exit] to display the preview
this page." been corrupted. screen without a thumbnail.
If the selected document contains
several pages, press [Switch] on the
"Display Page" area to change the
page, and then a preview of the next
page will appear.

"Check paper size." An irregular paper size is If you press [Start], the copy will start
set. using the selected paper.

"Exceeded the maximum The number of pages the For details about how to check the
number of sheets that can be user is permitted to copy has number of copies available per user,
used. Copying will be been exceeded. see "Managing Print Volume per User",
stopped." Security Guide.

"File being stored exceeded The scanned originals have Press [Exit], and then store again with
max. number of pages per too many pages to store as an appropriate number of pages.
file. Copying will be one document.
stopped."

173
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Maximum number of sets is The number of copies You can change the maximum copy
n." exceeds the maximum copy quantity from [Max. Copy Quantity] in
("n" is replaced by a quantity. [General Features] under [Copier /
variable.) Document Server Features]. For details
about Max. Copy Quantity, see
"General Features", Copy/ Document
Server.

"Memory is full. nn originals The number of scanned Press [Print] to copy scanned originals
have been scanned. Press originals exceed the number and cancel the scanning data. Press
[Print] to copy scanned of pages that can be stored [Clear Memory] to cancel the scanning
originals. Do not remove in memory. data and not copy.
remaining originals."
("n" is replaced by a
variable.)

"Press [Continue] to scan The machine checked if the Remove all copies, and then press
and copy remaining remaining originals should [Continue] to continue copying. Press
originals." be copied, after the scanned [Stop] to stop copying.
originals were printed.

"The selected folder is An attempt was made to edit For details about locked folders, see
locked. Please contact the or use a locked folder. "Managing Folders", Security Guide.
file administrator."

• If you set [Memory Full Auto Scan Restart] in [Input / Output] of User Tools to [On], even if the
memory becomes full, the memory overflow message will not be displayed. The machine will make
copies of the scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed to scan and to copy the
remaining originals. In this case, the resulting sorted pages will not be sequential. For details about
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, see "Input / Output", Copy/ Document Server.

174
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function

Messages Displayed When You Use the


Facsimile Function
Message Cause Solution

"Cannot find the specified The name of the computer or Check that the computer name and the
path. Please check the folder entered as the folder name for the destination are
settings." destination is wrong. correct.

"Error occurred, and • Original jammed during Press [Exit], and then send the
transmission was Immediate Transmission. documents again.
cancelled." • A problem occurred in
the machine, or noise
occurred on the
telephone line.

"Functional problem The power was turned off Even if you turn on the power
occurred. Stopped while the machine was immediately, depending on the mail
processing." receiving a document by server, the machine might not be able
Internet Fax. to resume receiving the Internet Fax if
the timeout period has not expired.
Wait until the mail server's timeout
period has expired, and then resume
receiving the Internet Fax. For details
about receiving the Internet Fax,
contact your administrator.

"Functional problems with There is a problem with the Record the code number shown on the
facsimile. Data will be fax. screen, and then contact your service
initialized." representative. Other functions can be
used.

"Memory is full. Cannot The memory is full. If you press [Exit], the machine returns
scan more. Transmission will to standby mode and starts transmitting
be stopped." the stored pages.
Check the pages that have not been
sent using the Communication Result
Report, and then resend those pages.

"Put original back, check it Original jammed during Press [Exit], and then send the
and press the Start key." Memory Transmission. documents again.

175
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Some page(s) are near The first page of the The original's blank side might have
blank." document is almost blank. been scanned. Be sure to place your
originals correctly. For details about
determining the cause of blank pages,
see "Detecting Blank Pages", Fax.

• Settings that can be confirmed in System Settings or Fax Features on the control panel can also be
confirmed from Web Image Monitor. For details about how to confirm the settings from Web
Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• If the paper tray runs out of paper, "There is no paper. Load paper." appears on the screen,
prompting you to add paper. If there is paper left in the other trays, you can receive documents as
usual, even if the message appears on the screen. You can turn this function on or off with
"Parameter Settings". For details about how to do this, see "Parameter Settings", Fax.

When Network Setting Problems Occur

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are The alias telephone number • Check that the correct alias phone
any network problems." you entered is already number is listed in [H.323
[13-10] registered on the gatekeeper Settings] of [Fax Features]. For
by another device. details about H.323 Settings, see
"Initial Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are Cannot access gatekeeper. • Check that the correct gate
any network problems." keeper address is listed in [H.323
[13-11] Settings] of [Fax Features]. For
details about H.323 Settings, see
"Initial Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

176
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are User name registration is • Correct that the correct SIP Server
any network problems." refused by SIP server. IP Address and SIP User Name
[13-17] are listed in [SIP Settings] of [Fax
Features]. For details about SIP
Settings, see "Initial Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are Cannot access SIP server. • Check that the correct SIP Server
any network problems." IP Address is listed in [SIP
[13-18] Settings] of [Fax Features]. For
details about SIP Settings, see
"Initial Settings", Fax.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are The password registered for For details about network problems,
any network problems." the SIP server is not the same contact your administrator.
[13-24] as the password registered
for this machine.

"Check whether there are In [Effective Protocol], the IP • Check that IPv4 in [Effective
any network problems." address is not enabled, or an Protocol] is set to "Active" in
[13-25] incorrect IP address has been [System Settings]. For details
registered. about effective protocol, see
"Interface Settings", Connecting
the Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the correct IPv4
address is specified for the
machine in [System Settings]. For
details about IPv4 address, see
"Interface Settings", Connecting
the Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

177
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are The "Effective Protocol" and • Check that the correct IP address
any network problems." "SIP Server IP Address" is specified for the machine in
[13-26] settings are different, or an [System Settings]. For details
incorrect IP address has been about IP address, see "Interface
registered. Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are The DNS server, SMTP • Check that the following settings
any network problems." server, or folder specified for in [System Settings] are listed
[14-01] transfer to was not found, or correctly.
the destination for Internet • DNS server
Fax around (not through) the
• Server name and IP address
SMTP server could not be
for the SMTP Server
found.
For details about these settings,
see "Interface Settings" or "File
Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the folder for transfer is
correctly specified.
• Check that the computer in which
the folder for transfer is specified
is correctly operated.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about network
problems, contact the
administrator of the destinations.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

178
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are E-mail transmission was • Check that User Name and
any network problems." rejected by SMTP Password for the following
[14-09] authentication, POP before settings in [System Settings] are
SMTP authentication, or login listed correctly.
authentication of the • SMTP Authentication
computer in which the folder
• POP before SMTP
for transfer is specified.
• Fax Email Account
For details about these settings,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the user ID and
password for the computer with
the folder for forwarding are
correctly specified.
• Check that the folder for
forwarding is correctly specified.
• Confirm that the computer with the
folder for forwarding is properly
working.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are E-mail addresses for the • Check that the correct e-mail
any network problems." machine and the Address is listed in [Fax Email
[14-33] administrator are not Account] of [System Settings]. For
registered. details about Fax Email Account,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

179
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are No POP3/IMAP4 server • Check that the correct Server
any network problems." address is registered. Name or Server Address is listed
[15-01] in [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings] of
[System Settings]. For details
about POP3 / IMAP4 Settings,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are Cannot log in to the POP3/ • Check that the correct User Name
any network problems." IMAP4 server. and Password are listed in [Fax
[15-02] Email Account] of [System
Settings]. For details about Fax
Email Account, see "File Transfer",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are No machine e-mail address • Check that the correct machine e-
any network problems." is specified. mail address is specified in
[15-03] [System Settings]. For details
about settings of e-mail address,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

180
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are Cannot find the DNS server • Check that the following settings
any network problems." or POP3/IMAP4 server. in [System Settings] are listed
[15-11] correctly.
• IP address of the DNS
Server
• the server name or IP
address of the POP3/
IMAP4 server
• the port number of the
POP3/IMAP4 server
• Reception Protocol
For details about these settings,
see "Interface Settings" or "File
Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Check whether there are Cannot log in to the POP3/ • Check that the following settings
any network problems." IMAP4 server. in [System Settings] are listed
[15-12] correctly.
• the user name and password
for [Fax Email Account]
• the user name and password
for POP before SMTP
authentication
For details about these settings,
see "File Transfer", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

181
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Check whether there are • An IP address has not • Check that the correct IP address
any network problems." been registered for the is specified for the machine in
[16-00] main machine. [System Settings]. For details
• A network is not about the IP address of the main
connected properly. machine, contact your
administrator.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

• Settings that can be confirmed in System Settings or Fax Features on the control panel can also be
confirmed from Web Image Monitor. For details about how to confirm the settings from Web
Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• If the paper tray runs out of paper, "There is no paper. Load paper." appears on the screen,
prompting you to add paper. If there is paper left in the other trays, you can receive documents as
usual, even if the message appears on the screen. You can turn this function on or off with
"Parameter Settings". For details about how to do this, see "Parameter Settings", Fax.
• If "Check whether there are any network problems." appears, the machine is not correctly
connected to the network or the settings of the machine are not correct. If you do not need to
connect to a network, you can specify the setting so this message is not displayed, and then [Check
Status] no longer lights up. For details about how to do this, see "Parameter Settings", Fax. If you
reconnect the machine to the network, be sure to set "Display" by configuring the appropriate User
Parameter.

When the Remote Fax Function Cannot Be Used

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication with remote User authentication on the For details about user authentication,
machine failed. Check main machine has failed. see "Configuring User Authentication",
remote machine's auth. Security Guide.
settings."

"Authentication with remote User Code Authentication is The remote fax function does not
machine failed. Check set on the device connected support User Code Authentication.
remote machine's auth. via the remote fax function. Disable the User Code Authentication
settings." on the main machine.

182
Messages Displayed When You Use the Facsimile Function

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication with remote The user does not have For details about how to set
machine failed. Check permission to use the function permissions, see "Limiting Available
remote machine's auth. on the main machine. Functions", Security Guide.
settings."

"Connection with the remote A network error occurred • Check that the main machine
machine has failed. Check while you were using the supports the remote fax function.
the remote machine status." remote fax function. • Check that the main machine is
working normally.
• Check that the correct IP address
or host name is set for the main
machine in [System Settings]. For
details about these settings,
contact your administrator.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about network
problems, contact your
administrator.

"Connection with the remote The main machine's power is Turn on the main machine's power.
machine has failed. Check off.
the remote machine status."

"Connection with the remote A timeout error occurred • Check that the LAN cable is
machine has failed. Check while an attempt was made correctly connected to the
the remote machine status." to connect the device via machine.
remote fax function. • Check that the main machine is
working correctly.
• For details about connection with
main machine, see "Sending/
Receiving Documents Using a
Remote Machine (Remote Fax)",
Fax.

183
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Connection with the remote The settings or machine For details about the settings and
machine has failed. There is configurations for using the machine configurations for using the
a problem with the remote remote fax function to remote fax function to connect to a
machine structure. Contact connect to the main machine main machine, contact your
the administrator." are incorrect. administrator.

"Transfer error has occured. A network error occurred • Check that the correct IP address
Check the status of the during transfer. or host name is set for the main
remote machine." machine in [System Settings]. For
details about these settings,
contact your administrator.
• Check that the main machine is
working correctly.
• Check that the LAN cable is
correctly connected to the
machine.
• For details about transmission,
contact your administrator.

"The HDD of the remote The hard disk became full Delete unnecessary files.
machine is full." after using the remote fax
function to scan an original.

184
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer


Function
This section describes the principal messages that appear on the display panel, error logs or reports. If
other messages appear, follow their instructions.

Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Printer Function

• Before turning off the power, see page 69 "Turning On/Off the Power".

Message Cause Solution

"Hardware Problem: An error has occurred in the Turn off the power, and then back on
Ethernet" Ethernet interface. again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

"Hardware Problem: HDD" An error has occurred in the Turn off the power, and then back on
hard disk. again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

"Hardware Problem: • The wireless LAN board Turn off the power, and then confirm
Wireless Card" has malfunctioned. the wireless LAN board is inserted
(A "wireless LAN board" or • The wireless LAN board correctly. And then, turn on the
"Bluetooth interface unit" is you are using is not power again. If the message
referred to as a "wireless compatible with this appears again, contact your service
card".) machine. representative.

"Hardware Problem: • The Bluetooth interface Turn off the power, and then confirm
Wireless Card" unit was connected while the Bluetooth interface unit is inserted
(A "wireless LAN board" or the machine was turned correctly. And then, turn on the
"Bluetooth interface unit" is on. power again. If the message
referred to as a "wireless • The Bluetooth interface appears again, contact your service
card".) unit was removed while representative.
the machine was turned
on.

185
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Load following paper in n. The printer driver settings are Check that the printer driver settings
To force print, select incorrect or the tray does not are correct, and then load paper of
another tray and press contain paper of the size the size selected in the printer driver
[Continue]." selected in the printer driver. into the input tray. For details about
("n" is replaced by a how to change the paper size, see
variable.) "Changing the Paper Size", Paper
Specifications and Adding Paper.

"Paper size and type are The printer driver settings are • Check that the printer driver
mismatched. Select another incorrect or the tray does not settings are correct, and then
tray from the following and contain paper of the size or load paper of the size selected
press [Continue]. To cancel type selected in the printer in the printer driver into the
job, press [Job Reset]. driver. input tray. For details about
Paper size and type can how to change the paper size,
also be changed in User see "Changing the Paper Size",
Tools." Paper Specifications and
Adding Paper.
• Select the tray manually to
continue printing, or cancel a
print job. For details about how
to select the tray manually, or
cancel a print job, see "If an
Error Occurs with the Specified
Paper Size and Type", Print.

"Paper type of n is The type of the paper in the tray Select a tray containing paper that is
mismatched. Select another does not match the paper type the same type as the specified paper
tray from the following and specified in the printer driver. type.
press [Continue]. Paper
type can also be changed
in User Tools."
(A tray name is placed at
n.)

"Printer font error." An error has occurred in the Contact your service representative.
font settings.

186
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

When using direct print from a memory storage device

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded the limit value for • The size of the selected Files or groups of files larger than 1 GB
total data size of the file exceeds 1 GB. cannot be printed.
selected files. Cannot select • The total size of the • When the total size of the multiple
more files." selected files exceeds 1 files that are selected exceeds 1
GB. GB, select files separately.
• When the size of the selected file
exceeds 1 GB, print from a
memory storage device using a
function other than the Direct
printing function.
You cannot select files of different
formats at the same time.

"Unable to access the • An error occurred Save the file to a different memory
specified memory storage when the machine storage device, and then print again.
device." accessed the memory
storage device or a file
stored on the memory
storage device.
• An error occurred
when the user used the
Direct printing function
to print from a memory
storage device.

Messages Printed on the Error Logs or Reports When You Use the Printer
Function

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that are printed on
the error logs or reports.

187
10. Troubleshooting

When print jobs are canceled

Message Cause Solution

"91: Error" Printing was canceled by the Check that the data is valid.
auto job cancel function due
to a command error.

"A job via the network that Jobs with errors were stored Contact your administrator to check
was not printed exists because an error occurred whether the machine is connected
because an error occurred. with a print job via the correctly to the network. For details
It was stored as a job not network while the error job about how to check and print jobs
printed." storing function was stored when print configuration errors
enabled. occur, see "Printing of Documents
Stored When Print Configuration Errors
Occur", Print.

"An error occurred while You tried to store a file in the On the printer driver, select a job type
processing an Unauthorized Document Server when the other than [Document Server] in "Job
Copy Prevention job. The [Unauthorized Copy Type:" or deselect [Unauthorized Copy
job was cancelled." Prevention] was specified. Prevention].

"An error occurred while The [Enter User Text:] field On the printer driver's [Detailed
processing an Unauthorized on the [Unauthorized Copy Settings] tab, click [Effects] in "Menu:".
Copy Prevention job. The Prevention for Pattern Select [Unauthorized Copy
job was cancelled." Details] screen is blank. Prevention], and then click [Details...]
to display [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention for Pattern Details]. Enter
text in [Enter User Text:].

"An error occurred while The resolution is set to a On the printer driver, set the resolution
processing an Unauthorized value less than 600 dpi to 600 dpi or higher, or cancel
Copy Prevention job. The when [Unauthorized Copy [Unauthorized Copy Prevention].
job was cancelled." Prevention] is specified.

"An error occurred while In [Administrator Tools] Cancel Unauthorized Copy Prevention
processing an Unauthorized under [System Settings], Printing for the printer driver. For details
Copy Prevention job. The priority was specified to be about how to cancel the settings, see
job was cancelled." given to Unauthorized Copy the printer driver Help.
Prevention Printing set on this
machine.

"Collate has been Collate was canceled. Turn off the power, and then back on
cancelled." again. If the message appears again,
contact your service representative.

188
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"You reach the usage limit. The number of pages the For details about print volume use
This job has been user is permitted to print has limitation, see "Managing Print Volume
cancelled." been exceeded. per User", Security Guide.

"Receiving data failed." Data reception was aborted. Resend the data.

"Sending data failed." The machine received a Check if the computer is working
command to stop correctly.
transmission from the printer
driver.

"The selected paper size is Job reset is automatically Specify the correct paper size, and
not supported. This job has performed if the specified then print the file again.
been cancelled." paper size is incorrect.

"The selected paper type is Job reset is automatically Specify the correct paper type, and
not supported. This job has performed if the specified then print the file again.
been cancelled." paper type is incorrect.

When there is a problem with the print settings

Message Cause Solution

"Classification Code is The classification code has not Enter the correct classification
incorrect." been entered, or the code.
classification code has been
entered incorrectly.

"Classification Code is The classification code is not Select [Optional] for


incorrect." supported with the printer classification code. For details
driver. about how to specify
classification code settings, see
"Configuring Classification
Codes", Print.

189
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Duplex has been cancelled." Duplex printing was canceled. Change the setting for "Apply
Duplex" in [Tray Paper Settings]
to enable duplex printing for the
paper tray. For details about
setting "Apply Duplex", see
"Tray Paper Settings",
Connecting the Machine/
System Settings.

"Exceeded max. pages. Collate The number of pages exceeds Reduce the number of pages to
is incomplete." the maximum number of sheets print.
that you can use Collate with.

"Output tray has been The output tray was changed Specify the proper output tray.
changed." because the paper size of the
specified output tray is limited.

"Print overrun." Images were discarded while Select a lower resolution on the
printing. printer driver. For details about
how to change the resolution
setting, see the printer driver
Help.

When documents cannot be stored in the Document Server

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot store data of this The paper size exceeded Reduce the paper size of the file that
size." the capacity of the you want to send to a size that the
Document Server. Document Server can store. Custom
size files can be sent but not stored
afterward.

"Document Server is not You cannot use the For details about using Document
available to use. Cannot Document Server function. Server function, contact your
store." administrator.
For details about how to set
permissions, see "Limiting Available
Functions", Security Guide.

190
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. capacity of The hard disk became full Delete some of the files stored in the
Document Server. Cannot after a file was stored. Document Server or reduce the size
store." that you want to send.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum file capacity Delete some of the files stored in the
files of Document Server. of the Document Server was Document Server.
Cannot store." exceeded.

"Exceeded max. number of While you were using the Delete Hold Print files (automatic) or
files. (Auto)" error job store function to unneeded files stored on the machine.
store Normal Print jobs as
Hold Print files, the maximum
file capacity for file storage
or Hold Print file
management (automatic)
was exceeded.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum page Delete some of the files stored in the
pages of Document Server. capacity of the Document Document Server or reduce the number
Cannot store." Server was exceeded. of pages that you want to send.

"Exceeded max. number of While you were using the Delete unneeded files stored on the
pages. (Auto)" error job store function to machine.
store Normal Print jobs as Reduce the number of pages to print.
Hold Print files, the maximum
page capacity was
exceeded.

"The print job has been The hard disk became full Delete the files stored in the Document
cancelled because capture after a file was stored. Server or reduce the file size to be sent.
file(s) could not be stored:
Exceeded max. memory."

"The print job has been The maximum file capacity Delete the files stored in the Document
cancelled because capture of the Document Server was Server.
file(s) could not be stored: exceeded.
Exceeded max. number of
files."

191
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"The print job has been The maximum page Delete some of the files stored in the
cancelled because capture capacity of the Document Document Server or reduce the number
file(s) could not be stored: Server was exceeded. of pages that you want to send.
Exceeded max. number of
pages per file."

"The specified folder in The specified folder is Unlock the folder or specify another
Document Server is locked. locked. folder number that can be used. For
Cannot store." details about locked folders, see
"Managing Folders", Security Guide.

When there is not enough free hard disk space

Message Cause Solution

"HDD is full." When you were printing Delete unneeded forms or fonts
with the PostScript 3 printer registered on the machine.
driver, the hard disk
capacity for fonts and forms
was exceeded.

"HDD is full." The hard disk became full Delete unneeded files stored on the
while you were printing a machine.
Sample Print, Locked Print, Alternatively, reduce the data size of
Hold Print, or Stored Print the Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold
file. Print, or Stored Print file.

"HDD is full. (Auto)" The hard disk became full Delete unneeded files stored on the
while you were using the machine.
error job store function to Alternatively, reduce the data size of
store Normal Print jobs as the Temporary Print file and/or the
Hold Print files. Stored Print file.

192
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

When there is not enough memory

Message Cause Solution

"84: Error" There is no work area Decrease the number of files sent to the
available for image machine.
processing.

When there is a problem with a parameter

Message Cause Solution

"86: Error" Parameters of the control Check the print settings.


code are invalid.

When the user lacks privileges to perform an operation

Message Cause Solution

"No response from the A timeout occurred while Check the status of the server.
server. Authentication has connection to the server was
failed." being established for LDAP
authentication or Windows
Authentication.

"Printing privileges have not You have no privileges to Contact the owner of the document.
been set for this document." print the PDF document you
tried to print.

"You do not have a privilege The entered login user name Check that the user name and
to use this function. This job or login password is not password are correct.
has been cancelled." correct.

"You do not have a privilege The logged in user is not For details about how to set
to use this function. This job allowed to use the selected permissions, see "Configuring User
has been cancelled." function. Authentication", Security Guide.

"You do not have a privilege The logged in user does not For details about how to set
to use this function. This have the privileges to permissions, see "Configuring User
operation has been register programs or change Authentication", Security Guide.
cancelled." the paper tray settings.

193
10. Troubleshooting

When a user cannot be registered

Message Cause Solution

"Auto-registration of user Automatic registration of For details about automatic registration


information has failed." information for LDAP of user information, see "Auto
Authentication or Windows Registration to the Address Book",
Authentication failed Security Guide.
because the Address Book is
full.

"Information for user The user name for LDAP was For details about user authentication,
authentication is already already registered in a see "Configuring User Authentication",
registered for another user." different server with a Security Guide.
different ID, and a
duplication of the user name
occurred due to a switching
of domains (servers), and so
on.

When other errors occur

Message Cause Solution

"85: Error" The specified graphics Check that the data is valid.
library is unavailable.

"98: Error" The machine could not Turn off the power, and then back on
access the hard disk again. If the message appears
correctly. frequently, contact your service
representative.

"99: Error" This data cannot be printed. Check that the data is valid. For details
The specified data is either about the kinds of data that can be
corrupt or it cannot be printed from a memory storage device
printed from a memory using the Direct printing function, see
storage device using the "Direct Printing from a Memory
Direct printing function. Storage Device", Print.

194
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"Command Error" An RPCS command error Check using the following procedure:
occurred. • Check if the communication
between the computer and the
machine is working correctly.
• Check if the correct printer driver
is being used.
• Check if the machine's memory
size is set correctly in the printer
driver.
• Check that the printer driver is the
most up-to-date version available.

"Compressed Data Error." The printer detected corrupt • Check the connection between
compressed data. the computer and the printer.
• Check that the program you used
to compress the data is
functioning correctly.

"Data storage error." You tried to print a Sample Contact your service representative.
Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, or Stored Print file, or
to store a file in the
Document Server when the
hard disk was
malfunctioning.

"Error has occurred." A syntax error, etc., Check that the PDF file is valid.
occurred.

"Exceeded Max. Stored While printing a Sample Delete unneeded files stored on the
Files" Print, Locked Print, Hold machine.
Print, or Stored Print file, the
maximum file capacity was
exceeded.

"Exceeded Max. Stored While printing a Sample Delete unneeded files stored on the
Pages" Print, Locked Print, Hold machine.
Print, or Stored Print file, the Reduce the number of pages to print.
maximum page capacity
was exceeded.

195
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Failed to obtain file system." PDF direct printing could not Turn off the power, and then back on
be performed because the again. If the message appears again,
file system could not be contact your service representative.
obtained.

"File system is full." PDF file does not print out Delete all unnecessary files from the
because the capacity of the hard disk, or decrease the file size sent
file system is full. to the machine.

"I/O buffer overflow." An input buffer overflow • In [Printer Features], under [Host
occurred. Interface], select [I/O Buffer],
and then set the maximum buffer
size to a larger value.
• Reduce the number of files being
sent to the machine.

"Insufficient Memory" A memory allocation error PCL 6


occurred. On the printer driver's [Detailed
Settings] tab, click [Print
Quality:Advanced] in "Menu:",
and then select [Raster] in the
"Vector/Raster:" list. In some
cases, it will take a long time to
complete a print job.

"Memory Retrieval Error" A memory allocation error Turn off the power and then back on
occurred. again. If the message appears again,
replace the RAM. For details about
replacing the RAM, contact your
service representative.

If printing does not start, contact your service representative.

• The contents of errors may be printed on the Configuration Page. Check the Configuration Page in
conjunction with the error log. For details about how to print the Configuration Page, see "List / Test
Print", Print.

196
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Messages Displayed When You Use the


Scanner Function
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When You Use the Scanner Function

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that appear on the
control panel. If a message not described here appears, act according to the message.

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot find the specified The destination computer Check whether the computer name and
path. Please check the name or folder name is the folder name for the destination are
settings." invalid. correct.

"Cannot find the specified An antivirus program or a • Antivirus programs and firewalls
path. Please check the firewall is preventing the can prevent client computers from
settings." machine from connecting to establishing connection with this
your computer. machine.
• If you are using antivirus software,
add the program to the exclusion
list in the application settings. For
details about how to add
programs to the exclusion list, see
the antivirus software Help.
• To prevent a firewall from
blocking the connection, register
the machine's IP address in the
firewall's IP address exclusion
settings. For details about the
procedure for excluding an IP
address, see your operating
system's Help.

"Entered user code is not You have entered an Check the authentication settings, and
correct. Please re-enter." incorrect user code. then enter a correct user code.

197
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum number of Check the maximum number of
alphanumeric characters for specifiable alphanumeric characters which can be entered, and
the path." characters in a path has then enter it again. For details about
been exceeded. the maximum enterable number of
characters, see "Values of Various Set
Items for Transmission/Storage
Function", Scan.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum enterable Check the maximum number of
alphanumeric characters." number of alphanumeric characters which can be entered, and
characters has been then enter it again. For details about
exceeded. the maximum enterable number of
characters, see "Values of Various Set
Items for Transmission/Storage
Function", Scan.

"Exceeded the maximum The maximum allowable Up to 100 jobs can be placed on
number of OCR jobs that number of jobs on standby standby by the OCR function. Scan the
can be on standby for was exceeded because next document after the current jobs
storing, please wait. Try large quantities of have finished being stored.
again after storing of the documents were stored by
current job has completed." the OCR function.

"File types have been If there are selected stored For details about the file formats used
automatically set for some documents which cannot be to transmit stored documents, see
files because multiple files converted to a specified file "Sending a Stored File", Scan.
were selected." format, those documents are
automatically converted to a
convertible format before
they are transmitted.

"Programmed. Cannot The destinations that were WSD destinations and DSM
program the destination(s) selected while registered to destinations cannot be registered to the
that is not programmed in the program contain a folder program because they cannot be
the address book." destination for which one of registered in the address book. For
the following destinations is manually entered destinations, register
set: the destinations in the address book,
manually entered and then try to register them to the
destination, WSD program again.
destination, or DSM
destination

198
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Scanner journal is full." "Print & Delete Scanner Print or delete Scanner Journal. For
"Please check Scanner Journal" in [Scanner details about Scanner Features, see
Features." Features] is set to [Do not "General Settings", Scan.
Print: Disable Send], and
Scanner Journal is full.

"The entered file name The file name contains a • Check the file name set at the time
contains invalid character(s). character that cannot be of scanning. For details about
Enter the file name again used. characters that can be used in file
using any of the following 1 names, see "Specifying the File
byte characters. "0 to 9", "A Name", Scan.
to Z", "a to z", ". - _"" • Check the file name specified at
the time of scanning. The file
name specified in the Sending
Scan Files to Folders function
cannot contain the following
characters:
\/:*?"<>|
The file name cannot start or end
with a period ".".

"The program is recalled. The currently logged-in user For details about how to set
Cannot recall the does not have permission to permissions, see "Limiting Available
destination(s) for which view the destination that was Functions", Security Guide.
access privileges are registered in the program.
required."

"The program is recalled. The destination stored in the Enter the destination directly to send
Cannot recall the program could not be data separately.
destination(s) that is deleted recalled because it was
from the address book." deleted from the address
book.

"The program is recalled. The folder destinations for A destination for which the protection
Cannot recall the folder which the protection code code is set cannot be recalled by the
destination(s) with protection was set were registered in program. Cancel the protection code
code(s)." the program. setting or send scanned files to the
destination separately.

199
10. Troubleshooting

When documents cannot be scanned properly

Message Cause Solution

"All the pages are detected No PDF file was created Check whether the original is set
as blank. No file was because all the pages of the upside down.
created." scanned original were Change [OCR Scanned PDF: Blank
detected as blank when Page Sensitivity] in [Scanner Features]
[On] is specified for [Delete to "Sensitivity Level 1".
Blank Page] in [OCR
Settings].

"Check original's Originals may sometimes not Change the orientation of the original,
orientation." be scanned depending on a and then scan the original again.
combination of items such as
the specified scaling factor
and document size.

"Exceeded max. data The scanned data exceeded Specify the scan size and resolution
capacity." maximum data capacity. again. Note that it may not be possible
"Check scanning resolution, to scan very large originals at a high
then press Start key again." resolution. For details about the settings
for the scanner function, see
"Relationship between Resolution and
Scan Size", Scan.

"Exceeded max. data The scanned original Specify the scan size and resolution
capacity." exceeded maximum data again. Note that it may not be possible
"Check the scanning capacity. to scan very large originals at a high
resolution, then reset n resolution. For details about the settings
original(s)." for the scanner function, see
"Relationship between Resolution and
("n" in the message
Scan Size", Scan.
represents a variable.)

"Exceeded max. data The data being scanned is Reduce the resolution or [Specify Size]
capacity." too large for the scale ratio value, and then scan the original
"Check the resolution and specified in [Specify Size]. again.
the ratio and then press the
Start key again."

200
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum number of Check the files stored by the other
files which can be used in files that can be stored in the functions, and then delete unneeded
Document Server at the Document Server has been files. For details about how to delete
same time." exceeded. files, see "Deleting Stored Documents",
Copy/ Document Server.

"Not all of the image will be If the scaling factor specified Reduce the scaling factor in "Specify
scanned." in "Specify Reproduction Reproduction Ratio", and then try to
"Check the ratio and then Ratio" is too large, part of scan the original again.
press the Start key again." the image may be lost. If displaying the entire image is not
necessary, press [Start] to start
scanning with the current scaling
factor.

"Not all of the image will be Using "Specify Reproduction Specify a large size in [Specify Size],
scanned." Ratio" to scale down a large and then scan the original again.
"Check the ratio and then document may cause part of If displaying the entire image is not
press the Start key again." the image to be lost. necessary, press [Start] to start
scanning with the current scaling
factor.

"The size of the scanned The data being scanned is Specify a higher resolution or a large
data is too small." too small for the scale ratio size in [Specify Size], and then scan
"Check the resolution and specified in [Specify Size]. the original again.
the ratio and then press the
Start key again."

201
10. Troubleshooting

When documents cannot be scanned because the memory is full

Message Cause Solution

"Memory is full. Cannot Because of insufficient hard Try one of the following measures:
scan. The scanned data will disk space, the first page • Wait for a while, and then retry
be deleted." could not be scanned. the scan operation.
• Reduce the scan area or scanning
resolution. For details about
changing scan area and scanning
resolution, see "Scan Settings" of
Various Scan Settings, Scan.
• Delete unneeded stored files. For
details about how to delete stored
files, see "Deleting a Stored File",
Scan.

"Memory is full. Do you Because there is not enough Specify whether or not to use the data.
want to store scanned file?" free hard disk space in the
machine for storing in the
Document Server, only some
of the pages could be
scanned.

"Memory is full. Scanning Because there is not enough Specify whether or not to use the data.
has been cancelled. Press free hard disk space in the
[Send] to send the scanned machine for sending by e-
data, or press [Cancel] to mail while data is being
delete." stored in the Document
Server, only some of the
pages could be scanned.

202
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

When data transmission fails

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication with the The entered user name or • Check that the user name and
destination has failed. Check password was invalid. password are correct.
settings. To check the current • Check that the ID and password
status, press [Scanned Files for the destination folder are
Status]." correct.
• A password of 128 or more
characters may not be
recognized.

"Exceeded max. email size. The file size per page has Change the scanner features settings
Sending email has been reached the maximum e- as follows:
cancelled. Check [Max. mail size specified in • Increase the e-mail size limit in
Email Size] in Scanner [Scanner Features]. [Max. Email Size].
Features."
• Change the [Divide & Send
Email] setting to [Yes (per Page)]
or [Yes (per Max. Size)]. For
details about these settings, see
"Send Settings", Scan.

"Sending the data has A network error has Wait until sending is retried
failed. The data will be occurred and a file was not automatically after the preset interval. If
resent later." sent correctly. sending fails again, contact your
administrator.

"Transmission has failed. Transmission has failed. Allocate sufficient space.


Insufficient memory in the There was not enough free
destination hard disk. To space on the hard disk of the
check the current status, SMTP server, FTP server, or
press [Scanned Files client computer at the
Status]." destination.

"Transmission has failed. To While a file was being sent, If the same message appears again
check the current status, a network error occurred after scanning again, the cause could
press [Scanned Files and the file could not be sent be a mixed network, or network
Status]." correctly. settings were changed during WSD
scanner transmission. For details about
network error, contact your
administrator.

203
10. Troubleshooting

When data cannot be sent because a currently used file is selected

Message Cause Solution

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
use. File name cannot be name of a file whose status cleared), and then change the file
changed." is "Waiting...". name.

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
use. Password cannot be password of a file whose cleared), and then change the
changed." status is "Waiting...". password.

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
use. User name cannot be sender's name whose status cleared), and then change the user
changed." is "Waiting...". name.

"Some of selected files are You cannot delete a file Cancel transmission ("Waiting..." status
currently in use. They could which is waiting to be cleared), and then delete the file.
not be deleted." transmitted ("Waiting..."
status displayed).

When data cannot be sent because there are too many documents or pages

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. number of The file being stored has Specify whether to store the data or
pages per file. Do you want exceeded the maximum not. Scan the pages that were not
to store the scanned pages number of pages for one file. scanned, and then store them as a new
as 1 file?" file. For details about storing files, see
"Storing and Saving the Scanned
Documents", Scan.

"Exceeded max. number of Too many files are waiting to Try again after they have been sent.
stored files. Cannot send the be sent.
scanned data as capturing
files is unavailable."

"Exceeded max. page The number of scanned Specify whether to send the data that
capacity per file. Press pages exceeded the has already been scanned.
[Send] to send the scanned maximum page capacity.
data, or press [Cancel] to
delete."

204
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded maximum Too many files are waiting to Try again after they have been sent.
number of file to store. be sent.
Delete all unnecessary files."

When the WSD scanner function cannot be used

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot communicate with WSD (Device) protocol or For details about how to enable or
PC. Contact the WSD (Scanner) protocol is disable the WSD protocol, see
administrator." disabled. "Enabling and Disabling Protocols",
Security Guide.

"Cannot start scanning Scan Profile is not set on the Set Scan Profile. For details about how
because communication was client computer. to do this, see "Creating a New Scan
failed." Profile", Scan.

"Cannot start scanning The [Take no action] setting Open scanner properties, click the
because communication was has been selected on the [Events] tab, and then select [Start this
failed." client computer, forcing the program] as the computer's response
client computer to remain when it receives scan data. For details,
inactive when it receives see your operating system's Help.
scan data.

"Cannot start scanning. The Scan Profile might be Check the Scan Profile configuration.
Check the setting(s) on the incorrectly configured.
PC."

205
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Could not send the data A time out occurred when • Reduce the number of originals,
because the PC timed out WSD Scanner was used. and then scan again.
before it was sent." Time outs occur when too • Remove any misfed original, and
much time passes between then scan again.
scanning an original and
• Use Scanner Journal to check
sending its data. The
there are no jobs awaiting
followings are likely causes
transmission, and then scan
of time outs:
again.
• Too many originals per
set.
• Misfed originals.
• Transmission of other
jobs.

When documents cannot be stored on a memory storage device

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot write on the The memory storage device • Replace the memory storage
memory storage device is full and scan data cannot device.
because remaining free be saved. Even if the • If the document is scanned as
space is insufficient." memory storage device single-page or divided into
appears to have sufficient multiple pages, data already
free space, data might not written to the memory storage
be saved if the maximum device is saved as is. Replace the
number of files that can be memory storage device, and then
saved is exceeded. press [Retry] to save the
remaining data, or press [Cancel]
to redo the scan.

"Cannot write on the The memory storage device Unlock the write-protection on the
memory storage device is write-protected. memory storage device.
because the device is write-
protected."

206
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot write on the The memory storage device • Check to see if the memory
memory storage device. is faulty, or the file name storage device is defective.
Check the memory storage contains a character that • Check the memory storage
device and machine cannot be used. device. It might be unformatted,
settings." or its format might be
incompatible with this machine.
• Check the file name set at the time
of scanning. For details about the
characters that can be used in file
names, see "Specifying the File
Name", Scan.

"Exceeded max. page The scan could not be Reduce the number of documents to be
capacity per file. Press completed because the written to the memory storage device,
[Write] to write the scanned maximum number of pages and then try again.
data to the memory storage that can be scanned by this
device, or press [Cancel] to machine was exceeded
delete." during the scanned data
was written to the memory
storage device.

"Memory is full. Press [Write] The scan could not be Specify whether or not to save the
to write the current scanned completed because there scanned document to the memory
data to the memory storage was insufficient hard disk storage device.
device, or press [Cancel] to memory when the scanned
delete." data was saved to the
memory storage device.

Messages Displayed on the Client Computer

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the main error messages displayed on
the client computer when you use the TWAIN driver. If a message not described here appears, follow
the instruction.

207
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Any of Login User Name, The entered login user Check your login user name, login
Login Password or Driver name, password, or driver password, or driver encryption key,
Encryption Key is incorrect." encryption key was invalid. and then enter them correctly. For
details about login user name, login
password, and driver encryption key,
see "Basic Authentication" or
"Encrypting Transmitted Passwords",
Security Guide.

"Authentication succeeded. The logged in user name For details about how to set
However, the access does not have permissions permissions, see "Limiting Available
privileges for scanner for scanner function. Functions", Security Guide.
function has been denied."

"Cannot add any more The maximum number of The maximum number of modes that
scanning mode." registrable scan modes has can be stored is 100. Delete unneeded
been exceeded. modes.

"Cannot specify any more The maximum number of The maximum number of scanning
scanning area." registrable scan modes has areas that can be stored is 100. Delete
been exceeded. unneeded scanning areas.

"Clear Misfeed(s) in ADF." A paper misfeed has • Remove the jammed originals,
occurred inside the ADF. and then insert them again. For
details about jammed paper, see
"Removing Jammed Paper",
Troubleshooting.
• When a misfeed occurs, replace
the jammed originals.
• Check whether the originals are
suitable to be scanned by the
machine.

208
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Error has occurred in the An error has occurred in the • Check whether the network cable
scanner driver." driver. is connected correctly to the client
computer.
• Check whether the Ethernet board
of the client computer is
recognized correctly by
Windows.
• Check whether the client
computer can use the TCP/IP
protocol.

"Error has occurred in the The application-specified Check whether the scanning settings
scanner." scan conditions have made with the application exceed the
exceeded the setting range setting range of the machine.
of the machine.

"Fatal error has occurred in An unrecoverable machine An unrecoverable machine error has
the scanner." error has occurred. occurred. Contact your service
representative.

"Insufficient memory. Close Memory is insufficient. • Close all the unnecessary


all other applications, then applications running on the client
restart scanning." computer.
• Uninstall the TWAIN driver, and
then reinstall it after restarting the
computer.

209
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Insufficient memory. Reduce Scanner memory is • Reset the scan size.


the scanning area." insufficient. • Lower the resolution.
• Set with no compression. For
details about the settings, see
TWAIN driver Help.
The problem may be due to the
following:
• Scanning cannot be performed if
large values are set for brightness
when halftone or high resolution is
used. For details about the
relationship between scan
settings, see "Relationship
between Resolution and Scan
Size", Scan.
• If a misfeed occurs, you might not
scan an original. Remove the
misfeed, and then scan the
original again.

"Invalid Winsock version. You are using an invalid Install the operating system of the
Please use version 1.1 or version of Winsock. computer or copy Winsock from the
higher." operating system CD-ROM.

"No response from the The machine or client • Check whether the machine or
scanner." computer is not connected to client computer is connected to
the network correctly. the network correctly.
• Disable the client computer's own
firewall. For details about firewall,
see Windows Help.

"No response from the The network is crowded. Wait for a while, and then connect to
scanner." the network again.

210
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Scanner is in use for other A function of the machine • Wait for a while, and then
function. Please wait." other than the Scanner connect to the network again.
function is being used such • Cancel the job that is being
as the Copier function. processed. Press [Stop]. Follow
the instructions in the message that
appears and exit the function that
is running.

"Scanner is not available on The TWAIN scanner function Contact your service representative.
the specified device." cannot be used on this
machine.

"Scanner is not ready. The ADF cover is open. Check whether the ADF cover is
Check the scanner and the closed.
options."

"The name is already in use. You tried to register a name Use another name.
Check the registered that is already in use.
names."

When there is a problem connecting to the scanner

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot connect to the An access mask is set. For details about an access mask,
scanner. Check the network contact your administrator.
Access Mask settings in User
Tools."

"Cannot find "XXX" scanner The main power of the Check whether the main power of the
used for the previous scan. previously used scanner is scanner used for the previous scan is
"YYY" will be used instead." not set to "On". turned on.
("XXX" and "YYY" indicate
scanner names.)

211
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot find "XXX" scanner The machine is not • Check that the previously used
used for the previous scan. connected to the network scanner is connected to the
"YYY" will be used instead." correctly. network correctly.
("XXX" and "YYY" indicate • Cancel the personal firewall of
scanner names.) the client computer. For details
about firewall, see Windows
Help.
• Use an application such as telnet
to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine's
protocol. For details about how to
check this, see "Remote
Maintenance Using telnet",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.
• Select the scanner used for the
previous scan.

"Communication error has A communication error has Check whether the client computer can
occurred on the network." occurred on the network. use the TCP/IP protocol.

"Scanner is not available. The machine's power is off. Turn on the power.
Check the scanner
connection status."

"Scanner is not available. The machine is not • Check whether the machine is
Check the scanner connected to the network connected to the network
connection status." correctly. correctly.
• Cancel the personal firewall
function of the client computer.
For details about firewall, see
Windows Help.
• Use an application such as telnet
to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine's
protocol. For details about how to
check this, see "Remote
Maintenance Using telnet",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.

212
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Scanner is not available. Network communication is • Check whether the machine's host
Check the scanner not available because the name is specified in the Network
connection status." machine's IP address could Connection Tool. For the WIA
not be obtained from the driver, check the [Network
host name. If only "IPv6" is Connection] tab in the properties.
set to [Active], the IPv6 • Use Web Image Monitor to set
address might not be "LLMNR" of "IPv6" to [Active].
obtained.

213
10. Troubleshooting

When Other Messages Appear


Message Cause Solution

"Firmware update will start. Automatic firmware update • If you want to start the firmware
Press [OK]. It will start is activated and it is time for update, press [OK], or let it start
automatically after 30 an automatic update. automatically after 30 seconds.
seconds have elapsed." • If you do not want to start the
firmware update, press [Cancel]
before 30 seconds have elapsed.
• Do not turn off the power switch
during the firmware update.

"Cannot connect with the • The wireless LAN Turn off the power, and then check the
wireless card. Turn the main board was not inserted wireless LAN board is inserted
power switch off, then check when the machine was correctly. After this, turn on the power
the card." turned on. again. If the message appears again,
(A "wireless LAN board" or • The wireless LAN contact your service representative.
"Bluetooth interface unit" is board was pulled out
referred to as a "wireless after the machine was
card".) turned on.
The settings are not updated
although the unit is detected.

"Cannot connect with the • The Bluetooth interface Turn off the power, and then confirm
Bluetooth interface. Check unit was installed while that the Bluetooth interface unit was
the Bluetooth interface." the machine was turned installed correctly. After this, turn on the
on. power again. If the message appears
• The Bluetooth interface again, contact your service
unit was removed while representative.
the machine was turned
on.

"Failed to read the PDF file." There is a possibility that the With this machine's browser PDF files
PDF version is not supported other than those whose versions and
by the browser's PDF viewer encryption levels are specified below
or an unsupported cannot be viewed.
encryption level is specified. • PDF version: 1.3-1.7
• PDF encryption level: 128Bit AES
or 256Bit AES

214
When Other Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution

"Clean the scanning glass. The scanning glass or guide Clean the scanning glass or guide
(Located next to the plate of the ADF is dirty. plate. See "Maintaining Your
exposure glass.)" Machine", Maintenance and
Specifications.

"Internal cooling fan is Some print runs may cause The fan will emit noise, but this is
active." the machine's interior to heat normal and the machine will be
up, starting the cooling fan. operable while the fan is running.
The amount of paper that can be
printed and the total operation time
until the fan starts running depends on
the temperature of the location at
which the machine is installed.

"Self checking..." The machine is performing The machine may perform periodic
image adjustment maintenance during operations. The
operations. frequency and duration of
maintenance depends on the humidity,
temperature, and printing factors such
as number of prints, paper size, and
paper type. Wait for the machine to
resume operation.

When There Is a Problem Scanning or Storing Originals

Message Cause Solution

"Captured file exceeded The maximum number of Reduce the number of pages in the
max. number of pages per pages per file has been transmitted file, and then resend the
file. Cannot send the exceeded. file. For details about the maximum
scanned data." number of pages per file, see "Storage
Function", Scan.

"Original(s) is being Another function of the Cancel the job in progress. Press [Exit],
scanned for a different machine is being used. and then press [Stop]. Follow the
function." instructions in the message that
appears and exit the function that is
running.

215
10. Troubleshooting

When the Address Book Is Updated

Message Cause Solution

"Updating the destination list A network error has • Check whether the server is
has failed. Try again?" occurred. connected.
• Antivirus programs and firewalls
can prevent client computers from
establishing connection with this
machine.
• If you are using antivirus software,
add the program to the exclusion
list in the application settings. For
details about how to add
programs to the exclusion list, see
the antivirus software Help.
• To prevent a firewall from
blocking the connection, register
the machine's IP address in the
firewall's IP address exclusion
settings. For details about the
procedure for excluding an IP
address, see your operating
system's Help.

"Updating the destination The destination list is being Wait until the message disappears. Do
list... Please wait. Specified updated from the network not turn off the power while this
destination(s) or sender's using Web Image Monitor. message is displayed. Depending on
name has been cleared." the number of destinations to be
updated, there may be some delay
before operation is resumed.
Operation is not possible while this
message is displayed.

"Updating the destination A specified destination or Specify the destination or sender's


list... Please wait. Specified sender's name was cleared name again.
destination(s) or sender's when the destination list in
name has been cleared." the delivery server was
updated.

216
When Other Messages Appear

When Data Cannot Be Sent Due to a Problem with the Destination

Message Cause Solution

"Some invalid destination(s) The specified group contains In the message that appears at each
contained. Do you want to either an e-mail destination transmission, press [Select].
select only valid and/or folder destination
destination(s)?" that is not supported by the
specified transmission
method.

"SMTP authentication email The SMTP authentication e- For details about how to set SMTP
address and administrator mail address and the authentication, see "File Transfer",
email address mismatch." administrator's e-mail Connecting the Machine/ System
address do not match. Settings.

When the Machine Cannot Be Operated Due to a Problem with the User
Certificate

Message Cause Solution

"The destination cannot be The user certificate A new user certificate must be installed.
selected because its (destination certificate) has For details about the user certificate
encryption certificate is not expired. (destination certificate), see
currently valid." "Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.

"The group destination The user certificate A new user certificate must be installed.
cannot be selected because (destination certificate) has For details about the user certificate
it contains a destination with expired. (destination certificate), see
a encryption certificate that "Configuring S/MIME", Security
is not currently valid." Guide.

"Transmission cannot be The user certificate A new user certificate must be installed.
performed because the (destination certificate) has For details about the user certificate
encryption certificate is not expired. (destination certificate), see
currently valid." "Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.

217
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"XXX cannot be YYY The device certificate (S/ A new device certificate (S/MIME)
because the device MIME) has expired. must be installed. For details about
certificate used for the S/ how to install a device certificate (S/
MIME signature is not MIME), see "Protecting
currently valid." Communication Paths via a Device
(XXX and YYY indicate the Certificate", Security Guide.
user action.)

"XXX cannot be YYY There is no device certificate For details about the device certificate
because there is a problem (S/MIME), or the certificate (S/MIME), see "Protecting
with the device certificate is invalid. Communication Paths via a Device
used for the S/MIME Certificate", Security Guide.
signature. Check the device
certificate."
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)

"XXX cannot be YYY The device certificate (PDF A new device certificate (PDF with
because the Digital with digital signature or digital signature or PDF/A with digital
Signature's device certificate PDF/A with digital signature) must be installed. For details
is not currently valid." signature) has expired. about how to install a device certificate
(XXX and YYY indicate the (PDF with digital signature or PDF/A
user action.) with digital signature), see
"Configuring PDFs with Electronic
Signatures", Security Guide.

"XXX cannot be YYY There is no device certificate A new device certificate (PDF with
because there is a problem (PDF with digital signature or digital signature or PDF/A with digital
with the Digital Signature's PDF/A with digital signature) must be installed. For details
device certificate. Check the signature), or the certificate about how to install a device certificate
device certificate." is invalid. (PDF with digital signature or PDF/A
(XXX and YYY indicate the with digital signature), see
user action.) "Configuring PDFs with Electronic
Signatures", Security Guide.

• If a fax or an e-mail cannot be sent and a message appears which states that there is a problem
with the device certificate or user certificate, a new certificate must be installed. For details about
how to install a new certificate, see "Configuring S/MIME" or "Protecting Communication Paths via
a Device Certificate", Security Guide.

218
When Other Messages Appear

When Problems Occur While Logging In

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication has failed." The entered login user name For details about the correct login user
or login password is not name and login password, see "Basic
correct. Authentication", Security Guide.

"Authentication has failed." The machine cannot perform For details about authentication, see
authentication. "Configuring User Authentication",
Security Guide.

When the User Lacks Privileges to Perform an Operation

Message Cause Solution

"You do not have the The logged in user name For details about how to set
privileges to use this does not have permissions permissions, see "Limiting Available
function." for the selected function. Functions", Security Guide.

"The selected file(s) You have tried to delete files To check your access permission for
contained file(s) without without the permission to do stored documents, or to delete a
access privileges. Only so. document you do not have permission
file(s) with access privileges to delete, see "Managing Stored Files",
will be deleted." Security Guide.

When the LDAP Server Cannot Be Used

Message Cause Solution

"Connection with LDAP A network error has Try the operation again. If the message
server has failed. Check the occurred and connection is still displayed, the network may be
server status." has failed. busy.
Check the settings for LDAP server in
[System Settings]. For details about
settings for LDAP server, see
"Programming the LDAP server",
Connecting the Machine/ System
Settings.

219
10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded time limit for A network error has • Try the operation again. If the
LDAP server search. Check occurred and connection message is still displayed, the
the server status." has failed. network may be busy.
• Check that the correct settings for
LDAP server are listed in
[Administrator Tools] of [System
Settings]. For details about LDAP
server, see "Programming the
LDAP server", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.

"LDAP server authentication A network error has Configure settings correctly for the user
has failed. Check the occurred and connection name and the password for LDAP
settings." has failed. server authentication.

220
11. Information for This Machine
This chapter describes environmental precautions and regulations.

Information on Environmental Regulations


ENERGY STAR Program

ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment


This company is a participant in the ENERGY STAR® Program.
This machine is compliant with the regulations specified by the
ENERGY STAR® Program.

The ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment encourage energy conservation
by promoting energy efficient computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products that feature energy saving
functions.
It is an open program in which manufacturers participate voluntarily.
Targeted products are computers, monitors, printers, facsimiles, copiers, scanners, and multi-function
devices. Energy Star standards and logos are internationally uniform.

• For details about the "default delay time", see page 221 "Energy Saving Functions".

Energy Saving Functions

To reduce its power consumption, this machine has the following functions:
Low Power mode
• If this machine remains idle for a specified period, it automatically reduces its electrical
consumption.

221
11. Information for This Machine

• The default period the machine waits before entering Low Power Mode is 1 minute. This
default time can be changed.
Sleep mode
• If this machine remains idle for a specified period or when [Energy Saver] ( ) is pressed, it
enters Sleep mode to further reduce its electrical consumption.
• The default delay time the machine waits before entering Sleep mode is 1 minute. This default
time can be changed.
• The machine can print jobs from computers and receive faxes while in Sleep mode.
Specification
• (mainly Europe and Asia)

Type 1 Type 2

Reduced electrical consumption in 29.8 W 30.4 W


Low Power mode *1

Time of switch into Low Power mode 1 minute 1 minute

Time of switch out from Low Power 10 seconds 10 seconds


mode *1

Reduced electrical consumption in 1.1 W 1.1 W


Sleep mode *1

Time of switch into Sleep mode 1 minute 1 minute

Time of switch out from Sleep mode 21 seconds 25.4 seconds


*1

Duplex Function *2 Standard Standard

*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may differ
depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
*2 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used
with) a duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.
• (mainly North America)

Type 1 Type 2

Reduced electrical consumption in Low 27.0 W 29.8 W


Power mode *1

Time of switch into Low Power mode 1 minute 1 minute

222
Information on Environmental Regulations

Type 1 Type 2

Time of switch out from Low Power 10 seconds 10 seconds


mode *1

Reduced electrical consumption in 1.1 W 1.1 W


Sleep mode *1

Time of switch into Sleep mode 1 minute 1 minute

Time of switch out from Sleep mode *1 21 seconds 25.4 seconds

Duplex Function *2 Standard Standard

*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may differ
depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
*2 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used
with) a duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.

• Specifications can vary depending on which options are installed on the machine.
• For details about how to change the default interval, see "Timer Settings", Connecting the
Machine/ System Settings.
• The machine enters sleep mode directly in the following situations:
• Low Power Mode Timer and Sleep Mode Timer are set to the same time
• Sleep Mode Timer is set to a shorter time than Low Power Mode Timer
• Depending on which embedded software application is installed on it, the machine might take
longer than indicated to enter Sleep mode.

User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (mainly


Europe)

Users in the countries where this symbol shown in this section has been specified in
national law on collection and treatment of E-waste

Our Products contain high quality components and are designed to facilitate recycling.
Our products or product packaging are marked with the symbol below.

223
11. Information for This Machine

The symbol indicates that the product must not be treated as municipal waste. It must be disposed of
separately via the appropriate return and collection systems available. By following these instructions
you ensure that this product is treated correctly and help to reduce potential impacts on the environment
and human health, which could otherwise result from inappropriate handling. Recycling of products
helps to conserve natural resources and protect the environment.
For more detailed information on collection and recycling systems for this product, please contact the
shop where you purchased it, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.

All Other Users

If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities, the shop where you bought this
product, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.

Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)
(mainly Europe)

In accordance with the Battery Directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users Annex II,
the above symbol is printed on batteries and accumulators.
This symbol means that in the European Union, used batteries and accumulators should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
In the EU, there are separate collection systems for not only used electrical and electronic products but
also batteries and accumulators.
Please dispose of them correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.
Contact your sales or service representative to change the battery.

224
Information on Environmental Regulations

Environmental Advice for Users (mainly Europe)

Users in the EU, Switzerland and Norway


Consumables yield
Please refer to either the User's Manual for this information or the packaging of the consumable.
Recycled paper
The machine can use recycled paper which is produced in accordance with European standard
EN 12281:2002 or DIN 19309. For products using EP printing technology, the machine can print
on 64 g/m2 paper, which contains less raw materials and represents a significant resource
reduction.
Duplex printing (if applicable)
Duplex printing enables both sides of a sheet of paper to be used. This saves paper and reduces
the size of printed documents so that fewer sheets are used. We recommend that this feature is
enabled whenever you print.
Toner and ink cartridge return program
Toner and ink cartridge for recycling will be accepted free of charge from users in accordance with
local regulations.
For details about the return program, please refer to the Web page below or consult your service
person.

https://www.ricoh-return.com/

Energy efficiency
The amount of electricity a machine consumes depends as much on its specifications as it does on
the way you use it. The machine is designed to allow you to reduce electricity costs by switching to
Ready mode after it prints the last page. If required, it can immediately print again from this mode.
If no additional prints are required and a specified period of time passes, the device switches to an
energy saving mode.
In these modes, the machine consumes less power (watts). If the machine is to print again, it needs
a little longer to return from an energy saving mode than from Ready mode.
For maximum energy savings, we recommend that the default setting for power management is
used.

Products that comply with the Energy Star requirement are always energy efficient.

225
11. Information for This Machine

Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA)


(mainly North America)

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/


perchlorate

226
INDEX
Data security for copying......................................25
Destination........................................................... 217
2 Sided Print...........................................................11
Display panel......................................................... 44
500-sheet paper feed unit.................................... 30
Distributed scan management.............................. 24
A Document Server.. 12, 17, 90, 109, 110, 131, 133,
173, 190
Adding toner........................................................156
Drag....................................................................... 49
Address Book........13, 91, 93, 119, 121, 122, 124,
126, 216 DSM....................................................................... 24
ADF.....................................................................9, 27 Duplex....................................................... 11, 16, 79
ADF's extender...................................................... 29 E
Authentication screen............................................ 71
E-mail address............................................ 124, 126
Auto Document Feeder........................................... 9
E-mail destination....................................... 124, 126
Auto Reduce / Enlarge.................................. 16, 78
E-mail transmission................................................ 20
B Embedding text information..................................22
Basic procedure......................................... 104, 131 ENERGY STAR Program..................................... 221
Basic procedure (Copy)....................................... 77 Envelope........................................ 16, 87, 108, 153
Basic procedure (Fax)........................................... 91 Environmental advice for users.......................... 225
Basic Procedure (Scanner Classic).................... 127 Error log............................................................... 187
Basic procedure (Scanner)........................ 117, 124 Error report.......................................................... 187
Beeping pattern................................................... 166 Exposure glass....................................................... 27
Bypass tray............................ 29, 86, 140, 142, 150 Extender................................................................. 29
Extender for the bypass tray................................. 29
C
External options..................................................... 30
Canceling a transmission...................................... 95 F
Caster table............................................................30
Changing the display language.......................... 45 Facsimile.............................................................. 175
Check Status........................................................ 164 Fax.......................................................................... 55
Checking a stored file......................................... 128 Fax destination................................................ 91, 93
Classic Application................................................52 Fax indicator.......................................................... 44
Combine.................................................... 11, 16, 82 File type................................................................ 129
Combine 1 Side.....................................................83 Flick......................................................................... 48
Combine 2 Sides................................................... 84 Folder destination......................119, 121, 122, 123
Combine printing.................................................106 Frequently-used settings........................................ 14
Computer............................................................. 207 Front cover............................................................. 29
Control panel.................................................. 27, 44 Function Compatibility........................................ 172
Copier.................................................................. 173 H
Copy................................................................ 53, 77
Hold Print................................................................17
Copy orientation....................................................80
Home screen............................................. 15, 46, 49
Creating a shared folder.................................... 117
How to Read the Manuals...................................... 7
Custom size paper.................................................86
I
D
Icon............................................................ 46, 49, 50
Data In indicator.................................................... 44
Immediate Transmission........................................ 94

227
Indicator lamp..................................................... 164 O
Information on environmental regulations.........221
OCR unit................................................................. 22
Information screen................................................. 11
OHP transparencies..................................... 16, 148
Internet Fax............................................................ 20
One-Sided combine.............................................. 83
IP-Fax......................................................................20
Options................................................................... 30
J Orientation-fixed paper......................................145
Journal.................................................................. 100 Original orientation............................................... 80
L P

Label paper......................................................... 148 Paper capacity.................................................... 148


LAN-Fax...........................................................11, 18 Paper guides.......................................................... 29
LDAP server..........................................................219 Paper size............................................................ 148
Left cover................................................................ 28 Paper size dial....................................................... 28
Loading paper................................... 137, 138, 140 Paper thickness.................................................... 151
Locked Print............................................................ 17 Paper tray............................................. 28, 138, 148
Logging in the machine................................ 71, 219 Paper type............................................................148
Logging out the machine.......................................72 Paper weight........................................................148
Long tap................................................................. 49 Paperless Fax......................................................... 11
Low Power mode.................................................221 PCL........................................................................101
PCL 6.......................................... 104, 105, 106, 108
M
Pinch-in................................................................... 48
Mail to Print............................................................ 20 Pinch-out.................................................................48
Main power indicator........................................... 44 Placing originals.................................................... 74
Main power switch......................................... 28, 69 Preventing information leakage........................... 23
Managing documents......................................... 110 Print/Scan(Memory Storage Device)............... 113
Media access lamp............................................... 44 Printer..... 104, 185, 187, 188, 189, 190, 192, 193,
Media slots............................................................ 44 194
Memory....................................................... 193, 202 Printer driver properties...................................... 103
Memory Storage Device.................................... 113 Privilege................................................................219
Memory Transmission........................................... 91 Problem....................................................... 167, 215
Message......... 167, 173, 175, 176, 182, 185, 187, Program........................................................... 14, 66
188, 189, 190, 192, 193, 194, 197, 200, 202,
203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 211, 214, 215, 216, Q
217, 219
Quick Application................................................. 52
Model-specific information..................................... 8
Quick Install......................................................... 101
N Quick Print Release............................................. 111
Names of major features........................................ 9 R
Network setting................................................... 176
Recommended paper......................................... 148
Note for the battery and/or accumulator symbol..
.............................................................................. 224 Reducing my costs................................................. 11
Notes to users in the state of California.............226 Region A................................................................... 8
Number of sets.......................................................89 Region B................................................................... 8
Registering destinations.........................................13
Remote Fax....................................................21, 182

228
Running out of toner............................................ 160 Two-sided paper................................................. 145
S Two-sided printing.............................................. 105
U
Sample Print........................................................... 17
Scan Settings....................................................... 130 Unauthorized copy prevention............................ 25
Scan to E-mail......................................................124 Used toner........................................................... 161
Scan to Folder............................................... 22, 117 User certificate..................................................... 217
Scanner.... 60, 117, 124, 127, 197, 200, 202, 203, User Code Authentication.....................................71
204, 205, 206, 207, 211 User information on electrical and electronic
Sending scan files........................................... 12, 22 equipment............................................................ 223
Sending stored documents................................... 98 Using scanned files on the computer................... 12
Shared folder.......................................................117 V
Shortcut icon............................................. 46, 49, 50
Sleep mode......................................................... 221 Vents.................................................................28, 29
SMB folder......................................... 119, 121, 122 W
Sort......................................................................... 89
Web Image Monitor.................................... 24, 135
Stamp..................................................................... 16
Widget................................................................... 51
Standard Application............................................ 52
WSD scanner.........................................................22
Standard printing................................................ 104
Standard tray......................................................... 28
Status icon............................................................ 163
Status indicator...................................................... 44
Stored documents.................................. 17, 98, 133
Stored Print............................................................. 17
Storing a document............................................... 97
Storing data.................................................. 90, 131
Storing documents...............................................109
Storing received documents................................. 18
Storing scan files........................................... 12, 127
Symbols.................................................................... 7
T
Thick paper.......................................................... 152
Toner................................................... 156, 160, 161
Tray......................................................................... 28
Tray 1................................................................... 148
Tray 2................................................................... 149
Tray 3................................................................... 149
Tray 4................................................................... 149
Tray 5................................................................... 149
Tray extension........................................................ 28
Turning off the power............................................ 69
Turning on the power............................................ 69
Two-Sided combine.............................................. 84

229
MEMO

230
MEMO

231
MEMO

232 EN GB EN US EN AU D256-7710
© 2016
EN GB EN US EN AU D256-7710
Operating Instructions
Driver Installation Guide

See the other online manuals on our


website (http://www.ricoh.com/) or from the
control panel.

For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information in Read This First before using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction
Start Installer........................................................................................................................................................3
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM.............................................................................................5
Printer Drivers..................................................................................................................................................5
TWAIN Driver.................................................................................................................................................7
LAN-Fax Driver...............................................................................................................................................8
For OS X Users....................................................................................................................................................9
2. Installing the Printer Driver
Confirming the Connection Method............................................................................................................... 11
Network Connection................................................................................................................................... 11
Local Connection......................................................................................................................................... 12
Quick Install...................................................................................................................................................... 13
Quick Installation via a Network................................................................................................................13
Quick Installation via a USB Connection...................................................................................................14
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection..................................................................................15
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port........................................................................................15
Using Windows Print Server........................................................................................................................21
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection....................................................................................... 23
USB Connection...........................................................................................................................................23
Parallel Connection..................................................................................................................................... 27
Bluetooth Connection.................................................................................................................................. 27
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer.................................................................................................... 33
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication............................................................................................. 33
If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled............................................................................................... 34
3. Installing the Scanner Driver
Installing the TWAIN Driver............................................................................................................................ 37
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver
Installing the LAN-Fax Driver.......................................................................................................................... 39
Specifying the Same Port as the Printer Driver...........................................................................................39
Specifying the Port When Installing the LAN-Fax Driver.......................................................................... 40
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties.................................................................................................................. 42
Setting Print Properties................................................................................................................................. 42
Configuring Option Settings for the Facsimile........................................................................................... 43

1
5. Troubleshooting
Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver............................................................................... 45
If USB Connection Fails................................................................................................................................... 47
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under OS X
Installing the PPD Files......................................................................................................................................49
Registering the Printer.......................................................................................................................................50
USB Connection...........................................................................................................................................50
Network Connection................................................................................................................................... 51
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer Under OS X...............................................................................52
7. Appendix
Updating or Deleting the Driver......................................................................................................................53
Updating the Driver..................................................................................................................................... 53
Deleting the Driver....................................................................................................................................... 54
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................................... 57
INDEX............................................................................................................................................................. 59

2
1. Introduction
This chapter explains the software included on the supplied CD-ROM.

Start Installer
To connect this machine to a client computer and use its printer, scanner, and fax functions, the software
included on the provided CD-ROM must be installed on the client computer.
The installer starts automatically when you insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of a
client computer running under Windows or Windows Server. You can then install the various software
included on the CD-ROM.
The contents (display item) of the installer are as follows:
Network Quick Install
Installs the PCL 6 printer driver via a network connection and configures settings to use the printer in
a network.
For details, see page 13 "Quick Installation via a Network".
USB Quick Install
Installs the PCL 6 printer driver via a USB connection and configures settings to connect the printer
to a computer.
For details, see page 14 "Quick Installation via a USB Connection".
PCL Printer Driver
Installs the PCL 6 and/or PCL 5e printer drivers.
For details about installing the driver, see page 15 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 23 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".
PostScript 3 Printer Driver
Installs the PostScript 3 printer driver.
For details about installing the driver, see page 15 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 23 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".
LAN-Fax Driver
This software enables you to fax documents directly from your computer. Address Book, LAN-Fax
Cover Sheet Editor, and MFP Address Book Downloader will also be installed.
For details about installing the driver, see page 39 "Installing the LAN-Fax Driver".
TWAIN Driver
This software enables you to utilize image data from other TWAIN compliant applications.
For details about installing the driver, see page 37 "Installing the TWAIN Driver".

3
1. Introduction

Select Language
Changes the interface language.
Browse This Disk
Browses the contents of this disk.
Exit
Quits Installer.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the case, double-click
"Setup.exe", located on the CD-ROM root directory, or click [Run SETUP.EXE] in the [AutoPlay]
dialog box.

4
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM

Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM


This section explains the software and utilities CD-ROM provided with this machine.

• For the latest information on the corresponding operating system, see "Readme.txt" file, located on
the CD-ROM root directory.
• For the latest information on Windows Terminal Service, Citrix XenDesktop, and Citrix XenApp, see
the manufacturer's Web site.

Printer Drivers

Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The following drivers are
included on the CD-ROM.

Printer Language

Operating System*1 PCL 5e PCL 6 PostScript 3

Windows Vista *2 OK OK OK

Windows 7 *3 OK OK OK

Windows 8 *4 OK OK OK

Windows 8.1 *5 OK OK OK

Windows 10*6 OK OK OK

Windows Server 2003 *7 OK OK OK

Windows Server 2008 *8 OK OK OK

Windows Server 2012 *9 OK OK OK

OS X *10 OK

*1 Windows operating system supports both versions (32/64 bit).


*2 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate/Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise/Microsoft Windows Vista Business/
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium/Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
*3 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium/Microsoft Windows 7 Professional/Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate/
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise
*4 Microsoft Windows 8/Microsoft Windows 8 Pro/Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise
*5 Microsoft Windows 8.1/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Enterprise

5
1. Introduction

*6 Microsoft Windows 10 Home/Microsoft Windows 10 Pro/Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise/Microsoft


Windows 10 Education
*7 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition/
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise
Edition
*8 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise/Microsoft
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
*9 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Foundation/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Essentials/Microsoft
Windows Server 2012 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Foundation/Microsoft Windows
Server 2012 R2 Essentials/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard
*10 OS X 10.8 or later
PCL printer drivers
Two kinds of PCL printer driver (PCL 5e and PCL 6) are included. These drivers allow your
computer to communicate with this machine via a printer language.
Adobe® PostScript® printer driver and PPD files
Adobe PostScript printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer
language. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.

• Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5e printer driver. In this case, you can install
PCL 5e without having to install PCL 6.
• For details about installing the driver, see page 15 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 23 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".

Supported languages

The languages supported in each printer driver are as follow:

Printer Language

Supported languages PCL 5e *1 PCL 6 *2 PostScript 3 *2 PPD (OS X)

English

German

French

Italian

Spanish

Dutch

6
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM

Printer Language

Supported languages PCL 5e *1 PCL 6 *2 PostScript 3 *2 PPD (OS X)

Swedish

Norwegian

Danish

Finnish

Hungarian

Czech

Polish

Portuguese

Russian

Catalan

Turkish

Brazilian Portuguese

Greek

: Supported
: You can install the printer driver, but the printer driver is displayed in English
*1 The PCL 5e printer driver does not support Brazilian Portuguese and Greek. Use the English version of the
driver.
*2 The PCL 6 and PostScript 3 printer drivers use the same interface language as the one specified by your
operating system. However, the PostScript 3 printer driver will be displayed in English if your operating
system uses one of the following languages: Finnish, Hungarian, Czech, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Catalan,
Turkish, Brazilian Portuguese, and Greek.

TWAIN Driver

This driver is required to scan an original using a scanner. To use the machine as a network TWAIN
scanner, this driver must be installed.
File path
The driver is included in the following folder on the CD-ROM:

7
1. Introduction

\X86\DRIVERS\TWAIN
Supported Operating System*1
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
*1 TWAIN scanner runs on a 64-bit operating system, but is not compatible with 64-bit applications. Use it
with 32-bit applications.
Supported languages
The TWAIN Driver uses the same interface language as the one specified by your operating
system.

• For details about installing the driver, see page 37 "Installing the TWAIN Driver".

LAN-Fax Driver

This driver is required to use LAN-Fax functions.


File path
The driver is included in the following folder on the CD-ROM:
• 32-bit driver
\X86\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\X86\DISK1
• 64-bit driver
\X64\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\X64\DISK1
Supported Operating System
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
Supported languages
The interface language is supported in the language specified when installing driver.

• For details about installing the driver, see page 39 "Installing the LAN-Fax Driver".

8
For OS X Users

For OS X Users
If you are using OS X, the following limitations apply to each function:
• When using the scanner function, the TWAIN Driver cannot be used.
• When using the fax function, the LAN-Fax Driver cannot be used.
• When using the printer function, use the printer driver for OS X.
For details, see page 49 "Installing the Printer Driver Under OS X".

9
1. Introduction

10
2. Installing the Printer Driver
This chapter explains how to install and configure the printer drivers for use on the Windows operating
system. Installing procedures on Windows 7 is shown as an example except where indicated.

Confirming the Connection Method


This machine supports network and local connection.
Before installing the printer driver, check how the machine is connected. Follow the driver installation
procedure that is appropriate to the connection method.

Network Connection

This machine can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.

Using the Windows printing port

Network connections can be established through Ethernet and Wireless LAN.


Available ports are determined based on the combination of Windows operating system version and
connection method used.
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

Connection Method Available Ports

• Ethernet • Standard TCP/IP port


• Wireless LAN • IPP port
• LPR port

Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2

Connection Method Available Ports

• Ethernet • Standard TCP/IP port


• Wireless LAN • IPP port
• LPR port
• WSD port

11
2. Installing the Printer Driver

• For details about how to install the printer driver for each type of port, see page 15 "Installing the
Printer Driver for the Selected Port".

Using as a network printer

This machine can be used as a remote printer using the Windows print server function.

Client OS Using Server

• Windows Vista • Windows Vista print server


• Windows 7 • Windows 7 print server
• Windows 8 • Windows 8 print server
• Windows 8.1 • Windows 8.1 print server
• Windows 10 • Windows 10 print server
• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 • Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 print server
• Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 • Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 print server
• Windows Server 2012/2012 R2 • Windows Server 2012/2012 R2 print server

• For details about how to install the printer driver to print server, see page 21 "Using Windows
Print Server".

Local Connection

Local connections can be established via USB, parallel, and Bluetooth connections.

• For details about how to install the printer driver for each method of connections, see page 23
"Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".

12
Quick Install

Quick Install
You can install the printer drivers easily from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 45 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".

Quick Installation via a Network

Using Network Quick Install, the PCL 6 printer driver is installed under network environment, and the
Standard TCP/IP port will be set.

1. Click [Network Quick Install] on the installer screen.

13
2. Installing the Printer Driver

2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
5. Click [Install].
6. When the port setting screen appears, specify a port.
7. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
8. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
9. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
10. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.

Quick Installation via a USB Connection

Using USB Quick Install, you can install the PCL 6 printer driver via a USB connection, and configure
settings to connect the printer to a computer.

1. Click [USB Quick Install] on the installer screen.


2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select the method to install a printer driver, and then click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use, and then click [Next >].
5. Make sure the machine is turned off and not connected to the computer, and then click
[Next >].
Wait for a moment until file copying is complete and [<Auto-detect USB Port>] screen appears.
6. Connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, and then turn on the machine.
The auto-detecting starts.
7. In the confirmation dialog box, select [Yes] if you want to use the machine as your default
printer.
8. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
9. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.

14
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

Installing the Printer Driver for a Network


Connection
This section describes the installation procedure of the printer drivers for network connection.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 45 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".

Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port

Describes the driver installation procedure for each printer port. See the installation procedure for the
printer port you are using.

15
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Port Type Printer Driver Type Reference

Standard TCP/IP port page 16 "Using the Standard TCP/IP port"

IPP port page 16 "Using the IPP port"

LPR port page 18 "Using the LPR port"

WSD port page 18 "Using the WSD port"

Using the Standard TCP/IP port

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [Next >].
6. Click [Next >].
7. Enter the machine name or IP address, and then click [Next >].
When the device type selection appears, select "RICOH Network Printer C model".
8. Click [Finish].
9. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
10. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
11. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
12. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

Using the IPP port

16
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].


If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1 or Windows Server 2012/2012 R2,
click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window
appears, click [View devices and printers].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 10, right-click the [Start] button on the
desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window appears, click [View
devices and printers].
2. Click [Add a printer].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1/10 or Windows Server 2012/2012
R2, proceed to Step 4.
3. Click [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer].
4. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
5. In the [Select a shared printer by name] box, enter "http://(machine's IP address or host
name)/printer (or ipp)" as the printer's address, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK] to close the [Install From Disk] window.
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[OK].
The installation starts.
10. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name and default
printer configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
11. Click [Finish].

17
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Using the LPR port

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [LPR Port], and then click [Next >].
6. Enter the machine name or IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd:]
box.
7. Enter "lp" in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server:] box, and then click [OK].
8. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
9. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
10. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
11. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

Using the WSD port

• The WSD port can be used under Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, or Windows Server
2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2.
• You can connect to the printer only if both the printer and computer are on the same network
segment, or "Network discovery" is enabled. For details, see Windows Help.

Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Network].


2. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Install].
3. Click [Locate and install driver software (recommended)].
4. Click [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].
5. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:

18
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
6. Click [Next].
7. Click [Close].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the WSD port will appear in the
window for configuring printers.

• The port name that follows "WSD" uses random character strings. It cannot be changed freely.
• To stop the installation, click [Cancel] before the installation is complete. When re-installing the
WSD Port, right-click the printer's icon in the [Network] window, and then click [Uninstall].

Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Computer].


2. Click [Network].
3. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Install].
4. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
5. Click [Add a printer].
6. Click [Add a local printer].
7. Select [Use an existing port:], and then select WSD port.
8. Click [Next].
9. Click [Have Disk...].
10. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1

19
2. Installing the Printer Driver

64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1


• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
11. Click [OK] to close the [Install From Disk] window.
12. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
13. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name, default printer,
and printer sharing configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
14. Click [Finish].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the WSD port will appear in the
window for configuring printers.

• To stop installation of the selected driver, click [Cancel] before the installation is complete. When
re-installing the WSD Port, right-click the machine's icon in the [Network] window, and then click
[Uninstall].

Windows 8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2

1. Open the [Devices and Printers] window.


• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add].
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [x86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].

20
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Click [Add a printer] on the [Devices and Printers] window.
13. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
14. Select [Add a Bluetooth, wireless or network discoverable printer], and then click [Next].
15. Select the machine you want to use, and then click [Next].

Using Windows Print Server

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Network Printer], and then click [Next >].
6. Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the [Browse for
Printer] window.

21
2. Installing the Printer Driver

7. Select the machine you want to use, and then click [OK].
8. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
9. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
10. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
11. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

22
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

Installing the Printer Driver for a Local


Connection
This section describes the installation procedure of the printer drivers for USB, parallel, or Bluetooth
connection.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Yes] or
[Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Install this
driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 45 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".

USB Connection

This section explains how to install the printer drivers using USB.

23
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are
in progress.
If the printer driver has already been installed, and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB" port is added to the [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and Printers]
window.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the machine to install it from
the CD-ROM provided with this machine.

Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

1. Check that the power of the machine is off.


2. Connect the machine and computer using the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
3. Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
4. Select [No, not this time], and then click [Next].
5. Click [Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]], and then click [Next].
6. Select the [Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box under [Search for
the best driver in these locations.], and then click [Next].
7. Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install.
Check the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [Next].
The installation starts.

24
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

9. Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers and Faxes] window.
The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.

Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008

1. Check that the power of the machine is off.


2. Connect the machine and computer using a USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
3. Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
4. In the [Found New Hardware] window, click [Locate and install driver software
(recommended)].
5. Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install.
Check the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
6. Click [Next].
The installation starts.
7. Click [Close].
If the printer driver has already been installed and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers] window.
The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.

25
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2

1. Open the [Devices and Printers] window.


• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add...].
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [x86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Check that the power of the machine is off.

26
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

13. Connect the machine and computer using a USB cable.


Connect the USB cable firmly.
14. Turn on the power of the machine.

Parallel Connection

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Local Port], and then click [Next >].
6. Enter a port name, and then click [OK].
7. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
8. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
9. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
10. Click [Finish].
Select one of the options to restart the computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].

Bluetooth Connection

• The Bluetooth unit and the wireless LAN unit cannot be used simultaneously.

Supported profiles and restrictions


Supported Profiles
• SPP (Serial Port Profile)
• HCRP (Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile)
• BIP (Basic Imaging Profile)
Restrictions on SPP, HCRP
• A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers can be connected at
the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by SPP, one by HCRP.

27
2. Installing the Printer Driver

• When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer at the
same time, the first device that establishes connection is selected. When selecting the
connection between the other devices, cancel the first established connection.
• SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.
• HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.
Restrictions on BIP
• PostScript 3 must be installed on the printer to connect via BIP.
• Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected via BIP.
• Only JPEG images can be printed using BIP.
• User codes are disabled for BIP.
• You cannot print if print functions are restricted.
• Some printers do not support BIP.

Adding a Bluetooth printer

• To connect to a Bluetooth printer, your computer must have a Bluetooth device installed. Make sure
a Bluetooth device is installed on your computer.

Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].


2. Click [Add a printer].
3. Click [Next].
4. Click [Bluetooth Printer], and then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth printers.
If a new printer is discovered, the [Found New Hardware Wizard] window appears. To ignore a
discovered device and continue searching, click [Cancel]. The computer resumes searching for
other available Bluetooth printers.
5. Click [No, I will not connect], and then click [Next].
6. Click [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)], and then click [Next].
7. Select the [Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box, and then click
[Next].
8. If the [Hardware Installation] window appears, click [Continue].
9. If the installation was successful, click [Finish].
10. Select [Test Print], and then click [Next].
11. Click [Finish].

28
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

• Actual Bluetooth printer operations will vary according to your Bluetooth device and/or Bluetooth-
installed computer. For details, see the Help supplied with your Bluetooth device and/or Bluetooth-
equipped computer.
• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.

Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].


2. In the "Hardware and Sound" area, click [Printers].
3. In the top part of the window, click [Add a printer].
4. In the [Add Printer] window, select [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer], and
then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth devices.
5. From the list of discovered devices, select the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
All discovered wireless printers appear in the list of discovered printers, not only Bluetooth printers.
Make sure the machine you select is a Bluetooth printer.
6. Click [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)] on the [Found New
Hardware] display.
7. In the [Found New Hardware] window, select the printer driver you want to use, and
then click [Next].
The installation starts.
8. If the [Windows Security] window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
9. Click [Close].
10. If you want to change the printer name, enter the new name in the [Printer Name
Settings] window.
11. If you want to print a test page, click [Printing Test Page] on the "Test Print" page.
Otherwise, click [Finish].

• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.

Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].


2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].

29
2. Installing the Printer Driver

3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add...].


4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [x86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Click [Add a printer] on the [Devices and Printers] window.
13. Click [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer].
14. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
15. Select [Add a Bluetooth printer], and then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth devices.
16. From the list of discovered devices, select the machine you want to use, and then click
[OK].
17. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name and shared
printer configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
18. Click [Finish].

30
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.

Windows 8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2

1. Open the [Devices and Printers] window.


• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add].
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [x86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.

31
2. Installing the Printer Driver

12. Click [Add a printer] on the [Devices and Printers] window.


13. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
14. Select [Add a Bluetooth, wireless or network discoverable printer], and then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth devices.
15. From the list of discovered devices, select the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
16. Click [Next].
17. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name and shared
printer configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
18. Click [Finish].

• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.

32
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer

Configuring Option Settings for the Printer


When bidirectional communication works correctly, your computer obtains information about option,
paper size and paper feed direction settings from the machine automatically. Bidirectional
communication also allows you to monitor machine status.
When bidirectional communication is disabled, you have to set up option, paper size and paper feed
direction settings on your computer manually.

• Manage Printers permission is required to enable bidirectional communication or to configure the


option settings. Log on as an Administrators group member.

Conditions for Bidirectional Communication

To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:


When connected with parallel cables
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.
• The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cables and
parallel connectors.
When connected with the network
• The Standard TCP/IP port must be used.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the printer driver.
When connected with USB
• The machine must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable.
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the printer driver.

• The PCL 6 and PostScript 3 printer drivers support bidirectional communication and automatic
printer status updates.
• To obtain printer information automatically using the bidirectional communication function of the
PCL 6 or PostScript 3 printer driver, you must select the [Automatically Update Printer Information]
check box on the [Accessories] tab in the printer driver's properties window.
• The PCL 5e printer driver supports bidirectional communication. You can update the printer status
manually.

33
2. Installing the Printer Driver

If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled

This section describes how to set up option, paper size and paper feed direction settings on your
computer manually.

1. Open the printer window.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Accessories] tab.
If options in the [Accessories] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection is enabled. In this case, no
change is necessary for option settings.
4. Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the necessary settings.
5. Click [Change Input Tray Settings...].
6. In [Input Tray:] select which trays to use, and then, in [Paper Size:] select the size of the
paper that you want to load in each tray.
Click [Modify Input Tray/Paper Size] to apply the setting for each tray.
7. Click [OK].
8. Click [Apply].
9. Click [OK] to close the printer properties window.

34
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer

• For details about making option settings for the machine using OS X, see page 52 "Configuring
Option Settings for the Printer Under OS X".

35
2. Installing the Printer Driver

36
3. Installing the Scanner Driver
This chapter explains how to install the TWAIN Driver on a client computer. Installing procedures on
Windows 7 is shown as an example except where indicated.

Installing the TWAIN Driver


To use the network TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN Driver on a client computer.

• To use this machine as a network TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application must be


installed on the client computer.

1. Click [TWAIN Driver] on the installer screen.


2. The installer of the TWAIN Driver starts. Follow the instructions.

• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".
• Before you start the installation, check the system requirements for the TWAIN Driver. For details
about the system requirements, see page 5 "Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM".
• When the installation is complete, a message about restarting the client computer may appear. In
this case, restart the client computer.
• After the installation is complete, a folder with the name of the machine in use is added in
[Programs], [All Programs], [Apps], or [All apps] on the [Start] menu. Help can be displayed from
here.

37
3. Installing the Scanner Driver

• Notes on using the network TWAIN scanner are provided in "Readme.txt". Be sure to read them
before use.

38
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver
This chapter explains how to install and configure the LAN-Fax Driver on a client computer. Installing
procedures on Windows 7 is shown as an example except where indicated.

Installing the LAN-Fax Driver


Address Book, LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor, and MFP Address Book Downloader are installed with the
LAN-Fax Driver. Address Book helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations. LAN-Fax Cover Sheet
Editor helps you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets. MFP Address Book Downloader allows you to save the
address book registered in the machine as a CSV file on your computer.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the Standard TCP/IP port.

Specifying the Same Port as the Printer Driver

If a port name that is the same as one that is already in use by the existing driver is specified, the LAN-
Fax Driver installation may fail. If the printer driver is already installed, make sure that the port numbers
of the LAN-Fax Driver and the printer driver match.

1. Click [LAN-Fax Driver] on the installer screen.


2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Click [Next >].
4. Select the same port as the one selected in the printer driver from the [Select from the port
list], and then click [Next >].
5. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
6. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
7. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Yes] or
[Continue].

39
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver

• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Install this
driver software anyway].
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".

Specifying the Port When Installing the LAN-Fax Driver

To specify a port that is different from the printer driver when installing the LAN-Fax Driver, see the
installation procedure of the printer driver.
If places where the procedure or description differs depending on the driver to be installed, replace the
corresponding procedure or description accordingly, and install the driver.

Corresponding items to
Installation procedures
replace

page 16 "Using the Standard TCP/IP port" 1, 2

page 16 "Using the IPP port" 3

page 18 "Using the LPR port" 1, 2

40
Installing the LAN-Fax Driver

List of Items to Replace


Procedure/description in Procedure/description in the LAN-
No. Items to be replaced
the printer driver Fax Driver

The name of the button


Click [PCL Printer Driver] or
1 that starts the installation Click [LAN-Fax Driver].
[PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
procedure

The procedures in the Select the check box of the


Select [Printer Name: <LAN-Fax
2 [Install Printer Driver] machine model you want to
Generic>].
dialog box use.

The LAN-Fax Driver is installed in


the following folder:
• 32-bit driver
The destination folder in
The destination folder is X86\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX
3 which the driver files are
written in the description. \X86\DISK1
stored
• 64-bit driver
X64\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX
\X64\DISK1

41
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver

Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties

• Manage Printers permission is required to set the properties for the LAN-Fax Driver. Log on as an
Administrators group member.
• The method for selecting the LAN-Fax Driver will vary according to your operating system. For
details, see Windows Help.

Setting Print Properties

This section explains how to make settings such as paper size or resolution.

1. Open the printer window.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Printing preferences].
3. To set the following properties.
• Document Size:
• Orientation:
• Input Tray:

42
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties

• Resolution:
• Spool Data in EMF Format
4. Click [Apply].
5. Click [OK].

Configuring Option Settings for the Facsimile

1. Open the printer windows.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Accessories] tab, and then make the settings for the option configuration.
4. Select the check boxes for the installed optional units.
5. Click [Apply].
Option configuration settings are complete.
6. Click [OK].

[Accessories] tab

The [Accessories] tab contains the following items besides option configuration items.

43
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver

Misc
• Enable Email
Check this when using Internet Fax with the LAN-Fax function.
• Prohibit manual destination entry
Select this check box when manual destination entry is set as prohibited from the machine.
• No. of Entries to Fix Destination
Specify the number of entries to fix the destinations when to enter destinations directly. You
can enter a value between 1 and 15.
• Check Destination
Select the check box to confirm the destinations before sending.
IP-Fax
To use IP-Fax, select the [Enable IP-Fax] check box, and then specify the protocol in [Valid
protocol:].

• If the options on this machine are not configured as instructed, LAN-Fax functions may fail.
• If this machine is connected to a network, configuration of each option installed on the machine will
be performed automatically. If the settings do not match the installed optional units, click [Update
Now].

44
5. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions for driver installation and USB connection problems.

Messages Displayed When Installing the


Printer Driver
This section describes what to do if a message appears when installing the printer driver.
Message number 58 or 34 indicates that the printer driver cannot be installed using Auto Run. Install the
printer driver using Add Printer Wizard.
Message number 58 appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed.

1. Open the printer window.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click [Add a printer].
3. Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1

45
5. Troubleshooting

• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
4. Specify a port.

• Available ports vary according to your Windows operating system or the type of interface. For
details, see page 11 "Confirming the Connection Method".

46
If USB Connection Fails

If USB Connection Fails


This section describes how to troubleshoot a problem related to USB connections.

Problem Causes Solutions

The machine is not The USB cable is not Disconnect the USB cable from the
automatically recognized. connected properly. computer, and then turn off the main
power switch. Turn on the main power
switch again. When the machine has
fully booted up, reconnect the USB
cable.

The machine does not Windows has already Check whether the computer has
recognize the USB configured the USB settings. identified the machine as an
connection even when a unsupported device.
USB cable is inserted. Open Windows' Device Manager,
and then, under [Universal Serial Bus
controllers], remove any conflicting
devices. Conflicting devices have a [!]
or [?] icon by them. Take care not to
accidentally remove required devices.
For details, see Windows Help.

The machine does not If the USB cable is Press the operation switch, and then
recognize the USB connected while the disconnect the USB cable from the
connection even when a machine is off, the machine computer. When the machine has
USB cable is inserted. might not recognize the USB returned to the ready condition,
connection. reconnect the USB cable.

47
5. Troubleshooting

48
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under
OS X
This chapter explains how to install and configure the printer drivers for use on the OS X operating
system.

Installing the PPD Files


To print using the printer specific features under OS X, install the PPD files.

• You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network
administrator.
• For the latest information on the corresponding operating system, see the "Readme.txt" file, located
on the CD-ROM root directory.

1. Double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.


2. Double-click the [(brand name)] folder.
3. Double-click the [MacOSX PPD Installer] folder.
4. Double-click the package file icon.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen.

• The PPD files will be automatically installed in the following location:


• \Library\Printers\PPDs\Contents\Resources\

49
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under OS X

Registering the Printer


To use the machine, the printer must be registered in the printer list.
Make sure the machine and computer are connected and turned on, and perform the following
procedure.
For details about how to connect the machine to the computer, see "Connecting the Machine",
Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.

• When printing with a USB connection to a Macintosh computer, the printer language does not
change automatically. Use the control panel on this machine to change the printer language to
[Auto] or [PS] before printing.
• The operating procedure under OS X differs depending on the version of the operating system.
Consult the procedure described in this manual, and make the necessary settings according to the
manual of each version.

USB Connection

• Make sure the computer and the printer are connected using the USB cable, and the power of the
devices are turned on beforehand.

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Click the [ ] button.
If [Add Other Printer or Scanner...] or [Add Printer or Scanner...] appears, click it.
4. Click [Default].
5. Select the printer that has "USB" indicated in the [Kind] column.
6. Select the printer you are using from the [Print Using:] or [Use:] pop-up menu.
If the printer you are using is not selected in [Print Using:] or [Use:], select its manufacturer in the
[Select Printer Software...] or [Select Software...] pop-up menu, and then select the PPD file of the
printer. For the location of the PPD files, see page 49 "Installing the PPD Files".
7. Click [Add].
If the option settings need to be configured, click [Configure] in the dialog box that appears, and
then configure the option settings.
8. Quit System Preferences.

50
Registering the Printer

Network Connection

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Click the [ ] button.
If [Add Other Printer or Scanner...] or [Add Printer or Scanner...] appears, click it.
4. Click [Default].
5. Select the printer that has "Bonjour" indicated in the [Kind] column.
If the printer name is not displayed, select the icon that corresponds to your network environment
(TCP/IP, etc.).
6. Select the printer you are using from the [Print Using:] or [Use:] pop-up menu.
If the printer you are using is not selected in [Print Using:] or [Use:], select its manufacturer in the
[Select Printer Software...] or [Select Software...] pop-up menu, and then select the PPD file of the
printer. For the location of the PPD files, see page 49 "Installing the PPD Files".
7. Click [Add].
If the option settings need to be configured, click [Configure] in the dialog box that appears, and
then configure the option settings.
8. Quit System Preferences.

51
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under OS X

Configuring Option Settings for the Printer


Under OS X
This section explains how to configure the printer driver.

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the printer you are using, and then click [Options & Supplies...].
4. Click [Driver] or [Options], and then configure settings as needed.
5. Click [OK].
6. Quit System Preferences.

• If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set up correctly. To complete
the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.

52
7. Appendix

Updating or Deleting the Driver

• Administrator permission is required to update or delete the driver in use. Log on as an


Administrators group member.
• For driver updates, select a driver that is compatible with the printer and driver type you are using.
An error may result if you select a driver that is not compatible with the printer and driver type.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].

Updating the Driver

Printer driver / LAN-Fax driver

You can download the most recent version of the driver from the manufacturer's Web site. Download the
latest driver, and then perform the following procedure.

1. Open the printer window.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].

53
7. Appendix

2. Open the printer properties dialog box.


• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Advanced] tab.
4. Click [New Driver...], and then click [Next].
5. Click [Have Disk...].
6. Click [Browse...], and then select the driver location.
7. Click [OK].
8. Select the machine model, and then click [Next].
9. Click [Finish].
The driver update starts.
10. Click [Apply].
11. Click [OK] to close the printer properties window.
12. Restart the computer.

PPD files (OS X), TWAIN driver

You can download the most recent version of the drivers from the manufacturer's Web site.
Delete the old version of the driver first, and then install the new driver. For details about how to delete
the driver, see page 54 "Deleting the Driver".

Deleting the Driver

Printer driver / LAN-Fax driver

Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].


2. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to delete, and then click [Delete].
3. Click [Server Properties] on the [File] menu.
4. Click the [Drivers] tab.
5. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove].
6. Click [Yes].

54
Updating or Deleting the Driver

7. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.

Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008

1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and
Sound] category.
2. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to delete, and then click [Delete].
3. On the [File] menu, point to [Run as administrator], and then click [Server Properties...].
4. Click the [Drivers] tab.
5. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove...].
6. Select [Remove driver and driver package.], and then click [OK].
7. Click [Yes].
8. Click [Delete].
9. Click [OK].
10. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.

Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].


If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1 or Windows Server 2012/2012 R2,
click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window
appears, click [View devices and printers].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 10, right-click the [Start] button on the
desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window appears, click [View
devices and printers].
2. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to delete, and then click [Remove device].
3. Click [Yes].
4. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
5. Click the [Drivers] tab.
6. Click the [Change Driver Settings] button if it is displayed.
7. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove...].
8. Select [Remove driver and driver package.], and then click [OK].
9. Click [Yes].
10. Click [Delete].
11. Click [OK].
12. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.

55
7. Appendix

PPD files (OS X)

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the printer you want to delete, click the [ ] button.
4. Click [Delete Printer].

TWAIN driver

1. Start uninstaller.
• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Add or Remove Programs].
• Windows Vista/7, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Uninstall a program].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [Uninstall a program].
• Windows 10
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [Uninstall a program].
2. Remove the TWAIN driver.
• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
1. Select the driver you want to delete.
2. Click [Change/Remove].
• Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 /2012/2012 R2:
1. Select the driver you want to delete.
2. Click [Uninstall/Change] or [Uninstall].
3. Follow the instructions that appear.
3. Quit uninstaller.

56
Trademarks

Trademarks
Adobe, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Citrix XenApp is a trademark of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more of its subsidiaries, and may be
registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries.
Macintosh, Mac OS, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home

57
7. Appendix

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro


Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

58
INDEX
B P
Bidirectional communication................................ 33 Parallel connection................................................ 27
BIP........................................................................... 27 PCL.........................................................5, 13, 15, 21
Bluetooth................................................................ 27 PostScript 3..................................................5, 15, 21
Bluetooth printer.................................................... 28 PPD..................................................................... 5, 49
C Printer driver................................................ 5, 15, 23
Printer port type..................................................... 15
CD-ROM.................................................................. 5
Q
Confirming the connection method...................... 11
Connection fails..................................................... 47 Quick Install........................................................... 13
D R
Delete............................................................... 53, 54 Registering the printer........................................... 50
E S
Error message........................................................ 45 Scanner.................................................................. 37
F Setting print properties.......................................... 42
Software................................................................... 5
Facsimile................................................................. 39 SPP.......................................................................... 27
H Standard TCP/IP port........................................... 16
Supported language............................................... 6
HCRP...................................................................... 27
Supported profiles and restrictions...................... 27
I
T
Installer..................................................................... 3
Trademarks............................................................ 57
IPP port................................................................... 16
TWAIN Driver................................................... 7, 37
L
U
LAN-Fax Driver................................................. 8, 39
Uninstall.................................................................. 54
LAN-Fax Driver properties....................................42
Update................................................................... 53
Launcher................................................................... 3
USB connection........................................ 23, 47, 50
Local connection............................................. 12, 23
Utilities...................................................................... 5
LPR port...................................................................18
W
M
WSD port............................................................... 18
Messages displayed when installing the printer
driver...................................................................... 45
N
Network connection................................. 11, 15, 51
Network printer............................................... 12, 21
O
Option settings.......................................... 33, 43, 52
OS X......................................................................... 9

59
MEMO

60 EN GB EN US EN AU D256-7822
EN GB EN US EN AU D256-7822 © 2016
Operating Instructions
Driver Installation Guide

See the other online manuals on our


website (http://www.ricoh.com/) or from the
control panel.

For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information in Read This First before using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction
Start Installer........................................................................................................................................................3
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM.............................................................................................5
Printer Drivers..................................................................................................................................................5
TWAIN Driver.................................................................................................................................................7
LAN-Fax Driver...............................................................................................................................................8
For OS X Users....................................................................................................................................................9
2. Installing the Printer Driver
Confirming the Connection Method............................................................................................................... 11
Network Connection................................................................................................................................... 11
Local Connection......................................................................................................................................... 12
Quick Install...................................................................................................................................................... 13
Quick Installation via a Network................................................................................................................13
Quick Installation via a USB Connection...................................................................................................14
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection..................................................................................15
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port........................................................................................15
Using Windows Print Server........................................................................................................................21
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection....................................................................................... 23
USB Connection...........................................................................................................................................23
Parallel Connection..................................................................................................................................... 27
Bluetooth Connection.................................................................................................................................. 27
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer.................................................................................................... 33
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication............................................................................................. 33
If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled............................................................................................... 34
3. Installing the Scanner Driver
Installing the TWAIN Driver............................................................................................................................ 37
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver
Installing the LAN-Fax Driver.......................................................................................................................... 39
Specifying the Same Port as the Printer Driver...........................................................................................39
Specifying the Port When Installing the LAN-Fax Driver.......................................................................... 40
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties.................................................................................................................. 42
Setting Print Properties................................................................................................................................. 42
Configuring Option Settings for the Facsimile........................................................................................... 43

1
5. Troubleshooting
Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver............................................................................... 45
If USB Connection Fails................................................................................................................................... 47
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under OS X
Installing the PPD Files......................................................................................................................................49
Registering the Printer.......................................................................................................................................50
USB Connection...........................................................................................................................................50
Network Connection................................................................................................................................... 51
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer Under OS X...............................................................................52
7. Appendix
Updating or Deleting the Driver......................................................................................................................53
Updating the Driver..................................................................................................................................... 53
Deleting the Driver....................................................................................................................................... 54
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................................... 57
INDEX............................................................................................................................................................. 59

2
1. Introduction
This chapter explains the software included on the supplied CD-ROM.

Start Installer
To connect this machine to a client computer and use its printer, scanner, and fax functions, the software
included on the provided CD-ROM must be installed on the client computer.
The installer starts automatically when you insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of a
client computer running under Windows or Windows Server. You can then install the various software
included on the CD-ROM.
The contents (display item) of the installer are as follows:
Network Quick Install
Installs the PCL 6 printer driver via a network connection and configures settings to use the printer in
a network.
For details, see page 13 "Quick Installation via a Network".
USB Quick Install
Installs the PCL 6 printer driver via a USB connection and configures settings to connect the printer
to a computer.
For details, see page 14 "Quick Installation via a USB Connection".
PCL Printer Driver
Installs the PCL 6 and/or PCL 5e printer drivers.
For details about installing the driver, see page 15 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 23 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".
PostScript 3 Printer Driver
Installs the PostScript 3 printer driver.
For details about installing the driver, see page 15 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 23 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".
LAN-Fax Driver
This software enables you to fax documents directly from your computer. Address Book, LAN-Fax
Cover Sheet Editor, and MFP Address Book Downloader will also be installed.
For details about installing the driver, see page 39 "Installing the LAN-Fax Driver".
TWAIN Driver
This software enables you to utilize image data from other TWAIN compliant applications.
For details about installing the driver, see page 37 "Installing the TWAIN Driver".

3
1. Introduction

Select Language
Changes the interface language.
Browse This Disk
Browses the contents of this disk.
Exit
Quits Installer.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the case, double-click
"Setup.exe", located on the CD-ROM root directory, or click [Run SETUP.EXE] in the [AutoPlay]
dialog box.

4
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM

Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM


This section explains the software and utilities CD-ROM provided with this machine.

• For the latest information on the corresponding operating system, see "Readme.txt" file, located on
the CD-ROM root directory.
• For the latest information on Windows Terminal Service, Citrix XenDesktop, and Citrix XenApp, see
the manufacturer's Web site.

Printer Drivers

Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The following drivers are
included on the CD-ROM.

Printer Language

Operating System*1 PCL 5e PCL 6 PostScript 3

Windows Vista *2 OK OK OK

Windows 7 *3 OK OK OK

Windows 8 *4 OK OK OK

Windows 8.1 *5 OK OK OK

Windows 10*6 OK OK OK

Windows Server 2003 *7 OK OK OK

Windows Server 2008 *8 OK OK OK

Windows Server 2012 *9 OK OK OK

OS X *10 OK

*1 Windows operating system supports both versions (32/64 bit).


*2 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate/Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise/Microsoft Windows Vista Business/
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium/Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
*3 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium/Microsoft Windows 7 Professional/Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate/
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise
*4 Microsoft Windows 8/Microsoft Windows 8 Pro/Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise
*5 Microsoft Windows 8.1/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Enterprise

5
1. Introduction

*6 Microsoft Windows 10 Home/Microsoft Windows 10 Pro/Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise/Microsoft


Windows 10 Education
*7 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition/
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise
Edition
*8 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise/Microsoft
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
*9 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Foundation/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Essentials/Microsoft
Windows Server 2012 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Foundation/Microsoft Windows
Server 2012 R2 Essentials/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard
*10 OS X 10.8 or later
PCL printer drivers
Two kinds of PCL printer driver (PCL 5e and PCL 6) are included. These drivers allow your
computer to communicate with this machine via a printer language.
Adobe® PostScript® printer driver and PPD files
Adobe PostScript printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer
language. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.

• Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5e printer driver. In this case, you can install
PCL 5e without having to install PCL 6.
• For details about installing the driver, see page 15 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 23 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".

Supported languages

The languages supported in each printer driver are as follow:

Printer Language

Supported languages PCL 5e *1 PCL 6 *2 PostScript 3 *2 PPD (OS X)

English

German

French

Italian

Spanish

Dutch

6
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM

Printer Language

Supported languages PCL 5e *1 PCL 6 *2 PostScript 3 *2 PPD (OS X)

Swedish

Norwegian

Danish

Finnish

Hungarian

Czech

Polish

Portuguese

Russian

Catalan

Turkish

Brazilian Portuguese

Greek

: Supported
: You can install the printer driver, but the printer driver is displayed in English
*1 The PCL 5e printer driver does not support Brazilian Portuguese and Greek. Use the English version of the
driver.
*2 The PCL 6 and PostScript 3 printer drivers use the same interface language as the one specified by your
operating system. However, the PostScript 3 printer driver will be displayed in English if your operating
system uses one of the following languages: Finnish, Hungarian, Czech, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Catalan,
Turkish, Brazilian Portuguese, and Greek.

TWAIN Driver

This driver is required to scan an original using a scanner. To use the machine as a network TWAIN
scanner, this driver must be installed.
File path
The driver is included in the following folder on the CD-ROM:

7
1. Introduction

\X86\DRIVERS\TWAIN
Supported Operating System*1
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
*1 TWAIN scanner runs on a 64-bit operating system, but is not compatible with 64-bit applications. Use it
with 32-bit applications.
Supported languages
The TWAIN Driver uses the same interface language as the one specified by your operating
system.

• For details about installing the driver, see page 37 "Installing the TWAIN Driver".

LAN-Fax Driver

This driver is required to use LAN-Fax functions.


File path
The driver is included in the following folder on the CD-ROM:
• 32-bit driver
\X86\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\X86\DISK1
• 64-bit driver
\X64\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\X64\DISK1
Supported Operating System
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
Supported languages
The interface language is supported in the language specified when installing driver.

• For details about installing the driver, see page 39 "Installing the LAN-Fax Driver".

8
For OS X Users

For OS X Users
If you are using OS X, the following limitations apply to each function:
• When using the scanner function, the TWAIN Driver cannot be used.
• When using the fax function, the LAN-Fax Driver cannot be used.
• When using the printer function, use the printer driver for OS X.
For details, see page 49 "Installing the Printer Driver Under OS X".

9
1. Introduction

10
2. Installing the Printer Driver
This chapter explains how to install and configure the printer drivers for use on the Windows operating
system. Installing procedures on Windows 7 is shown as an example except where indicated.

Confirming the Connection Method


This machine supports network and local connection.
Before installing the printer driver, check how the machine is connected. Follow the driver installation
procedure that is appropriate to the connection method.

Network Connection

This machine can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.

Using the Windows printing port

Network connections can be established through Ethernet and Wireless LAN.


Available ports are determined based on the combination of Windows operating system version and
connection method used.
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

Connection Method Available Ports

• Ethernet • Standard TCP/IP port


• Wireless LAN • IPP port
• LPR port

Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2

Connection Method Available Ports

• Ethernet • Standard TCP/IP port


• Wireless LAN • IPP port
• LPR port
• WSD port

11
2. Installing the Printer Driver

• For details about how to install the printer driver for each type of port, see page 15 "Installing the
Printer Driver for the Selected Port".

Using as a network printer

This machine can be used as a remote printer using the Windows print server function.

Client OS Using Server

• Windows Vista • Windows Vista print server


• Windows 7 • Windows 7 print server
• Windows 8 • Windows 8 print server
• Windows 8.1 • Windows 8.1 print server
• Windows 10 • Windows 10 print server
• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 • Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 print server
• Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 • Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 print server
• Windows Server 2012/2012 R2 • Windows Server 2012/2012 R2 print server

• For details about how to install the printer driver to print server, see page 21 "Using Windows
Print Server".

Local Connection

Local connections can be established via USB, parallel, and Bluetooth connections.

• For details about how to install the printer driver for each method of connections, see page 23
"Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".

12
Quick Install

Quick Install
You can install the printer drivers easily from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 45 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".

Quick Installation via a Network

Using Network Quick Install, the PCL 6 printer driver is installed under network environment, and the
Standard TCP/IP port will be set.

1. Click [Network Quick Install] on the installer screen.

13
2. Installing the Printer Driver

2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
5. Click [Install].
6. When the port setting screen appears, specify a port.
7. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
8. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
9. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
10. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.

Quick Installation via a USB Connection

Using USB Quick Install, you can install the PCL 6 printer driver via a USB connection, and configure
settings to connect the printer to a computer.

1. Click [USB Quick Install] on the installer screen.


2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select the method to install a printer driver, and then click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use, and then click [Next >].
5. Make sure the machine is turned off and not connected to the computer, and then click
[Next >].
Wait for a moment until file copying is complete and [<Auto-detect USB Port>] screen appears.
6. Connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, and then turn on the machine.
The auto-detecting starts.
7. In the confirmation dialog box, select [Yes] if you want to use the machine as your default
printer.
8. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
9. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.

14
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

Installing the Printer Driver for a Network


Connection
This section describes the installation procedure of the printer drivers for network connection.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 45 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".

Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port

Describes the driver installation procedure for each printer port. See the installation procedure for the
printer port you are using.

15
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Port Type Printer Driver Type Reference

Standard TCP/IP port page 16 "Using the Standard TCP/IP port"

IPP port page 16 "Using the IPP port"

LPR port page 18 "Using the LPR port"

WSD port page 18 "Using the WSD port"

Using the Standard TCP/IP port

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [Next >].
6. Click [Next >].
7. Enter the machine name or IP address, and then click [Next >].
When the device type selection appears, select "RICOH Network Printer C model".
8. Click [Finish].
9. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
10. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
11. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
12. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

Using the IPP port

16
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].


If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1 or Windows Server 2012/2012 R2,
click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window
appears, click [View devices and printers].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 10, right-click the [Start] button on the
desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window appears, click [View
devices and printers].
2. Click [Add a printer].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1/10 or Windows Server 2012/2012
R2, proceed to Step 4.
3. Click [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer].
4. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
5. In the [Select a shared printer by name] box, enter "http://(machine's IP address or host
name)/printer (or ipp)" as the printer's address, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK] to close the [Install From Disk] window.
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[OK].
The installation starts.
10. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name and default
printer configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
11. Click [Finish].

17
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Using the LPR port

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [LPR Port], and then click [Next >].
6. Enter the machine name or IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd:]
box.
7. Enter "lp" in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server:] box, and then click [OK].
8. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
9. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
10. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
11. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

Using the WSD port

• The WSD port can be used under Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, or Windows Server
2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2.
• You can connect to the printer only if both the printer and computer are on the same network
segment, or "Network discovery" is enabled. For details, see Windows Help.

Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Network].


2. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Install].
3. Click [Locate and install driver software (recommended)].
4. Click [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].
5. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:

18
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
6. Click [Next].
7. Click [Close].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the WSD port will appear in the
window for configuring printers.

• The port name that follows "WSD" uses random character strings. It cannot be changed freely.
• To stop the installation, click [Cancel] before the installation is complete. When re-installing the
WSD Port, right-click the printer's icon in the [Network] window, and then click [Uninstall].

Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Computer].


2. Click [Network].
3. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Install].
4. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
5. Click [Add a printer].
6. Click [Add a local printer].
7. Select [Use an existing port:], and then select WSD port.
8. Click [Next].
9. Click [Have Disk...].
10. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1

19
2. Installing the Printer Driver

64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1


• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
11. Click [OK] to close the [Install From Disk] window.
12. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
13. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name, default printer,
and printer sharing configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
14. Click [Finish].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the WSD port will appear in the
window for configuring printers.

• To stop installation of the selected driver, click [Cancel] before the installation is complete. When
re-installing the WSD Port, right-click the machine's icon in the [Network] window, and then click
[Uninstall].

Windows 8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2

1. Open the [Devices and Printers] window.


• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add].
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [x86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].

20
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Click [Add a printer] on the [Devices and Printers] window.
13. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
14. Select [Add a Bluetooth, wireless or network discoverable printer], and then click [Next].
15. Select the machine you want to use, and then click [Next].

Using Windows Print Server

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Network Printer], and then click [Next >].
6. Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the [Browse for
Printer] window.

21
2. Installing the Printer Driver

7. Select the machine you want to use, and then click [OK].
8. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
9. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
10. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
11. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

22
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

Installing the Printer Driver for a Local


Connection
This section describes the installation procedure of the printer drivers for USB, parallel, or Bluetooth
connection.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Yes] or
[Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Install this
driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 45 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".

USB Connection

This section explains how to install the printer drivers using USB.

23
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are
in progress.
If the printer driver has already been installed, and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB" port is added to the [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and Printers]
window.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the machine to install it from
the CD-ROM provided with this machine.

Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

1. Check that the power of the machine is off.


2. Connect the machine and computer using the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
3. Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
4. Select [No, not this time], and then click [Next].
5. Click [Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]], and then click [Next].
6. Select the [Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box under [Search for
the best driver in these locations.], and then click [Next].
7. Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install.
Check the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [Next].
The installation starts.

24
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

9. Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers and Faxes] window.
The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.

Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008

1. Check that the power of the machine is off.


2. Connect the machine and computer using a USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
3. Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
4. In the [Found New Hardware] window, click [Locate and install driver software
(recommended)].
5. Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install.
Check the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
6. Click [Next].
The installation starts.
7. Click [Close].
If the printer driver has already been installed and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers] window.
The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.

25
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2

1. Open the [Devices and Printers] window.


• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add...].
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [x86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Check that the power of the machine is off.

26
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

13. Connect the machine and computer using a USB cable.


Connect the USB cable firmly.
14. Turn on the power of the machine.

Parallel Connection

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Local Port], and then click [Next >].
6. Enter a port name, and then click [OK].
7. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
8. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
9. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
10. Click [Finish].
Select one of the options to restart the computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].

Bluetooth Connection

• The Bluetooth unit and the wireless LAN unit cannot be used simultaneously.

Supported profiles and restrictions


Supported Profiles
• SPP (Serial Port Profile)
• HCRP (Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile)
• BIP (Basic Imaging Profile)
Restrictions on SPP, HCRP
• A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers can be connected at
the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by SPP, one by HCRP.

27
2. Installing the Printer Driver

• When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer at the
same time, the first device that establishes connection is selected. When selecting the
connection between the other devices, cancel the first established connection.
• SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.
• HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.
Restrictions on BIP
• PostScript 3 must be installed on the printer to connect via BIP.
• Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected via BIP.
• Only JPEG images can be printed using BIP.
• User codes are disabled for BIP.
• You cannot print if print functions are restricted.
• Some printers do not support BIP.

Adding a Bluetooth printer

• To connect to a Bluetooth printer, your computer must have a Bluetooth device installed. Make sure
a Bluetooth device is installed on your computer.

Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].


2. Click [Add a printer].
3. Click [Next].
4. Click [Bluetooth Printer], and then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth printers.
If a new printer is discovered, the [Found New Hardware Wizard] window appears. To ignore a
discovered device and continue searching, click [Cancel]. The computer resumes searching for
other available Bluetooth printers.
5. Click [No, I will not connect], and then click [Next].
6. Click [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)], and then click [Next].
7. Select the [Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box, and then click
[Next].
8. If the [Hardware Installation] window appears, click [Continue].
9. If the installation was successful, click [Finish].
10. Select [Test Print], and then click [Next].
11. Click [Finish].

28
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

• Actual Bluetooth printer operations will vary according to your Bluetooth device and/or Bluetooth-
installed computer. For details, see the Help supplied with your Bluetooth device and/or Bluetooth-
equipped computer.
• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.

Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].


2. In the "Hardware and Sound" area, click [Printers].
3. In the top part of the window, click [Add a printer].
4. In the [Add Printer] window, select [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer], and
then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth devices.
5. From the list of discovered devices, select the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
All discovered wireless printers appear in the list of discovered printers, not only Bluetooth printers.
Make sure the machine you select is a Bluetooth printer.
6. Click [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)] on the [Found New
Hardware] display.
7. In the [Found New Hardware] window, select the printer driver you want to use, and
then click [Next].
The installation starts.
8. If the [Windows Security] window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
9. Click [Close].
10. If you want to change the printer name, enter the new name in the [Printer Name
Settings] window.
11. If you want to print a test page, click [Printing Test Page] on the "Test Print" page.
Otherwise, click [Finish].

• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.

Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].


2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].

29
2. Installing the Printer Driver

3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add...].


4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [x86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Click [Add a printer] on the [Devices and Printers] window.
13. Click [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer].
14. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
15. Select [Add a Bluetooth printer], and then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth devices.
16. From the list of discovered devices, select the machine you want to use, and then click
[OK].
17. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name and shared
printer configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
18. Click [Finish].

30
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.

Windows 8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2

1. Open the [Devices and Printers] window.


• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add].
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [x86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.

31
2. Installing the Printer Driver

12. Click [Add a printer] on the [Devices and Printers] window.


13. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
14. Select [Add a Bluetooth, wireless or network discoverable printer], and then click [Next].
The computer begins searching for available Bluetooth devices.
15. From the list of discovered devices, select the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
16. Click [Next].
17. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name and shared
printer configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
18. Click [Finish].

• After printing the test page, check it. If there is a problem with the test page, click [Troubleshooting]
in the test print window. If there is no problem with the test page, click [Close] to close the window.

32
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer

Configuring Option Settings for the Printer


When bidirectional communication works correctly, your computer obtains information about option,
paper size and paper feed direction settings from the machine automatically. Bidirectional
communication also allows you to monitor machine status.
When bidirectional communication is disabled, you have to set up option, paper size and paper feed
direction settings on your computer manually.

• Manage Printers permission is required to enable bidirectional communication or to configure the


option settings. Log on as an Administrators group member.

Conditions for Bidirectional Communication

To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:


When connected with parallel cables
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.
• The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cables and
parallel connectors.
When connected with the network
• The Standard TCP/IP port must be used.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the printer driver.
When connected with USB
• The machine must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable.
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the printer driver.

• The PCL 6 and PostScript 3 printer drivers support bidirectional communication and automatic
printer status updates.
• To obtain printer information automatically using the bidirectional communication function of the
PCL 6 or PostScript 3 printer driver, you must select the [Automatically Update Printer Information]
check box on the [Accessories] tab in the printer driver's properties window.
• The PCL 5e printer driver supports bidirectional communication. You can update the printer status
manually.

33
2. Installing the Printer Driver

If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled

This section describes how to set up option, paper size and paper feed direction settings on your
computer manually.

1. Open the printer window.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Accessories] tab.
If options in the [Accessories] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection is enabled. In this case, no
change is necessary for option settings.
4. Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the necessary settings.
5. Click [Change Input Tray Settings...].
6. In [Input Tray:] select which trays to use, and then, in [Paper Size:] select the size of the
paper that you want to load in each tray.
Click [Modify Input Tray/Paper Size] to apply the setting for each tray.
7. Click [OK].
8. Click [Apply].
9. Click [OK] to close the printer properties window.

34
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer

• For details about making option settings for the machine using OS X, see page 52 "Configuring
Option Settings for the Printer Under OS X".

35
2. Installing the Printer Driver

36
3. Installing the Scanner Driver
This chapter explains how to install the TWAIN Driver on a client computer. Installing procedures on
Windows 7 is shown as an example except where indicated.

Installing the TWAIN Driver


To use the network TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN Driver on a client computer.

• To use this machine as a network TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application must be


installed on the client computer.

1. Click [TWAIN Driver] on the installer screen.


2. The installer of the TWAIN Driver starts. Follow the instructions.

• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".
• Before you start the installation, check the system requirements for the TWAIN Driver. For details
about the system requirements, see page 5 "Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM".
• When the installation is complete, a message about restarting the client computer may appear. In
this case, restart the client computer.
• After the installation is complete, a folder with the name of the machine in use is added in
[Programs], [All Programs], [Apps], or [All apps] on the [Start] menu. Help can be displayed from
here.

37
3. Installing the Scanner Driver

• Notes on using the network TWAIN scanner are provided in "Readme.txt". Be sure to read them
before use.

38
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver
This chapter explains how to install and configure the LAN-Fax Driver on a client computer. Installing
procedures on Windows 7 is shown as an example except where indicated.

Installing the LAN-Fax Driver


Address Book, LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor, and MFP Address Book Downloader are installed with the
LAN-Fax Driver. Address Book helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations. LAN-Fax Cover Sheet
Editor helps you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets. MFP Address Book Downloader allows you to save the
address book registered in the machine as a CSV file on your computer.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the Standard TCP/IP port.

Specifying the Same Port as the Printer Driver

If a port name that is the same as one that is already in use by the existing driver is specified, the LAN-
Fax Driver installation may fail. If the printer driver is already installed, make sure that the port numbers
of the LAN-Fax Driver and the printer driver match.

1. Click [LAN-Fax Driver] on the installer screen.


2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Click [Next >].
4. Select the same port as the one selected in the printer driver from the [Select from the port
list], and then click [Next >].
5. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
6. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
7. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Yes] or
[Continue].

39
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver

• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Install this
driver software anyway].
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".

Specifying the Port When Installing the LAN-Fax Driver

To specify a port that is different from the printer driver when installing the LAN-Fax Driver, see the
installation procedure of the printer driver.
If places where the procedure or description differs depending on the driver to be installed, replace the
corresponding procedure or description accordingly, and install the driver.

Corresponding items to
Installation procedures
replace

page 16 "Using the Standard TCP/IP port" 1, 2

page 16 "Using the IPP port" 3

page 18 "Using the LPR port" 1, 2

40
Installing the LAN-Fax Driver

List of Items to Replace


Procedure/description in Procedure/description in the LAN-
No. Items to be replaced
the printer driver Fax Driver

The name of the button


Click [PCL Printer Driver] or
1 that starts the installation Click [LAN-Fax Driver].
[PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
procedure

The procedures in the Select the check box of the


Select [Printer Name: <LAN-Fax
2 [Install Printer Driver] machine model you want to
Generic>].
dialog box use.

The LAN-Fax Driver is installed in


the following folder:
• 32-bit driver
The destination folder in
The destination folder is X86\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX
3 which the driver files are
written in the description. \X86\DISK1
stored
• 64-bit driver
X64\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX
\X64\DISK1

41
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver

Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties

• Manage Printers permission is required to set the properties for the LAN-Fax Driver. Log on as an
Administrators group member.
• The method for selecting the LAN-Fax Driver will vary according to your operating system. For
details, see Windows Help.

Setting Print Properties

This section explains how to make settings such as paper size or resolution.

1. Open the printer window.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Printing preferences].
3. To set the following properties.
• Document Size:
• Orientation:
• Input Tray:

42
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties

• Resolution:
• Spool Data in EMF Format
4. Click [Apply].
5. Click [OK].

Configuring Option Settings for the Facsimile

1. Open the printer windows.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the [LAN-Fax Generic] icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Accessories] tab, and then make the settings for the option configuration.
4. Select the check boxes for the installed optional units.
5. Click [Apply].
Option configuration settings are complete.
6. Click [OK].

[Accessories] tab

The [Accessories] tab contains the following items besides option configuration items.

43
4. Installing the Facsimile Driver

Misc
• Enable Email
Check this when using Internet Fax with the LAN-Fax function.
• Prohibit manual destination entry
Select this check box when manual destination entry is set as prohibited from the machine.
• No. of Entries to Fix Destination
Specify the number of entries to fix the destinations when to enter destinations directly. You
can enter a value between 1 and 15.
• Check Destination
Select the check box to confirm the destinations before sending.
IP-Fax
To use IP-Fax, select the [Enable IP-Fax] check box, and then specify the protocol in [Valid
protocol:].

• If the options on this machine are not configured as instructed, LAN-Fax functions may fail.
• If this machine is connected to a network, configuration of each option installed on the machine will
be performed automatically. If the settings do not match the installed optional units, click [Update
Now].

44
5. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions for driver installation and USB connection problems.

Messages Displayed When Installing the


Printer Driver
This section describes what to do if a message appears when installing the printer driver.
Message number 58 or 34 indicates that the printer driver cannot be installed using Auto Run. Install the
printer driver using Add Printer Wizard.
Message number 58 appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed.

1. Open the printer window.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click [Add a printer].
3. Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1

45
5. Troubleshooting

• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
4. Specify a port.

• Available ports vary according to your Windows operating system or the type of interface. For
details, see page 11 "Confirming the Connection Method".

46
If USB Connection Fails

If USB Connection Fails


This section describes how to troubleshoot a problem related to USB connections.

Problem Causes Solutions

The machine is not The USB cable is not Disconnect the USB cable from the
automatically recognized. connected properly. computer, and then turn off the main
power switch. Turn on the main power
switch again. When the machine has
fully booted up, reconnect the USB
cable.

The machine does not Windows has already Check whether the computer has
recognize the USB configured the USB settings. identified the machine as an
connection even when a unsupported device.
USB cable is inserted. Open Windows' Device Manager,
and then, under [Universal Serial Bus
controllers], remove any conflicting
devices. Conflicting devices have a [!]
or [?] icon by them. Take care not to
accidentally remove required devices.
For details, see Windows Help.

The machine does not If the USB cable is Press the operation switch, and then
recognize the USB connected while the disconnect the USB cable from the
connection even when a machine is off, the machine computer. When the machine has
USB cable is inserted. might not recognize the USB returned to the ready condition,
connection. reconnect the USB cable.

47
5. Troubleshooting

48
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under
OS X
This chapter explains how to install and configure the printer drivers for use on the OS X operating
system.

Installing the PPD Files


To print using the printer specific features under OS X, install the PPD files.

• You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network
administrator.
• For the latest information on the corresponding operating system, see the "Readme.txt" file, located
on the CD-ROM root directory.

1. Double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.


2. Double-click the [(brand name)] folder.
3. Double-click the [MacOSX PPD Installer] folder.
4. Double-click the package file icon.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen.

• The PPD files will be automatically installed in the following location:


• \Library\Printers\PPDs\Contents\Resources\

49
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under OS X

Registering the Printer


To use the machine, the printer must be registered in the printer list.
Make sure the machine and computer are connected and turned on, and perform the following
procedure.
For details about how to connect the machine to the computer, see "Connecting the Machine",
Connecting the Machine/ System Settings.

• When printing with a USB connection to a Macintosh computer, the printer language does not
change automatically. Use the control panel on this machine to change the printer language to
[Auto] or [PS] before printing.
• The operating procedure under OS X differs depending on the version of the operating system.
Consult the procedure described in this manual, and make the necessary settings according to the
manual of each version.

USB Connection

• Make sure the computer and the printer are connected using the USB cable, and the power of the
devices are turned on beforehand.

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Click the [ ] button.
If [Add Other Printer or Scanner...] or [Add Printer or Scanner...] appears, click it.
4. Click [Default].
5. Select the printer that has "USB" indicated in the [Kind] column.
6. Select the printer you are using from the [Print Using:] or [Use:] pop-up menu.
If the printer you are using is not selected in [Print Using:] or [Use:], select its manufacturer in the
[Select Printer Software...] or [Select Software...] pop-up menu, and then select the PPD file of the
printer. For the location of the PPD files, see page 49 "Installing the PPD Files".
7. Click [Add].
If the option settings need to be configured, click [Configure] in the dialog box that appears, and
then configure the option settings.
8. Quit System Preferences.

50
Registering the Printer

Network Connection

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Click the [ ] button.
If [Add Other Printer or Scanner...] or [Add Printer or Scanner...] appears, click it.
4. Click [Default].
5. Select the printer that has "Bonjour" indicated in the [Kind] column.
If the printer name is not displayed, select the icon that corresponds to your network environment
(TCP/IP, etc.).
6. Select the printer you are using from the [Print Using:] or [Use:] pop-up menu.
If the printer you are using is not selected in [Print Using:] or [Use:], select its manufacturer in the
[Select Printer Software...] or [Select Software...] pop-up menu, and then select the PPD file of the
printer. For the location of the PPD files, see page 49 "Installing the PPD Files".
7. Click [Add].
If the option settings need to be configured, click [Configure] in the dialog box that appears, and
then configure the option settings.
8. Quit System Preferences.

51
6. Installing the Printer Driver Under OS X

Configuring Option Settings for the Printer


Under OS X
This section explains how to configure the printer driver.

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the printer you are using, and then click [Options & Supplies...].
4. Click [Driver] or [Options], and then configure settings as needed.
5. Click [OK].
6. Quit System Preferences.

• If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set up correctly. To complete
the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.

52
7. Appendix

Updating or Deleting the Driver

• Administrator permission is required to update or delete the driver in use. Log on as an


Administrators group member.
• For driver updates, select a driver that is compatible with the printer and driver type you are using.
An error may result if you select a driver that is not compatible with the printer and driver type.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].

Updating the Driver

Printer driver / LAN-Fax driver

You can download the most recent version of the driver from the manufacturer's Web site. Download the
latest driver, and then perform the following procedure.

1. Open the printer window.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].

53
7. Appendix

2. Open the printer properties dialog box.


• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Advanced] tab.
4. Click [New Driver...], and then click [Next].
5. Click [Have Disk...].
6. Click [Browse...], and then select the driver location.
7. Click [OK].
8. Select the machine model, and then click [Next].
9. Click [Finish].
The driver update starts.
10. Click [Apply].
11. Click [OK] to close the printer properties window.
12. Restart the computer.

PPD files (OS X), TWAIN driver

You can download the most recent version of the drivers from the manufacturer's Web site.
Delete the old version of the driver first, and then install the new driver. For details about how to delete
the driver, see page 54 "Deleting the Driver".

Deleting the Driver

Printer driver / LAN-Fax driver

Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].


2. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to delete, and then click [Delete].
3. Click [Server Properties] on the [File] menu.
4. Click the [Drivers] tab.
5. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove].
6. Click [Yes].

54
Updating or Deleting the Driver

7. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.

Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008

1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and
Sound] category.
2. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to delete, and then click [Delete].
3. On the [File] menu, point to [Run as administrator], and then click [Server Properties...].
4. Click the [Drivers] tab.
5. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove...].
6. Select [Remove driver and driver package.], and then click [OK].
7. Click [Yes].
8. Click [Delete].
9. Click [OK].
10. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.

Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].


If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1 or Windows Server 2012/2012 R2,
click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window
appears, click [View devices and printers].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 10, right-click the [Start] button on the
desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window appears, click [View
devices and printers].
2. Right-click the icon of the machine you want to delete, and then click [Remove device].
3. Click [Yes].
4. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
5. Click the [Drivers] tab.
6. Click the [Change Driver Settings] button if it is displayed.
7. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove...].
8. Select [Remove driver and driver package.], and then click [OK].
9. Click [Yes].
10. Click [Delete].
11. Click [OK].
12. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.

55
7. Appendix

PPD files (OS X)

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the printer you want to delete, click the [ ] button.
4. Click [Delete Printer].

TWAIN driver

1. Start uninstaller.
• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Add or Remove Programs].
• Windows Vista/7, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Uninstall a program].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [Uninstall a program].
• Windows 10
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [Uninstall a program].
2. Remove the TWAIN driver.
• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
1. Select the driver you want to delete.
2. Click [Change/Remove].
• Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 /2012/2012 R2:
1. Select the driver you want to delete.
2. Click [Uninstall/Change] or [Uninstall].
3. Follow the instructions that appear.
3. Quit uninstaller.

56
Trademarks

Trademarks
Adobe, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Citrix XenApp is a trademark of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more of its subsidiaries, and may be
registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries.
Macintosh, Mac OS, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home

57
7. Appendix

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro


Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

58
INDEX
B P
Bidirectional communication................................ 33 Parallel connection................................................ 27
BIP........................................................................... 27 PCL.........................................................5, 13, 15, 21
Bluetooth................................................................ 27 PostScript 3..................................................5, 15, 21
Bluetooth printer.................................................... 28 PPD..................................................................... 5, 49
C Printer driver................................................ 5, 15, 23
Printer port type..................................................... 15
CD-ROM.................................................................. 5
Q
Confirming the connection method...................... 11
Connection fails..................................................... 47 Quick Install........................................................... 13
D R
Delete............................................................... 53, 54 Registering the printer........................................... 50
E S
Error message........................................................ 45 Scanner.................................................................. 37
F Setting print properties.......................................... 42
Software................................................................... 5
Facsimile................................................................. 39 SPP.......................................................................... 27
H Standard TCP/IP port........................................... 16
Supported language............................................... 6
HCRP...................................................................... 27
Supported profiles and restrictions...................... 27
I
T
Installer..................................................................... 3
Trademarks............................................................ 57
IPP port................................................................... 16
TWAIN Driver................................................... 7, 37
L
U
LAN-Fax Driver................................................. 8, 39
Uninstall.................................................................. 54
LAN-Fax Driver properties....................................42
Update................................................................... 53
Launcher................................................................... 3
USB connection........................................ 23, 47, 50
Local connection............................................. 12, 23
Utilities...................................................................... 5
LPR port...................................................................18
W
M
WSD port............................................................... 18
Messages displayed when installing the printer
driver...................................................................... 45
N
Network connection................................. 11, 15, 51
Network printer............................................... 12, 21
O
Option settings.......................................... 33, 43, 52
OS X......................................................................... 9

59
MEMO

60 EN GB EN US EN AU D256-7711
EN GB EN US EN AU D256-7711 © 2016
Initial Guide for FAX
Read this manual carefully before you use the product and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, please be sure to read the Safety Information before
using the machine. This manual briefly describes the procedure for initial setup for fax function.
For more details about other information, see User Guide on our web site (http://www.ricoh.com/).

Selecting the Telephone Line Basic Operation for Sending


Connection
Type a Fax
Connect a telephone line cord to LINE.
If using an external telephone, connect the Press [Home] at the Press [Home] at the
telephone to TEL. bottom of the screen in the bottom of the screen in the
center. center.

Flick the screen to the left, Press the [Fax] icon.


and then press the [User Tools]
icon. Place the original on the
exposure glass or in the ADF.
Press [Machine Features].
Press [Specify destination(s)].
Press [Fax Features].
Press [Enter No. Manually].
Press [Initial Settings].
DPK950 Enter the fax number using the
Press [Select Dial/Push Phone]. number keys.

Press [Finished].
Initial Setup Press [Push Button Phone] or
[Dial Phone (10PPS)] to select Press [Start].
the line, and then press [OK]. When you place original on the
❖ Setting the Date and Time, and the exposure glass and Memory
Language Press [Exit] two times. Transmission mode is enabled, perform
Make sure that you have set the date and the following steps to scan the
time, and the language you want to display. If subsequent pages of the original.
you have not yet, set the date, time, and
If you have more originals to
language.
See Connecting the Machine/System Settings
scan, place the next original on
for the date and time setting, and see Getting the exposure glass within 60
Started for the language setting. seconds, and then press [Start].
Repeat this step until all
❖ Setting the Country Code originals are scanned.
Press [Home] at the When all originals have been
bottom of the screen in the scanned, press [Finish Scn] to
center. start sending the fax.
Flick the screen to the left, and
then press the [User Tools]
icon.

Press [Machine Features].

Press [Fax Features].

Press [Initial Settings].

Press [▼], and then press


[Country Code (for Function
Settings)].

Specify the country code you


want to use, and then press
[OK].
© 2016
Restart the machine. EN GB
D256-7814
Start Guide
Introduction to the nn Operations on the screen
Applications’ Screen vvDrag: Moving icons
Slide your finger while pressing on the screen.

nn Easy operation with simple screens


Frequently used functions and settings are shown on the top screen.

Copy Fax
DNE111

vvFlick: Switching between screens


Flick your finger to the right or left on the screen.

Scanner
DNE102

vvLong tap: Displaying a subscreen


Place and hold your finger on the screen.
For detailed information about the applications’ screens that can
be browsed on the control panel, see “How to Use Each
Application”, About This Machine. Alternatively, see Quick
Reference Copy Guide, Quick Reference Fax Guide, and Quick
Reference Scanner Guide on our website (http://www.ricoh.com/).

Various types of operation screens are available.


Quick applications Classic applications
You can easily set the basic operations. You can select advanced functions and detailed settings. DNE101

vvPinch-in/Pinch-out: Zooming in/out


Pinch or spread your thumb and forefinger on the screen.

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy
for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety DNE113

Information in Read This First before using the machine.


nn When Basic Authentication, Windows How to Read the Operating
Logging In and Logging Out Authentication, or LDAP Authentication •• The machine must be connected to a network to
Instructions on the Control Panel display the operation instructions. If the machine
is active
is not connected to a network, browse the User
vv Login Flick to the left. Guide on our website (http://www.ricoh.com/)
•• Ask the user administrator for the Login User Press [Login] on the top right on the screen. from a computer or other device that can connect
Name, Login Password, and User Code. Enter a login user name and a password, and to a network.
•• To prevent use of the machine by unauthorized then press [Login]. •• Some illustrations in this manual might be
persons, always log out when you have finished slightly different from the machine.
using the machine.
nn Changing the display language
nn When User Code Authentication is active You can change the language used on the screen.
The language used in the operating instructions is
vv Login the same as that used on the screen. If no
Enter a User Code (up to eight digits), using operating instructions are provided written in the
the soft keyboard that appears and then press current display language, the operating instructions
[OK]. Press the [User Guide] icon. written in English are displayed on the screen.
To change the display language, press [Change
vv Logout Langs. Widget] on the [Home] screen.
Press [Logout] on the top right on the screen.

vv Logout
Press [ ] on the top right on the screen. The top page of the operating instructions
appears on the control panel.

DKQ001

If there is no response when you touch the screen,


contact your service representative.

© 2016
EN US EN AU

D256-7817

Start Guide
Read This First Manuals Provided with This Machine

Safety Information for This Machine

Other Information for This Machine

Appendix

For information not in this manual, refer to


the HTML/PDF files on the supplied
CD-ROM.

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep
it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to
read the Safety Information in this manual before using the
machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals................................................................................................................................. 2
Symbols Used in the Manuals.......................................................................................................................2
Disclaimer........................................................................................................................................................3
Notes............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Machine Types............................................................................................................................................... 3
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Manuals for This Machine................................................................................................................................. 5
How to Use the Operating Instructions............................................................................................................. 7
Start Installer................................................................................................................................................... 7
Read HTML Manuals..................................................................................................................................... 7
2. Safety Information for This Machine
Safety Symbols for This Machine...................................................................................................................... 9
Safety Information............................................................................................................................................ 10
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................................................10
Safety Precautions to Be Followed............................................................................................................. 10
Safety Labels of This Machine.........................................................................................................................17
Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels.........................................................................................17
Symbols Power Switch.................................................................................................................................20
3. Other Information for This Machine
Laws and Regulations...................................................................................................................................... 21
Duplication and Printing Prohibited............................................................................................................ 21
Laser Safety.................................................................................................................................................. 21
User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (For Users in India)........................................22
4. Appendix
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................................... 23

1
How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.

This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.

[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.

Indicates the key sequence order you should perform using the control panel.
Example:
Select [Host Interface] Press [OK]
(Select [Host Interface], and then press the [OK] key.)

Indicates instructions provided on this company's Web site.


(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by the two symbols. Read
the information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see "Model- Specific Information",
Operating Instructions .

2
Disclaimer

To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.

Notes

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.


The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.

Machine Types

Check the type of your machine before reading the manuals.


• Type 1: SP 5300DN
• Type 2: SP 5310DN
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.

3
4
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
This chapter explains manuals for this machine.

Manuals for This Machine


The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats:

Format Manuals

Printed manuals • Read This First


• Quick Installation Guide

CD-ROM • Driver Installation Guide


• HTML manuals (Only for English version)

Web page • Read This First


• User Guide
• Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)
• Quick Installation Guide
• Driver Installation Guide

Read This First


Before using the machine, be sure to read the section of this manual entitled Safety Information. It
also describes each regulation and environmental conformance.
User Guide
Regarding the basic usage of this machine, frequently used functions, troubleshooting when an
error message appears, etc., summaries are provided for each user manual.
Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)
Describes the setup for using the machine, how to use functions to print or for maintenance and
specifications, troubleshooting, system settings, and security functions.
Manuals are available in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
User Guide and Security Guide are available in the seven languages above and other languages.
For details about how to use the HTML manuals, see page 7 "How to Use the Operating
Instructions".
Quick Installation Guide
Describes procedures for unpacking and setting up the machine, which include loading paper and
installing print cartridge and waste toner bottle, etc.

5
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine

Driver Installation Guide


Describes how to install and configure each driver. This manual is included in the drivers CD.

• Before you configure the extended security and authentication settings, refer to "Before Using This
Printer" in the Security Guide .
• You can see the following manuals on the Web page.
• Appendix
• DHCP Option 204

6
How to Use the Operating Instructions

How to Use the Operating Instructions


This chapter describes the operating instructions of this machine.

Start Installer

The installer starts automatically when you insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of a
client computer. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the case, double-click
"setup.exe".

Read HTML Manuals

The following browsers are recommended to read the HTML manuals.


• Internet Explorer 8/9/10/11
• Firefox 29
• Safari 5.1.7
• Chrome 35

• If JavaScript is disabled or unavailable in your browser, you will not be able to search or use
certain buttons in the HTML documentation.
• The required display resolution is 1,024 × 768 pixels or greater.
• In the help on the top right of the top page, you can check how to use the HTML manuals. The help
topics explain the icons and buttons that are displayed in the HTML manuals.

Search for what you want to do or can do

Using Easy Search, you can search for what want to do or can do with this machine.

1. Click Easy Search on the top right of the top page.


2. Click a title to display the item you want to read.

Search by entering a keyword

You can search through the HTML manuals.


This section explains how to search for "duplex".

1. Enter "duplex" in the search box on the top left of the top page.

7
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine

2. Click .
A list of titles or descriptions that include "duplex" appears.
A search result appears in the search result window. In addition you can use the drop-down menu
to select a manual.
3. Click a title to display the item you want to read.

• Use keywords to search for items you want to query. Depending on the keyword you enter, related
keywords might also appear.
• Items including the used keyword is appear in the search result window.
• If you put a space between keywords, pages that contain both keywords are displayed. For
example, if you enter "duplex" and a space and "copy", items including both words appear in the
search result window.)

8
2. Safety Information for This Machine
This chapter describes the safety precautions.

Safety Symbols for This Machine


The meanings of the safety symbols for this machine are as follows:

Caution

Warning; Sharp element

Do not touch

Do not throw into the fire

Do not use the cleaner

Keep out of reach of children

Caution, hot surface

9
2. Safety Information for This Machine

Safety Information
Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death
or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor
or moderate injury or damage to property.

Safety Precautions to Be Followed

This section explains safety precautions that should always be followed when using this machine.

Environments where the machine can be used

This section explains safety precautions about environments where the machine can be used.

• Do not use flammable sprays or solvents in the vicinity of this machine. Also, avoid placing these
items in the vicinity of this machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not place vases, plant pots, cups, toiletries, medicines, small metal objects, or containers
holding water or any other liquids, on or close to this machine. Fire or electric shock could result
from spillage or if such objects or substances fall inside this machine.

• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might
occur.

• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, an injury might
occur.

• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. Doing so can cause the machine to topple over,
possibly resulting in injury.

10
Safety Information

• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and spacious. Good
ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily.

• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.

Handling power cords and power cord plugs

This section explains safety precautions about handling power cords and power cord plugs.

• Do not use any power sources other than those that match the specifications shown. Doing so
could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not use any frequencies other than those that match the specifications shown. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not use multi-socket adaptors. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not use extension cords. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not use power cords that are damaged, broken, or modified. Also, do not use power cords
that have been trapped under heavy objects, pulled hard, or bent severely. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.

• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and
electric shock hazard.

• The supplied power cord is for use with this machine only. Do not use it with other appliances.
Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.

• If the power cord is damaged and its inner wires are exposed or broken, contact your service
representative for a replacement. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire or electric
shock.

11
2. Safety Information for This Machine

• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• There are burn marks on the plug.
• The prongs on the plug are deformed.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the plug and consult your dealer or service
representative. Use of the plug could result in fire or electric shock.

• Be sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed, broken, etc.
• The power cord's coating has a crack or dent.
• When bending the power cord, the power turns off and on.
• Part of the power cord becomes hot.
• The power cord is damaged.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the power cord and consult your dealer or
service representative. Use of the power cord could result in fire or electric shock.

• Be sure to push the plug of the power cord fully into the wall outlet. Partially inserted plugs
create an unstable connection that can result in unsafe buildup of heat.

• If this machine is not going to be used for several days or longer at a time, disconnect its power
cord from the wall outlet.

• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.

• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around
the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.

• When performing maintenance on the machine, always disconnect the power cord from the
wall outlet.

• Power Source
220–240 V, 6 A, 50/60 Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.

12
Safety Information

Handling the main machine

This section explains safety precautions about handling the main machine.

• Be sure to locate the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet. This will allow easy
disconnection of the power cord in the event of an emergency.

• If the machine emits smoke or odours, or if it behaves unusually, you must turn off its power
immediately. After turning off the power, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the
wall outlet. Then contact your service representative and report the problem. Do not use the
machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• If metal objects, or water or other fluids fall inside this machine, you must turn off its power
immediately. After turning off the power, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the
wall outlet. Then contact your service representative and report the problem. Do not use the
machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not touch this machine if a lightning strike occurs in the immediate vicinity. Doing so could
result in electric shock.

• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, take care that the power cord is not damaged under the machine. Failing to take these
precautions could result in fire or electric shock.

• If you have to move the machine when the optional paper tray unit is attached, do not push on
the main unit's top section. Doing so can cause the optional paper tray unit to detach, possibly
resulting in injury.

• The printer weighs approximately 18 kg (40 lb.).


• When moving the machine, use the inset grips on both sides, and lift slowly in pairs. The
machine will break or cause injury if dropped.

• Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping may cause injury.

13
2. Safety Information for This Machine

• After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise the machine might
move or come down to cause an injury.

• Contact your service representative if you need to lift the machine (such as when relocating it to
another floor). Do not attempt to lift the machine without the assistance of your service
representative. The machine will be damaged if it topples or is dropped, resulting in malfunction
and risk of injury to users.

• Before installing or removing options, always disconnect the power cord plugs from the wall
outlet and allow time for the main unit to fully cool. Failing to take these precautions could result
in burns.

• Do not look into the lamp. It can damage your eyes.

Handling the machine's interior

This section explains safety precautions about handling the machine's interior.

• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those explicitly mentioned in this manual. Inside
this machine are high voltage components that are an electric shock hazard and laser
components that could cause blindness. Contact your sales or service representative if any of the
machine's internal components require maintenance, adjustment, or repair.
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify this machine. Doing so risks burns and electric shock.
Note again that exposure to the laser components inside this machine risks blindness.

• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.

• When removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.

• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.

• While safety measures have been installed to prevent accidents, you must not touch the
machine's rollers while it is operating. Doing so could cause injury.

• If the machine's interior is not cleaned regularly, dust will accumulate. Fire and breakdown can
result from heavy accumulation of dust inside this machine. Contact your sales or service
representative for details about and charges for cleaning the machine's interior.

14
Safety Information

Handling the machine's supplies

This section explains safety precautions about handling the machine's supplies.

• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.

• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.

• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Absorbed toner
may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the vacuum cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a vacuum cleaner that is explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof. If
toner is spilled on the floor, remove the spilled toner slowly using a wet cloth, so that the toner is
not scattered.

• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.

• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.

• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.

• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.

15
2. Safety Information for This Machine

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.

• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.

• Do not attempt to print on stapled sheets, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind of
conductive paper. Doing so risks fire.

• Keep SD cards or USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult a doctor immediately.

16
Safety Labels of This Machine

Safety Labels of This Machine


This section explains the machine's safety information labels.

Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels

This machine has labels for WARNING and CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety,
please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.

Main unit

Front and Left Side

DPK005

1.
Do not incinerate toner bottles. Doing so risks burns as toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.
Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner. Absorbed toner may cause a fire or explosion due
to electrical contact sparking inside the vacuum cleaner.

17
2. Safety Information for This Machine

Store toner bottles out of reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner, consult a doctor
immediately.
Do not hold the toner bottle one-handed, use both hands and hold it firmly without shaking it.
Accidentally dropping the waste toner bottle may damage it. If toner scatters, you may inhale it. Also,
your clothes or hands, or floor will be dirty.
2.
Do not incinerate waste toner bottles. Doing so risks burns as toner will ignite on contact with naked
flame.
Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled waste toner. Absorbed toner may cause a fire or
explosion due to electrical contact sparking inside the vacuum cleaner.
Store waste toner bottles out of reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner, consult a doctor
immediately.
Do not hold the waste toner bottle one-handed, use both hands and hold it firmly without shaking it.
Accidentally dropping the waste toner bottle may damage it. If toner scatters, you may inhale it. Also,
your clothes or hands, or floor will be dirty.

Front and Right side


1

DPK007

1
There are protruding parts on the lower side of this machine, which is near this label. Do not touch the
lower part of this machine or areas near this label.

18
Safety Labels of This Machine

Rear Side

DPK006

1.
The machine weighs approximately 18 kg (40 lb.).
When moving the machine, use the inset grips on both sides.
2, 3
Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The inside and surface of the fusing unit could be very hot.
Caution should be taken when removing misfed paper.

500-sheet paper feed unit

DPK004

19
2. Safety Information for This Machine

There are protruding parts on the lower side of this machine, which is near this label. Do not touch the
lower part of this machine or areas near this label.

Symbols Power Switch

Symbols for power switch that are used for this machine are as follows:
• : STANDBY

20
3. Other Information for This Machine
This chapter describes laws and regulations related to this machine.

Laws and Regulations


Duplication and Printing Prohibited

Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing
certain items, consult with your legal advisor.

Laser Safety

Laser Safety

This machine complies with the requirements of IEC60825-1:2014 for class 1 laser product. The
machine contains two monolithic array laser diodes, 655–663 nanometer wavelength for each emitter.
The beam divergence angle is 21 degrees (minimum) and 29 degrees (maximum) in the vertical
direction, and 7 degrees (minimum) and 11 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal direction, and laser
beams are generated in Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The maximum output power of the light source
is 25 milliwatt.
The following label is attached on the rear side of the machine:

Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

21
3. Other Information for This Machine

User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (For Users in India)

This product complies with the "India E-waste Rule 2011" and prohibits use of lead, mercury,
hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations
exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2
of the Rule.

22
4. Appendix
This appendix describes trademarks for the machine.

Trademarks
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Safari is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
The SD is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 8, 9, 10 and 11 are as follows:
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 9
• Internet Explorer® 10
• Internet Explorer® 11
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

23
MEMO

24 EN AU M282-7905
© 2016
EN AU M282-7905
User Guide Getting Started

Loading Paper

Troubleshooting

For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information
in"Read This First" before using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine................................................................................................................................. 3
1. Getting Started
Before You Start..................................................................................................................................................5
How to Read the Manuals.............................................................................................................................5
Model-Specific Information...........................................................................................................................6
List of Options................................................................................................................................................. 7
Guide to Names and Functions of Components.............................................................................................. 9
Guide to Components....................................................................................................................................9
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Control Panel......................................................................... 13
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Control Panel Screen............................................................ 15
Installing Options............................................................................................................................................. 16
Order of Option Installation........................................................................................................................16
Attaching the 500-sheet paper feed unit...................................................................................................16
Installing the Interface Units........................................................................................................................ 18
Installing SD Card Options......................................................................................................................... 24
Turning On/Off the Power.............................................................................................................................. 28
Turning On the Power..................................................................................................................................28
Turning Off the Power..................................................................................................................................28
Saving Energy.............................................................................................................................................. 29
Replenishing and Replacing Consumables....................................................................................................32
Replacing the Print Cartridge...................................................................................................................... 32
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle.............................................................................................................. 37
Displaying the Printer Configuration Screens Using the Control Panel........................................................41
Using Web Image Monitor............................................................................................................................. 42
Displaying the top page..............................................................................................................................43
2. Loading Paper
Paper Loading Procedure................................................................................................................................47
Paper Size Specifications................................................................................................................................ 48
Paper Type Specifications............................................................................................................................... 51
Paper Precautions.............................................................................................................................................53
Loading Paper into Paper Trays......................................................................................................................56
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray............................................................................................................... 60
Loading Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper................................................................................ 62

1
Loading Envelopes........................................................................................................................................... 64
Specifications of Envelopes.........................................................................................................................64
Printing on Envelopes with Windows (PCL 6/PostScript 3)..................................................................... 66
Printing on Envelopes with Windows (PCL 5e)..........................................................................................66
Printing on Envelopes with OS X.................................................................................................................67
Paper Settings...................................................................................................................................................69
Specifying a Paper Size.............................................................................................................................. 69
Specifying a Paper Type............................................................................................................................. 70
Configuring Envelope Settings Using the Control Panel...........................................................................70
3. Troubleshooting
When a Panel Tone Beeps.............................................................................................................................. 73
When Checking the Indicator Lamps, Status Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel.........................74
Indicators...................................................................................................................................................... 74
If USB Connection Fails................................................................................................................................... 75
When Messages Are Displayed..................................................................................................................... 76
Status Messages.......................................................................................................................................... 76
Alert Messages (Displayed on the Control Panel).................................................................................... 77
Alert Messages (Printed on Error Logs and Reports)................................................................................ 82
When You Cannot Print................................................................................................................................... 87
When the Data In Indicator Does Not Light Up or Flash..........................................................................90
Other Printing Problems................................................................................................................................... 91
When You Cannot Print Properly................................................................................................................91
Paper Misfeeds Occur Frequently..............................................................................................................98
Additional Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................... 102
The Printed Image is Different from the Image on the Computer...........................................................106
When Printer Is Not Functioning Properly............................................................................................... 107
Removing Jammed Paper..............................................................................................................................109
Paper Misfeed Message (A1) (A2) (B) (C) (Z).......................................................................................110
Paper Misfeed Message (Y1), (Y2), (Y3), or (Y4).................................................................................112
Trademarks.....................................................................................................................................................114
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................117

2
Manuals for This Machine
The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats:

Format Manuals

Printed manuals • Read This First


• Quick Installation Guide

CD-ROM • Driver Installation Guide


• (mainly Asia)
• HTML manuals (Only for English
version)

Web page • Read This First


• User Guide
• Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)
• Quick Installation Guide
• Driver Installation Guide

Read This First


Before using the machine, be sure to read the section of this manual entitled Safety Information. It
also describes each regulation and environmental conformance.
User Guide
Regarding the basic usage of this machine, frequently used functions, troubleshooting when an
error message appears, etc., summaries are provided for each user manual.
Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)
Describes the setup for using the machine, how to use functions to print or for maintenance and
specifications, troubleshooting, system settings, and security functions.
Manuals are available in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
User Guide and Security Guide are available in the seven languages above and other languages.
For details about how to use the HTML manuals, see "How to Use the Operating Instructions",
Read This First.
Quick Installation Guide
Describes procedures for unpacking and setting up the machine, which include loading paper and
installing print cartridge and waste toner bottle, etc.
Driver Installation Guide
Describes how to install and configure each driver. This manual is included in the drivers CD.

3
• Before you configure the extended security and authentication settings, refer to "Before Using This
Printer" in the Security Guide.
• You can see the following manuals on the Web page.
• Appendix
• DHCP Option 204

4
1. Getting Started
This section describes the symbols used in the manuals supplied with the printer, available options, and
names and functions of components.

Before You Start


How to Read the Manuals

Symbols used in the manuals

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.

This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.

[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.

Indicates the key sequence order you should perform using the control panel.
Example:
Select [Host Interface] Press [OK]
(Select [Host Interface], and then press the [OK] key.)
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by the two symbols. Read
the information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see "Model- Specific Information",
Operating Instructions.

5
1. Getting Started

Disclaimer

To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.

Notes

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.


The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.

About IP addresses

In this manual, "IP address" covers both IPv4 and IPv6 environments. Read the instructions that are
relevant to the environment you are using.

Model-Specific Information

This section explains how to identify the region to which your printer belongs.
There is a label on the rear of the printer, located in the position shown below. The label contains details
that identify the region to which your printer belongs. Read the label.

DPL001

6
Before You Start

The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your printer.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your printer is a Region A model:
• CODE XXXX -27, -29
• 220–240 V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your printer is a Region B model:
• CODE XXXX -17
• 120–127 V

• Dimensions in this manual are given in two measurement units: metric and imperial. If your printer is
a Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your printer is a Region B model, refer to the imperial
units.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -27" is printed on the label, see
" (mainly Europe)" also.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -29" is printed on the label, see
" (mainly Asia)" also.

List of Options

This section provides a list of options for this printer and the names commonly used in this manual.

Option name Description

Paper Feed Unit PB1100 500-sheet paper feed unit

Caster Table Type M24 Caster Table

Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 Hard disk

Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 Enhanced Security HDD

IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 Wireless LAN interface board

IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 IEEE 1284 interface board

USB Device Server Option Type M19 USB device server board

Extended USB Board Type M19 Extended USB Board

7
1. Getting Started

Option name Description

XPS Direct Print Option Type M24 XPS card

VM CARD Type P8 VM card

IPDS Unit Type M24 IPDS Unit

8
Guide to Names and Functions of Components

Guide to Names and Functions of Components


Guide to Components

• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.

Exterior: Front view

1 2 3

12

11

10 4

8 7 6 5
DPL002

1. Top cover
Open to access the inside of the printer and remove jammed paper.
Open here to replace the print cartridge.
2. Standard tray
Output is stacked here with the print side down.
3. Control panel
For details, see page 13 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Control Panel".
4. Vents
Prevent overheating.
5. Paper size dial
Use this dial to specify the paper size. To use a paper size that is not indicated on the paper size dial, set the
dial to " ". If this is the case, set the paper size using the control panel.

9
1. Getting Started

6. Main power switch


Use this switch to turn the power on and off.
For details about how to shut down the printer, see page 28 "Turning Off the Power".
7. Front cover
Open to access the inside of the printer and remove jammed paper.
Open here to replace the print cartridge.
8. Tray 1
Up to 500 sheets of plain paper can be loaded.
For details about the sizes and types of paper that can be used, see page 48 "Paper Size Specifications"
and page 51 "Paper Type Specifications".
9. Extender for the bypass tray
Pull this extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11 or larger size paper in the bypass tray.
10. Bypass tray
Up to 100 sheets of plain paper can be loaded.
For details about the sizes and types of paper that can be used, see page 48 "Paper Size Specifications"
and page 51 "Paper Type Specifications".
11. Paper guides
When loading paper in the bypass tray, align the paper guides flush against the paper.
12. Tray Extension
Pull this fence to prevent paper from falling off.

Exterior: Rear view

3 2 1

DPL003

10
Guide to Names and Functions of Components

1. Rear cover
Open to access the inside of the printer.
Open here to replace the fusing unit.
2. Power connector
Connect the power cord to the printer. Insert the other end into an electrical outlet.
3. USB port A
Connect external devices such as a card authentication device, etc.
4. USB port B
Connect to the USB port of the USB device server. Remove the cover to use this port.
5. Ethernet port
Use a network interface cable to connect the printer to a network.
6. Optional interface board slot
Optional interface boards can be inserted.
Insert an optional wireless LAN interface board, IEEE 1284 interface board, USB device server, or Extended
USB Board.

Interior: Front view

DPL004

1. Print cartridge
Messages appear on the screen when the print cartridge needs to be replaced, or a new cartridge needs to
be prepared.
For details about the messages that appear on the screen when consumables need to be replaced, see
page 32 "Replenishing and Replacing Consumables".

11
1. Getting Started

Guide to functions of the printer's internal options

DPL006

1. SD memory card options


• VM card
With this card, you can install embedded software applications.
• XPS card
Allows you to print XPS files.
• IPDS unit
Allows you to print using Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS).
To attach this option, see page 24 "Installing SD Card Options".
2. Optional interface units
• Wireless LAN board
Allows you to communicate over a wireless LAN.
• IEEE 1284 interface board
Allows you to connect to an IEEE 1284 cable.
• USB device server
Allows you to add an Ethernet port to the printer and use two IP addresses at the same time.
• Extended USB Board
Allows you to add a USB port.
To attach this option, see page 18 "Installing the Interface Units".
To install the following options, contact your service representative.
• Hard disk
Allows you to store documents to be printed.
• Enhanced Security HDD

12
Guide to Names and Functions of Components

Allows you to enhance the security of the hard disk by using an encryption function that is
compliant with FIPS 140-2.

• If you want to use two or more SD cards that can be inserted in the same slot, contact your sales or
service representative.

Guide to the Names and Functions of the Control Panel

This illustration shows the control panel of the printer.

3
13

5 12

11

6 10

7 8 9 CYN041

1. Display
Displays current printer status and error messages.
Entering energy saver mode turns off the back light. For details about energy saver mode, see page 29
"Saving Energy".
2. Selection keys
Correspond to the function items at the bottom line on the display.

13
1. Getting Started

Example: When this manual instructs you to press [Option], press the selection key on the left below the initial
screen.
3. [Switch Functions] key
Press this key to switch between the operation screen of the printer function and the function screens of the
extended features currently in use.
4. [Menu] key
Press this key to configure and check the current printer settings.
Press to change the default settings to meet your requirements. See "Function Details of the Printer
Configuration Items", Operating Instructions.
5. [Job Reset] key
Press to cancel the current print job.
6. [Suspend/Resume] key
Press this to suspend the print job currently being processed. The indicator remains lit as long as the job is
suspended.
To resume the job, press this key again. The suspended job will resume automatically when the time specified
in [Auto Reset Timer] elapses (default: 60 seconds).
For details about the [Auto Reset Timer] setting, see "Timer Settings", Operating Instructions.
7. Power indicator
Lights up when the printer is ready to receive data from a computer. Flashes when the printer is warming up or
receiving data. It is unlit when the power is off or when the printer is in energy saver mode.
8. Alert indicator
Lights up or flashes when a printer error occurs.
Steady red: printing is not possible, or is possible but print quality cannot be ensured.
Flashing yellow: the printer will soon require maintenance or a replacement consumable such as print
cartridge.
Follow the instructions that appear on the display.
9. Data in indicator
Flashes when the printer is receiving data from a computer. The data in indicator is lit if there is data to be
printed.
10. Light sensor
The sensor that detects the ambient light level when the ECO Night Sensor function is enabled.
11. [Escape] key
Press this key to cancel an operation or return to the previous display.
12. [OK] key
Use this key to confirm settings or setting values, or move to the next menu level.
13. Scroll keys
Press these keys to move the cursor in each direction.
When the [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] keys appear in this manual, press the applicable key for the direction that you
want to move the cursor.

14
Guide to Names and Functions of Components

Guide to the Names and Functions of the Control Panel Screen

CYN901

1. Operational Status or Messages


Displays the printer status and messages.
2. [Option]
Press to display the following items:
• Form Feed
You can output data that is unprintable due to errors such as a missing line-feed code.
• Error Log
If a document cannot be printed due to errors or other reasons, an error log is created. You can check
the error log using the control panel.
3. [Prt.Jobs]
Press to display print jobs sent from a computer.
[Prt.Jobs] is displayed only when the optional hard disk is installed in the printer.
4. [Supplies]
Press to display the information about printer supplies.

• By default, the remaining amount of toner is displayed. To avoid displaying the remaining amount
of toner, set [Display Supply Info] to [Off] in [General Settings] under [Maintenance].

15
1. Getting Started

Installing Options
By installing options, you can improve printer performance and expand the available features.

Order of Option Installation

When installing multiple options, the following order is recommended:

1. Attach the paper feed unit.


Attach the paper feed unit to the bottom of the printer.
You can attach up to four paper feed units. Up to 2,000 sheets of paper can be loaded.
2. Install the caster table.
3. Install the optional interface board.
Install in the slot of the printer.
Only one interface board can be installed.
4. Insert SD card options.
Insert in the SD card slot of the printer.
There are two slots for SD cards.
Each slot supports different types of SD cards.
If you want to use two or more SD cards that can be inserted in the same slot, contact your sales or
service representative.

Attaching the 500-sheet paper feed unit

You can install a 500-sheet paper feed unit.

• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.

• The printer weighs approximately 18 kg (40 lb.).


• When moving the machine, use the inset grips on both sides, and lift slowly in pairs. The
machine will break or cause injury if dropped.

• Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping may cause injury.

16
Installing Options

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, take care that the power cord is not damaged under the machine. Failing to take these
precautions could result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not place the printer directly on the floor.


• When attaching multiple options, attach the paper feed unit first.
• To attach two or three paper feed units at the same time, first stack them one upon the other, and
then attach them as a single unit.
• Before turning on the power, remove the packaging material from the paper feed unit.

1. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord.


2. Remove the packaging from the paper feed unit.
3. Lift the printer using the inset grips on both sides of the printer.

DPL023

Lifting the machine requires two people.


When moving the printer, do not touch the following parts:
• Convex parts on the right side of the machine
• Places indicated on the labels attached to the machine
• The bottom of the optional paper tray

17
1. Getting Started

4. There are two upright pins on the optional paper feed unit. Align them with the holes on
the underside of the printer, and then carefully lower the printer.

DPK939

5. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the printer.


6. Print the configuration page to confirm that the unit was attached correctly.

• To check whether the optional paper feed unit was correctly attached, print the configuration page,
and check "Attached Equipment" on the configuration page. If the unit was attached correctly,
"Tray 2", "Tray 3", "Tray 4", and "Tray 5" will appear.
• For information about printing the configuration page, see "Test Printing", Operating Instructions.
• If the optional paper feed unit was not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the beginning.
If it cannot be installed correctly even after trying the installation a second time, contact your sales
or service representative.
• To use the paper feed unit, configure the printer options in "Accessories" in the printer driver. For
details about opening "Accessories", see "Configuring Option Settings for the Printer", Driver
Installation Guide.

Installing the Interface Units

• Before beginning work, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static
electricity. Static electricity can damage the interface units.
• Do not subject the interface units to physical shocks.

Installing the Wireless LAN interface board

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord.

18
Installing Options

3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPL009

The removed cover will not be reused.


4. Fully insert the interface board.

DPL010

Check that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPL011

6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the printer.


7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

19
1. Getting Started

• Check that the board was correctly installed by printing the configuration page. If it is correctly
installed, "Wireless LAN" will appear for "Device Connection" on the configuration page. For
details about printing the configuration page, see "Test Printing", Operating Instructions.
• If the board was not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it cannot be
installed correctly even after trying the installation a second time, contact your sales or service
representative.
• Before using the board, you must configure settings from the printer control panel. For details, see "
Wireless LAN Configuration", Operating Instructions.

Installing the IEEE 1284 interface board

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord.
3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPL009

The removed cover will not be reused.


4. Fully insert the IEEE 1284 interface board.

DPL012

Check that the IEEE 1284 interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.

20
Installing Options

5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPL013

6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the printer.


7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

• Check that the board was correctly installed by printing the configuration page. If it is correctly
installed, "Parallel Interface" will appear for "Device Connection" on the configuration page. For
details about printing the configuration page, see "Test Printing", Operating Instructions.
• If the board was not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it cannot be
installed correctly even after trying the installation a second time, contact your sales or service
representative.

Installing the Extended USB board

1. Check the contents of the package.


2. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord.
3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPL009

The removed cover will not be reused.

21
1. Getting Started

4. Fully insert the interface board.

DPL014

Check that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPL015

6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the printer.


7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

• If the board was not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it cannot be
installed correctly even after trying the installation a second time, contact your sales or service
representative.

Installing the USB device server

The optional USB device server is an interface board that adds an Ethernet port to the printer.
With this option installed, two Ethernet cables can be connected at the same time using the standard port
on the printer and an additional port on the USB device server. You can assign different IP addresses to
each port, so the printer can print jobs from different network segments.
Procedure for installing the USB device server

1. Check the contents of the package.

22
Installing Options

2. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord.


3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.

DPL009

The removed cover will not be reused.


4. Fully insert the interface board.

DPL016

Check that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.

DPL030

6. Connect the USB device server to the printer.


For details, see the Setup Guide provided with the USB device server.

23
1. Getting Started

Configuring settings
After installing and connecting the USB device server to the printer, configure the printer settings.

• When using the USB device server, set [Engy Sv Md to Dsbl Prt Srv] to [Disable mode] to prevent
the printer from entering Energy Saver mode. Otherwise, the USB device server loses
communication with the network while the printer is in Energy Saver mode, and the printer cannot
receive print jobs.

1. Select [System] Press [OK]


2. Select [Engy Sv Md to Dsbl Prt Srv] Press [OK]
3. Select [Disable Mode] Press [OK]

Installing SD Card Options

• Keep SD cards or USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult a doctor immediately.

• Do not subject the card to physical shocks.

1. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord.


2. Open the rear cover.

DPL040

24
Installing Options

3. Unhook the tab on the interface cover, which is located on the side of the rear cover.

DPL041

4. Unhook the two tabs on the outside of the interface cover.

DPL042

5. Insert the SD card into the slot until it clicks.

DPL043

If you insert only one SD card, use the upper slot. If you insert two SD cards simultaneously, use
both slots. If you insert the optional VM card, use only the lower slot.
If you want to use two or more SD cards simultaneously, contact your service representative.

25
1. Getting Started

6. Hook the two tabs on the outside of the interface cover.

DPL044

7. Hook the tab on the interface cover, which is located on the side of the rear cover.

DPL045

8. Close the rear cover.

DPL046

9. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the printer.


10. Check that the SD card was installed correctly.

• You can confirm that the SD card was installed correctly by checking the control panel menu or
configuration page.
• VM card: Make sure [JavaTM/X] appears when the [Switch Functions] key is pressed.

26
Installing Options

• XPS card: Printing the configuration page, if the XPS card is installed properly, "XPS" will
appear for "Printer Language" in "System Reference". For details about printing the
configuration page, see "Test Printing", Operating Instructions.
• If the card is not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it cannot be
installed correctly even after trying the installation a second time, contact your sales or service
representative.
• Do not touch the card while the printer is in use. It may come loose, even if pushed only slightly. The
slot cover must be reattached.

27
1. Getting Started

Turning On/Off the Power


This section explains how to turn on/off the printer.

Turning On the Power

1. Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
2. Push the main power switch.

DPK914

The power indicator turns on.

• After you switch the main power on, a screen may appear to indicate that the printer is initializing.
Do not switch the power off during this process. Initialization takes about 5 minutes.

Turning Off the Power

• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.

• Do not press and hold the main power switch when turning off the printer. Doing so shuts down the
printer forcefully and may damage the hard disk and the SDRAM module, causing a malfunction of
the printer.
• Before unplugging the power cord plug, turn off the power switch and make sure the power switch
indicator turns off. Not doing so may result in damage to the hard disk or memory, leading to a
malfunction.

28
Turning On/Off the Power

• Do not turn off the power while the printer is in operation.

1. Push the main power switch.

DPK914

The main power is turned off automatically when the shutdown process is complete.
If the shutdown process is not complete within the period of time displayed on the screen, contact
your service representative.

Saving Energy

This printer has the following energy saving functions:


Low Power mode
If the printer is not used for a certain period of time, it enters Low Power mode.
In Low Power mode, the printer consumes less electricity than in the standby mode by turning off the
display and lowering the temperature of the fusing unit heater. If the printer receives a job, it
increases the temperature of the fusing unit and perform printing, but the display remains off.
You can configure the period of time the printer waits before it enters Low Power mode in [Low
Power Mode Timer]. For details, see "System", Operating Instructions.
To exit Low Power mode, do one of the following:
• Start print jobs
• Press any key on the control panel
• Open any cover
• Open any paper tray
The printer also exits Low Power mode when the ECO Night Sensor detects an increase in the
ambient light level.
Fusing Unit Off mode
If you do not use the printer for a certain period after an operation, the display will turn off and the
printer goes into Fusing Unit Off mode. The printer uses less electricity in Fusing Unit Off mode.

29
1. Getting Started

When the printer is in Fusing Unit Off mode, the display is on but the fusing unit heater is off to save
energy. In this mode, you can change the printer settings on the control panel. However, the printer
must exit this mode to print.
You can change the amount of time that the printer waits before switching to Fusing Unit Off mode
under [Fusing Unit Off Mode Timer]. For details, see "System", Operating Instructions.
To exit Fusing Unit Off mode, do one of the following:
• Start print jobs
• Display the [Maintenance] screen on the control panel
• Operate the control panel when [Exit Fusing Unit Off Mode] is set to [On Operating Control
Panel]
Sleep mode
If the printer remains inactive for a specified period after entering Fusing Unit Off mode, it enters
Sleep mode to further reduce the power consumption. The printer also enters Sleep mode when:
• The printer waits before entering Sleep mode is set in [Sleep Mode Timer]
• It is the day and time specified in [Weekly Timer]
The printer can print jobs from computers.
You can change the amount of time that the printer waits before switching to Sleep mode.
For details about setting [Sleep Mode Timer] and [Weekly Timer], see "System", Operating
Instructions.
To exit Sleep mode, do one of the following:
• Press one of the keys on the control panel
• Start print jobs
ECO Night Sensor
ECO Night Sensor can detect darkness and automatically turn off this product's power.
If ECO Night Sensor is enabled and detects darkness in a room after the lights are turned off, the
sensor automatically turns the power off and reduces the power consumption of this product to 1W
or less.
The default settings of ECO Night Sensor are enabled.
To change the settings, see "System", Operating Instructions.

• The ECO Night Sensor function's factory default is [Auto Power Off Only]. If the printer is
located in an environment where the ambient light level is low (such as in a hallway or a
location with motion sensor lighting), it is advisable that you either keep this function disabled
or adjust its sensitivity.
• You can configure the printer to automatically turn its power on when it detects an increase in
the ambient light level. The printer may also react to daylight and turn its power on. If the

30
Turning On/Off the Power

printer is located in an environment where it is exposed to direct sunlight, it is advisable that


you do not change the factory default configuration and only enable [Auto Power Off Only].

• The energy saving functions will not activate when:


• Communicating with external devices
• The hard disk is active
• A warning message is displayed
• The service call message is displayed
• Paper is jammed
• The printer's covers are opened
• Toner is being replenished
• The printer settings screen is displayed
• Fixed warm-up is in progress
• Data is being processed
• Operations are suspended during printing
• The Data In indicator is on or flashing
• The sample print, locked print, hold print, or stored print screen is displayed
• Accessing the printer using Web Image Monitor
• The printer consumes less energy when in Sleep mode, but it takes longer to start printing.
• If two or more energy saving functions are set, the function for which the predetermined conditions
to enter energy saving mode are met takes effect first.

31
1. Getting Started

Replenishing and Replacing Consumables


This section explains how to replenish consumables when they run out.

Replacing the Print Cartridge

This section explains precautions to add toner when it has run out, and how to dispose of used toner.

• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.

• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.

• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Absorbed toner
may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the vacuum cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a vacuum cleaner that is explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof. If
toner is spilled on the floor, remove the spilled toner slowly using a wet cloth, so that the toner is
not scattered.

• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.

• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.

• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.

32
Replenishing and Replacing Consumables

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.

• Always replace the print cartridge when a notification appears on the display.
• Errors may occur if you use toner other than the recommended one.
• When adding toner, do not turn off the main power. Otherwise, settings will be lost.
• Store toner where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight, temperatures rise above 35 °C (95 °F),
or high humidity.
• Store toner on a flat surface.
• Do not shake the print cartridge with its mouth down after removing it. Residual toner may scatter.
• Do not repeatedly install and remove print cartridges. This will result in toner leakage.
• When installing the print cartridge, hold it with both hands and insert it into the printer fully until it
reaches the position indicated on the label attached on the printer. If the front cover does not close,
do not force it. Check if the print cartridge is properly installed.
For details about installing the toner, see the instructions on the package of the toner.
When the following messages appear on the display, the toner has almost run out. Have a replacement
print cartridge at hand.
" Toner is almost empty."

1. Open the front cover and the top cover.

DPL705

33
1. Getting Started

2. Hold the print cartridge with one hand as you release the print cartridge lever with
another hand.

DPK918

3. Squeeze the clip on the print cartridge and lift it.

DPK919

4. Put the used print cartridge in a plastic bag and seal it so that the toner does not spill out.

DPK920

34
Replenishing and Replacing Consumables

5. Remove the new print cartridge from the toner kit.

DPK921

6. Shake the new print cartridge at least 10 times to the left and right so that the toner inside
it spreads uniformly.

10

DPK922

7. Insert the new print cartridge into the printer.


Press the new print cartridge until it clicks into place.

DPK924

35
1. Getting Started

8. Lock the lever of the print cartridge.

DPK925

9. Close the front cover and the top cover.

• If appears when there is a lot of toner, follow the toner replacement instructions that appear on
the screen: Pull out the cartridge, and then reinstall it.
• Comply with our Print Cartridge Recycling Program, whereby used print cartridges are collected
for processing. For details, ask your sales or service representative.

Disposing of used toner

This section describes what to do with used toner.


Toner cannot be re-used.
Pack used toner containers in the container's box or a bag to prevent the toner from leaking out of the
container when you dispose of it.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used toner container, please contact your local sales office. If you discard it
by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
(mainly North America)
Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you can
recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.

36
Replenishing and Replacing Consumables

Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle

• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.

• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.

• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.

• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Absorbed toner
may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the vacuum cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a vacuum cleaner that is explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof. If
toner is spilled on the floor, remove the spilled toner slowly using a wet cloth, so that the toner is
not scattered.

• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.

• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.

• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.

37
1. Getting Started

• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.

• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.

• Waste toner bottles cannot be reused.


• Before removing the waste toner bottle from the machine, spread paper or some other material
around the area to keep toner from dirtying your workspace.
• When removing the waste toner bottle, do not touch the inside of the machine.
• Be careful to not allow the toner to leak from the waste toner bottle when you remove it.
• Carefully pull the waste toner bottle out horizontally when you are replacing it.
• Do not use a waste toner bottle that has not been used for a long time.
• Take care not to drop the waste toner bottle.
• Make sure the waste toner bottle is fully inserted. If it is not, toner will leak inside the machine.
• We recommend purchasing and keeping a spare waste toner bottle on hand since waste toner
bottles are consumable items.

1. Open the left cover.

DPK928

38
Replenishing and Replacing Consumables

2. Remove the waste toner bottle from the printer.

DPK929

3. Put the full waste toner bottle in a plastic bag and seal it so that the toner does not spill
out.

DPK930

4. Remove the new waste toner bottle from the toner kit.

DPK931

5. Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer


Leave the cap open.

39
1. Getting Started

DPK932

Press the new waste toner bottle it clicks into place.

DPK933

6. Close the left cover.

DPK934

• Replace the waste toner bottle if "Waste Toner full" appears on the display.
• When the "Waste Toner almost full" appears on the display, the waste toner bottle should be
replaced soon. Prepare a new waste toner bottle.
• Your service representative can replace the waste toner bottle if it is included in your contract. For
details, contact your local dealer or service representative.

40
Displaying the Printer Configuration Screens Using the Control Panel

Displaying the Printer Configuration Screens


Using the Control Panel
The configuration screens allow you to change or set defaults.

• If Administrator Authentication Management is specified, contact your administrator.

1. Press the [Menu] key.

CYN042

2. Select the settings you want to change.


Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the next or previous items.
3. Press the [OK] key.

• Any changes you make with configuration screens remain in effect even if the main power switch is
turned off.
• To cancel changes made to settings and return to the initial display, press the [Escape] key.

41
1. Getting Started

Using Web Image Monitor

• You cannot configure the printer settings using Web Image Monitor from a computer connected to
the USB device server's network. Be sure to access Web Image Monitor from the printer's network.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the printer status and change settings.
Available operations
The following operations can be remotely performed using Web Image Monitor from a client
computer.
• Displaying printer status or settings
• Checking the print job status or history
• Interrupting currently printing jobs
• Resetting the printer
• Managing the Address Book
• Configuring printer settings
• Configuring network protocol settings
• Configuring security settings
Configuring the printer
To perform the operations from Web Image Monitor, TCP/IP is required. After the printer is
configured to use TCP/IP, operations from Web Image Monitor become available.
Recommended Web browser
• Windows:
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher
Firefox 10 and 15 or higher
Google Chrome 19 or higher
• OS X:
Safari 3.0 or higher
Firefox 10 and 15 or higher
Google Chrome 19 or higher
Web Image Monitor supports screen reader software. We recommend JAWS 7.0 or a later
version.

• Display and operation problems may occur if you do not enable JavaScript and cookies, or if you
are using a non-recommended Web browser.

42
Using Web Image Monitor

• If you are using a proxy server, change the Web browser settings. Contact your administrator for
information about the settings.
• We recommend using Web Image Monitor in the same network.
• If the printer is firewall-protected, it cannot be accessed from computers outside the firewall.
• If the printer under DHCP is used, the IP address may be changed automatically by the DHCP
server settings. Enable DDNS setting on the printer, and then connect using the printer's host name.
Alternatively, set a static IP address to the DHCP server.
• If the HTTP port is disabled, a connection to the printer using the printer's URL cannot be
established. SSL settings must be enabled on this printer. For details, contact your network
administrator.
• If Firefox is used, fonts and colors may be different, or tables may not appear properly configured.
• When using a host name under Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012
R2 with IPv6 protocol, perform host name resolution using an external DNS server. The host file
cannot be used.
• To use JAWS 7.0 under Web Image Monitor, you must be running Windows and Internet Explorer
6.0 or a later version.
• If you are using Internet Explorer 8.0 or higher, downloading will be slower than with other
browsers. To download faster with Internet Explorer 8.0 or higher, open the browser's [Internet
Options] menu and register the printer's URL as a trusted site, and then disable SmartScreen filter
for trusted sites. For details about these settings, see the Internet Explorer Help files.
• You can access Web Image Monitor more quickly by registering the printer's URL as a bookmark.
Note that the URL you register must be the URL of the top page, which is the page that appears
before login. If you register the URL of a page that appears after login, Web Image Monitor will
not open properly from the bookmark.
• If user authentication is activated, you must enter your login user name and password to use Web
Image Monitor. For Details, see "Logging In Using Web Image Monitor", Operating Instructions.
• When you configure settings using Web Image Monitor, do not log in from the control panel. The
settings you have configured using Web Image Monitor may become invalid.

Displaying the top page

There are two modes available with Web Image Monitor: guest mode and administrator mode.
Displayed items may differ depending on the printer type.
Guest mode
This mode requires no login to enter.
In the guest mode, the printer status, settings, and print job status can be viewed, but the printer
settings cannot be changed.

43
1. Getting Started

Administrator mode
This mode requires an administrator login to enter.
In the administrator mode, you can configure various printer settings.

• When entering an IPv4 address, do not begin segments with zeros. For example: If the address is
"192.168.001.010", you must enter it as "192.168.1.10".

1. Start your Web browser.


2. Enter "http://(printer's IP address or host name)/" in your Web browser's address bar.
The top page of Web Image Monitor appears.
If the printer's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server, you can enter it.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under the environment in which server
authentication is issued, enter "https://(printer's IP address or host name)/".
3. To log in to Web Image Monitor in the administrator mode, click [Login] on the top page.
The window for entering the login user name and password appears.
4. Enter your login user name and password, and then click [Login].
For details about the login user name and password, contact your administrator.
Depending on the configuration of your Web browser, the login user name and password might be
saved. If you do not want to save them, configure your Web browser's settings so that this
information is not saved.

3
1

DPL053

1. Menu area
Displays the content of a selected menu item.
2. Header area
Displays the dialog box for switching to the user mode and administrator mode and the menu for each mode.
Also displays the link to Help and dialog box for keyword search.

44
Using Web Image Monitor

3. Refresh/Help
(Refresh): Click at the upper right in the work area to update the printer information. Click the Web
browser's [Refresh] button to refresh the entire browser screen.
(Help): Use Help to view or download Help file contents.
4. Basic Information area
Displays the basic information of the printer.
5. Work area
Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area.

45
1. Getting Started

46
2. Loading Paper
This chapter describes available trays for each paper size and type, and explains how to load paper in
paper trays.

Paper Loading Procedure


To achieve the print results you expect, it is important to select an appropriate input tray according to the
size, type, and weight of the paper you want to use for printing. You also need to specify the paper size
and type properly using the control panel or Web Image Monitor, and/or the paper size dial on the
tray.
Follow the procedure below to load paper.

1. Check the paper tray available for the size, type, and weight of the paper you want to
use for printing.
For details about available paper trays for each paper size and type, see page 48 "Paper Size
Specifications" and page 51 "Paper Type Specifications".
2. Change the paper size and type settings for the tray you selected.
Use the control panel of the printer or Web Image Monitor to change the paper size and type.
When loading paper into Trays 1 to 5, adjust the paper size dial on the trays.
For details about changing paper settings using the control panel, see page 69 "Paper Settings".
3. Load paper into the tray.
For details about loading paper, see page 56 "Loading Paper into Paper Trays" or page 60
"Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray".
For details about loading envelopes, see page 64 "Loading Envelopes".

47
2. Loading Paper

Paper Size Specifications


The following tables show the paper sizes that can be loaded in each paper tray. The "Paper size"
column shows the names of paper sizes and their dimensions in millimeters and inches. The and
icons indicate the paper orientation in relation to the printer body.
The letters in the tables indicate the following:
• A: Select the paper size using the control panel.
• B: Select the paper size using the paper size dial on the tray.
• C: Set the paper size dial on the tray to " ", and select the paper size with the control panel.
• : You can print on both sides of paper.
• -: Not supported

Metric sizes
Paper size
Actual size Bypass tray Tray 1 Trays 2-5 Two-sided
name

210 × 297
A4 A B B
mm

148 × 210
A5 A B B
mm

148 × 210
A5 A C - -
mm

105 × 148
A6 A B - -
mm

182 × 257
B5 JIS A C C
mm

128 × 182
B6 JIS A C C -
mm

162 × 229
C5 Env A - C -
mm

114 × 162
C6 Env A - C -
mm

110 × 220
DL Env A - C -
mm

48
Paper Size Specifications

Paper size
Actual size Bypass tray Tray 1 Trays 2-5 Two-sided
name

195 × 267
16K A C C
mm

Imperial sizes
Paper size
Actual size Bypass tray Tray 1 Trays 2-5 Two-sided
name

81/2 × 14 8.5" × 14" A B B

81/2 × 13 8.5" × 13" A C C

81/2 × 11 8.5" × 11" A B B

81/4 × 14 8.25" × 14" A C C

81/4 × 13 8.25" × 13" A C C

8 × 13 8" × 13" A C C

8 × 10 8" × 10" A C C

71/4 × 101/2
7.25" × 10.5" A C C

51/2 × 81/2 5.5" × 8.5" A B B

41/8 × 91/2 4.125" × 9.5" A - C -

37/8 × 71/2 3.875" × 7.5" A - C -

81/2 × 13
2/ 8.5" × 13.4" A C C
5

Custom Size Specifications


You can also load custom size paper by specifying horizontal and vertical sizes.
The following tables show the custom paper sizes that can be loaded in each tray.

Metric sizes
Horizontal size Vertical size Horizontal size Vertical size
Tray
(One-sided) (One-sided) (Two-sided) (Two-sided)

70.0 to 216.0 148.0 to 356.0 139.7 to 216.0 210.0 to 356.0


Bypass tray
mm mm mm mm

49
2. Loading Paper

Horizontal size Vertical size Horizontal size Vertical size


Tray
(One-sided) (One-sided) (Two-sided) (Two-sided)

105.0 to 216.0 148.0 to 356.0 139.7 to 216.0 210.0 to 356.0


Tray 1
mm mm mm mm

92.0 to 216.0 162.0 to 356.0 139.7 to 216.0 210.0 to 356.0


Trays 2–5
mm mm mm mm

Imperial sizes
Horizontal size Vertical size Horizontal size Vertical size
Tray
(One-sided) (One-sided) (Two-sided) (Two-sided)

Bypass tray 2.76 to 8.50" 5.83 to 14.0" 5.50 to 8.50" 8.27 to 14.0"

Trays 1 4.14 to 8.50" 5.83 to 14.0" 5.50 to 8.50" 8.27 to 14.0"

Trays 2–5 3.63 to 8.50" 6.38 to 14.0" 5.50 to 8.50" 8.27 to 14.0"

• Print speed will be lowered in Silent Mode when printing on any paper other than envelopes is
performed.

50
Paper Type Specifications

Paper Type Specifications


The following table show the paper types that can be loaded in each tray. See "Paper weight" table for
the actual paper weight indicated by numbers in the "Paper weight No." column. Use both tables to
specify the correct paper type for the paper you are using.
The letters in the tables indicate the following:
• A: Supported
• : You can print on both sides of paper.
• -: Not supported

Paper weight
Paper type Bypass tray Tray 1 Trays 2-5 Two-sided
No.

Thin Paper 1 A - - -

Plain Paper 2 A A A

Plain Paper 2 3 A A A

Middle Thick Paper 4 A A A

Thick Paper 1 5 A A A

Thick Paper 2 6 A - - -

Thick Paper 3 7 A - - -

Recycled Paper 1, 6, 7 A - - -

Recycled Paper 2 to 5 A A A

Color Paper 1, 6, 7 A - - -

Color Paper 2 to 5 A A A

Special Paper 1 1, 6, 7 A - - -

Special Paper 1 2 to 5 A A A

Special Paper 2 1, 6, 7 A - - -

Special Paper 2 2 to 5 A A A

Special Paper 3 1, 6, 7 A - - -

Special Paper 3 2 to 5 A A A

51
2. Loading Paper

Paper weight
Paper type Bypass tray Tray 1 Trays 2-5 Two-sided
No.

Letterhead Paper 1, 6, 7 A - - -

Letterhead Paper 2 to 5 A A A

Preprinted Paper 1, 6, 7 A - - -

Preprinted Paper 2 to 5 A A A

Bond Paper 1, 6, 7 A - - -

Bond Paper 2 to 5 A A A

OHP - *1 A - - -

Label Paper 1 to 7 A - - -

Envelope 2 to 7 A - A -

*1 It is not necessary to specify the paper weight for this paper type.
Paper weight

No. Paper weight

1 60–63 g/m2 (16 lb. BOND)

2 64–74 g/m2 (17–20 lb. BOND)

3 75–90 g/m2 (20–24 lb. BOND)

4 91–105 g/m2 (24–28 lb. BOND)

5 106–135 g/m2 (28–36 lb. BOND) *1

6 136–170 g/m2 (36 lb. BOND–63 lb. COVER)

7 171–220 g/m2 (63–80 lb. COVER)

*1 Allowed weights for Trays 1 to 5 and duplex printing are 106 to 120 g/m2 (28 lb. BOND to 44 lb.
COVER) paper.

• When you print using envelope, the print speed may change.
• Print speed will be lowered in Silent Mode when printing on any paper other than envelopes is
performed.

52
Paper Precautions

Paper Precautions

• Do not attempt to print on stapled sheets, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind of
conductive paper. Doing so risks fire.

• If Tray 2, 3, 4 and 5 are installed, do not pull out more than one tray at a time when you are
changing or replenishing paper or resolving paper jams. Pressing down forcefully on the
machine's upper surfaces can result in malfunctions and/or user injury.

Precautions
• Print quality is not guaranteed if paper other than the ones recommended is used. For more
information about recommended paper, contact your sales or service representative.
• If paper jams occur or multiple sheets are fed at once, fan the paper before loading it.

CBK254

• If you load paper when only a few sheets of paper remain in the tray, multiple sheet feeding
may occur. Remove any remaining paper, stack them upon the new sheets of paper, and then
fan the entire stack before loading it into the tray.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• For details about available paper sizes and types for each paper tray, see page 48 "Paper
Size Specifications" and page 51 "Paper Type Specifications".
• Depending on the environment where the printer is being used, you might at times hear a
rustling noise from paper moving through the printer. This noise does not indicate a
malfunction.
• If paper cannot be fed properly because of burrs on the edges of paper, load paper upside
down.
• It is recommended to load envelopes and labels into the bypass tray.
Unusable Paper
To prevent errors and misfeeds, do not use:

53
2. Loading Paper

• Paper for inkjet printers, thermal fax paper, art paper, paper with perforated lines, hemmed-
edge paper, or window envelopes
• Bent, folded, or creased paper, perforated paper, slippery paper, torn paper, rough paper,
thin paper with little stiffness, and paper with a dusty surface

• Errors can occur if you print onto sides that are already printed. Be sure to print onto blank
sides only.
• Even supported types of paper may cause paper jams or malfunctions if they have been
improperly stored.
• If you print onto rough grain paper, the output image might be blurred.
• Do not load sheets that have already been printed by another printer.
Paper Storage
When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:
• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or less).
• Store on a flat surface.
• Do not store paper vertically.
• Once opened, store paper in plastic bags.
Print Area
The following shows the recommended print area for paper printed with this printer:

3 3

DPL059

1. Print area
2. Feed direction

54
Paper Precautions

3. 4 mm (0.2 inches)
4. 10 mm (0.4 inches)

• The print area may vary depending on the paper size, printer language, and printer driver
settings.
• Depending on the printer driver settings, you may be able to print outside the recommended
print area. However, the actual output may not come out as desired, or a paper feed problem
may occur.

55
2. Loading Paper

Loading Paper into Paper Trays


In the following example procedure, paper is loaded into Tray 1.

• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.

• If Tray 2, 3, 4 and 5 are installed, do not pull out more than one tray at a time when you are
changing or replenishing paper or resolving paper jams. Pressing down forcefully on the
machine's upper surfaces can result in malfunctions and/or user injury.

• For details about trays that can be loaded for each paper size and type, see page 48 "Paper Size
Specifications" and page 51 "Paper Type Specifications".
• Be sure to select the correct paper size and feed direction using the paper size dial on the tray.
Otherwise, the printer might be damaged, or printing problems might occur.
• Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the upper limit mark inside the paper tray. Excessive
stacking can cause paper jams.
• If paper jams occur frequently, flip the paper stack in the tray.
• Do not mix different types of paper in the same paper tray.
• After loading paper, specify the paper size using the control panel or paper size dial, and paper
type using the control panel. When printing a document, specify the same paper size and type in
the printer driver as specified on the printer.
• Do not move the side paper guides and end paper guide forcefully. Doing so may damage the
tray.
• When loading label paper, load it one by one.
• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease or the paper may
misfeed.

56
Loading Paper into Paper Trays

1. Pull the tray carefully until it stops, lift the front side of the tray, and then pull it out of the
printer.

DPK907

Place the tray on a flat surface.


2. Adjust the paper size dial to match the size and feed direction of paper in the paper tray.

DPL036

3. Squeeze the clip on the side paper guide and slide it to match the paper size.

DPL037

57
2. Loading Paper

4. Squeeze the end guide and slide it inward to match the standard size.

DPL038

When loading paper that is larger than A4 or 81/2 × 11 , push the button, and then pull the
end guide out to match the paper size.

DPK125

5. Load the new paper stack print side down.


Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit (upper line) marked inside the tray.

DPK909

6. Adjust the paper guides to close any gaps.


Do not move paper loaded in the tray more than a few millimeters.
Moving the loaded paper excessively may cause damage to paper edges on the openings of the
tray's lifting plate, resulting in sheets being folded or becoming jammed.

58
Loading Paper into Paper Trays

7. Lift the front side of the tray, and then slide it into the printer carefully until it stops.

DPL039

To avoid paper jams, make sure the tray is securely inserted.

• Letterhead paper must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see page 62 "Loading
Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper".
• You can load envelopes into Trays 2-5. Envelopes must be loaded in a specific orientation. For
details, see page 64 "Loading Envelopes".

59
2. Loading Paper

Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray

• For details about trays that can be loaded for each paper size and type, see page 48 "Paper Size
Specifications" and page 51 "Paper Type Specifications".
• Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the upper limit mark. Excessive stacking can cause
paper jams.
• Do not mix different types of paper.
• After loading paper, specify the paper size and type using the control panel. When printing a
document, specify the same paper size and type in the printer driver as specified on the printer.
• When loading label paper, load it one by one.
• Paper feeding conditions and printing quality may vary depending on the paper thickness and
width. Be sure to perform test printing using the same paper beforehand.

1. Open the bypass tray.

DPL019

Pull the extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11 or larger paper.

DPL020

60
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray

2. Load paper face up until it stops, and then adjust both sides of the paper guide to match
the paper width.

DPL022

• When using the bypass tray, it is recommended that you set the paper direction to .
• Letterhead paper must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see page 62 "Loading
Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper".
• You can load envelopes into the bypass tray. Envelopes must be loaded in a specific orientation.
For details, see page 64 "Loading Envelopes".

61
2. Loading Paper

Loading Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided


Paper
Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper (for example, letterhead paper, punched paper, or
copied paper) might not print correctly, depending on how the paper is placed.
Settings using the control panel
Set [Letterhead Setting] to [Auto Detect] or [On (Always)], and then place the paper as shown in
the table below. For details about [Letterhead Setting], see "Machine Modes", Operating
Instructions.
Paper orientation
The meanings of the icons are as follows:

Icon Meaning

Place or load paper printed side face up.

Place or load paper printed side face down.

Print side Trays 1–4 Bypass tray

One-sided

Two-sided

• To print on letterhead paper when [Letterhead Setting] is set to [Auto Detect], you must specify
[Letterhead] for the paper type in the printer driver's settings.

62
Loading Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper

• If a print job is changed partway through printing from one-sided to two-sided printing, one-sided
output after the first copy may be printed facing a different direction. To ensure all paper is output
facing the same direction, specify different input trays for one-sided and two-sided printing. Note
also that two-sided printing must be disabled for the tray specified for one-sided printing.
• For details about how to make two-sided prints, see "Printing on Both Sides of a Page", Operating
Instructions.

63
2. Loading Paper

Loading Envelopes
This section explains various details about and recommendations concerning envelopes.

Specifications of Envelopes

• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.

• Do not use window envelopes.


• Envelopes, especially those with glue on their flaps, may stick together. Fan the envelopes to
separate them before loading. If the envelopes still stick together, load them one by one. For the
envelope types that can be used with this printer, see page 48 "Paper Size Specifications" and
page 51 "Paper Type Specifications".
• Misfeeds might occur depending on the length and shape of the flaps.
• You can print with a standard envelope size setting only when printing on envelopes with their flaps
closed.
• Before loading envelopes, press down on them to remove any air from inside, flattening out all four
edges. If they are bent or curled, flattening their leading edges (the edge going into the printer) by
running a pencil or ruler across them.

CHU024

Loading orientation for envelopes


The method for loading envelopes varies depending on the orientation of the envelopes. Be sure to
load envelopes with the correct orientation.

64
Loading Envelopes

Orientation Paper tray 2-5 Bypass tray

Envelopes

• Flaps: closed
• Flaps: closed • Bottom side of envelopes:
• Bottom side of envelopes: toward the right of the
toward the right of the printer
printer • Side to be printed: face up
• Side to be printed: face
down

When loading envelopes, use both the control panel and the printer driver to select "Envelope" for
the paper type and specify the thickness of the envelopes. For details, see page 66 "Printing on
Envelopes with Windows (PCL 6/PostScript 3)", page 66 "Printing on Envelopes with Windows
(PCL 5e)", and page 67 "Printing on Envelopes with OS X".
Recommended envelopes
For details about recommended envelopes, contact your local dealer.
The size of envelopes that you can load depends on the tray in which you load them. For details,
see page 48 "Paper Size Specifications".

• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.


• The duplex function cannot be used with envelopes.
• Straighten any curls within 2 mm (0.1 inch) upward and 0 mm (0 inches) downward on the tray
before loading.
• To achieve better output quality, it is recommended that you set the right, left, top, and bottom print
margin to at least 15 mm (0.6 inches) each.
• The output quality on envelopes may be uneven if parts of an envelope have differing thicknesses.
Print one or two envelopes to check the print quality.
• When printing onto envelopes, the print speed is slower than usual.
• Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled.
• Check that the envelopes are not damp.
• High temperature and high humidity conditions can reduce print quality and cause envelopes to
become creased.

65
2. Loading Paper

• Depending on the environment, printing on envelopes may wrinkle them even if they are the
recommended envelopes.
• Certain types of envelopes might be output creased, dirtied, or misprinted. If you are printing a
solid color on an envelope, lines may appear where the overlapped edges of the envelope make it
thicker.

Printing on Envelopes with Windows (PCL 6/PostScript 3)

1. After creating a document, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box in the document's
native application.
2. Click the [Detailed Settings] tab.
3. In the "Menu:" box, click the [Basic] icon, and then configure the following settings:

• Document Size:
Select the envelope size.

4. In the "Menu:" box, click the [Paper] icon, and then configure the following settings:

• Input Tray:
Select the paper tray where the envelopes are loaded.
• Paper Type:
Select [Envelope].

Change any other print settings as necessary. For details, see the printer driver's Help.

5. Click [OK].
6. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

• Configure the paper settings appropriately using both the printer driver and the control panel. For
details about settings using the control panel, see page 70 "Configuring Envelope Settings Using
the Control Panel".
• Envelopes must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see page 64 "Loading Envelopes".

Printing on Envelopes with Windows (PCL 5e)

1. After creating a document, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box in the document's
native application.

66
Loading Envelopes

2. Click the [Paper] tab, and then configure the following settings:

• Input Tray:
Select the paper tray where the envelopes are loaded.
• Document Size:
Select the envelope size.
• Type:
Select [Envelope].

Change any other print settings as necessary. For details, see the printer driver's Help.

3. Click [OK].
4. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.

• Configure the paper settings appropriately using both the printer driver and the control panel. For
details about settings using the control panel, see page 70 "Configuring Envelope Settings Using
the Control Panel".
• Envelopes must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see page 64 "Loading Envelopes".

Printing on Envelopes with OS X

1. After creating a document, open the printing preferences screen in the document's native
application.
2. Configure the following settings:

• Two-Sided:
Select [Off].
• Paper Size:
Select the envelope size.
• Orientation:
Select the orientation of the envelope.

3. Select [Paper Feed] in the pop-up menu.


4. Select the paper tray where the envelopes are loaded.
5. Select [Printer Features] in the pop-up menu.

67
2. Loading Paper

6. Select [Paper] in the "Feature Sets:" menu to configure the following settings:

• Paper Type:
Select [Envelope].

7. Change any other print settings as necessary.


8. Start printing from the application's printing preferences screen.

• Configure the paper settings appropriately using both the printer driver and the control panel. For
details about settings using the control panel, see page 70 "Configuring Envelope Settings Using
the Control Panel".
• Envelopes must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see page 64 "Loading Envelopes".

68
Paper Settings

Paper Settings
This section explains how to specify paper size and type using the control panel.

• When [Tray Setting Priority] is set to [Machine Setting(s)], the paper settings configured using the
printer's control panel have priority over the settings specified in the printer driver or commands.
For details, see "Machine Modes", Operating Instructions.

Specifying a Paper Size

• To use the paper size and feed direction other than those indicated on the paper size dial, set the
dial to " ", and set the paper size using the control panel.
• To use custom size paper, be sure to specify the paper size using the control panel and the printer
driver.
• The printer cannot print on custom size paper if the application does not support custom size paper.

Specifying standard size paper

Press the [Menu] key, and then select the setting items using the [ ] or [ ] key.

1. Select [Paper Input] Press [OK]


2. Select [Paper Size: (tray name)] Press [OK]
3. Select the size of the paper set in the specified tray Press [OK]

• For details about the available paper size, see page 48 "Paper Size Specifications".

Specifying custom size paper

Press the [Menu] key, and then select the setting items using the [ ] or [ ] key.

1. Select [Paper Input] Press [OK]


2. Select [Paper Size: (tray name)] Press [OK]
3. Select [Custom Size] Press [OK]
4. Enter the horizontal value Press [OK]
5. Enter the vertical value Press [OK]

69
2. Loading Paper

• For details about the available paper size, see page 48 "Paper Size Specifications".

Specifying a Paper Type

You can improve printer performance by selecting the optimum paper type for the tray.
Press the [Menu] key, and then select the setting items using the [ ] or [ ] key.

1. Select [Paper Input] Press [OK]


2. Select [Paper Type: (tray name)] Press [OK]
3. Select the type of the paper set in the specified tray Press [OK]
The setting is complete when specifying the following types of paper:
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3,
Special Paper 1, Special Paper 2, Special Paper 3
4. If you have selected [Recycled Paper], [Color Paper], [Letterhead], [Label Paper],
[Envelope], or [Preprinted Paper] for the paper type, press [Escape]
5. Select [Maintenance] Press [OK]
6. Select [General Settings] Press [OK]
7. Select the paper thickness setting for the specified paper type Press [OK]
8. Select the tray where the specified type of paper is loaded [OK]
If you selected [Letterhead Setting], [Label Paper Setting], or [Envelope Setting] in Step 8, you can
specify the paper thickness for each tray separately. For other paper types, the specified paper
thickness is applied to all trays.
9. Select the paper thickness Press [OK]

• For details about the available paper type, see page 51 "Paper Type Specifications".

Configuring Envelope Settings Using the Control Panel

When printing on envelopes, load envelopes in bypass tray or Trays 2-5, and then follow the procedure
below to specify envelope type and thickness.
Press the [Menu] key, and then select the setting items using the [ ] or [ ] key.

1. Select [Paper Input] Press [OK]


2. Select [Paper Size: (tray name)] Press [OK]
3. Select the envelope type Press [OK]

70
Paper Settings

4. Select [Paper Type: (tray name)] Press [OK]


5. Select [Envelope] Press [OK]
6. Press [Escape]
7. Select [Maintenance] Press [OK]
8. Select [General Settings] Press [OK]
9. Select [Envelope Setting] Press [OK]
10. Select the source tray for which you want to change the paper thickness Press [OK]
11. Select the paper thickness Press [OK]

• For details about the envelope types that can be loaded in each tray, see page page 48 "Paper
Size Specifications" and page 51 "Paper Type Specifications".
• For details about how to load envelopes, see page 64 "Loading Envelopes".
• Configure the paper settings appropriately using both the printer driver and the control panel. For
details about paper settings using the printer driver, see page 66 "Printing on Envelopes with
Windows (PCL 6/PostScript 3)", page 66 "Printing on Envelopes with Windows (PCL 5e)",
page 67 "Printing on Envelopes with OS X".

71
2. Loading Paper

72
3. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions to common problems and it also explains how to correct unwanted print
results.

When a Panel Tone Beeps


The following table describes various beep patterns that the printer produces to alert users about printer
conditions and the meaning of each beep pattern.

Beep pattern Meaning Causes

Single short beep Panel/screen input A control panel key was pressed.
accepted.

Two long beeps Printer has warmed up. When the power is turned on or the
printer exits Sleep mode, the printer
has fully warmed up and is ready for
use.

Five long beeps repeated Soft alert An error message appears on the
four times. control panel if there is no tray for the
selected paper size or the tray is
empty.

Five short beeps repeated Strong alert The printer requires user attention
five times. because paper has jammed, the toner
needs replenishing, or other problems
have occurred.

• Beep alerts cannot be muted. If the printer's covers are opened and closed repeatedly within a
short space of time during an alert indicating a paper jam or insufficient toner, a beep alert might
continue, even after normal status has resumed.
• You can enable or disable beep alerts. For details, see "General Settings", Operating Instructions.

73
3. Troubleshooting

When Checking the Indicator Lamps, Status


Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel
Indicators

This section describes the indicators displayed when the printer requires the user to remove misfed
paper, to add paper, or to perform other procedures.

Indicator Status

: Paper Misfeed indicator Appears when a paper misfeed occurs.


For details about removing jammed paper, see page 109
"Removing Jammed Paper".

: Load Paper indicator Appears when paper runs out.


For details about loading paper, see page 47 "Loading Paper".

: Add Toner indicator Appears when toner runs out.


For details about adding toner, see page 32 "Replacing the Print
Cartridge".

: Service Call indicator Appears when the printer is malfunctioning or requires


maintenance.

: Cover Open indicator Appears when one or more covers of the printer are open.

74
If USB Connection Fails

If USB Connection Fails


Problem Causes Solutions

The printer is not The USB cable is not Disconnect the USB cable, turn off the
automatically recognized. connected properly. printer, and then turn it on again.
When the printer has fully booted up,
reconnect the USB cable.

Windows has already Check whether or not the Open Windows' Device Manager,
configured the USB settings. computer has identified the and then, under [Universal Serial Bus
printer as an unsupported controllers], remove any conflicting
device. devices. A [!] or [?] icon is displayed
for conflicting devices. Take care not to
accidentally remove required devices.
For details, see Windows Help.

75
3. Troubleshooting

When Messages Are Displayed


This section describes the main messages that appear on the display panel and printed error logs and
reports. If other messages appear, follow their instructions.

Status Messages

Message Status

"Energy Saver Mode" The printer is in Energy Saver mode. Press any key to recover to the
normal mode.

"Hex Dump Mode" In Hex Dump mode, the printer receives data in a hexadecimal format.
Turn off the printer after printing, and then turn it on again.

"Job Suspended" All jobs are suspended. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to
resume the jobs.

"Offline" The printer is offline and cannot print.

"Please wait..." This message may appear for a few seconds. It means the printer is
initializing, replenishing toner, or performing maintenance operations.
Wait a while.

"Printing..." The printer is printing. Wait a while.

"Printing Suspended" Printing is suspended. To resume printing, press the [Suspend/Resume]


key.

"Ready" This is the default ready message. The printer is ready for use. No
action is required.

"Resetting Job" The printer is resetting the print job. Wait a while.

"Setting change..." The printer is applying the changes made to its settings. Wait a while.

"The cooling fan is active." The fan will emit noise, but this is normal and the machine will be
operable while the fan is running. The amount of paper that can be
printed and the total operation time until the fan starts running depends
on the temperature of the location at which the machine is installed.

"Updating Certificate..." The printer is updating the @Remote certificate. Turn the power off, and
then turn it on again.

"Waiting for print data..." The printer is waiting for the next data to print. Wait a while.

76
When Messages Are Displayed

Alert Messages (Displayed on the Control Panel)

Message Cause Solution

" (A1) Remove misfeed in Open the front cover and remove For details, see page 109
Trays. Opn & cls Frt. Cov." the jammed paper from the paper "Removing Jammed Paper".
feed path.

" (A2) Remove misfeed & Remove the jammed paper from For details, see page 109
reset ppr in Byps correctly " the bypass tray. To reset the error, "Removing Jammed Paper".
open the front cover and then
close it.

" (B) Open Top Cover and Open the top cover and remove For details, see page 109
remove misfeed." the jammed paper from the "Removing Jammed Paper".
internal paper feed path.

" (B) (C) Open Rear Open the front cover and remove For details, see page 109
Cover and remove any jammed paper from the "Removing Jammed Paper".
misfeed." internal paper feed path.

" (Y1) Remove misfeed in Open Tray 2 and remove the For details, see page 109
Tray 2. Opn & cls Frt. Cov."" jammed paper. To reset the error, "Removing Jammed Paper".
open the front cover and then
close it.

" (Y2) Remove misfeed in Open Tray 3 and remove the For details, see page 109
Tray 3. Opn & cls Frt. Cov." jammed paper. To reset the error, "Removing Jammed Paper".
open the front cover and then
close it.

" (Y3) Remove misfeed in Open Tray 4 and remove the For details, see page 109
Tray 4. Opn & cls Frt. Cov." jammed paper. To reset the error, "Removing Jammed Paper".
open the front cover and then
close it.

" (Y4) Remove misfeed in Open Tray 5 and remove the For details, see page 109
Tray 5. Opn & cls Frt. Cov." jammed paper. To reset the error, "Removing Jammed Paper".
open the front cover and then
close it.

" (Z) Pull out Tray 1 & opn Open Tray 1 and remove the For details, see page 109
cover, remove misfeed." jammed paper. To reset the error, "Removing Jammed Paper".
open the front cover and then
close it.

77
3. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

" Toner is almost empty." The print cartridge is almost For details, see page 32
empty. "Replacing the Print Cartridge".

" Add toner. Replace The toner has run out. Replace the For details, see page 32
Toner Cartridge." print cartridge. "Replacing the Print Cartridge".

"@Remote Cert. update Updating the @Remote certificate Turn the printer off, and then turn it
failed" failed. on again. If the problem persists,
contact your sales or service
representative.

"Cannot The proxy user name or password Check the proxy server settings,
connect=>Comm.Serv. is incorrect. and then change the user name
Check proxy user/ and/or password if they are
password." incorrect.

"Cannot connect with DHCP An IP address cannot be obtained Contact your network
server.(101/201)" from the DHCP server. administrator.

"Cannot print." The printer cannot print the sent Check that the file you want to
data. print is a supported file type.
Check the misfeeds and ask your
network administrator for help.

"Change (Tray name) to the The size of the paper in the tray Select a tray containing paper
following settings:" does not match the paper size that is the same size as the
specified in the printer driver. specified paper size.

"Check network settings. The IP address setting is incorrect. Check the IP address, subnet
(103/203)" mask, and gateway address.

"Classification Code Error" A classification code is not Enter a classification code using
specified for the print job. the printer properties and print the
document again.

"Connect The printer cannot detect the Check that the board is supported
failed:WirelessCard Turn wireless LAN interface board. or installed correctly.
power off, check card."

"Cover Open. Please close A cover of the printer is open. Close the cover as indicated on
the indicated cover." the control panel.

78
When Messages Are Displayed

Message Cause Solution

"Duplex mode is in off The duplex mode for the indicated You can use one-sided printing
position for (tray name)" tray is not available. only. Press [Change] to change
the tray's settings, press [JobReset]
to reset the job, or press [Form
Feed] to force printing.

"Ethernet Board Error" An error on the Ethernet is Turn the printer off, and then turn it
detected. on again. If the problem persists,
contact your sales or service
representative.

"Exceeded max. No. of While printing a Sample Print, Delete unneeded files stored in
files." Locked Print, Hold Print, or Stored the printer.
Print file, the maximum file
capacity was exceeded.

"Exceeded max. No. of While printing a Sample Print, • Delete unneeded files stored
pages." Locked Print, Hold Print, or Stored in the printer.
Print file, the maximum page • Reduce the number of pages
capacity was exceeded. to print.

"Exceeded max. print size. The specified paper size exceeds Press [Form Feed] to force printing
Press [FormFeed] or the maximum size supported by or [JobReset] to cancel printing.
[JobReset]." this printer.

"Exceeded max. print size. The specified paper size exceeds Press [JobReset] to cancel printing.
Press [JobReset]." the maximum size supported by
this printer.

"Failed to connect to server The printer cannot communicate Check the connection to the
for Remote Diagnostics." with Remote Communication Remote Server Gate.
Gate.

"Independent-supply toner" Independent-supply toner is set. Use the toner recommended for
this printer.

"IPv6 Address already exists The same IPv6 address is already Contact your network
Link-local used. administrator.
Address(109/209)"

"IPv6 Address already exists The same IPv6 address is already Contact your network
Stateless used. administrator.
Address(109/209)"

79
3. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"IPv6 Address already exists The same IPv6 address is already Contact your network
Manual Config. used. administrator.
Address(109/209)"

"Load paper in (tray name)" There is no paper in the specified Load the specified paper in the
tray. tray, press [JobReset] to reset the
job.

"No privileges to use funct." The logged in user does not have For details about how to set
the privileges to register programs permissions, see "Configuring
or change the paper tray settings. Administrator Authentication",
Security Guide.

"Par. I/F board has a The printer's self-diagnostic test Replace the IEEE 1284 board that
problem." failed due to a loopback error. caused the error.

"Printer Font Error." There are problems with the Turn the printer off, and then turn it
printer's font file. on again.
If the problem persists, contact
your sales or service
representative.

"Problem with Hard Disk The printer cannot detect the hard Check that the hard disk installed
Please call service." disk. correctly. If the problem persists,
contact your sales or service
representative.

"Problem:Wireless card The printer cannot detect a Check that the wireless LAN
Please call service." wireless LAN interface board. interface board installed correctly.
If the problem persists, contact
your sales or service
representative.

"Replacmnt Requrd Maint. You need to replace the Contact your sales or service
Kit" maintenance kit. representative.

"Replcmnt Requrd Drum You need to replace the drum Contact your sales or service
Unit" unit. representative.

"Repl Requrd Soon Maint. You will need to replace the Contact your sales or service
Kit" maintenance kit soon. representative to obtain a new
unit.

80
When Messages Are Displayed

Message Cause Solution

"Rplcmnt Rqrd Soon:Drum You will need to replace the drum Contact your sales or service
Unit" unit soon. representative to obtain a new
unit.

"SD Card Authentication from the SD card Turn the printer off, and then turn it
authenticatn.failed Error failed. on again. If the problem persists,
recurs, call service." contact your sales or service
representative.

"Set the Drum Unit The drum unit may not be installed Contact your sales or service
correctly." correctly. representative.

"Set the Maintenance Kit The fusing unit may have not been Contact your sales or service
correctly." installed correctly. representative.

"Set the Toner Cartridge The print cartridge may have not Turn the printer off, and install the
correctly." been installed correctly. print cartridge again.

"Standard Tray is full. The standard tray is full. Remove the paper.
Remove the paper."

"Supply order has failed." The automatic supply order failed. The message indicates the printer
tried to order the supplies.

"This NetBIOS name is The NetBIOS name specified for Contact your network
already in use.(108/208)" the printer is already used by administrator.
another device on the network.

"The same IPv4 Address The IPv4 address specified for the Contact your network
already exists.(102/202)" printer is already used by another administrator.
device on the network.

"The selected job has This message might appear if you Press Exit on the message screen.
already been printed or print or delete a job from Web
deleted." Image Monitor.

"USB has a problem. Please The printer has detected a USB Turn the printer off, and then turn it
call service." board failure. on again. If the problem persists,
contact your sales or service
representative.

"Values set for IPv6/ The IPv6 address or gateway Check the network settings.
Gateway addresses are address is invalid.
invalid.(110/210)"

81
3. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Waste Toner almost full" The waste toner bottle must be Prepare a new waste toner bottle.
replaced when the waste toner is
full.

"Waste Toner full" The waste toner is full. Replace the waste toner bottle.
For details, see page 37
"Replacing the Waste Toner
Bottle".

"WPA Auth. incomplete. WPA authentication could not be Contact your network
(211)" completed. administrator.

Alert Messages (Printed on Error Logs and Reports)

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that are printed on
the error logs or reports.

Message Cause Solution

"84: Error" There is no work area available Select [Font Priority] for
for image processing. [Memory Usage] in [System].
Decrease the number of files
sent to the printer.

"85: Error" The specified graphics library is Check that the data is valid.
unavailable.

"86: Error" Parameters of the control code Check the print settings.
are invalid.

"91: Error" Printing was canceled by the Check that the data is valid.
auto job cancel function due to
a command error.

"92: Error" Printing was canceled because Perform the print operation
the [Job Reset] key or the again as necessary.
[Suspend/Resume] key was
pressed on the printer's control
panel.

82
When Messages Are Displayed

Message Cause Solution

"Address book is in use." The printer currently cannot Wait a while, and then retry the
perform authentication because operation.
the Address Book is being used
by another function.

"Auto-user prog. failed." Automatic registration of For details about the automatic
information for LDAP registration of user information,
Authentication or Windows see "Auto Registration to the
Authentication failed because Address Book", Security Guide.
the Address Book is full.

"Cannot print." You have no privileges to print Contact the owner of the
the PDF file you want to print. document.

"Classification Code Error" The classification code is not Select [Optional] for the
specified with the printer driver. classification code. For details
about how to specify
classification code settings, see
"Registering Classification
Codes", Operating Instructions.

"Collate cancelled." Collate was canceled. Turn the printer off, and then
turn it on again. If the message
appears again, contact your
service representative.

"Collate: Page max." The amount of free memory is Reduce the number of pages to
insufficient to perform collating. be printed.

"Command Error." An RPCS command error Check that the communication


occurred. between a device and the
printer is working correctly.

"Compressed Data Error" The printer detected corrupt Check that the program you
compressed data. used to compress the data is
functioning correctly.

"Duplex cancelled." Duplex printing was canceled. Change the setting for "Duplex
Tray" in [Paper Input] to enable
duplex printing for the paper
tray.

"Error occured. Prntd/Cncld." An error occurred during Check the print settings.
printing, but it was ignored.

83
3. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Excd Prt Vol Use max count." Printing was canceled because Contact your user administrator.
the print maximum number was
reached.

"Excd Prt Vol Use max count." Maximum number of user codes Delete unnecessary user codes.
that can be registered has been
reached.

"File System Error." PDF direct printing could not be Turn the printer off, and then
performed because the file turn it on again. If the message
system could not be obtained. appears again, contact your
service representative.

"File System Full." The PDF file cannot be printed Delete all unnecessary files from
because the capacity of the file the hard disk, or decrease the
system is full. file size sent to the printer.

"Function use denied." The print job was cancelled Enter the user name or user
because of one of the following: code with privileges to print, or
• The user does not have enter the correct password for
privileges to print. the user name.

• No privileges to print are


assigned to the entered
user name or user code, or
a wrong password was
specified for the user
name.

"HDD is full." The hard disk became full while Reduce the data size of the
printing a Sample Print, Locked Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, Hold Print, or Stored Print Print, or Stored Print file.
file. Delete unnecessary files When printing with the
stored in the printer. PostScript 3 printer driver, the
hard disk capacity for fonts and
forms has been exceeded.
Delete unnecessary forms or
fonts registered to the printer.

"HDD not installed." The printer received a stored Contact your sales or service
job file but no hard disk is representative.
installed.

84
When Messages Are Displayed

Message Cause Solution

"I/O buffer overflow." An input buffer overflow • Select [Font Priority] for
occurred. [Memory Usage] in
[System].
• In [I/O Buffer] under the
[Host Interface] menu, set
the maximum buffer size to
a larger value.
• Reduce the number of files
being sent to the printer.

"Insufficient Memory." A memory allocation error PCL 6


occurred. Select a lower resolution
on the printer driver. For
details about how to
change the resolution
setting, see the printer
driver Help. On the printer
driver's [Detailed Settings]
tab, click [Print Quality] in
"Menu:", and then select
[Raster] in the "Vector/
Raster:" list. In some cases,
it will take a long time to
complete a print job.
PCL 5e, PostScript 3
Select a lower resolution
on the printer driver. For
details about how to
change the resolution
setting, see the printer
driver Help.

"No response from server." A timeout occurred while the Check the status of the server.
printer was connecting to the
server for LDAP Authentication
or Windows Authentication.

"Paper Size Error" Printing was canceled because Check the available paper size.
the specified paper size cannot
be fed from the tray.

85
3. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution

"Paper Type Error" The printer does not recognize Check that the printer is
the paper type specified using connected to the network
the printer driver. correctly and bidirectional
communication is enabled. If the
problem persists, check the user
paper type settings of the
printer.

"Password mismatch." A wrong password was entered Check the password.


when an encrypted PDF file was
printed.

"PDF File Error." A syntax error, etc., occurred. Check that the PDF file is valid.

"Print overrun." Printing images was aborted. Select a lower resolution on the
printer driver. For details about
how to change the resolution
setting, see the printer driver
Help.

"Receiving data failed." Data reception was aborted. Resend the data.

"Sending data failed." The printer received a command Check that the computer is
to stop a transmission from the working correctly.
printer driver.

"User auth. already exists." The same account name is Contact your user administrator.
already used in the newly
selected domain or server in an
environment using LDAP
Authentication or Integration
Server Authentication.

86
When You Cannot Print

When You Cannot Print


Problem Cause Solution

Printing does not start. The power is off. For details about how to turn on
the main power switch, see
page 28 "Turning On/Off the
Power".

Printing does not start. The cause is displayed on the Check the error message or
screen of the control panel. warning status on the display
panel, and then take the
required action. For details
about solutions, see page 76
"When Messages Are
Displayed".

Printing does not start. The interface cable is not For details about how to
connected correctly. connect interface cables
correctly, see "Connecting the
Printer", Operating Instructions.

Printing does not start. The correct interface cable is The type of interface cable to
not being used. use depends on the computer.
Be sure to use the correct one. If
the cable is damaged or worn,
replace it. For details about
interface cable, see
"Connecting the Printer",
Operating Instructions.

Printing does not start. The interface cable was Connect the interface cable
connected after the printer was before turning on the main
switched on. power switch.

87
3. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Printing does not start. If the printer is using wireless Check the radio signal status of
LAN, failure to print might result the wireless LAN in [System
from a weak wireless signal. Settings]. If the signal quality is
not satisfactory, move the
printer to a location where
radio waves can pass or
remove objects that might cause
interference.
You can check the signal status
only when wireless LAN is used
in infrastructure mode. For
details about the radio signal
status of the wireless LAN, see
"Host Interface", Operating
Instructions.

Printing does not start. If the printer is using wireless Turn off the microwave oven,
LAN, when there is a mobile phone, industrial
microwave oven, mobile phone, machine, scientific instrument, or
industrial machine, scientific medical instrument which uses
instrument, or medical the same frequency range and
instrument which uses the same then try printing again. If
frequency range near the printing is successful, move the
device, radio waves may be device to a location where it
interfering with the wireless does not interfere.
LAN's communication.

Printing does not start. If the printer is using wireless Check that the SSID is correctly
LAN, SSID settings may be set using the printer's display
incorrect. panel. For details about SSID
Setting, see "Connecting to the
Wireless LAN Interface",
Operating Instructions.

88
When You Cannot Print

Problem Cause Solution

Printing does not start. If the printer is using wireless Check the access point settings
LAN, the receiver's MAC when using the infrastructure
address may be preventing mode. Depending on the access
communication with the access point, client access may be
point. filtered by MAC address. Also,
check that there are no
transmission problems between
the access point and wired
clients, and between the access
point and wireless clients.

Printing does not start. The Login User Name, Login Check the Login User Name,
Password, or Driver Encryption Login Password, and Driver
Key is incorrect. Encryption Key.

Printing does not start. Advanced encryption has been Check the settings of the
set using the Extended Security Extended Security function. For
function. details about Extended Security
function settings, see
"Specifying the Extended
Security Functions", Security
Guide.

[List / Test Print] is disabled. A mechanical error might have Contact your service
occurred. representative.

Printing does not start when The correct Communication • Turn the main power switch
using the extended wireless Mode is not set. off and then back on
LAN in Ad-hoc Mode. again. For details about
how to turn on/off the
main power switch, see
page 28 "Turning On/Off
the Power".
• Change [Communication
Mode] in [System Settings]
to [802.11 Ad-hoc
Mode], and then select
[Off] for [Security
Method]. For details about
Communication Mode, see
"Host Interface",
Operating Instructions.

89
3. Troubleshooting

If printing does not start, contact your service representative.

When the Data In Indicator Does Not Light Up or Flash

When the Data In indicator does not light up or flash after a print job starts, data is not being sent to the
printer.
When the printer is connected to the computer using the interface cable
Check that the print port setting is correct. When connecting the printer to the computer using a
parallel interface, connect using LPT1 or LPT2.

1. Open the printer properties dialog box, and then click the [Ports] tab.
For details about displaying the printer properties dialog box, see "Displaying the Printer
Driver Properties with Windows", Operating Instructions.
2. In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, check that the correct port is selected.
Network connection
For details about the network connection, contact your administrator.

90
Other Printing Problems

Other Printing Problems


This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for problems that can occur when a print
job is performed from a computer.

When You Cannot Print Properly

Problem Cause Solution

The printed image is smudged. Settings for thick paper have not PCL 5e
been configured when printing On the printer driver's
on thick paper in the bypass [Paper] tab, select [Bypass
tray. Tray] in the "Input Tray:"
list. Then in the "Type:" list,
select a proper paper
type.
PCL 6/PostScript 3
On the printer driver's
[Detailed Settings] tab,
click [Paper] in "Menu:",
and then select [Bypass
Tray] in the "Input Tray:"
list. Then in the "Paper
Type:" list, select a proper
paper type.

Printed images contain blots or The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored
are patchy. in the recommended
temperature and humidity
conditions. For details about the
proper way to store paper, see
page 53 "Paper Precautions".

Printed images contain blots or The printer is not on a level The printer must be placed on a
are patchy. surface. stable and level surface. Check
the printer environment and
select an appropriate location.
For details about the printer's
environment, see "Install
Location", Operating
Instructions.

91
3. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Printed images contain blots or The paper is creased, curled, or Smooth out the wrinkles or
are patchy. has blemishes. replace the paper. For details
about paper, see page 53
"Paper Precautions".

The printed image is faded over The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored
the entire page. in the recommended
temperature and humidity
conditions. For details about the
proper way to store paper, see
page 53 "Paper Precautions".

The printed image is faded over The paper is unsuitable. Printing Use recommended paper. For
the entire page. on coarse or treated paper details about recommended
might result in faint print image. paper, see page 48 "Paper
Size Specifications" and
page 51 "Paper Type
Specifications".

The printed image is faded over If [On] is selected in the "Toner PCL 6/PostScript 3
the entire page. Saving:" list in the printer driver On the printer driver's
settings, the entire page will be [Detailed Settings] tab,
faded when printed. click [Print Quality] in
"Menu:", and then select
[Off] in the "Toner Saving".

Images smudge when rubbed. The specified paper type and PCL 5e
(Toner is not fixed.) the paper that is actually loaded On the printer driver's
might be different. For example, [Paper] tab, select a
thick paper might be loaded but proper paper type in the
not specified as the paper type. [Type:] box.
PCL 6/PostScript 3
On the printer driver's
[Detailed Settings] tab,
click [Paper] in "Menu:",
and then select a proper
paper type in the "Paper
Type:" list.

92
Other Printing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

The printed image is different Printing will be performed by PCL 6


from the image on the the printer's graphic processing On the printer driver's
computer's display. function. [Detailed Settings] tab,
click [Print Quality] in
"Menu:", and then select
[Raster] in the "Vector/
Raster:" list.

The image is too dark or too The paper type settings are not Check that the paper loaded on
light. configured correctly. the paper tray or bypass tray
matches the paper type set on
the display panel. For details
about paper type settings, see
page 69 "Paper Settings".

The image is too dark or too The paper is loaded reverse Before printing on special
light. side up. Printing on non-print paper, check its surface
surfaces reduces print quality carefully. For details about
and can damage the printer's special paper, see page 53
internal components. "Paper Precautions".

Image is dirty. Use of non-recommended toner Use genuine manufacturer


can result in a loss of print toner. Contact your service
quality and other problems. representative.

Printed graphics do not match If the printer driver is configured If you want to print accurately,
graphics on the screen. to use the graphics command, set the printer driver to print
the graphics command from the without using the graphics
printer is used to print. command. For details about
settings for printer driver, see the
printer driver Help.

Print result differs from the A non-Windows operating Check that the application
display. system is being used. supports the printer driver.

93
3. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Print result differs from the The printer is not selected for Use the printer driver of the
display. printing. printer and check that the printer
is the specified printer. For
details about how to open the
printer driver settings screen,
see "Displaying the Printing
Preferences dialog box from the
[Start] menu", Operating
Instructions.

Print result differs from the Data transmission failed or was Check whether there is failed or
display. canceled during printing. canceled data remaining. For
details about how to identify the
cause of the error, see
"Checking Error Logs",
Operating Instructions.

Characters differ from the The loaded paper is unsuitable. Printing on recommended paper
display. produces better resolution. For
details about recommended
paper, see page 48 "Paper
Size Specifications" and
page 51 "Paper Type
Specifications".

Image position differs from the The page layout settings are not Check the page layout settings
display. configured correctly. configured using the
application. For details about
page layout settings, see the
application's Help.

94
Other Printing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Image position differs from the The page layout settings are not PCL 5e
display. configured correctly. On the printer driver's
[Paper] tab, select [Print
On] box, and then select
the desired size.
PCL 6 / PostScript 3
On the printer driver's
[Detailed Settings] tab,
click [Basic] in "Menu:",
and then select the desired
size in the "Print On:" list.

Lines of garbled or unwanted An incorrect printer language Select the correct printer driver,
alphanumeric characters might have been selected. and then print the file again.
appear.

Images are cut off, or excess is You may be using paper smaller Use the same size paper as that
printed. than the size selected in the selected in the application. If
application. you cannot load paper of the
correct size, use the reduction
function to reduce the image,
and then print. For details about
the reduction function, see the
printer driver Help.

Photo images are grainy. Some applications print at a Use the application's or printer
lower resolution. driver's settings to specify a
higher resolution. For details
about printer driver's settings,
see the printer driver Help.

A solid line is printed as a Dither patterns do not match. PostScript 3


dashed line or appears blurred. Change the dithering
settings on the printer
driver. For details about
the dithering settings, see
the printer driver Help.

95
3. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Fine lines are fuzzy with Super fine lines have been PostScript 3
inconsistent thickness or color, specified in the application. Change the dithering
or do not appear. settings on the printer
driver. For details about
the dithering settings, see
the printer driver Help.
If the problem continues
after you change the
dithering settings, use the
settings of the application
in which the image was
created to change the
color and thickness of the
lines.

Images appear only partially The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored
colored. in the recommended
temperature and humidity
conditions. For details about the
proper way to store paper, see
page 53 "Paper Precautions".

When printing is performed Even if the USB device server Specify a longer period for
using the USB device server, a has received the data [I/O Timeout] using the printer's
print job cannot be completed successfully, the printer cannot control panel.
properly. complete the print job properly
because the timeout period set
on the printer is too short.

The back sides of prints are The fixing ratio of toner is too • Specify a paper thickness
partially dirty. low. This problem may occur that is greater than the one
when very dense images such currently set in paper type
as halftone images are printed. settings. If specifying
thicker paper does not
resolve the problem,
specify a paper thickness
that is further greater than
the one currently used.
• If the problem persists,
print in Silent mode.

96
Other Printing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Images smudge when rubbed. The fixing ratio of toner is too • Specify a paper thickness
(Toner is not fixed.) low. This problem may occur that is greater than the one
when very dense images such currently set in paper type
as halftone images are printed. settings. If specifying
thicker paper does not
resolve the problem,
specify a paper thickness
that is further greater than
the one currently used.
• If the problem persists,
print in Silent mode.

Prints are smeared with toner. The fixing ratio of toner is too • Specify a paper thickness
low. This problem may occur that is greater than the one
when very dense images such currently set in paper type
as halftone images are printed. settings. If specifying
thicker paper does not
resolve the problem,
specify a paper thickness
that is further greater than
the one currently used.
• If the problem persists,
print in Silent mode.

Image is too light. The drum has condensation on If this problem occurs, contact
it. your service representative.

Image is out of focus. The drum has condensation on If this problem occurs, contact
it. your service representative.

97
3. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Toner is smudged. The toner was smudged by • Use paper that has been
moisture in the paper. stored where temperature
and humidity conditions
meet the limitations we
recommend. For details
about the paper storage
conditions we recommend,
see page 53 "Paper
Precautions".
• If the problem persists,
contact your service
representative.

Paper Misfeeds Occur Frequently

Problem Cause Solution

Paper is not fed from the When you are using Windows, PCL 5e
selected tray. printer driver settings override On the printer driver's
those settings using the display [Paper] tab, select the
panel. desired input tray in the
"Input Tray:" list.
PCL 6/PostScript 3
On the printer driver's
[Detailed Settings] tab,
click [Paper] in "Menu:",
and then select the desired
input tray in the "Input
Tray:" list.

Images are printed at a slant. The tray's side fences might not Check that the side fences are
be locked. locked. For details about how to
set the side fences, see page 56
"Loading Paper into Paper
Trays" or page 60 "Loading
Paper into the Bypass Tray".

98
Other Printing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Images are printed at a slant. The paper is feeding in at a Load the paper correctly. For
slant. details about loading paper,
see page 56 "Loading Paper
into Paper Trays" or page 60
"Loading Paper into the Bypass
Tray".

Misfeeds occur frequently. The number of sheets loaded Load paper only as high as the
exceeds the capacity of the upper limit markings on the side
printer. fences of the paper tray, or the
markings on the paper guides of
the bypass tray.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper tray's side fences are Push the side fences lightly, and
set too tightly. then reset them.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored
in the recommended
temperature and humidity
conditions. For details about the
proper way to store paper, see
page 53 "Paper Precautions".

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is too thick or too Use recommended paper. For
thin. details about recommended
paper, see page 48 "Paper
Size Specifications" and
page 51 "Paper Type
Specifications".

99
3. Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is wrinkled or has • Use recommended paper.
been folded/creased. For details about
recommended paper, see
page 48 "Paper Size
Specifications" and
page 51 "Paper Type
Specifications".
• Use paper that has been
stored in the recommended
temperature and humidity
conditions. For details
about the proper way to
store paper, see page 53
"Paper Precautions".

Misfeeds occur frequently. Printed paper is being used. Do not load sheets that have
already been copied or printed
by another printer.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Sheets are sticking together. Fan the sheets thoroughly
before loading them.
Alternatively, feed the sheets
into the printer one at a time.

Sheets are feeding in together, Sheets are sticking together. Fan the sheets thoroughly
resulting in jams. before loading them.
Alternatively, feed the sheets
into the printer one at a time.

Printed paper becomes The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored
creased. in the recommended
temperature and humidity
conditions. For details about the
proper way to store paper, see
page 53 "Paper Precautions".

Printed paper becomes The paper is too thin. Use recommended paper. For
creased. details about recommended
paper, see page 48 "Paper
Size Specifications" and
page 51 "Paper Type
Specifications".

100
Other Printing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Edges of sheets are creased. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored
in the recommended
temperature and humidity
conditions. For details about the
proper way to store paper, see
page 53 "Paper Precautions".

Edges of sheets are creased. You are using non- Use recommended paper. For
recommended paper. details about recommended
paper, see page 48 "Paper
Size Specifications" and
page 51 "Paper Type
Specifications".

Duplex printing is You have selected a paper tray Change the setting to enable
malfunctioning. that is not set for duplex print. duplex printing for the paper
tray.

The image on the back side of Missing patches and smudges • Do not install the printer in
duplex printing has mottled are caused by moisture leaking areas that are susceptible
blank patches or is smudged. from the paper. to low temperature.
• Use paper that has been
stored in the recommended
temperature and humidity
conditions. For details
about the proper way to
store paper, see page 53
"Paper Precautions".

White stripes appear on the Fragments of paper are stuck to Use a dry cloth to wipe any
OHP. the OHP. paper fragments off the back of
the OHP.

101
3. Troubleshooting

Additional Troubleshooting

Problem Causes Solutions

Printed pages fall off of the Paper may curl depending on • Extend the extension tray
output tray. the paper size, type, or printing of the output tray.
conditions. • Load paper upside down
in the paper input tray.
• Remove the printed paper
one by one.

It takes a long time to complete Photographs and other data If the Data In indicator is
a print job. intensive pages take a long time flashing, data has been
for the printer to process, so received by the printer. Wait for
simply wait when printing such a moment.
data. Changing the following settings
with the printer driver may help
speed up printing:
• Select [Speed] in "Print
Priority" list.
• Select a lower resolution.
For details about how to change
the settings, see the printer
driver Help.

Images are printed in the wrong The feed orientation you Set the printer's feed orientation
orientation. selected and the feed and the printer driver's feed
orientation selected in the orientation accordingly. For
printer driver's option setup details about settings for printer
might not be the same. driver, see the printer driver
Help.

Optional components Bidirectional communication is Set up optional devices on the


connected to the printer are not not working. properties of the printer. For
recognized. details about how to set up
optional devices, see the printer
driver Help.

102
Other Printing Problems

Problem Causes Solutions

Combined printing, booklet The application or printer driver Make sure the application's
printing, or Auto Reduce/ settings are not configured paper size and orientation
Enlarge printing does not come correctly. settings match those of the
out as expected. printer driver. If a different
paper size and orientation are
set, select the same size and
orientation.

Some types of data, such as The printer driver settings are PCL 5e
graphics data or data from not configured correctly. On the printer driver's
certain applications, do not [Print Quality] tab, select
print. [600 dpi] in the
"Resolution" area.
PCL 6
• On the printer driver's
[Detailed Settings]
tab, click [Print
Quality] in "Menu:",
and then select
[Quality] in the "Print
Priority:" list.
• On the printer driver's
[Detailed Settings]
tab, click [Print
Quality] in "Menu:",
and then select
[Raster] in the
"Vector/Raster:" list.
PostScript 3
On the printer driver's
[Detailed Settings] tab,
click [Print Quality] in
"Menu:", and then select
[Photographic] in the
"Dithering:" list.
For details about the printer
driver settings, see the printer
driver Help.

103
3. Troubleshooting

Problem Causes Solutions

Some characters are not printed The printer driver settings are PCL 5e
or appear strange. not configured correctly. On the printer driver's
[Print Quality] tab, select
[600 dpi] in the
"Resolution" area.
PCL 6
• On the printer driver's
[Detailed Settings]
tab, click [Print
Quality] in "Menu:",
and then select
[Quality] in the "Print
Priority:" list.
• On the printer driver's
[Detailed Settings]
tab, click [Print
Quality] in "Menu:",
and then select
[Raster] in the
"Vector/Raster:" list.
PostScript 3
On the printer driver's
[Detailed Settings] tab,
click [Print Quality] in
"Menu:", and then select
[Text] in the "Dithering:" list.
For details about the printer
driver settings, see the printer
driver Help.

104
Other Printing Problems

Problem Causes Solutions

Print speed or application The printer driver settings are PCL 6


relinquishing speed is slow. not configured correctly. On the printer driver's
[Detailed Settings] tab,
click [Print Quality] in
"Menu:", and then select
[Speed] in the "Print
Priority:" list.
For details about the printer
driver settings, see the printer
driver Help.
Quit any other applications.

Print ends mid-job. An error might have occurred. Check the printer's display
panel to see if an error has
occurred.

A print instruction was issued User Authentication may have For details about User
from the computer, but printing been set. Authentication, see "Configuring
did not start. User Authentication", Security
Guide.

PDF files do not print out/ PDF files are password- To print password-protected
cannot perform PDF direct print. protected. PDF files, enter the password in
[PDF Menu].

PDF files do not print out/ PDF files cannot be printed if Change the PDF file security
cannot perform PDF direct print. they are print-disabled in PDF setting.
file security setting.

PDF direct print produces Fonts were not embedded. Embed fonts in the PDF file you
strange or malformed want to print, and then print.
characters.

"Resetting job..." appears and Memory is insufficient. In [System], select [Memory


printing is suspended. Usage] to [Font Priority].

Printing did not start even The time set on the printer or Set the correct time on the
though the specified print time computer is incorrect. printer or computer.
has already passed.

Printing via wireless LAN is The number of jobs exceeds the Reduce the number of jobs.
slow. capacity of the printer.

105
3. Troubleshooting

Problem Causes Solutions

Printing via wireless LAN is • A communication error • Move the printer farther
slow. might have occurred. away from the wireless
• Interference from other LAN device.
wireless LAN devices can • If there are active wireless
reduce the communication LAN devices nearby, move
speed the printer or disable those
• If the printer is using a devices.
wireless LAN, radio waves • Turn off other printers or
may be interfering with the instruments that use the
wireless communication. same frequency range,
This may occur if there is a and then try printing again.
microwave oven, cordless If printing is successful,
telephone, industrial move the devices to a
printer, scientific location where they do not
instrument, or medical interfere with the printer.
instrument using the same
frequency range near the
device.

The Printed Image is Different from the Image on the Computer

Problem Solutions

The printed image is different When you use some functions, such as enlargement or reduction,
from the image on the the layout of the image might be different from that displayed on
computer's display. the computer display.

Images are cut off, or excess If you are using paper smaller than the paper size selected in the
pages are printed. application, use the same size paper with that selected in the
application. If you cannot load paper of the correct size, use the
reduction function to reduce the image, and then print.
For details, see the printer driver's Help.

As a result of printing using PDF Before printing, embed the font in the PDF file to be printed.
Direct Printing, characters are
missing or misshapen.

106
Other Printing Problems

Problem Solutions

The paper size appears on the When PDF Direct Print is used, printout requires paper set within the
control panel and printing is not PDF file. When a message indicating a paper size appears, either
performed with PDF Direct Print. place the indicated size in the paper tray or perform Form Feed.
Also, if [Sub Paper Size] in the [System] menu is set to [Auto],
printing is performed assuming Letter size and A4 size to be the
same size. For example, when a PDF file set to A4 size paper is
printed using PDF Direct Print and Letter size paper is loaded in the
paper tray, or vice versa, the file will be printed out.

The printer takes a long time to The printer accesses the USB interface when it receives a print job
start printing. from the USB device server's network. In this case, it takes longer
than usual to start a print job received from the printer's network.
If it takes too long to start printing, specify a shorter period for [I/O
Timeout] using the printer's control panel.

When Printer Is Not Functioning Properly

Problem Solutions

Paper is not fed from the When you are using a Windows operating system, the printer
selected tray. driver settings override those set using the control panel. Set the
input tray you want using the printer driver.
For details, see the printer driver's Help.

Prints do not stack properly. • Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly. See
page 53 "Paper Precautions".
• If printed sheets come out curled, use the standard tray
extension. See page 9 "Guide to Components".

It takes too long to turn on the If the printer is turned off while accessing the hard disk (for
printer. example: during file deletion), the printer will require more time to
power-up the next time it is turned on. To avoid this time delay, do
not turn the printer off while it is in operation.

107
3. Troubleshooting

Problem Solutions

It takes too long to resume • The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process it.
printing. If Data In indicator is flashing, the data is being processed.
Wait until it resumes.
• The printer was in the Energy Saver mode or the Sleep mode.
To recover from these modes, the printer must warm up, and
this takes time until printing starts. For details, see page 29
"Saving Energy".

It takes too long to complete the • Photographs and other data-intensive pages take a long time
print job. for the printer to process, so wait when printing such data.
Changing the settings with printer driver may help to speed up
printing. For details, see the printer driver's Help.
• The data is so large or complex that it takes time for the
printer to process it. If Data In indicator is flashing, the data is
being processed. Wait until it resumes.

Attached options are not The computer and printer are not in bidirectional communication.
detected in the printer You must configure attached options in the printer properties. For
properties. details, see the printer driver's Help.

When printing combined prints Check that the paper size and direction set in the printer driver are
or bound prints. the same as those set in the application.
If the settings are not the same, change the settings of the printer
driver.

An empty tray is selected by If a paper tray is opened and closed while the printer is in Energy
Auto Tray Select, and the Saver mode, the printer will initialize the tray upon recovery, but
document is not printed due to the tray will not be selectable by Auto Tray Select.
out of paper error. To print from a paper tray that you opened and closed while the
printer was in Energy Saver mode, you must manually specify the
tray as the source paper tray before printing. When the printer
recovers from Energy Saver mode and completes initialization, it
will then print the document from the tray you have specified.

108
Removing Jammed Paper

Removing Jammed Paper


An error message appears if a paper misfeed occurs. The error message indicates where the misfeed
occurs.
Check the location and remove the paper.

• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.

• When removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.

• To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the printer.
• Contact your service representative if misfeeds occur frequently.
• If the error message remains displayed even after you remove misfed paper, open and close the
front cover.

109
3. Troubleshooting

Paper Misfeed Message (A1) (A2) (B) (C) (Z)

Pull out the paper tray Pull out the jammed Pull out the jammed
until it stops. paper carefully. paper carefully.

Use both hands to Hold the clip on the Pull out the print
slowly open the front print cartridge to lift it. cartridge.
cover and the top
cover.

Pull out the jammed Squeeze the clip on


paper carefully. the print cartridge, and
then insert it into the
printer until it stops.
DPL054

110
Removing Jammed Paper

Open the rear cover. Lower the "C" lever and


pull out the jammed
paper carefully.

Pull the tray carefully Lower the "Z" lever Lift the "Z" lever.
until it stops, lift the and pull out the
front side of the tray, jammed paper
and then pull it out of carefully.
the printer.

DPL055

• When closing the front cover, push the upper side of the cover firmly. After closing the cover, check
that the paper jam is cleared.
• If paper misfeed message (B) appears, carefully remove jammed paper from behind the
registration roller.

DPL050

• If a paper misfeed occurs, remove paper left in the machine or caught among parts of the machine.

111
3. Troubleshooting

Paper Misfeed Message (Y1), (Y2), (Y3), or (Y4)

The following messages are displayed according to the tray where the paper is jammed:
• " (Y1)": Tray 2
• " (Y2)": Tray 3
• " (Y3)": Tray 4
• " (Y4)": Tray 5
The procedure for removing jammed paper is the same for all trays. In the following procedure, a paper
jam that occurs in Tray 2 (with the (Y1) message displayed) is explained as an example.

1. Pull out the paper tray until it stops.

DPL047

2. Pull out the jammed paper carefully.

DPL048

112
Removing Jammed Paper

3. Hold the tray with both hands, slide it along the rails of the paper feed unit, and then
push it straight in.

DPL049

113
3. Troubleshooting

Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Bonjour, Macintosh, Mac OS, OS X, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United
States and other countries.
Citrix, Citrix Presentation Server and Citrix XenApp are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Citrix Systems, Inc.
Firefox® is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
IPS is a trademark or registered trademark of Zoran Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in the United
States or other countries.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Internet Explorer are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Monotype is a registered trademark of Monotype Imaging Inc.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of the Open Group.
UPnP is a trademark of the UPnP Implementers Corporation.
The proper name of Internet Explorer 6 is Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6.
The proper name of Internet Explorer 8 is Windows® Internet Explorer® 8.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate

114
Trademarks

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise


• The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials

115
3. Troubleshooting

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard


Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

116
INDEX
C S
Cannot print........................................................... 87 Symbols.................................................................... 5
Configuring printer settings................................... 41 T
Control panel......................................................... 13
Control panel screen............................................. 15 Trademarks.......................................................... 114

E U

Exterior............................................................... 9, 10 USB......................................................................... 75

G W

Guide to components.............................................. 9 Web Image Monitor............................................. 42

I
Indicator................................................................. 74
Installing options.................................................... 16
Interior.................................................................... 11
Internal options...................................................... 12
L
Letterhead.............................................................. 62
Loading envelopes................................................ 64
Loading paper.................................................56, 60
M
Manuals................................................................... 3
Messages............................................................... 76
O
Options..................................................................... 7
Other printing problems........................................ 91
P
Panel tone beeps................................................... 73
Paper loading procedure..................................... 47
Paper precautions................................................. 53
Paper settings......................................................... 69
Paper size...............................................................48
Paper type.............................................................. 51
Power..................................................................... 28
R
Region.......................................................................6
Removing jammed paper................................... 109
Replacing consumables........................................ 32
Replenishing consumables....................................32

117
MEMO

118
MEMO

119
MEMO

120 EN GB EN US EN AU M282-7922
© 2016
EN GB EN US EN AU M282-7922
Operating Instructions
Driver Installation Guide

See the other online manuals on our


website (http://www.ricoh.com/) or from the
control panel.

For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information in Read This First before using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction
Start Installer........................................................................................................................................................3
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM.............................................................................................5
Printer Drivers..................................................................................................................................................5
2. Installing the Printer Driver
Confirming the Connection Method..................................................................................................................7
Network Connection......................................................................................................................................7
Local Connection............................................................................................................................................8
Quick Install.........................................................................................................................................................9
Quick Installation via a Network.................................................................................................................. 9
Quick Installation via a USB Connection...................................................................................................10
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection..................................................................................11
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port........................................................................................11
Using Windows Print Server........................................................................................................................17
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection....................................................................................... 19
USB Connection...........................................................................................................................................19
Parallel Connection..................................................................................................................................... 23
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer.................................................................................................... 24
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication............................................................................................. 24
If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled............................................................................................... 25
3. Troubleshooting
Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver............................................................................... 27
If USB Connection Fails................................................................................................................................... 29
4. Installing the Printer Driver Under OS X
Installing the PPD Files......................................................................................................................................31
Registering the Printer.......................................................................................................................................32
USB Connection...........................................................................................................................................32
Network Connection................................................................................................................................... 33
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer Under OS X...............................................................................34
5. Appendix
Updating or Deleting the Driver......................................................................................................................35
Updating the Printer Driver..........................................................................................................................35
Deleting the Printer Driver............................................................................................................................36

1
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................................... 39
INDEX............................................................................................................................................................. 41

2
1. Introduction
This chapter explains the software included on the supplied CD-ROM.

Start Installer
To connect this machine to a client computer and use its printer, scanner, and fax functions, the software
included on the provided CD-ROM must be installed on the client computer.
The installer starts automatically when you insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of a
client computer running under Windows or Windows Server. You can then install the various software
included on the CD-ROM.
The contents (display item) of the installer are as follows:
Network Quick Install
Installs the PCL 6 printer driver via a network connection and configures settings to use the printer in
a network.
For details, see page 9 "Quick Installation via a Network".
USB Quick Install
Installs the PCL 6 printer driver via a USB connection and configures settings to connect the printer
to a computer.
For details, see page 10 "Quick Installation via a USB Connection".
PCL Printer Driver
Installs the PCL 6 and/or PCL 5e printer drivers.
For details about installing the driver, see page 11 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 19 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".
PostScript 3 Printer Driver
Installs the PostScript 3 printer driver.
For details about installing the driver, see page 11 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 19 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".
Select Language
Changes the interface language.
Browse This Disk
Browses the contents of this disk.
Exit
Quits Installer.

3
1. Introduction

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the case, double-click
"Setup.exe", located on the CD-ROM root directory, or click [Run SETUP.EXE] in the [AutoPlay]
dialog box.

4
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM

Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM


This section explains the software and utilities CD-ROM provided with this machine.

• For the latest information on the corresponding operating system, see "Readme.txt" file, located on
the CD-ROM root directory.
• For the latest information on Windows Terminal Service, Citrix XenDesktop, and Citrix XenApp, see
the manufacturer's Web site.

Printer Drivers

Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The following drivers are
included on the CD-ROM.

Printer Language

Operating System*1 PCL 5e PCL 6 PostScript 3

Windows Vista *2 OK OK OK

Windows 7 *3 OK OK OK

Windows 8 *4 OK OK OK

Windows 8.1 *5 OK OK OK

Windows 10*6 OK OK OK

Windows Server 2003 *7 OK OK OK

Windows Server 2008 *8 OK OK OK

Windows Server 2012 *9 OK OK OK

OS X *10 OK

*1 Windows operating system supports both versions (32/64 bit).


*2 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate/Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise/Microsoft Windows Vista Business/
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium/Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
*3 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium/Microsoft Windows 7 Professional/Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate/
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise
*4 Microsoft Windows 8/Microsoft Windows 8 Pro/Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise
*5 Microsoft Windows 8.1/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Enterprise

5
1. Introduction

*6 Microsoft Windows 10 Home/Microsoft Windows 10 Pro/Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise/Microsoft


Windows 10 Education
*7 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition/
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise
Edition
*8 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise/Microsoft
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
*9 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Foundation/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Essentials/Microsoft
Windows Server 2012 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Foundation/Microsoft Windows
Server 2012 R2 Essentials/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard
*10 OS X 10.8 or later
PCL printer drivers
Two kinds of PCL printer driver (PCL 5e and PCL 6) are included. These drivers allow your
computer to communicate with this machine via a printer language.
Adobe® PostScript® printer driver and PPD files
Adobe PostScript printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer
language. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.

• Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5e printer driver. In this case, you can install
PCL 5e without having to install PCL 6.
• For details about installing the driver, see page 11 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Network
Connection" or page 19 "Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".

Supported languages

The languages supported in each printer driver are as follow:


English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Finnish, Hungarian,
Czech, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Catalan, Turkish, Brazilian Portuguese, Greek

• The PCL 5e printer driver does not support Brazilian Portuguese and Greek. Use the English version
of the driver.
• The PCL 6 and PostScript 3 printer drivers use the same interface language as the one specified by
your operating system. However, the PostScript 3 printer driver will be displayed in English if your
operating system uses one of the following languages: Finnish, Hungarian, Czech, Polish,
Portuguese, Russian, Catalan, Turkish, Brazilian Portuguese, Greek.

6
2. Installing the Printer Driver
This chapter explains how to install and configure the printer drivers for use on the Windows operating
system. Installing procedures on Windows 7 is shown as an example except where indicated.

Confirming the Connection Method


This machine supports network and local connection.
Before installing the printer driver, check how the machine is connected. Follow the driver installation
procedure that is appropriate to the connection method.

Network Connection

This machine can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.

Using the Windows printing port

Network connections can be established through Ethernet and Wireless LAN.


Available ports are determined based on the combination of Windows operating system version and
connection method used.
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

Connection Method Available Ports

• Ethernet • Standard TCP/IP port


• Wireless LAN • IPP port
• LPR port

Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2

Connection Method Available Ports

• Ethernet • Standard TCP/IP port


• Wireless LAN • IPP port
• LPR port
• WSD port

7
2. Installing the Printer Driver

• For details about how to install the printer driver for each type of port, see page 11 "Installing the
Printer Driver for the Selected Port".

Using as a network printer

This machine can be used as a remote printer using the Windows print server function.

Client OS Using Server

• Windows Vista • Windows Vista print server


• Windows 7 • Windows 7 print server
• Windows 8 • Windows 8 print server
• Windows 8.1 • Windows 8.1 print server
• Windows 10 • Windows 10 print server
• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 • Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 print server
• Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 • Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 print server
• Windows Server 2012/2012 R2 • Windows Server 2012/2012 R2 print server

• For details about how to install the printer driver to print server, see page 17 "Using Windows
Print Server".

Local Connection

Local connections can be established via USB and parallel connections.

• For details about how to install the printer driver for each method of connections, see page 19
"Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection".

8
Quick Install

Quick Install
You can install the printer drivers easily from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 27 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".

Quick Installation via a Network

Using Network Quick Install, the PCL 6 printer driver is installed under network environment, and the
Standard TCP/IP port will be set.

1. Click [Network Quick Install] on the installer screen.

9
2. Installing the Printer Driver

2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
5. Click [Install].
6. When the port setting screen appears, specify a port.
7. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
8. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
9. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
10. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.

Quick Installation via a USB Connection

Using USB Quick Install, you can install the PCL 6 printer driver via a USB connection, and configure
settings to connect the printer to a computer.

1. Click [USB Quick Install] on the installer screen.


2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select the method to install a printer driver, and then click [Next >].
4. Select the machine model you want to use, and then click [Next >].
5. Make sure the machine is turned off and not connected to the computer, and then click
[Next >].
Wait for a moment until file copying is complete and [<Auto-detect USB Port>] screen appears.
6. Connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, and then turn on the machine.
The auto-detecting starts.
7. In the confirmation dialog box, select [Yes] if you want to use the machine as your default
printer.
8. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
9. Click [Exit] in the first window of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.

10
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

Installing the Printer Driver for a Network


Connection
This section describes the installation procedure of the printer drivers for network connection.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 27 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".

Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port

Describes the driver installation procedure for each printer port. See the installation procedure for the
printer port you are using.

11
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Port Type Printer Driver Type Reference

Standard TCP/IP port page 12 "Using the Standard TCP/IP port"

IPP port page 12 "Using the IPP port"

LPR port page 14 "Using the LPR port"

WSD port page 14 "Using the WSD port"

Using the Standard TCP/IP port

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [Next >].
6. Click [Next >].
7. Enter the machine name or IP address, and then click [Next >].
When the device type selection appears, select "RICOH Network Printer C model".
8. Click [Finish].
9. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
10. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
11. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
12. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

Using the IPP port

12
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].


If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1 or Windows Server 2012/2012 R2,
click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window
appears, click [View devices and printers].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 10, right-click the [Start] button on the
desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window appears, click [View
devices and printers].
2. Click [Add a printer].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1/10 or Windows Server 2012/2012
R2, proceed to Step 4.
3. Click [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer].
4. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
5. In the [Select a shared printer by name] box, enter "http://(machine's IP address or host
name)/printer (or ipp)" as the printer's address, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK] to close the [Install From Disk] window.
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[OK].
The installation starts.
10. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name and default
printer configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
11. Click [Finish].

13
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Using the LPR port

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [LPR Port], and then click [Next >].
6. Enter the machine name or IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd:]
box.
7. Enter "lp" in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server:] box, and then click [OK].
8. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
9. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
10. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
11. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

Using the WSD port

• The WSD port can be used under Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, or Windows Server
2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2.
• You can connect to the printer only if both the printer and computer are on the same network
segment, or "Network discovery" is enabled. For details, see Windows Help.

Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Network].


2. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Install].
3. Click [Locate and install driver software (recommended)].
4. Click [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].
5. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:

14
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
6. Click [Next].
7. Click [Close].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the WSD port will appear in the
window for configuring printers.

• The port name that follows "WSD" uses random character strings. It cannot be changed freely.
• To stop the installation, click [Cancel] before the installation is complete. When re-installing the
WSD Port, right-click the printer's icon in the [Network] window, and then click [Uninstall].

Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Computer].


2. Click [Network].
3. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Install].
4. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
5. Click [Add a printer].
6. Click [Add a local printer].
7. Select [Use an existing port:], and then select WSD port.
8. Click [Next].
9. Click [Have Disk...].
10. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1

15
2. Installing the Printer Driver

64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1


• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
11. Click [OK] to close the [Install From Disk] window.
12. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
13. Follow the instructions that appear. Modify settings such as printer name, default printer,
and printer sharing configuration, as necessary. You can also print a test page.
14. Click [Finish].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the WSD port will appear in the
window for configuring printers.

• To stop installation of the selected driver, click [Cancel] before the installation is complete. When
re-installing the WSD Port, right-click the machine's icon in the [Network] window, and then click
[Uninstall].

Windows 8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2

1. Open the [Devices and Printers] window.


• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add].
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [x86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].

16
Installing the Printer Driver for a Network Connection

7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Click [Add a printer] on the [Devices and Printers] window.
13. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
14. Select [Add a Bluetooth, wireless or network discoverable printer], and then click [Next].
15. Select the machine you want to use, and then click [Next].

Using Windows Print Server

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Network Printer], and then click [Next >].
6. Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the [Browse for
Printer] window.

17
2. Installing the Printer Driver

7. Select the machine you want to use, and then click [OK].
8. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
9. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
10. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
11. Click [Finish].
When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

18
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

Installing the Printer Driver for a Local


Connection
This section describes the installation procedure of the printer drivers for USB or parallel connection.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Yes] or
[Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears in driver installation procedure, click [Install this
driver software anyway].
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See page 27 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
• The [AutoPlay] dialog box is displayed only for a few seconds under Windows 8/8.1/10 and
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2. If the [AutoPlay] dialog box disappears, use the following
procedure to replay the CD-ROM:
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2012
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Search], and then click [Computer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then click
"Setup.exe".
• Windows 10
1. On the desktop, right-click the [Start] button, and then click [File Explorer].
2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive in which the provided CD-ROM is set, and then double-
click "Setup.exe".

USB Connection

This section explains how to install the printer drivers using USB.

19
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are
in progress.
If the printer driver has already been installed, and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB" port is added to the [Printers], [Printers and Faxes], or [Devices and Printers]
window.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the machine to install it from
the CD-ROM provided with this machine.

Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

1. Check that the power of the machine is off.


2. Connect the machine and computer using the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
3. Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
4. Select [No, not this time], and then click [Next].
5. Click [Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]], and then click [Next].
6. Select the [Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box under [Search for
the best driver in these locations.], and then click [Next].
7. Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install.
Check the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [Next].
The installation starts.

20
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

9. Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers and Faxes] window.
The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.

Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008

1. Check that the power of the machine is off.


2. Connect the machine and computer using a USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
3. Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
4. In the [Found New Hardware] window, click [Locate and install driver software
(recommended)].
5. Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install.
Check the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
6. Click [Next].
The installation starts.
7. Click [Close].
If the printer driver has already been installed and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers] window.
The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.

21
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2

1. Open the [Devices and Printers] window.


• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click any machine icon, and then click [Print server properties].
3. Click the [Drivers] tab, and then click [Add...].
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the [x64] (64 bit) or [x86] (32 bit) check box, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk...].
7. Click [Browse...], and then specify the location of the INF file.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1
• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the manufacturer and model name of the machine you want to use, and then click
[Next].
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.
12. Check that the power of the machine is off.

22
Installing the Printer Driver for a Local Connection

13. Connect the machine and computer using a USB cable.


Connect the USB cable firmly.
14. Turn on the power of the machine.

Parallel Connection

1. Click [PCL Printer Driver] or [PostScript 3 Printer Driver] on the installer screen.
2. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
3. Select a printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next >].
4. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next >].
5. Select [Local Port], and then click [Next >].
6. Enter a port name, and then click [OK].
7. Select the [Printer Name:] check box of the machine model you want to use.
8. Configure the user code, default printer, and shared printer as necessary.
9. Click [Continue].
The installation starts.
10. Click [Finish].
Select one of the options to restart the computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].

23
2. Installing the Printer Driver

Configuring Option Settings for the Printer


When bidirectional communication works correctly, your computer obtains information about option,
paper size and paper feed direction settings from the machine automatically. Bidirectional
communication also allows you to monitor machine status.
When bidirectional communication is disabled, you have to set up option, paper size and paper feed
direction settings on your computer manually.

• Manage Printers permission is required to enable bidirectional communication or to configure the


option settings. Log on as an Administrators group member.

Conditions for Bidirectional Communication

To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:


When connected with parallel cables
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.
• The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cables and
parallel connectors.
When connected with the network
• The Standard TCP/IP port must be used.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the printer driver.
When connected with USB
• The machine must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable.
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the printer driver.

• The PCL 6 and PostScript 3 printer drivers support bidirectional communication and automatic
printer status updates.
• To obtain printer information automatically using the bidirectional communication function of the
PCL 6 or PostScript 3 printer driver, you must select the [Automatically Update Printer Information]
check box on the [Accessories] tab in the printer driver's properties window.
• The PCL 5e printer driver supports bidirectional communication. You can update the printer status
manually.

24
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer

If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled

This section describes how to set up option, paper size and paper feed direction settings on your
computer manually.

1. Open the printer window.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Accessories] tab.
If options in the [Accessories] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection is enabled. In this case, no
change is necessary for option settings.
4. Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the necessary settings.
5. Click [Change Input Tray Settings...].
6. In [Input Tray:] select which trays to use, and then, in [Paper Size:] select the size of the
paper that you want to load in each tray.
Click [Modify Input Tray/Paper Size] to apply the setting for each tray.
7. Click [OK].
8. Click [Apply].
9. Click [OK] to close the printer properties window.

25
2. Installing the Printer Driver

• For details about making option settings for the machine using OS X, see page 34 "Configuring
Option Settings for the Printer Under OS X".

26
3. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions for driver installation and USB connection problems.

Messages Displayed When Installing the


Printer Driver
This section describes what to do if a message appears when installing the printer driver.
Message number 58 or 34 indicates that the printer driver cannot be installed using Auto Run. Install the
printer driver using Add Printer Wizard.
Message number 58 appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed.

1. Open the printer window.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].
2. Click [Add a printer].
3. Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• PCL 5e
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X86\(Language)\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL5E\X64\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PCL6\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PCL6\X64\MUI\DISK1

27
3. Troubleshooting

• PostScript 3
32-bit driver D:\X86\DRIVERS\PS\X86\MUI\DISK1
64-bit driver D:\X64\DRIVERS\PS\X64\MUI\DISK1
For details about the languages supported in the printer drivers, see page 6 "Supported
languages".
4. Specify a port.

• Available ports vary according to your Windows operating system or the type of interface. For
details, see page 7 "Confirming the Connection Method".

28
If USB Connection Fails

If USB Connection Fails


This section describes how to troubleshoot a problem related to USB connections.

Problem Causes Solutions

The machine is not The USB cable is not Disconnect the USB cable from the
automatically recognized. connected properly. computer, and then turn off the main
power switch. Turn on the main power
switch again. When the machine has
fully booted up, reconnect the USB
cable.

The machine does not Windows has already Check whether the computer has
recognize the USB configured the USB settings. identified the machine as an
connection even when a unsupported device.
USB cable is inserted. Open Windows' Device Manager,
and then, under [Universal Serial Bus
controllers], remove any conflicting
devices. Conflicting devices have a [!]
or [?] icon by them. Take care not to
accidentally remove required devices.
For details, see Windows Help.

The machine does not If the USB cable is Press the operation switch, and then
recognize the USB connected while the disconnect the USB cable from the
connection even when a machine is off, the machine computer. When the machine has
USB cable is inserted. might not recognize the USB returned to the ready condition,
connection. reconnect the USB cable.

29
3. Troubleshooting

30
4. Installing the Printer Driver Under
OS X
This chapter explains how to install and configure the printer drivers for use on the OS X operating
system.

Installing the PPD Files


To print using the printer specific features under OS X, install the PPD files.

• You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network
administrator.
• For the latest information on the corresponding operating system, see the "Readme.txt" file, located
on the CD-ROM root directory.

1. Double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.


2. Double-click the [(brand name)] folder.
3. Double-click the [MacOSX PPD Installer] folder.
4. Double-click the package file icon.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen.

• The PPD files will be automatically installed in the following location:


• \Library\Printers\PPDs\Contents\Resources\

31
4. Installing the Printer Driver Under OS X

Registering the Printer


To use the machine, the printer must be registered in the printer list.
Make sure the machine and computer are connected and turned on, and perform the following
procedure.
For details about how to connect the machine to the computer, see "Connecting the Machine",
Operating Instructions.

• When printing with a USB connection to a Macintosh computer, the printer language does not
change automatically. Use the control panel on this machine to change the printer language to
[Auto] or [PS] before printing.
• The operating procedure under OS X differs depending on the version of the operating system.
Consult the procedure described in this manual, and make the necessary settings according to the
manual of each version.

USB Connection

• Make sure the computer and the printer are connected using the USB cable, and the power of the
devices are turned on beforehand.

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Click the [ ] button.
If [Add Other Printer or Scanner...] or [Add Printer or Scanner...] appears, click it.
4. Click [Default].
5. Select the printer that has "USB" indicated in the [Kind] column.
6. Select the printer you are using from the [Print Using:] or [Use:] pop-up menu.
If the printer you are using is not selected in [Print Using:] or [Use:], select its manufacturer in the
[Select Printer Software...] or [Select Software...] pop-up menu, and then select the PPD file of the
printer. For the location of the PPD files, see page 31 "Installing the PPD Files".
7. Click [Add].
If the option settings need to be configured, click [Configure] in the dialog box that appears, and
then configure the option settings.
8. Quit System Preferences.

32
Registering the Printer

Network Connection

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Click the [ ] button.
If [Add Other Printer or Scanner...] or [Add Printer or Scanner...] appears, click it.
4. Click [Default].
5. Select the printer that has "Bonjour" indicated in the [Kind] column.
If the printer name is not displayed, select the icon that corresponds to your network environment
(TCP/IP, etc.).
6. Select the printer you are using from the [Print Using:] or [Use:] pop-up menu.
If the printer you are using is not selected in [Print Using:] or [Use:], select its manufacturer in the
[Select Printer Software...] or [Select Software...] pop-up menu, and then select the PPD file of the
printer. For the location of the PPD files, see page 31 "Installing the PPD Files".
7. Click [Add].
If the option settings need to be configured, click [Configure] in the dialog box that appears, and
then configure the option settings.
8. Quit System Preferences.

33
4. Installing the Printer Driver Under OS X

Configuring Option Settings for the Printer


Under OS X
This section explains how to configure the printer driver.

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the printer you are using, and then click [Options & Supplies...].
4. Click [Driver] or [Options], and then configure settings as needed.
5. Click [OK].
6. Quit System Preferences.

• If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set up correctly. To complete
the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.

34
5. Appendix

Updating or Deleting the Driver

• Administrator permission is required to update or delete the driver in use. Log on as an


Administrators group member.
• For driver updates, select a driver that is compatible with the printer and driver type you are using.
An error may result if you select a driver that is not compatible with the printer and driver type.

• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].

Updating the Printer Driver

Windows operating system

You can download the most recent version of the driver from the manufacturer's Web site. Download the
latest driver, and then perform as follows:

1. Open the printer window.


• Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Printers and Faxes].
• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and Sound]
category.
• Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2:
On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
• Windows 8/8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2:
Click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel]
window appears, click [View devices and printers].
• Windows 10:
Right-click the [Start] button on the desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control
Panel] window appears, click [View devices and printers].

35
5. Appendix

2. Open the printer properties dialog box.


• Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Properties].
• Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2:
Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Advanced] tab.
4. Click [New Driver...], and then click [Next].
5. Click [Have Disk...].
6. Click [Browse...], and then select the driver location.
7. Click [OK].
8. Select the machine model, and then click [Next].
9. Click [Finish].
The driver update starts.
10. Click [Apply].
11. Click [OK] to close the printer properties window.
12. Restart the computer.

OS X

You can download the most recent version of PPD file from the manufacturer's Web site.
Delete the old version of the PPD file first, and then install the new PPD file. For details about how to
delete the PPD files, file, see page 36 "Deleting the Printer Driver".

Deleting the Printer Driver

Windows operating system

Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].


2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to delete, and then click [Delete].
3. Click [Server Properties] on the [File] menu.
4. Click the [Drivers] tab.
5. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove].
6. Click [Yes].

36
Updating or Deleting the Driver

7. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.

Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008

1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then click [Printers] in [Hardware and
Sound] category.
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to delete, and then click [Delete].
3. On the [File] menu, point to [Run as administrator], and then click [Server Properties...].
4. Click the [Drivers] tab.
5. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove...].
6. Select [Remove driver and driver package.], and then click [OK].
7. Click [Yes].
8. Click [Delete].
9. Click [OK].
10. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.

Windows 7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].


If you are using a computer that is running Windows 8/8.1 or Windows Server 2012/2012 R2,
click [Settings] on the Charm Bar, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window
appears, click [View devices and printers].
If you are using a computer that is running Windows 10, right-click the [Start] button on the
desktop, and then click [Control Panel]. When the [Control Panel] window appears, click [View
devices and printers].
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to delete, and then click [Remove device].
3. Click [Yes].
4. Click any printer icon, and then click [Print server properties].
5. Click the [Drivers] tab.
6. Click the [Change Driver Settings] button if it is displayed.
7. Select the driver you want to delete, and then click [Remove...].
8. Select [Remove driver and driver package.], and then click [OK].
9. Click [Yes].
10. Click [Delete].
11. Click [OK].
12. Click [Close] to close the print server properties window.

37
5. Appendix

OS X

1. Start System Preferences.


2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the printer you want to delete, click the [ ] button.
4. Click [Delete Printer].

38
Trademarks

Trademarks
Adobe, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or countries.
Citrix XenApp is a trademark of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more of its subsidiaries, and may be
registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries.
Macintosh, Mac OS, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise

39
5. Appendix

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education


• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

40
INDEX
B R
Bidirectional communication................................ 24 Registering the printer........................................... 32
C S
CD-ROM.................................................................. 5 Software................................................................... 5
Confirming the connection method........................ 7 Standard TCP/IP port........................................... 12
Connection fails..................................................... 29 Supported language............................................... 6
D T
Delete............................................................... 35, 36 Trademarks............................................................ 39
E U
Error message........................................................ 27 Uninstall.................................................................. 36
I Update................................................................... 35
USB connection........................................ 19, 29, 32
Installer..................................................................... 3 Utilities...................................................................... 5
IPP port................................................................... 12
W
L
WSD port............................................................... 14
Launcher................................................................... 3
Local connection............................................... 8, 19
LPR port...................................................................14
M
Messages displayed when installing the printer
driver...................................................................... 27
N
Network connection................................... 7, 11, 33
Network printer................................................. 8, 17
O
Option settings................................................ 24, 34
P
Parallel connection................................................ 23
PCL........................................................... 5, 9, 11, 17
PostScript 3..................................................5, 11, 17
PPD..................................................................... 5, 31
Printer driver................................................ 5, 11, 19
Printer port type..................................................... 11
Q
Quick Install............................................................. 9

41
MEMO

42
MEMO

43
MEMO

44 EN GB EN US EN AU M282-7917
EN GB EN US EN AU M282-7917 © 2016

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi